PVElite Manual

12777 Jones Rd. Ste.
480
Houston, TX 77070
Tel: 281 890-4566
FAX: 281 890-3301
Web: www.coade.com
January 1, 2002
Dear PVElite User,
Enclosed please find Version 4.3 of the PVElite Pressure Vessel Design and Analysis software program.
This package includes a CD-ROM and update pages to the manual. The program installs using the Setup
program on the CD. The CD contains an auto-run feature that should automatically start the installation
process. If it does not start, execute the setup program contained on the CD. The installation serial
number is located on the inside of the CD jacket. Do not discard the jacket.
Some New Features of Version 4.3 are:
• Tailing lug analysis

• Leg Baseplate Analysis
• Updated 3-D Graphics
• Considerations for Rectangular Top head platforms and Caged Ladders
• PD 5500 Annex F Nozzle Calculations
• IBC 2000 Earthquake Code Added
• Modal Natural Frequency Solver
• Dynamic Response Spectrum Analysis added, including IBC 2000 and ASCE 7-98 parameters
• ASME 2001 Code 2001 addenda updates
Component Analysis Features:
• ASME 2001 Code 2001 Addenda update

• Div1 or Div2 database available when using WRC 107
• Split Screen Graphics
• Tailing Lug Analysis
• Thick Shell band entry for ASME fixed tubesheets
• Pneumatic Hydrotest calks added
• Simplified input for non-radial Nozzles
• Static Head Input in the nozzle module
• Improved Summary
• Improved On-line registration
• Tailing Lug Calculations
Plus many others

This version of PVElite has been extensively tested according to the QA standards established at COADE.
At least 115 different vessel jobs have been run to verify the results of the program.
Important Release Notes

For the HTML Help system to work properly, you must install Internet Explorer 5 or later. IE5 updates
critical Windows DLLs and also installs DCOM 95 on Windows 95 machines if it is not present. DCOM 95
allows the “CodeCalc” portion of PVElite to function properly. Otherwise the error “Failed to create
empty document” may appear when that processor is invoked. IE5 can be installed from the PVElite CD.
If version 4.2 is working fine, this step is not necessary. Please note that Microsoft has dropped support
for Windows 95. Windows 9x will not be supported after this release.
For network users, the file netuser.bat must be executed from each workstation. This will register
some critical DLLs that allow the 3-D modeler to function properly. If this is not done, the 3-D graphics
modeler will abort with an error. The error will state that some XML components are not available.
Sincerely,
PVElite Development Staff

PVElite
User's
Guide
Version 4.3
PVElite is a PC-based
pressure vessel design
and analysis software
program developed,
marketed, and sold by
COADE Engineering
Software.
Version 4.30
Revised 1/2002
This page is intentionally left blank.
PVElite - User Guide
Contents
Preface
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT P-2
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER P-2
LICENSE GRANT P-2
TERM P-2
LIMITED WARRANTY P-3
ENTIRE AGREEMENT P-3
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES P-3
GENERAL P-4
DISCLAIMER - PVElite P-4
HOOPS‘ License Grant P-6
Chapter: 1 Introduction
What is PVElite? 1-1
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program? 1-1What distinguishes PVElite from other
commercial pressure vessel packages? 1-3
What Applications are Available? 1-4
General Vessels 1-4
Complete Vertical Vessels 1-4
Complete Horizontal Vessels 1-4
Individual Shells & Heads 1-4
Conical Sections 1-4
Vessel Nozzles 1-4
Flanges 1-4
Base Rings 1-5
Lifting Lug 1-5
Pipe & Pad 1-5
Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads 1-5
Thin-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
TEMA Tubesheets 1-5
ASME Tubesheets 1-5
Floating Heads 1-5
Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6
Large Openings 1-6
Rectangular Vessels 1-6
Shells & Heads 1-6
Nozzles 1-6
Flanges 1-6
Horizontal Vessels 1-6
Legs & Lugs 1-7
WRC 107 1-7
Summary 1-7
WRC 297 1-7
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7
About the PVElite Documentation 1-8
Program Support / User Assistance 1-9
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers 1-9
i
Updates 1-10
Licenses 1-10
Full Run 1-10
Lease 1-10
Limited Run 1-10
Summary of Version 3.5 Improvements 1-11
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features 1-11
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements 1-12
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.2 1-14
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.3 1-14
Chapter: 2 Overview of the Installation/Configuration Process

System and Hardware Requirements 2-1
External Software Lock 2-1
Starting the Installation Procedure 2-2
Installing PVElite 2-4
Network Installation / Usage 2-7
Software Installation on a Network Drive 2-7
ESL Installation on a Network 2-7
Novell File Server ESL Installation 2-8
Novell Workstation ESL Installation 2-8
Windows Server Installation 2-8
Notes on Network ESLs 2-8
Chapter: 3 Tutorial / Master Menu

Program Structure and Control 3-1
A Road Map for PVElite 3-2
The Input Processor 3-3
Other Input Processors 3-6
Error Checking 3-9
Analysis 3-10
Tools Menu 3-11
Output Review & Report Generation 3-12
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details 3-14
Main Menu 3-16
File Menu 3-17
Input Menu 3-20
Analyze Menu 3-22
Output Menu 3-23
Tools Menu 3-24
Print Water Volume in Gallons? 3-24
Use AD-540.2 sketch b and not sketch d for normal? 3-25
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size? 3-25
ii
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness? 3-25

Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles? 3-25
Print Equations and Substitutions? 3-25
Increase Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement? 3-25
Use OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick? 3-26
Allowable Tower Deflection 3-26
Wind Shape Factor 3-26
Do not use the bolt correction factor. 3-26
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only. 3-26
Use Code Case 2260/2261. 3-26
Use EigenSolver 3-27
Diagnostics Menu 3-29
View Menu 3-30
Using the 3D Viewer 3-32
ESL Menu 3-38
Help Menu 3-39
Quick Start with PVElite 3-40
Entering PVElite 3-40
Defining the Basic Vessel 3-40
Adding Details 3-42
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image 3-43
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints 3-45
Running the Analysis 3-48
Reviewing the Results 3-49
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components (Details) 3-50
DXF File Generation Option 3-53
Setting Up the Required Parameters 3-53
User Border Creation 3-54
Invoking the Drawing 3-55
Chapter: 4 Element Data

Element Basic Data 4-2
Element’s From Node 4-2
Element’s To Node 4-3
Inside Diameter 4-3
Distance 4-3
Finished Thickness 4-3
Corrosion Allowance 4-4
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier 4-4
Material Name 4-4
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams 4-4
Design Internal Pressure 4-5
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure 4-5
Design External Pressure 4-5
Examples of external pressure 4-5
Design Temperature for External Pressure 4-5
Element Additional Data 4-6
Cylindrical Shell 4-6
Elliptical Head 4-6
Head Factor 4-6
Inside Head Depth 4-6
iii
Torispherical Head 4-7

Crown Radius 4-7
Knuckle Radius 4-7
Spherical Head 4-8
Conical Head or Shell Segment 4-8
To Node Diameter 4-8
Cone Length 4-8
Half Apex Angle 4-8
Toriconical 4-9
Toricone Dialog 4-9
Large End Knuckle Radius 4-9
Large End Knuckle Thickness 4-9
Small End Knuckle Radius 4-9
Small End Knuckle Thickness 4-9
Welded Flat Head 4-10
Attachment Factor 4-10
Non-Circ. Small Diameter 4-10
Flange Analysis 4-11
Body Flange 4-11
Flange Input Data 4-14
Flange Type 4-14
Weld Neck Flanges 4-14
Slip-on Flanges 4-14
Ring Flanges 4-14
Lap Joint Flanges 4-14
Reverse Geometry Flanges 4-14
Split Loose-type Flanges (mostly with lap joints) 4-14
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets 4-15
Integral Ring (3) & Loose Ring (5) Additional Data 4-15
Lap Joint (6) Additional Data 4-15
Blind (7) Additional Data 4-15
Hub Thickness, Small End 4-17
Hub Thickness, Large End 4-17
Hub Length 4-17
Bolt Material Specification 4-17
Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 4-17
Bolt Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 4-18
Diameter of Bolt Circle 4-18
Nominal Bolt Diameter 4-18
Thread Series 4-18
User-Specified Root-Area Additional Data 4-18
Number of Bolts 4-18
Gasket Factor m 4-18
Gasket Design Seating Stress y 4-18
Flange Face Facing Sketch 4-19
Column for Gasket Seating (I, II) 4-19
Gasket Thickness 4-19
Nubbin Width (or width of Ring Joint) 4-19
Partition Gasket Additional Data 4-19
External Loads 4-20
External Loads Additional Data 4-20
Mating Flange Loads 4-21
Mating Loads Additional Data 4-21
Skirt Support with Basering 4-23
Inside Diameter at Base 4-23
Basering Dialog 4-23
Basering Analysis 4-24
Thickness of a Basering Under Compression 4-24
iv
Thickness of Basering Under Tension 4-26

Thickness of Top Ring Under Tension 4-26
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension 4-26
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression 4-26
Basering Design 4-27
Selection of Number of Bolts 4-27
Calculation of Required Area for each Bolt 4-27
Selection of the Bolt Size 4-27
Selection of Preliminary Basering Geometry 4-27
Analysis of Preliminary Basering Geometry 4-27
Selection of Final Basering Geometry 4-27
Analysis of Basering Thicknesses 4-28
Basic Skirt Thickness 4-28
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring 4-28
Brownell and Young Method 4-28
Basering Input Data 4-30
Basering Description 4-30
Analyze or Design Basering 4-30
Temperature of Basering (needed if not ambient) 4-30
Thickness of Basering 4-30
Basering Material Specification 4-30
Inside Diameter of Basering 4-30
Outside Diameter of Basering 4-30
Bolt Material Specification 4-31
Nominal Bolt Diameter 4-31
Number of Bolts 4-31
Diameter at Bolt Circle 4-31
Bolt Table (Fine Thread, TEMA ), (Coarse, UNC ) User 4-31
Bolt Table 3 Additional Data 4-32
User Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt 4-32
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete 4-32
Allowable Compressive Strength of Concrete 4-32
Bolt Corrosion Allowance 4-32
Gussets Additional Data 4-32
Thickness of Gusset Plates 4-32
Height of Gussets 4-32
Distance between Gussets 4-32
Average Width of Gusset Plates 4-32
Elastic Modulus for Plates 4-32
Yield Stress for Plates 4-32
Thickness of Top Ring 4-32
Width of Top Ring 4-33
External Corrosion Allowance 4-33
Tailing Lug Analysis 4-34
Tailing Lug Input Data 4-35
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis 4-35
Tail Lug Type 4-35
Centerline Offset 4-35
Lug Thickness 4-35
Pin Hole Diameter 4-35
Weld Size Thickness 4-35
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring) 4-35
Discussion of Results 4-36
v
Chapter: 5 Vessel Detail Data

Introduction 5-1
Assigning Details to Elements 5-3
Detail Definition Buttons 5-4
Defining the Details 5-6
From Node 5-6
Distance from “From” Node or Offset from Vessel Centerline 5-6
Detail ID 5-6
Rings 5-7
Inside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Outside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Thickness of Ring 5-8
Ring Material 5-8
Moment of Inertia 5-8
Cross Sectional Area 5-8
Distance to Ring Centroid 5-8
Name of Section Type 5-8
Nozzles 5-10
Overriding Nozzle Weight 5-10
Nozzle Analysis 5-11
Nozzle Input Data 5-13
Nozzle Description 5-13
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell 5-13
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1) 5-13
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange 5-13
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange 5-13
Modification of Reinforcing Limits 5-14
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit 5-14
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit 5-14
Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0 5-14
Nozzle Material Specification 5-14
Nozzle Diameter Basis 5-14
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle 5-14
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis 5-14
Actual Diameter and Thickness 5-15
Nominal Diameter and Thickness 5-15
Minimum Diameter and Thickness 5-15
Actual Thickness of Nozzle 5-15
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle 5-15
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 5-15
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes 5-15
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck 5-15
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle 5-16
Nozzle Outside Projection 5-16
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad 5-16
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel 5-16
Nozzle Inside Projection 5-16
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell 5-16
Local Shell Thickness 5-16
Shell Tr Value 5-16
Tapped Hole Area Loss 5-17
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad 5-17
vi
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface 5-17

Pad Thickness 5-17
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter 5-17
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck 5-17
Pad Material 5-17
ASME Code Weld Type 5-17
Flange Type 5-18
Flange Material 5-18
Lugs 5-19
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint 5-19
Lug Bearing Width 5-19
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate 5-19
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate 5-19
Thickness of Bottom Plate 5-20
Distance between Gussets 5-20
Mean Width of Gussets 5-20
Height of Gussets 5-20
Thickness of Gussets 5-20
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring 5-20
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring 5-20
Overall Height of Lug 5-20
Overall Width of Lug 5-20
Weight of One Lug 5-20
Number of Lugs 5-20
Perform WRC 107 Calc 5-20
Pad Width 5-20
Pad Thickness 5-21
Pad Length 5-21
Weight 5-22
Miscellaneous Weight 5-22
Offset from Centerline 5-22
Forces and Moments 5-23
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction 5-23
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis 5-23
Acts During Wind or Seismic 5-23
Platforms 5-24
Platform Start Angle (degrees) 5-24
Platform End Angle (degrees) 5-24
Platform Wind Area 5-24
Platform Weight 5-24
Platform Railing Weight 5-24
Platform Grating Weight 5-24
Platform Width 5-25
Platform Height 5-25
Platform Clearance 5-25
Platform Force Coefficient 5-25
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options] 5-25
Platform Length (Non- Circular) 5-25
Saddles 5-26
Width of Saddle 5-26
Centerline Dimension (B) 5-26
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) 5-26
Height of Composite Stiffener 5-26
Width of Wear Plate 5-26
vii
Thickness of Wear Plate 5-26

Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees) 5-27
Saddle Dimension A 5-27
Perform Saddle Check (Y/N) 5-27
Material Yield Stress 5-27
E for Plates 5-27
Baseplate Length 5-27
Baseplate Thickness 5-27
Baseplate Width 5-27
Number of Ribs 5-27
Rib Thickness 5-27
Web Thickness 5-27
Web Location 5-27
Height of Center Web 5-27
Trays 5-28
Number of Trays 5-28
Tray Spacing 5-28
Tray Weight Per Unit Area 5-28
Height of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Density of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Legs 5-29
Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-29
Leg Orientation 5-29
Number of Legs 5-30
Section Identifier 5-30
Length of Leg 5-30
Packing 5-31
Height of Packed Section 5-31
Density of Packing 5-31
Liquid 5-33
Height/Length of Liquid 5-33
Density of Liquid 5-33
Insulation 5-35
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing 5-35
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing 5-35
Insulation Density 5-35
Lining 5-36
Height/Length of Lining 5-36
Thickness of Lining 5-36
Density of Lining 5-36
Chapter: 6 General Vessel Data

Design Data 6-2
Design Internal Temperature 6-2
Datum Line Distance 6-2
Hydrotest Type 6-2
1 - ASME UG-99(b) 6-2
2 - ASME UG-99(c) 6-2
3 - ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34 6-3
Hydrotest Position 6-3
Projection from Top 6-3
Projection from Bottom 6-3
viii
Min. Metal Temperature 6-3

Flange Distance to Top 6-3
Construction Type 6-3
Special Service 6-4
Degree of Radiography 6-4
Miscellaneous Weight 6-4
Use Higher Long. Stresses? 6-4
Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N) 6-4
Consider Vortex Shedding? 6-5
User Defined MAWP/MAPnc 6-5
User Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure 6-5
Corroded Hydrotest? 6-5
Is This a Heat Exchanger 6-5
Installation Options 6-6
Platform Area Calculation Method 6-6
Stiffener Type 6-6
For Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way 6-7
Bar Thickness to use Designing 6-7
Rigging Data 6-7
Impact Factor 6-7
Lug Distances from Base 6-8
Select from Standard Bar Ring List 6-8
Design Modification 6-9
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure 6-9
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure 6-9
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure 6-9
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress 6-9
Load Case 6-10
Nozzle Design Modifications 6-12
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, M.A.W.P. + Static Head 6-12
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Design Pressure + Static Head 6-12
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Overall MAWP + Static Head 6-12
Nozzle Design Modifications, Consider MAP nc in Analysis 6-12
Modify Tr based on the Maximum Stress Ratio 6-12
Consider Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design 6-13
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings 6-13
6-13
Wind & Seismic Data 6-14
Wind Data 6-14
Wind Design Code 6-14
ASCE Wind Data 6-15
Design Wind Speed 6-15
Exposure Constant 6-15
Base Elevation 6-15
Percent Wind for Hydrotest 6-15
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor 6-15
ASCE Roughness Factor 6-16
UBC Wind Data 6-17
Base Elevation 6-17
UBC Wind Importance Factor 6-17
ix
NBC Wind Data 6-19

Base Elevation 6-19
Critical Damping Ratio 6-19
Roughness Factor 6-20
ASCE 95 Wind Data 6-21
Base Elevation 6-21
Importance Factor 6-22
Roughness Factor 6-22
Height of Hill (H) 6-22
Distance to Site (x) 6-22
Height above Ground 6-22
Crest Distance 6-22
Type of Hill 6-22
Damping Factor 6-22
IS 875 Wind Code 6-24
Base Elevation 6-24
Wind Zone Number 6-24
Risk Factor 6-24
Terrain Category 6-24
Category 1 6-24
Category 2 6-24
Category 3 6-24
Category 4 6-24
Equipment Class 6-25
Consider Gust Response Factor 6-25
User-Defined Wind Profile 6-26
Wind Profile Data 6-26
Seismic Data 6-27
Seismic Design Code 6-27
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data 6-28
Soil Type 6-28
Horizontal Force Factor 6-29
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest 6-29
Seismic Zone 6-29
Seismic Coefficient Av 6-30
Seismic Coefficient Cc 6-30
Performance Criteria Factor P 6-30
Amplification Factor ac 6-30
UBC Seismic Data 6-31
Soil Type 6-31
Horizontal Force Factor 6-31
x
Seismic Zone 6-32

NBC Seismic Data 6-33
Soil Type 6-33
Force Modification Factor 6-33
Acceleration Zone 6-34
Velocity Zone 6-35
India’s Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM 6-36
Soil Factor 6-36
Zone Number 6-36
Period of Vibration 6-36
Damping Factor 6-36
ASCE-95 Seismic Data 6-37
Force Factor ( R ) 6-37
Seismic Coefficient Ca 6-37
Seismic Coefficient Cv 6-37
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data 6-38
UBC Earthquake Importance Factor 6-38
Category Value 6-38
UBC Seismic Coefficient CA 6-38
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV 6-38
UBC Near Source Factor 6-38
UBC Seismic Zone 6-38
UBC Horizontal Force Factor 6-39
Seismic Load Input in G's 6-40
IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters 6-41
EarthQuake Parameters Ss and Sl 6-41
Response Modification Factor R 6-41
Moment Reduction Factor Tau 6-41
Seismic Design Category 6-41
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv 6-41
Response Spectrum 6-43
Seismic for Hydrotest 6-43
Response Spectrum Name 6-43
User Defined 6-44
El Centro 6-44
ASCE 6-44
IBC 6-44
1.60D.5 6-44
1.60D2 6-44
1.60D5 6-44
1.60D7 6-44
1.60D10 6-45
Shock Scale X|Y dir 6-45
Zero Period Acceleration 6-45
Combination Method 6-45
Acc.Based Factor Fa: 6-46
xi
Acc Based Factor Fv: 6-46

Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss: 6-46
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl: 6-46
Response Modification R: 6-46
Coefficient Cd: 6-47
Range Type: 6-47
Ordinate Type: 6-47
Include Missing Mass Components: 6-47
Chapter: 7 PVElite Analysis

Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results 7-3
Step 0: Error Checking 7-3
Step 1: Input Echo 7-3
Step 2: XY Coordinate Calculations 7-3
Step 3: Internal Pressure Calculations 7-3
Step 4: Hydrotest calculations 7-3
Step 5: External Pressure calculations 7-3
British Standard PD:5500 7-4
Step 6: Weight of Elements 7-4
Step 7: Weight of Details 7-4
Step 8: ANSI Flange MAWP 7-4
Steps 9 and 10: Total weight and detail moment 7-5
Step 11: Natural Frequency Calculation 7-6
Step 12: Wind Load Calculation 7-6
Step 13: Earthquake Load Calculation 7-6
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake 7-6
Step 15: Wind Deflection 7-6
Step 16: Longitudinal Stress Constants 7-6
Step 17: Longitudinal Allowable Stresses 7-6
Step 18: Longitudinal stresses due to . . . 7-6
Step 19: Stress due to Combined Loads 7-6
Optional Steps 7-8
Component Analysis 7-9
Chapter: 8 Output / Review

Generating Output 8-1
The Review Screen 8-2
Using Review 8-3
Component Analysis 8-4
Purpose of This Chapter 9-1
Chapter: 9 Component Analysis Tutorial

Starting the PVElite Component Analysis Module 9-1
Component Analysis Main Menu 9-2
File Menu 9-2
Edit Menu 9-5
Analysis Menu 9-6
Output Menu 9-8
xii
Tools Menu 9-9

Configuration 9-9
Computation Control Tab 9-9
Miscellaneous Tab 9-11
Diagnostics Menu 9-16
ESL Menu 9-17
View Menu 9-18
Help Menu 9-19
Performing an Analysis 9-20
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option 9-25
Printing or Saving Reports to a File 9-27
Printing the Reports 9-27
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel 9-28
Tutorial Problem Printout 9-29
Chapter: 10 The Shell Module

Introduction 10-1
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 10-1Discussion of Input Data 10-5
Main Input Fields 10-5
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure 10-5
Design External Pressure 10-5
Design Temperature for External Pressure 10-5
Shell Section Material 10-5
Include Hydrostatic Head Component 10-5
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 10-5
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 10-6
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams 10-6
Is the Shell/Head Material Normalized? 10-6
Type of Shell or Head 10-6
Diameter Basis 10-7
Diameter of Shell/Head 10-7
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7
Nominal of Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate (optional) 10-7
Corrosion Allowance 10-7
Type of Reinforcing Ring 10-7
Minimum Design Metal Temperature 10-7
Skip UG-16(B) Minimum Thickness Calculation 10-8
Pop-up Input Fields 10-9
Operating Liquid Density 10-9
Height of Liquid Column Operating 10-9
Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest 10-9
Design Length of Section 10-9
Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations 10-9
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads 10-9
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads 10-9
Length of Straight Flange 10-9
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads 10-9
Half APEX Angle for Conical Sections 10-10
Large Diameter for Non-Circular Welded Flat Heads 10-10
Attachment Factor for Flat Head 10-10
Width of Reinforcing Ring 10-10
Thickness of Reinforcing Ring 10-10
Size of Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell 10-10
Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements 10-11
Ring Weld Attachment Style (Intermittent, Continuous, Both) 10-11
Location of Ring (Internal or External) 10-11
xiii
Moment of Reinforcing Ring 10-11

Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring 10-11
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface 10-11
Is the Ring Angle Rolled the Hard Way? 10-12
Results 10-13
Status Bar 10-13
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure 10-13
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness 10-13
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold 10-14
Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness 10-14
Summary of Internal Pressure Results 10-14
Minimum Metal Temperatures 10-14
Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance 10-14
Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure 10-14
Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure 10-15
Summary of External Pressure Results 10-15
Example Problems 10-16
Chapter: 11 The Nozzle Module

Introduction 11-1
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 11-1
Discussion of Input Data 11-3
Pop-Up Input Fields 11-10
Chapter: 12 The Flange Module

Introduction 12-1
Status Bar 12-14
Flanges with Different Bending Moments 12-14
Blind Flanges and Channel Covers 12-14
Allowable Flange Stresses 12-15
Chapter: 13 The Conical Sections Module 13-1

Introduction 13-1
Cone Number 13-2
Cone Description 13-2
Internal Design Pressure 13-2
Internal Design Temperature 13-2
External Design Pressure 13-2
External Design Temperature 13-2
Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name 13-3
Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 13-3
Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 13-3
Cone Joint Efficiency 13-3
Cone Actual Thickness 13-3
Cone Corrosion Allowance 13-3
Cone Diameter Basis ( ID, OD ) 13-4
xiv
Cone Diameter at Small End 13-4

Cone Diameter at Large End 13-4
Cone Half Apex Angle 13-4
Cone Axial Length 13-4
Are There Axial Forces on the Cone? 13-4
Small Cylinder Joint Efficiency 13-4
Small Cylinder Actual Thickness 13-4
Small Cylinder Corrosion Allowance 13-5
Small Cylinder Axial Strength 13-5
Small End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle) 13-5
Large Cylinder Joint Efficiency 13-5
Large Cylinder Actual Thickness 13-5
Large Cylinder Corrosion Allowance 13-5
Large Cylinder Axial Length 13-5
Large End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle) 13-5
Cone Circumferential Joint Efficiency 13-6
Take Cone as Lines of Support for External Pressure? 13-7
Total Axial Force on Large End for Internal Pressure Case 13-7
Total Axial Force on Large End for External Pressure Case 13-7
Total Axial Force on Small End for Internal Pressure Case 13-7
Total Axial Force on Small End for External Pressure Case 13-7
Location of Reinforcing Cone ( Shell, Cone ) 13-7
Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring 13-8
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring 13-8
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section 13-8
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section 13-8
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section 13-8
Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End 13-8
Knuckle Thickness, Large End 13-8
Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End 13-8
Knuckle Thickness, Small End 13-8
Discussion of the Results 13-9
Internal Pressure Results 13-9
External Pressure Results 13-9
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure 13-9
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure 13-10
Example Problem #1 13-11
Chapter: 14 The Floating Head Module

Introduction 14-1
Bolt Root Area 14-8
Inside Depth of Flange from Flange Face to Attached Head 14-8
Backing Ring Inside Diameter 14-8
Backing Ring Actual Thickness 14-8
Number of Splits in Backing Ring (0, 1, or 2) 14-8
Internal Pressure Results for the Head 14-9
xv
External Pressure Results for the Head 14-9

Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head 14-9
Required Thickness Calculations 14-9
Soehren’s Calculations 14-9
Chapter: 15 The Horizontal Vessel Module

Introduction 15-1
Discussion of Input 15-1
Main Input Fields 15-1Pop-Up Input Fields 15-5
Base Plate Length 15-5
Base Plate Thickness 15-5
Base Plate Width 15-5
Number of Ribs 15-5
Thickness of Ribs 15-5
Thickness of Web 15-5
Web Location Center or Side 15-5
Height of Center Web 15-5
Force Coefficient 15-5
Additional Area 15-5
Wind Pressure on Vessel 15-5
Importance Factor ( I ) 15-6
Basic Wind Speed 15-6
Wind Exposure 15-6
Height of Vessel Above Grade 15-6
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base 15-6
Use ASCE 7-95 Code 15-6
Types of Hill 15-6
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) 15-7
Distance to Site (x) 15-7
Height Above Ground (z) 15-7
Distance to Crest (Lh) 15-7
Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) — Optional (Hz) 15-7
Damping Ratio (beta) — Optional 15-7
Seismic Zone 15-7
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base 15-7
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS 15-7
Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads 15-8
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads 15-8
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads 15-8
Stiffening Ring Location 15-8
Stiffening Ring Material Specification 15-8
Stiffening Ring Properties 15-8
Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring 15-8
Cross-Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring 15-8
Distance to Ring Centroid from Shell Surface 15-9
Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9
Saddle Wear Plate Design 15-11
Restrictions of this Method 15-11
xvi
Conclusions 15-11
Example Problem 15-14
Chapter: 16 The TEMA Tubesheet Module

Introduction 16-1
Chapter: 17 The WRC 107/FEA Module

Introduction 17-1
Additional Input for VRC107 17-16
Additional Input for FEA 17-17
WRC107 Stress Calculations 17-19
WRC107 Stress Summations 17-22
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle 17-23
Finite Element Analysis (FEA): 17-27
Examples 17-29
Chapter: 18 The Leg & Lug Module

Introduction 18-1
Vessel Leg Input 18-8
Leg Results 18-10
Support Lug Input 18-11
Lifting Lug Input 18-13
Output 18-16
Examples 18-17
Baseplate Input 18-24
Baseplate Results 18-27
Trunnion Input 18-28
Trunnion Result 18-31
Chapter: 19 The Pipe & Pad Module

Introduction 19-1
Main Input Fields 19-1Pop-Up Input Fields 19-5
Output 19-6
xvii
Chapter: 20 The Base Ring Module

Introduction 20-1
Calculation Techniques 20-1
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression 20-1
Thickness of Base Ring Under Tension 20-3
Thickness of Top Ring Under Tension 20-3
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension 20-3
Base Ring Design 20-4
Selection of Number of Bolts 20-4
Calculation of Load per Bolt 20-4
Calculation of Required Area for each Bolt 20-4
Selection of the Bolt Size 20-4
Selection of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry 20-4
Analysis of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry 20-4
Selection of Final Base Ring Geometry 20-5
Analysis of Base Ring Thicknesses 20-5
Basic Skirt Thickness 20-5
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring 20-5
Pop-up Input Fields 20-10
Chapter: 21 The Thin Joint Module

Introduction 21-1
Chapter: 22 The Thick Joint Module

Introduction 22-1
Chapter: 23 The ASME Tubesheets Module

Introduction 23-1
xviii

Chapter: 24
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction 24-1
Chapter: 25 The Large Opening Module

Introduction 25-1
Chapter: 26 The Rectangular Vessel Module

Introduction 26-1
Type of Reinforcing Ring 26-15
None—No reinforcing ring 26-15
Simple Bar Geometry—Enter the width, thickness, and length (if necessary) of the bar. 26-15
General Beam Section—Enter the moment of inertia, cross-sectional area, and the distance from the centroid. 26-
16
Chapter: 27 The WRC 297/Annex G Module

Introduction 27-1
Item Number 27-1
Description 27-1
Diameter Basis for Vessel 27-1
Vessel Diameter 27-1
Vessel Wall Thickness 27-1Vessel Corrosion Allowance 27-2
Design Pressure 27-2
Design Temperature 27-2
Vessel Material 27-2
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor 27-2
Is there a Reinforcing Pad? 27-2
Diameter Basis for Nozzle 27-2
Diameter of Nozzle 27-2
Nozzle Wall Thickness 27-2
xix
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 27-2

Axial Force "P" (IN WRC 107 ) or FR (IN PD 5500) 27-3
Shear Force VC (IN WRC 107 ) or FC (IN PD 5500) 27-3
Shear Force VL (IN WRC 107 ) or FL (IN PD 5500) 27-3
Torsional Moment MT 27-3
Circumferential Moment MC 27-3
Longitudinal Moment ML 27-4
Add Axial Pressure Thrust ? 27-5
Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)? 27-5
Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G 27-6
Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane + Bending) 27-6
Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane) 27-6
Nozzle Inside Projection 27-6
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section 27-6
Offset from Left Tangent Line 27-6
Is the Location of the Nozzle in the Vessel Spherical? 27-6
Sample Calculation 27-7
Appendix G Sample Problem 27-12
Chapter: 28 The Appendix Y Module

Introduction 28-1
Gasket and Gasket Factors 28-2
Sample Calculation 28-3
Chapter: 29 Miscellaneous Processors

File Manager 29-1
Heading Edit 29-3
Material Definition 29-4
Material Name 29-6
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 29-6
Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature 29-6
Allowable Stress at Hydrotest Temperature 29-6
Nominal Density of this Material 29-6
P Number Thickness 29-7
Yield Stress, Operating 29-7
UCS-66 Chart Number 29-7
External Pressure Chart Name 29-8
Carbon Steel Materials 29-9
Heat Treated Materials 29-9
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials 29-9
Non Ferrous Materials 29-9
TEMA Number 29-10
Keyboard Commands 29-11
Mouse Operation 29-12
Chapter: 30 Vessel Example Problems

Introduction 30-1
Vessel Example 30-1
xx
3UHIDFH
7KH3UHIDFHSURYLGHVLPSRUWDQW
OHJDOLQIRUPDWLRQIRU39(OLWHXVHUV
&RQWHQWV
$FFHSWDQFHRI7HUPVRI
$JUHHPHQWE\WKH8VHU
/LFHQVH*UDQW
7HUP
/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\
(QWLUH$JUHHPHQW
/LPLWDWLRQVRI5HPHGLHV
*HQHUDO
'LVFODLPHU
39(OLWH
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT PVElite - User Guide
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT

Licensor: COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 12777 Jones Rd., Ste. 480, Hous-
ton, Texas 77070
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
BEFORE USING THIS PACKAGE. USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
The enclosed proprietary encoded materials, hereinafter referred to as the Licensed Pro-
gram(s), are the property of COADE and are provided to you under the terms and condi-
tions of this License Agreement. You assume responsibility for the selection of the
appropriate Licensed Program(s) to achieve the intended results, and for the installation,
use and results obtained from the selected Licensed Program(s).
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed
Program(s) from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights
with regard to the Licensed Programs(s):
a. Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the
License Program to be executed without a COADE External Software Lock
(ESL).
b. To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party
acknowledges in writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed
Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or
in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so trans-
ferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Pro-
gram(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed
Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Pro-
gram(s) on any copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).
THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR
TRANSFER THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR
MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED
PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE
GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s)
until terminated in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may termi-
nate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together
with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License
2 Preface
PVElite - User Guide PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or
automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License
Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s)
together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND
EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and
performance of the Licensed Program(s) is with you.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdic-
tions the above exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal
rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from one jurisdiction to another.
COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will
meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error
free.
COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on
which the Licensed Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and work-
manship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you
as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.
COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE’s expense,
as soon as possible after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those cus-
tomers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected
version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning
the Licensed Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or repre-
senting themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement
the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this
Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to
in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in this
regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADE’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
a. the replacement of any CD not meeting COADE’s “Limited Warranty” as defined
herein and which is returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a
copy of your receipt, or
b. if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of
defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement
by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you will
be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).
Preface 3
IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES,

INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, AND OTHER INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) EVEN IF COADE OR AN AUTHORIZED
COADE DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-
AGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIA-
BILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT THE
ABOVE LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY IN THOSE JURISDIC-
TIONS. FURTHERMORE, COADE DOES NOT PURPORT TO DISCLAIM ANY LIA-
BILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY DEFECTS IN THE CDS OR OTHER
PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY COADE PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or
the Licensed Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any
attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations
hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the
right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State
of Texas, United States of America.
The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the
program. After the first 1 year term, such updates and support are optional at the then cur-
rent update fee.
Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein, shall be
made by contacting COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones RD., Ste. 480, Houston,
Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.
DISCLAIMER - PVElite
Copyright(c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2002, all rights reserved.
This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc.
and is provided to the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. pro-
gram license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distrib-
uted in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner except as
expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license
agreement.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFT-
WARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF
THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING
PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN
NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE
TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN
Preface 4
ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT IS THE USERS

RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE RESULTS OF THE PROGRAM.
Preface 5
HOOPS‘ License Grant PVElite - User Guide
HOOPS License Grant

COADE grants to PVElite Users a non-exclusive license to use the Software Application
under the terms stated in this Agreement.
PVElite Users agree not to alter, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Software Applica-
tion. PVElite Users will not copy the Software except: (i) as necessary to install the Soft-
ware Application onto a computer(s)... or (ii) to create an archival copy. PVElite Users
agree that any such copies of the Software Application shall contain the same proprietary
notices which appear on and in the Software Application.
Title to and ownership of the intellectual property rights associated with the Software
Application and any copies remain with COADE and its suppliers.
PVElite Users are hereby notified that Tech Soft America, L.L.C. 1301 Marina Village
Parkway, Suite 300, Alameda, CA 94501 ("Tech Soft America") is a third-party benefi-
ciary to this Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate
to PVElite Users’ use of the Software Application. Such provisions are made expressly
for the benefit of Tech Soft America and are enforceable by Tech Soft America in addition
to COADE.
In no event shall COADE or its suppliers be liable in any way for indirect, special, or con-
sequential damages of any nature, including without limitation, lost business profits, or
liability or injury to third persons, whether foreseeable or not, regardless of whether
COADE or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages.
6 Preface
&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
What is PVElite?
PVElite is a PC-based pressure vessel design and analysis software program developed,
marketed, and sold by COADE Engineering Software. The PVElite program is a package
of nineteen applications for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and heat exchang-
ers. The purpose of the program is to provide the vessel engineer, designer, or estimator
with easy-to-use, technically sound, well documented calculations which will speed and
simplify the task of vessel design or re-rating. The popularity of PVElite is a reflection of
COADE’s expertise in programming and engineering, as well as COADE’s dedication to
service and quality.
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program?

Calculations in the PVElite program are based on the latest editions of national codes such
as the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or industry standards such as the Zick
method of analysis for horizontal vessels on saddles. The PVElite program offers excep-
tional ease of use which results in dramatic improvement in efficiency and comprehen-
sion.
PVElite features include
• Graphical User Interface, which lists model data and control with a vessel display.
• Both horizontal and vertical vessels may be composed of cylinders, conic sections,
body flanges and elliptical, torispherical, hemispherical, conical and flat heads.
• Saddle supports for horizontal vessels. Leg and skirt supports at any location for verti-
cal vessels.
• Extensive on-line help.
• Deadweight calculation from vessel details such as nozzles, lugs, rings, trays, insula-
tion, packing and lining.
• Wall thickness calculations for internal and external pressure in accordance with the
rules of ASME Section VIII Division 1 and Division 2, and also BS 5500. Stiffener
ring evaluation for external pressure.
• Wind and seismic data using the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) stan-
dard, the Uniform Building Code (UBC), and the National (Canadian) Building Code,
and the India Standard.
• User defined unit system.
• A complete examination of the vessel’s structural loads combining the effects of pres-
sure, deadweight and live loads in the empty, operating and hydrotest conditions.
• Logic to automatically increase wall thickness to satisfy requirements for pressure and
structural loads and introduce stiffener rings to address external pressure rules.
Introduction 1-1
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program? PVElite - User Guide
• Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios (to the
allowable limits).
• Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.
• A complete material library for all three design standards.
• A component library containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure vs. temperature charts, and section properties for AISC beams.
• Printed output from the PVElite program is exceptionally clear and complete, with
user definable headings on each page. User comments and additions may be inserted
at any point in the output.
1-2 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What distinguishes PVElite from other commercial pres-
What distinguishes PVElite from other commercial pressure vessel

packages?
COADE treats PVElite more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pres-
sure vessel engineers are involved in day-to-day software development, program support,
and training. This approach has produced a program which most closely fits today’s
requirements of the pressure vessel industry. Data entry is simple and straight forward
through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. PVElite provides the widest range of
modelling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system
analysis. Users may tailor their PVElite installation through default setting and custom-
ized data bases. Comprehensive input graphics confirms the model construction before the
analysis is made. The program’s interactive output processor presents results on the moni-
tor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer. PVElite is an up-to-date
package that not only utilizes standard analysis guidelines but also provides the latest rec-
ognized opinions for these analyses.
PVElite is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product
with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record. COADE is a
strong and stable company where service is a major commitment.
Introduction 1-3
What Applications are Available? PVElite - User Guide
What Applications are Available?

The following applications are available in the PVElite Program.
General Vessels
Wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic combinations of pressure,
deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with ASME Section VIII Divi-
sion 1 rules, Division 2 rules, and the rules of BS 5500. These calculations address mini-
mum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress (both tension and
compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load combinations.
Complete Vertical Vessels

Vessels supported by either skirts, legs or lugs can be defined for complete dead load and
live load analysis. Stacked vessels with liquid are also addressed. Hydrotest conditions
may be specified for either vertical or horizontal test positions. Vessel MAWP includes
hydrostatic head and ANSI B16.5 flange pressure limitations.
Complete Horizontal Vessels

Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L. P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads.
Individual Shells & Heads

Internal and external pressure design of vessels using any of the three design standards.
Components include cylinders; conical sections; and elliptical, torispherical, flat, and
spherical heads. PVElite calculates required thickness and maximum allowable internal
pressure for the given component. It also determines the minimum design metal tempera-
ture per UCS-66, and evaluates stiffening rings for external pressure design.
Conical Sections
Internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings. Complete
area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the cone under both internal
and external pressure are included.
Vessel Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement per the applicable code (Div. 1 or Div. 2) under
internal, and external pressures and under MAPNC conditions for nozzles in shells and
heads. The program includes tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal
pipe diameters and schedules. The program also calculates the strength of reinforcement
and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle.
Flanges
MAWP and MAP are listed for all nozzle flanges. For those flanges requiring stress analy-
sis (e.g. body flanges), complete Appendix 2 stress analysis is provided. PVElite can also
design flanges either by increasing the flange thickness or by changing several flange
parameters.
1-4 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What Applications are Available?
Base Rings
Stress and thickness evaluation for tailing lugs, skirts and base rings. Results from both the
neutral axis shift and simplified method for basering required thickness are reported.
The following pressure vessel components, while unincorporated in the general vessel
model, may be modeled and analyzed on an individual basis in PVElite.
Lifting Lug
The stresses on legs, supporting lugs, lifting lugs, and their allowable limits can be calcu-
lated. Stresses on cap type and continuous top support rings (girder rings) can also be cal-
culated. Trunnion and shell stress as well as baseplate thickness is also computed.
Pipe & Pad

Required wall thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for two pipes, and
branch reinforcement requirements for the same two pipes considered as a branch and a
header. Based on ANSI B31.3 rules, this program includes tables of outside diameter and
wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules.
Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads

Stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the
method of P. P. Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107.
Thin-Walled Expansion Joints

Stress and life cycle evaluation for thin walled expansion joints in accordance with ASME
VIII Div. 1 Appendix 26.
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints

Stress, life cycle and spring rate calculations for flanged and flued expansion joints in
accordance with ASME VIII Div. 1 Appendix CC. The spring rate computation is per
TEMA 8th edition.
TEMA Tubesheets
Analysis of all types of tubesheets using the Seventh Edition of the Standards of the Tubu-
lar Exchanger Manufacturers Association. The program takes full account of the effects of
tubesheets extended as flanges, and for fixed tubesheets also includes the effects of differ-
ential thermal expansion and the presence of an expansion joint.
ASME Tubesheets
This program determines required thickness of tubesheets for fixed or U-tube exchangers
per the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA.
Floating Heads
Internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. An additional calculations technique allowed
by the Code (Soehren’s calculation) is also implemented by this program.
Introduction 1-5
What Applications are Available? PVElite - User Guide
Half-Pipe Jacket
This program determines required thickness and MAWP for half-pipe jacketed vessels per
the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix EE.
Large Openings
This program analyzes large openings in integral flat heads per the ASME Code Section
VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 and Appendix 14. Required thickness, MAWP and weights
are computed for geometries that have no nozzle or an attached nozzle.
Rectangular Vessels
This program analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are ana-
lyzed for internal pressure, including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a
diametral staying plate. All membrane and bending stresses are computed and compared
to the appropriate allowables.
Shells & Heads

Internal and external pressure design of vessels and exchangers using the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Components include cylinders, conical sections, elliptical
heads, torispherical heads, flat heads, and spherical shells and heads. This program calcu-
lates required thickness and maximum allowable internal pressure for the given compo-
nent. It also calculates the minimum design metal temperature per UCS-66, and evaluates
stiffening rings for external pressure design.
Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells
and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules and including tables of
outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The
program also calculates the strength of reinforcement and evaluates failure paths for the
nozzle.
Flanges
Stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Sec-
tion VIII, Division 1 rules. This program both designs and analyzes the following types of
flanges:
• Weld neck flanges and all integral flange types
• Slip on flanges and all loose flange types with hubs
• Ring type flanges and all loose flange types without hubs
• Blind flanges, both circular and non-circular
• TEMA channel covers
• Reverse geometry weld neck flanges
• Flat faced flanges with full face gaskets
Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L.P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads. Stiffen-
ing rings used in the design of the vessel are also evaluated. Wind and seismic loadings are
1-6 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What Applications are Available?
also considered. Additionally, the saddle, webs and baseplate are checked for external
seismic and wind loads.
Legs & Lugs

Analysis of vessel support legs, support lugs, and lifting lugs. This analysis is based on
industry standard calculation techniques, and the resulting stresses are compared to the
AISC Handbook of Steel Construction or the ASME Code. A full table of 929 AISC
beams, channels and angles is included in the program.
WRC 107
Stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the
method of P.P. Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, including a
stress comparison to VIII div. 2 allowables for 3 different loading conditions. An FEA
interface to PRG’s NOZPRO is also included.
Summary
Description and evaluation of all the components of a pressure vessel or heat exchanger.
Design pressure, temperature, material, actual thickness, and Maximum Allowable Work-
ing Pressure are shown for each component.
WRC 297
Stresses in cylindrical shells and nozzles due to external loading, per Welding Research
Council Bulletin 297 and PD5500 Annex G.
Appendix Y Flanges
Required thickness and MAWP for Class 1 flanges with metal to metal contact outside the
bolt circle per Appendix Y.
Introduction 1-7
About the PVElite Documentation PVElite - User Guide
About the PVElite Documentation

Chapter 2 gives you information on the hardware and software required to run the PVElite
program, instructions on how to install the program, and how to prepare your computer to
run the program.
Chapter 3 tells you how to get the PVElite program started on your computer. Use Chap-
ter 3 to learn the structure of the program, and the keystrokes needed to make it work.
Each of the applications operates the same way, so you will only need to learn these skills
one time.
Chapter 4 discusses the PVElite element input data for each basic element and the vessel
details added to these elements is explained in Chapter 5. Chapter 6 describes the general
vessel input data.
Chapter 7 discusses the Anaylze options of PVElite while Chapter 8 contains information
needed to review or generate output for the job. This chapter also focuses on the capabili-
ties of the review processor.
Chapter 9 contains a complete step-by-step tutorial which leads you through the use of one
application of the PVElite Component Analysis Module.
Chapter 10 gives a more detailed description of several features associated with the
spreadsheet input program - merging shell data, selecting materials, editing materials
properties, and inserting or deleting analyses.
Chapters 10 through 28 contain the technical descriptions for each of the PVElite module
applications. The information provided for each application includes:
• The purpose and scope of the application and its technical basis
• Notes on the input to the program and results of the program
• A figure showing the relevant geometry
• One or more example problems
Chapter 29 describes the miscellaneous processors included in PVElite.
Finally, Chapter 30 provides a listing for typical vertical and horizontal vessels along with
complete example problems.
1-8 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Program Support / User Assistance
Program Support / User Assistance

COADE’s staff understands that PVElite is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at
times, an elaborate process—one that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our
documentation is intended to address the questions raised regarding piping analysis, sys-
tem modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly found in these
volumes.
COADE understands the engineer’s need to produce efficient, economical, and expedi-
tious designs. To that end, COADE has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address
any PVElite issues raised by all users. PVElite support is available by telephone, fax, the
Internet, discussion board, and by mail; literally hundreds of support calls are answered
every week. COADE provides this service at no additional charge to the user. It is
expected, however, that questions focus on the current version of the program.
Formal training in PVElite and pressure vessel analysis is also available from COADE.
COADE conducts regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open
attendance courses around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available at
COADE—modeling, analysis, and design.
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers

Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
Fax: 281-890-3301 WEB: www.coade.com
Introduction 1-9
Updates PVElite - User Guide
Updates
PVElite update sets are identified by their version number. The current release of PVElite
is Version 4.2.
Licenses
There are 3 types of PVElite licenses:
Full Run
Provides unlimited access to PVElite and one year of updates, maintenance, and support.
Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
Provides unlimited access to PVElite with updates, maintenance, and support provided as
long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run
Provides 50 analyses over an unlimited period of time, but does not include program
updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 “runs” is purchased.
A run is decremented when the “Analyze” Option is selected from the menu bar and the
“Analyze” submenu item is selected.
1-10 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Summary of Version 3.5 Improvements
Summary of Version 3.5 Improvements

• Code Case 2260
• Code Case 2261
• Thick-walled equations from App. 1
• WRC 297 added
• Appendix Y calculations added
• Microsoft Word output report generation

• A-99 addenda changes have been incorporated, including the higher allowable
stresses for Div. 1
• The pre 99 addenda is available as an option (uses the 98 addenda material database,
etc.)
• Other FVC nozzles such as types F, V1, V2, and V3 are now included (with or with
nut relief)
• Nozzle calculations in ANSI blind flanges can now be performed (full area replace-
ment)
• An ANSI flange dimension lookup feature has been added
• Required flange thickness calculations based on Rigidity considerations are included
• A saddle copy feature has been incorporated
• The program’s documentation is now available on-line in PDF format
• Several enhancements to the user interface have been made
• Dimensional Solutions Foundation 3-D interface has been added
• MAWP and MAPnc can now be manually defined
• The 3/32 min. thickness requirement based on the Service type (Unfired Steam) is
accounted for
• The Maximum hydrotest pressure is computed in the case of overstressed geometries
• The ESL will automatically be updated for current users (obviating the need for the
phone call)
• An option for the pneumatic hydrotest type has been added
• The material database editor can select materials from the database for editing pur-
poses
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features

• A-99 addenda changes have been incorporated, including the higher allowable
stresses for Div. 1
• The pre 99 addenda is available as an option (uses the 98 addenda material database,
etc.)
• Required flange thickness calculations based on Rigidity considerations
• TEMA Eighth edition changes are included
• Code Case 2260 has been added
• The CodeCalc User interface has been re-written and now has lower memory require-
ments
• The material database editor can select materials from the database for editing pur-
poses
• Thick Walled Cylinder and Sphere equations are implemented per Appendix 1
Introduction 1-11
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements PVElite - User Guide
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements

• An option for a user defined hydrotest pressure has been added
• A provision for a corroded hydrotest has been added
• An interactive 3D graphical viewer has been added
• Local Stress calculations per BS-5500 Appendix G for Nozzles on Spheres and Cylin-
ders has been added
• PV Elite now creates a Data Interchange File (DXF), Nozzle Summary and Bill of
Material
• An interface to Paulin Research Group’s Nozpro Finite Element Analysis program has
been added
• The flange input now accepts different M and Y factors for the partition Gasket
• The nozzle input has been expanded to accept an alternate Angle and Manway specifi-
cation as well as tapped hole area loss
• The UBC 97 Earthquake Code has an alternate provision to use higher allowables
• Some additional Basering Design Parameters have also been included
• UCS-79 Fiber Elongation Calculations are now reported

• ASME 2000 addenda has been incorporated
• Provision to use the 99 year material database
• TEMA and ASME tubesheet programs updated to perform multiple load cases
• Separate entry of m and y factors for partition gaskets
• User bolt loads in the tubesheet programs
• Simultaneous Corroded and UnCorroded thick expansion joint calculations
• ASCE 98 wind code added
• Rigging analysis with graphical results processor added
• The input (thicknesses, rings, and repads) can now be updated by the analysis program
• The 3- D viewer now has a transparency option
• Ladder information is now collected
• User time history input for IS-893 RSM
1-12 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Summary of Version 4.2 Improvements

• Computation of Slen (allowable length between stiffeners) displays on the status bar
• Computation of Tr for external pressure displays on the Status bar
• Computation of EMAWP for heads displays on the Status bar
• Computation of Areas (Required and Available) in the Nozzle dialog
• Computation of Inertias (Required and Available) in the Stiffener Ring dialog
• Inputs for Type and Material of Construction for Nozzle flanges
• Nozzles on heads are now listed allowing the ability to copy and paste nozzles
between heads (cut and paste)
• The program will automatically design a ring on entry in to the Ring dialog once the
minimum parameters are entered in or if the ring OD is zeroed out and you tab around
the data fields
• A standard Bar Ring Selection table is now available
• Minimum leg size is calculated if the leg selected fails the AISC Unity Check
• Minimum thickness of Gusset plates, bottom, and top lug plates are now shown
• Minimum size of Cone/Shell junction rings are computed if the selected ring fails on
area or inertia
• The Liquid dialog was reworked to allow entry of Specific Gravity and Distance of
Liquid from datum line
• A group of Stiffening Rings can be added at one time
• ANSI Flange MAWP displays on the Status bar
• FVC Studding Outlets added to the FVC database
• WRC 107 Calcs performed for Legs and Lugs automatically
• Percent Liquid Holdup and SP specification added to Packing dialog
• Y forces now add/subtract to axial stress for cases with FW or FS added to them
• Nozzle Flange Rating displays on the Status bar
• Pressing the F5 key in Nozzle, Ring, and Flange dialog acts as a Refresh (recalc) Key
• Added offset dimension in the Weight dialog
• Flange Calcs are now available from the Flange dialog
• Added 48 character element descriptions for each element
• From Nodes now display on the printout of the sketch input
• Diameter and length dimensions now display on the sketch
• Option to print a sketch in color
• Several default values can be set such as pressure, temperature, thickness, material,
etc.
• Computed Cone Half Apex angle now displays on the Status bar
• Option to vary the temperature used to determine the compressive allowables for load
cases involving internal and external pressure
• Overall MDMT now reported in the Vessel Summary report
• Required Blind Flange Thickness at the Gasket location now computed
• A search facility in the Material Database is now included
• The 3D graphics were updated to include showing elevations, element names and
weights
• Added Flange MDMT calculations
Introduction 1-13
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.2 PVElite - User Guide
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.2

• Added Trunnion analysis and WRC analysis capability
• Added Baseplate design for vessel legs
• Added capability to display Nozzle results on the Status bar
• Added capability to display Shell and Flange results on the Status bar
• Added advanced search capabilities to the Material Database
• Improved the look up into the Yield Stress database
• Added Flange MDMT calculations
• Improved the Flange Summary
• Added the capability to print the allowable stress for spherical vessels
• Improved the file saving logic for modified and/or unmodified files

• Added Tailing Lug analysis
• Added Leg Baseplate analysis
• Rectangular top head platform and ladder cases are addressed
• Added IBC 200 Earthquake Code
• Added PD:5500 Annex F nozzle calculations
• Added Dynamic Response Spectrum Earthquake analysis including guidelines per
ASCE -98 and IBC 2000
• Updated ASME 2001 Code
• Added new Natural Frequency Solver
• Updated 3D Graphics
• Improved 2D Graphics
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.3

• Updated ASME 2001 Code
• Added Div 1 and Div 2 to WRC107 Module
• Added Split screen Graphics
• Added Static Head to Nozzle calcs
• Added Pneumatic Hydrotest calculation
• Added Tailing Lug calculations
• Simplified nozzle input for non-radial nozzles
• Improved Summary capability
• Added Thick Shell band for ASME Tubesheets
• Improved Online Registration
1-14 Introduction
&KDSWHU
Overview of the Installation/
Configuration Process
The PVElite program is installed on the system hard disk using the program setup
located on the CD. This installation program has been designed to allow total or par-
tial installations, diagnostic checks of the installation, multi-language support, and
ease of updating. This section will explain the process of running the PVElite setup
application.
For users upgrading to a new version of PVElite, the installation program can be
instructed to place the new files in the same directory where the current version
resides. The new version files will overwrite the old version files where appropriate.
The PVElite program can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. It is recom-
mended that job files be kept in one or more data or project directories separate from
the PVElite installation directory.
The installation process consists of the following steps:
1. Copying files from the CD to the hard disk.
2. Extraction of the PVElite program from these compressed files.
3. Verification of the extracted files.
4. Installation of the External Software Lock drivers
5. Configuring the PVElite program.
System and Hardware Requirements

The specific system resources necessary to run PVElite are listed below:
• Intel Pentium processor (or equivalent)
• Microsoft Windows (95/98/2000, NT 4.0, XP, or higher) Operating System
• 32 Mbytes RAM (recommended)
• 70 Mbytes of disk space
• CD-ROM Drive
Note PVElite is designed for 800x600 resolution (using small fonts) or 1024x768
resolution (using large fonts).
External Software Lock

The External Software Lock (ESL) is the security protection method employed by
COADE. The PVElite program cannot execute unless an appropriate ESL (green or
white) is attached to the PC locally, or to another computer in the network (red ESL).
Overview of the Installation/Configuration Process 2-1

Starting the Installation Procedure PVElite - User Guide
The ESL can be easily attached to the parallel port of the computer in a matter of seconds.
The printer cable should then be attached to the other side of the ESL. The essential
requirement for the successful operation of the ESL is that the port must be a Centronics
compatible DB-25 pin parallel port. This is the IBM PC standard read/write printer port.
The ESL contains the PVElite licensing data, and other client-specific information. This
information includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may
be stored on the ESL depending on the specific program and the specific client.
Starting the Installation Procedure

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program should start up automati-
cally. If so, the user is invited to skip to the section entitled “Installing PVElite”. If not, it
may be started manually using the following procedure.
Select the Windows Desktop Start button, select Settings, then Control Panel (see
below).
Opening Control Panel
2-2 Overview of the Installation/Configuration Process

PVElite - User Guide Starting the Installation Procedure
From the Control Panel select Add/Remove Programs.
Control Panel
This brings up the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. Click on the Install button to start
the installation process.
Add/Remove Programs Dialog
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current loca-
tion of an existing PVElite installation, or a new location.

This starts the installation process by prompting you to place the CD in the CD-ROM
drive and clicking on the Next button. The Add/Remove Programs application searches
for the SETUP.EXE file located on the CD and prompts the user for verification of the file
to be installed. Clicking the Finish button runs the PVElite setup program.
Installing PVElite
The PVElite installation routine is easily navigable by responding to on-screen prompts
and then clicking the Next button. After an opening screen, the user must enter the Serial
Number provided with the CD. This serial number should be kept in a safe place for
future installations.
Entering the PVElite Serial Number
Note The serial number is located on the sticker that is attached to the CD. Do not dis-
card the jewel case!

PVElite - User Guide Starting the Installation Procedure
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current loca-
tion of an existing PVElite installation or a new location.
PVElite Destination Folder

Next the install routine prompts for the type of installation, with a “Full Install” being the
default choice and recommended for most users.
Type of PVElite Installation

The program then prompts for the folder in which to add the program icons.
Icon Folder Selection
The user then specifies the color of the ESL being used. This ensures that the correct driv-
ers get loaded during the installation.
ESL Selection
Note After loading the ESL drivers, the computer will have to be rebooted in order for
them to become operative.

PVElite - User Guide Network Installation / Usage
Network Installation / Usage

COADE products can be run on network file servers as easily as on stand alone worksta-
tions. There are two different installation configurations which must be considered.
COADE software supports three different ESLs from two different manufacturers. Two of
these devices are intended for “local” usage, and are green or white in color. The third
device is the “network” ESL, and is red in color. Do not attempt to put a “local” ESL on a
network server - the system will usually crash.
Software Installation on a Network Drive

The Setup program treats a network drive no different than a local hard drive. Simply
specify the target installation drive and directory and the software will be copied and
expanded accordingly.
Some networks protect installation directories from subsequent modification by users.
This involves setting the access rights in the installation directory to usually “read,”
“share,” and “scan.” Since COADE software utilizes data files specific to the installation
(i.e., accounting, files, material files, etc....) which a user may need to modify, these files
cannot be located in the “protected” installation directory. These data files are located in a
sub-directory named SYSTEM, underneath the installation directory. Users should be
given all access rights to this SYSTEM directory. While the actual name of the program’s
installation directory can be specified by the person installing the software, the SYSTEM
sub-directory name is fixed, and is automatically created. Renaming this sub-directory
will cause the software to fail and generate an error report.
Note The SYSTEM subdirectory is not the primary top level SYSTEM directory con-
taining the network operating system.
Once the software has been installed on the network drive, the installation program
invokes the configuration program which generates a default configuration file. Once the
installation directory is write protected this file cannot be modified. Leaving this file as
read only would insure the configuration file can then only be used as a starting template
to generate other configuration files located in the various user data directories.
ESL Installation on a Network

COADE software programs support two different ESLs, “local” ESLs and “network”
ESLs. Both types of ESLs are intended to be attached to the parallel ports of the applicable
computers. The local ESLs provide the maximum flexibility in using the software, since
these devices can be moved between computers (i.e., between desktops and laptops). If
your computer uses a local ESL, the remainder of this section can be skipped.
The network ESL must be attached to the parallel port of any machine on the network (this
can be a workstation or the file server). The file server is a better location for this ESL,
since it will usually be up and running. If the network ESL is attached to a workstation, the
workstation must be running and/or logged onto the network before anyone can use the
software.
In order for the network to recognize the ESL, a utility program must be loaded on the
machine controlling the ESL. The actual utility used depends on whether the ESL is on the
file server or a workstation and the type of network. The drivers for network ESL usage

Notes on Network ESLs PVElite - User Guide
can be found in the subdirectory ASSIDRV beneath the PVElite program directory. The
documentation files in this subdirectory contain instructions for a variety of networks and
operating systems.
Note Whenever a new version of PVElite is installed in a network environment the new
ESL drivers must be installed on the machine where the red key resides.
Novell File Server ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a Novell file server, the driver HASPSERV.NLM is
needed. This driver should be copied onto the file server, into the top level SYSTEM
directory. Then, the system startup file (AUTOEXEC.NCF) should be modified to include
the command:
LOAD HASPSERV
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming Supervi-
sor rights.
Novell Workstation ESL Installation

If the network ESL is to be located on a workstation, the driver HASPSERV.EXE is
needed. This driver should be copied onto the workstation. The actual location (directory)
on the workstation is not important, as long as the program can be located for startup.
Place the command:
HASPSERV
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the net-
work drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note however, the worksta-
tion must always be up and running for users to access the software.
Windows Server Installation

For a Windows server installation, please refer to the documentation files NETHASP.TXT
and ESL_RED.TXT found in the ASSIDRV subdirectory for network specific instruc-
tions.
Notes on Network ESLs

There are advantages and disadvantages in utilizing a network ESL. The prime advantage
is that many users (up to the number of licenses) have access (from a variety of computers)
to the software on a single server.
The prime disadvantage is that users cannot transfer the ESL between machines in order to
take PVElite home or to another remote location.
Since both a network and several local ESLs may be initialized on the same system (there
is no network specific version of the software), it is suggested that only 70 to 80 percent of
the desired licenses be assigned to a network ESL. The remaining 20 to 30 percent of the
licenses should be assigned to local ESLs. This enables the local ESLs to be moved
between computers, to run the software at remote locations. Alternatively, if all of the

PVElite - User Guide Notes on Network ESLs
licenses are on the ESL, a user must then be logged into the network to access the soft-
ware. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.
Note The number of licenses assigned to a network ESL is not a parameter that can be
modified remotely by COADE software.
Local users running the software from a network drive should run the file "Netuser.bct"
one time to update all locations.

Notes on Network ESLs PVElite - User Guide

&KDSWHU
Tutorial / Master Menu
Program Structure and Control

The basic PVElite hard disk configuration would be structured as follows:
• PVELITE: Directory holding PVElite program
• Project #1: Data files for Project #1
• Project #2: Data files for Project #2
• SYSTEM: Program database & control files
• EXAMPLES: Sample input files
Most files in the data subdirectories are identified by a user-defined filename with a given
extension. The remaining files hold data controlling the program’s operation. These files
and their description follow:
• jobname.PVI PVElite input file
• jobname.TAB temporary results file
• jobname.T80 results file used by the output review processor
• jobname.CCI input file for component analysis
• units.FIL User units file (relating user’s units and program
units)
• *.BIN PVElite Material Database
• UMAT1.BIN Binary file holding the user-defined materials
Tutorial / Master Menu 3-1

A Road Map for PVElite PVElite - User Guide
A Road Map for PVElite

There are many PVElite functions that are not addressed here. This section focuses on the
structure and control of the fundamental units of the program - input, analysis, and output.
By understanding these basic concepts, a firm foundation for understanding PVElite is
assured.
Input, analysis, output; it is as simple as that. Input - collect information required to define
the vessel, its service requirements and its design guidelines. Analysis - translate the user’s
input into appropriate data for the design and analysis algorithms, correctly apply the rules
of appropriate code or standard and generate results. Output - present those results with
explanation in a way that the final report is comprehensive and meaningful.
3-2 Tutorial / Master Menu

PVElite - User Guide The Input Processor
The Input Processor

To define the data necessary for the analysis, the vessel is broken down into its basic ele-
ments—heads, shells, cones, etc. A quick look at the default PVElite input screen (below)
shows the data which defines the element. Except for the “From Node” and “To Node”,
these data are common to all vessel wall thickness calculations. The From and To Nodes
are necessary to assemble the individual elements into the complete vessel and are auto-
matically assigned by PVElite. A complete vessel is required if all dead and live loads are
to be included in the design or analysis. Yet PVElite will run wall thickness calculations
on elements without constructing the entire vessel.
PVElite Completed Input Screen

PVElite is a Windows package and exploits the advantages of the Graphical User Interface
or GUI. Looking at the input screen above, no direct path through the processor is evident;
control can jump to many other points in the program. This style of control is called an
event driven, graphic environment.
This screen has a Main Menu across the top which controls the major routing through the
processor. These items — File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, etc. — may be accessed
directly from this menu at any point in the processor. In a row directly below the Main
Menu appears a series of toolbars and buttons specific to the current screen. In the screen
above, the buttons manipulate the elements (Insert, Delete, Update), specify unique data
(Material, Share), or change the view or input method (Zoom, Layout view). The three
toolbars control the data file, add elements and add details to the current element. These
toolbars and buttons may be relocated on the screen.
The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Basic
Data, a table of the Element Additional Data (when required), and the graphic area which
contains an image of the current status of the entire vessel or the current element. A status
bar runs across the bottom of the screen. The status bar displays an element count, the

The Input Processor PVElite - User Guide
position and orientation of the current element, and quick internal pressure calculations for
the current element.
How are the menu selections made, how are the buttons pushed, how is the data entered?
Most operations are obvious when using a mouse; simply point to the item and click the
left mouse button1 to open drop down menus from the menu line, activate the button com-
mands, pick a tool or move control to one of the screen areas. All buttons and toolbars
have fly-out definitions which are activated when the mouse rests on the button.
When a mouse click occurs in the data area(s), the Tab key moves the highlight (and con-
trol) through its input cells. In most element data areas, the Enter key has no function; it is
the tab key which moves the cursor to the next input cell. The exception is at “combo
boxes”2 where a click on the arrow will display the available choices and a down arrow
will step through the choices. An example of the combo box is found on the Input screen
shown above where the element is chosen from a list of available types. Throughout the
program, the [F1] key shows the help screen for the highlighted data item. Once familiar
with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands will provide
the most efficient navigation through the program.
Note The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic.
Note Combo boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
Main Menu
Toolbars and Buttons (Default)
“Element Basic Data” Area
Graphic Display Area
“Element Additional Data” Area

(If required)
Status Bar
Layout of the Input Screen
When the graphics area of the Input screen is active a few more keys are available. No
special highlight will appear but the string “PgUp/PgDn/Home/End” will appear at the
bottom graphics area. This indicates these keys are now active. The image in the graphics

PVElite - User Guide The Input Processor
area shows the current state of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the
details on these elements. One element is highlighted. This is the current element and the
element data (Element Basic Data and Element Additional Data) shown on the screen
defines this element. By pressing PgUp or PgDn, the highlight changes from one element
to the next through the vessel. Home and End keys are pressed to move the highlight to the
first and last elements in the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button on the element will also
highlight it. Once an element is highlighted the detail information for that element may be
accessed. With the mouse, simply click the right mouse button for the existing detail
image to be displayed. To add details to the current element, simply click on the appropri-
ate detail on the toolbar and provide the necessary data.
Detail Pop-up Screen
Once the control of this screen is understood, all the remaining input processors will
present no difficulties as they all have the same control structure with mouse and keyboard
commands.

Other Input Processors PVElite - User Guide
Other Input Processors

The other menu items listed under input indicate the other types of data that may be neces-
sary for the analysis.
Input Menu
Other than the Vessel Data there are four other categories of vessel input which must be
addressed - component analysis data, report headings, the guidelines for the vessel design
Enter
or analysis, and a definition of the live (wind and seismic) loads. These input processors
Vessel Data
are entered through Input on the Main Menu. The drop down menu here can be used to
switch between the Build and Define mode and also enter the Heading definition and the
Global processor. The Design/Analysis Constraints are important here as this is where the
overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.
Finished thickness is required input for each vessel element but the user may allow the
program to increase element thickness so that each element passes the requirements for
internal pressure, external pressure, and the combined loads of pressure, dead and live
loads. Remember that the status bar lists internal pressure information about the current
element including the required thickness. A switch is also available to locate stiffener
rings on the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements.
The Component Analysis Data option allows the user to enter data and analyze without
building a vessel. These are COADE’s remaining CodeCalc analysis modules some of
which cannot be incorporated directly in PVElite. CodeCalc, COADE’s popular vessel
component analysis package is included in PVElite.

PVElite - User Guide Other Input Processors
Component Analysis Data screen:
Component
Analysis
Processor
Report
Headings Report Headings screen:

Other Input Processors PVElite - User Guide
Design / Analysis Constraints screen:
Design/
Analysis
Constraints
Live Load Data screen:
Enter Live
Load Data

PVElite - User Guide Error Checking
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor will create an error message if the user tries to specify a nozzle 20
feet from the bottom of a 10 foot shell element. Not all pieces of data can be confirmed on
input. For that reason, a general error processor is executed prior to the analysis. This error
processor can be run in a stand-alone mode as well. The error checker may be accessed
from the pull down menu under Analyze. In addition to the notes that are presented on the
screen during error checking, these error messages also appear in the output report acces-
sible through the output review processor.

Analysis PVElite - User Guide
Analysis
PVElite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The pro-
gram also provides direct design capabilities in which the wall thickness of individual ele-
ments are increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure and
longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program
changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a Design/Analysis Con-
straint specification under Design Modification. (See Design/Analysis Constraints screen
above). A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags for “Select t for ...” are all
unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program will automatically step up the
wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. The user’s input in the resulting output
report is automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addi-
tion to wall thickness, a fourth flag can be set - “Set Stiffener Rings?”. In this case, rather
than increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the
external pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings
are added to the model input for this analysis.
PVElite will analyze each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal
and external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules or
PD:5500 rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to
four categories of vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel
attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake.
These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and
hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce
the default set of 12 load cases that are found in the Design/Analysis Contraints processor.
For each load case, PVElite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress around the cir-
cumference of the elements and compare these values to the allowable stress for the mate-
rial, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the vessel wall exceed the design limits,
PVElite will proceed according to the design modification settings in the input.
Once the program finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program
design modifications. If any data was changed by the program, PVElite automatically re-
runs the complete analysis to review the impact of the changes.
There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These con-
trols, however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job.
Instead, these seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the
Data subdirectory. These controls are viewed and modified through the Tools item on the
Main Menu. Here, select Configuration to display the setup parameters dialogue.

PVElite - User Guide Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Setup Parameters and DXF Options screens:

Output Review & Report Generation PVElite - User Guide
Output Review & Report Generation

Output is stored in a binary file having the same name as the input file but with the exten-
sion of “.T80”.
Once the output file is created, it can be examined through the Review item under the Out-
put option from the Main Menu. Each analysis module creates its own report in the output
file. The reports of interest are selected with the mouse and can be sent to the screen, a
printer or a file. Most of the reports take the form of tables with the rows related to the ele-
ments and the columns holding the values such as thickness, MAWP, and stress.
PVElite Output Review Screen
Following is a list of some reports available from PVElite:

Step 0 Vessel Element Error Checking
Cover Cover Sheet
Title Title Page
Step 1 Vessel Input Echo
Step 2 XY Coordinate Calculations
Step 3 Internal Pressure Calculations
Step 4 External Pressure Calculations
Step 5 Weight of Elements & Details
Step 6 ANSI Flange MAWP
Step 7 Natural Frequency Calculations
Step 8 Forces & Moments Applied to Vessel
Step 9 Wind Load Calculation
Step 10 Earthquake Load Calculation
Step 11 Wind and Earthquake Shear, Bending
Step 12 Wind Deflection
Step 13 Longitudinal Stress Constants
Step 14 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses
Step 15 Longitudinal Stresses Due to Load Components
Step 16 Stress Due to Combined Loads
Step 17 Basering Calculations
Step 18 Center of Gravity Calculation
Cone 1-N Conical Sections
Nozl 1-N Nozzle Calculations
Step 21 Nozzle Summary
PVElite - User Guide Output Review & Report Generation
Screen Display for the Internal Pressure Report:

Design and Analysis of Vessel Details PVElite - User Guide
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details

At this point in the analysis the vessel details have been defined only so that their weights
could be included in vessel calculations. With the structural analysis of the vessel com-
plete and the wall thickness set, vessel details can be evaluated.
To access the Input Processor for these vessel details, use the pulldown menu under Input
and Select Component Analysis Data. This will bring up the processor from which the
component is selected and defined.
Component Selection Screen from the Component Pulldown menu:

PVElite - User Guide Design and Analysis of Vessel Details
WRC 107 Input Screen (by clicking on WRC 107 in Component Pulldown Menu):
WRC 107 On-screen Results:

Main Menu PVElite - User Guide
Main Menu
PVElite always starts with the Vessel Data Input Screen. Across the top of this screen is a
line of items which is called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions
of the program. This chapter reviews the functions available in each of these menu items.
The PVElite Vessel Data screen has the following structure:
Main Menu
Toolbars and Buttons (Default)
“Element Basic Data” Area
Graphic Display Area
“Element Additional Data” Area

(If required)
Status Bar
The items in the Main Menu, File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, View, ESL,
and Help, may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character
while pressing the [Alt] key. For example, the Output processor may be selected by press-
ing [Alt]+ [O].

PVElite - User Guide File Menu
File Menu
File Menu
The File options control the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected. The
file manager is described in the chapter titled Miscellaneous Processors. The following
options are available from the Main Menu item - File:
New
• New - Starts a new file.
File New Dialog

File Menu PVElite - User Guide
• Open—Opens a previously created file.
Open
File Open Dialog
Save • Save—Causes the current file to be saved in its present condition.
Save Dialog
• Save As—Allows the user to either save a file that has not been named or to save the
current file under another name.
Print • Print—Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a printer.
• Print Preview—Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above)
• Print Setup—Brings up the standard Windows printer setup screen.
• Exit—Allows the user to exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user
a last opportunity to save any modification to the current job.
• Export
• Dump Graphics to PCX...—Rather than sending the vessel image directly to
the printer, the image may be stored in a standard PCX format file. This file
can be printed at a later time or added to other documents. The name of the
created PCX file will default to the name of the current job with the extension
of PCX, e.g. JOBNAME.PCX.
• Dump Screen to PCX...—As with “Dump Graphics to PCX File...,” this
option will build a PCX file for later manipulation and printing. In this case,
the entire contents of the screen are saved in the file.
PVElite - User Guide File Menu
• Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF file

The File Menu will also list the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be
opened with a mouse click.

Input Menu PVElite - User Guide
Input Menu
Input Menu
The Input options controls the general operations of PVElite program input processes. The
following options are available:
Enter
• Vessel Data—This is the main input processor of the program, which allows the user
Vessel Data
to input and edit the element data (shell, heads, body flange, skirt and cone) and the
detail data (saddle, platform, packing, liquid, insulation, lining, ring, nozzle, tray, leg,
lug, weight, force and moment). Also in this option the user can add, delete, insert ele-
ments and details. The user can click on an element’s graphic field to bring this ele-
ment’s data to the screen for further editing. The user can right click on an element for
further editing. The ‘Individual Detail’ button on the Detail toolbar also allows the
user to edit the detail data. This processor is discussed later in this section. See the
Component
Element Data and the Detail Data chapters for more information.
Analysis
Processor • Component Analysis Data—This option includes those (CodeCalc) processors which
are not integrated into the main vessel analysis. These processors are described in
Chapters 9 thorough 28.
Report
• Report Headings—This option allows the user to input and edit a three line heading,
Headings
which will be placed in the first three lines of each report page. It will also print on the
title page, which will be the first page of the report.
• Design/Analysis Constraints—This option allows the user to input and edit the global
Design/ data, which includes the general vessel description, design control data, and the struc-
Analysis tural load analyses to be performed. This is where ASME Section VIII Division 1,
Constraints

PVElite - User Guide Input Menu
Division 2, or PD:5500 is specified as the design code. If the user does not select this
option, the program will set the default data.
Design/Analysis Constraints Dialog

Enter
Live Load
• Live Load Data—This option switches to the wind and seismic data edit mode where
Data
the wind loads and seismic loads are defined through the specification of the appropri-
ate load parameters.
Live Load Data Dialog

Analyze Menu PVElite - User Guide
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
The Analyze options cause program to quit the input process and enter the analysis pro-
cess. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename, then
process the analysis. The following options are available:
• Analyze—This option quits the input process and begins the error checking process.
After finishing the error checking, if no error is detected, the program will implement
the analysis process. A description of the PVElite analysis is found in Chapter 7 of this
user’s guide. The output from the analysis processor, whether error messages or
results, may be examined by the Review function in Output. Once an analysis is com-
pleted, the program will automatically switch to the Review processor.
• Error Check Only—This option will only process the error checking, and will not
implement the analysis process. The error report may be examined in the Review
option found in the Output item from this Main Menu.

PVElite - User Guide Output Menu
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output options allow the user to review the analysis results, and print the graphics of
the vessel. The following options are available under Output:
• Review—This option allows the user to review the analysis results of the current job,
if these results are already available.
• Review the DXF file.

Tools Menu PVElite - User Guide
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools options control utility processors. Options that are displayed in the menu with
‘...’ cause a window to appear when selected. The configuration option allows the user to
define a variety of system variables for the program:
Configuration Menu
The Configuration Option lets some specific program computation control parameters be
set. These controls let you set some options in some programs that control the results of
some computations. Following is a description of the options:
Print Water Volume in Gallons?
Normally the volumes computed by the program are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The pro-
gram will use cubic units if the default value if it is not checked.

Use AD-540.2 sketch b and not sketch d for normal?

This setup parameter is used for the computation of the vertical thickness limit. The for-
mulas for computing these limits are found in paragraph AD-540.2 of the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 2. Sketch (b) of Fig. Ad-540.1 shows an integral connection with a
smooth radius. Figure (d) shows a similar geometry with an alternative pad plate and fillet.
By default PVElite uses sketch (d) to compute the vertical thickness limit. However if you
would like to use sketch (b) then check this directive.
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size?
If you would like to have your thicknesses rounded to the nearest 1/16 of an inch (if you
are in English units) or the nearest 1mm if you are in MM units, then check this directive.
The program will increase the thickness of an element if you specify for it to do so in the
Design/Analysis Constraints and the element thickness is inadequate.
If this directive is not checked then no thickness rounding will be performed.
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness?
In many cases pressure vessels are designed and built long before the piping system is
attached to them. This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. If this field is
checked, then your minimum nozzle thickness (trn) will be the maximum of:
trn = max (.134, trn for internal pressure ) <=Nps 18
trn = max (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) > Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some
additional metal to work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels
are designed for.
Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input.
If you do so, that will override this calculation.
Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles?
The Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement
calculations when small nozzles are involved. The Code states:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforce-
ment other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this parameter is not checked, then the nozzle
reinforcement areas and MAWP’s will not be computed.
Print Equations and Substitutions?
By default PVElite will provide you with formulas and substitutions for internal and exter-
nal pressure calculations. If you do not want these formulas and substitutions, do not
check this box.
Increase Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement?

For Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-39(d)(2) provides a consideration for bypass-
ing reinforcement of a single opening of a flat end connection. This effectively increases

the required thickness of the blind flange cover. Please note that this can only be used if
there is only 1 nozzle located in the blind flange.
Use OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick?

By default PVElite uses the ID basis on which to perform Zick analysis calculations. In
general, this is more conservative than using the OD. However if you wish to use the OD
as the basis, then check this box. Checking this box will change the “r” value used in the
stress calculation equations.
Allowable Tower Deflection

This setup directive applies to vertical tower geometries. By default PVElite uses a criteria
of 6 inches per 100 feet for the allowable tower deflection. If your design specification
requires a different value of allowable deflection then enter it here.
Wind Shape Factor

Based on the wind design specification, PVElite will compute the wind shape factor. If
your design requirement calls for a specific value for the shape factor that does not corre-
spond to the calculated value, then enter that number here. For cylindrical structures it is
typically 0.7.
Do not use the bolt correction factor.

For the design of heat exchanger flanges and tubesheets, TEMA (like Taylor-Forge) pro-
vide a correction factor when the actual bolt spacing exceeds the allowable bolt spacing.
The correction factor is then multiplied by the moment to design a thicker flange. The use
of this term is very standard in industry and is used in other pressure vessel design Codes
such as PD:5500.
However, ASME Section VIII does not specifically address this subject. Thus, for a pure
flange design per Appendix 2, there is no bolt-spacing correction factor. If you do not wish
to use the factor, then check this box.
The default is to use the bolt space correction factor.
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only.

As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is mandatory. This mandatory
revision includes changes to the material properties of many materials used for Division 1
vessel construction found in Section 2 Part D. Namely, the allowable stresses were
increased in certain ranges. PV Elite contains 2 databases of material properties. The
default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress database. If you are re-rating
an older vessel to the pre 99 addenda and would like to use the older material allowables,
then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked
before any vessel modelling occurs. Other design codes will not be affected by this direc-
tive.
Use Code Case 2260/2261.

Use of this code case calculates required thickness of elliptical and torispherical heads.
The required thickness is less than that of the equations in UG-32 or Appendix 1 for these
heads.

Use EigenSolver
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than 1 method. The tra-
ditional method is to use the analysis technique of Freese or Rayleigh-Ritz. For the skirt
supported freestanding structure, this method provides acceptable results. When the sup-
port configuration is not the skirt/base type such as legs, lugs, or intermediate skirt, this
analysis may not provide accurate results.
To solve this problem generically, PVElite has a natural frequency solver that uses numer-
ical methods to solve the general equations motion. Namely, the program must solve the
following: [ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}={0}. Which for the general case is a set of n homogenous
(right hand side equal to zero, in this case abs[ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}=0. This requires an iter-
ative solution.
After building a stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrix of the model with appropriate bound-
ary conditions (anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, at support lugs etc.) the program can
extract a number of modes that is meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem,
particularly the modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic frequency Eigenso-
lution method, PVElite can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit
neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration codes. The natu-
ral frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic method. For PVElite
files earlier than 4.3, the default is to use the Freese method. The default version for 4.3
and later is to use the EigenSolver. Check or uncheck this box as necessary.
• Create/Review Units—Creates a custom set of user units.
Create/Review Units Dialog
Edit/Add Materials—This option allows the user to create and edit a user defined material
in the program’s material database. The screen appears as follows:
Edit/Add Materials Dialog
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
• Calculator—This option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.

PVElite - User Guide Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
• Crc Check—This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
• Build Version Check—This option checks the revision level of the PVElite execut-
able files.

View Menu PVElite - User Guide
View Menu
View Menu
The View Option allows the user to specify the toolbars to be displayed. The following
options are available:
• Standard Bar—
• Element Bar—PVElite allows the user to create a vessel with the default data by sim-
ply clicking an icon on the Element Toolbar. The following options are available:
• Cylinder—Causes a cylindrical shell to be added to the end of the vessel under con-
struction.
• Ellipse—Adds an elliptical head to the end of the vessel.
• Torisphere—Adds a torispherical head to the end of the vessel.
• Sphere—Adds a spherical head to the end of the vessel.
• Cone—Adds a conical head or shell element to the end of the vessel.
• Welded Flat—Adds a flat head to the end of the vessel.
• Body Flange—Adds a body flange to the end of the vessel.
• Skirt—Skirt element with optional Basering.
• Detail Bar—By clicking an icon on the Detail toolbar, certain details such as stiffen-
ers, nozzles, forces, moments, platforms, liquid, lining, etc. can be added to the cur-
rent element when applicable.

PVElite - User Guide View Menu
• Utility Bar—
• Insert—inserts a new element after the current element.

• Delete—deletes the current element.
• Update—updates the vessel graphic.
• Share—allows data to be shared between several vessel elements.
• Flip—flips the current element’s orientation.
• Mat—accesses the material database.
• Zoom—allows the user to switch the vessel graphics display schemes.
Pressing this button causes the current element (plus details) plus the par-
tial of the previous element, if it exists, and the partial of the next element,
if it exists, to be drawn to the graphic area.
• Plan / Layout View—draws the head or cylinder from the top showing the
orientation of the nozzles and their diameter limits.
• Auxiliary Bar—
• Pipe Properties—This option will access the database of pipe dimensions.

By clicking OK, the current diameter and thickness will be replaced with
the current selection.
• List Dialog—
The list dialog allows the editing of some types of vessel details. One fea-
ture of the list is that the location of the detail can be specified from the
datum position. To use the list dialog, select the type of detail to edit by

pressing its tab. Then simply enter the data as necessary for each cell. If
the list is empty, then press the plus button (+) to add a row.
The entry of the “From Node” is optional. The program will assign that
value automatically. The description is a required mandatory input. If it is
not entered, the program will treat that row as if it did not exist and that
data will be lost. All of the other data must be entered as required.
Rows of data can be duplicated from on row to the next. Click on the list-
ing number of the item to copy. That row should turn black (selected).
Next copy the data to the clipboard by pressing [ctrl-c]. Next paste it to a
blank line by using [ctrl-v]. Next change any data that might be different
for that detail.
• PVElite 3D Viewer—Pressing this button starts the PVElite 3D viewer.
• Status Bar—
• Split—Allows the user to split the screen by moving the line left or right.
• Input Bar—Allows selection of the various options as described earlier in this chapter.
• Analyze Bar—Allows the user to analyze the current model, review previous results,
error-check the model, or review the previously created DXF file.
Using the 3D Viewer

The viewer is started by pressing the blue sphere icon on the PVElite Auxilliary toolbar. A
vessel model should be open and ready for viewing.
The PVElite 3D viewer is a stand alone application that can render any PVElite input file
showing the actual vessel geometry in 3 dimensions. In addition to showing the outer sur-
faces, the model can also be viewed in wire frame and hidden line mode. Different shading
modes such as flat shaded, Gourard and Phong are all supported. This program is capable
of viewing more that one file at a time making this a multi-document application. Other
operations such as panning, zooming and model rotation are also supported. Help is also
available in the application by pressing the F1 key or by selecting Help under the Help
Menu Option.
Listed below is an explanation of the buttons (icons) on the toolbar.
Open Open—Open a new file

Copy Copy—Copies the contents of the current window to the clipboard. This image can

then be pasted into an application such as Microsoft Word. If this option is used,
we suggest changing the background color to white instead of the default back-
ground color of black.
Print Print—Print the graphic image
Reset View—Put the model back into its original location when the program
Reset View
started
Front Predefined Views—Clicking one of these buttons changes the current view to
Zoom
front, back, top, bottom, left, or right view.
Extents Zoom Extents—Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window.
Zoom Zoom Window—When this operator is selected, use the mouse to draw a window
Window around the portion of the model that you want to zoom in on. This is a rubber band
zoom. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Rotate
Rotate—This operator allows the model to be rotated using the mouse. Click the
Pan right mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the model.
Pan—The pan operator allows the model to be translated in the direction the
Zoom mouse is being dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it down while
Camera moving the mouse will also pan the model.
Zoom Camera—This operator zooms in or out. Press this button then press the left
Select by
Window mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to zoom in or out.
Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Select by Window—This is a rubber band selection of objects. Once objects are
selected they can be translated and rotated.
Select by
Click Select by Click—Allows the selection of objects by group for further manipula-
tion. This is the cursor icon. Use ctrl + click to select more than one object.
Insert Insert Cutting Plane—Click on this button and then click anywhere in the window.
Cutting
Plane
A cutting plane will then appear. The plane can then be rotated after it has been
selected with the selection tool (cursor icon). The rotating grid will then expose the
various layers of the vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned
Translate off once the view is set.
Selection
Translate Selection—Moves the items in the current selection away from the main
Rotate model.
Selection Rotate Selection—Rotates the current selection in its own 3D space.
Insert Text Insert Text—Add comments to the model. These comments are for the session
only and will not be saved. However, if the graphic is printed, the comments will
be printed out as well.
Edit
Edit Properties—This option allows visibility of vessel details to be turned on or
Properties
off. Additionally, the model colors can also be set here. After being set, the pro-

gram will remember them in between sessions. This option is also available by
right clicking on the model window and selecting properties. The properties dialog
is shown below:
You can also add an elements transparency attribute by clicking the Change This Item’s
Color button and checking the transparency option on the color dialog.

The floating toolbar show in the window above is produced by right clicking in the win-
dow. These menus allow the model to be manipulated. Here it is seen that the grid used to
slice the model has been turned off. Within this menu structure it is possible to change the
shading algorithm, alter the appearance of surfaces and to change the selection level of
various entities. The Options command brings up the Options (Properties) dialog.

Here some of the internals have been selected and translated out of the model. The viewer
is a very powerful and useful processor. One of the greatest benefits is its ability to show
interference between vessel details like rings, nozzles, platforms, and others.

This is a wire frame view of the 3D model. This option is available under the Render
Mode option. After viewing the model close the 3D viewer to return to PVElite.

ESL Menu PVElite - User Guide
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities which interact with the External Software Lock.
The options are as follows:
• Show Data—This option will display the data stored on the ESL.
• Phone Update—This option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
• Generate Fax Codes—This option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
• Enter Fax Authorization Codes—Choose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL

PVElite - User Guide Help Menu
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
• Tip of the Day—Provides tips for running PVElite.
• Help Topics—Starts the help facility.
• About PVElite—Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel
for technical support, and provides a link to COADE’s Web Site.
• Online Registration—Register this product electronically with COADE.
• Online Documentation—View this manual online.
• Foundation 3D Help—Review the foundation 3D interface specification.

Quick Start with PVElite PVElite - User Guide
Quick Start with PVElite

Entering PVElite
Before starting PVElite, most users will collect the necessary data for the vessel design or
analysis. PVElite breaks the vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads,
shells, cones, body flanges, and/or a skirt—and the components on these elements. Vessels
are defined one element to the next - from bottom to top for vertical vessels and from left
to right for horizontal vessels. Collecting data to define these elements before starting the
program is not required but it will make the most efficient use of the designer’s time. Typ-
ical input items include actual or proposed values for vessel material, inside diameter,
operating temperatures and pressures, wind and seismic site data, nozzle and ring location
to name a few. If necessary, the input processor can be terminated at any time and restarted
later if any missing data need be collected. With the program’s graphic display of the ves-
sel input, it is easy to recall the current state of an unfinished model or identify where data
is missing or incomplete.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
PVElite will start with a Vessel Input Screen for the job currently called “Untitled.”
Defining the Basic Vessel

PVElite displays the Element Basic Data, an empty graphic area, three tool bars (File Han-
dling, Elements, and Details) and a button bar. Items which cannot be used are grayed out.
Vertical vessels are built bottom to top and horizontal vessels are built left to right. It is not
necessary to build an entire vessel if only thickness for pressure is desired. Before the first
element can be placed on the screen, the Element Basic Data must be set. Start with Inside
Diameter as both the node numbers and the Element Type will be set by using the element
tool bar. Once the Basic Data is entered, elements are quickly assembled one after another
by simply clicking on the Element tool bar and making any changes to the Basic Data. The
complete vessel is created from the following elements (in their tool bar order):
• Shell
• Elliptical head

PVElite - User Guide Quick Start with PVElite
• Torispherical head
• Spherical head
• Cone
• Welded Flat head
• Body flange
• Skirt
If the vessel begins with a skirt element it will be a vertical vessel. Both vertical vessels on
legs and horizontal vessels would start with a head element. If that first head element is
improperly oriented for the vessel in mind (horizontal or vertical), simple click on the
FLIP button to correct the orientation. Once the second element is added, the vessel can no
longer be flipped between horizontal and vertical. Later, if heads, body flanges or cone
elements show incorrect orientation, use the FLIP button to fix them. From Nodes and To
Nodes are automatically assigned by the program; they start with node 10 and are incre-
mented by 10’s throughout the model. The element data set at the beginning of the session
carries forward from one element to the next. Any data changes on the last element will
carry forward onto any new elements to be added. The element data displayed belongs to
the highlighted element in the vessel image. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and
displayed element by clicking on the element of interest. The Page Up and Page Down
keys can also be used to scroll through the vessel elements.
Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to change an
item through several elements. Say, for example, the circumferential weld joint efficiency
for the skirt (from node 10 to 20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not changed to 1.0 on the
bottom head as it was created, this (incorrect) value is carried from one element to the next
in the Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (say, From Node 50 To Node 60). In this
situation, it is easiest to change the data on the bottom head element (20 to 30) and then
use the SHARE button to “share” this item through the elements in the list with “From
Node” 30 through “From Node” 50. Certain data is automatically “shared”. Inside diame-
ter, for example is automatically changed for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to
the element where the change occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immedi-
ately appear on the vessel image. To refresh the image click on the Update button.

Adding Details PVElite - User Guide
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calcula-
tions but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as ele-
ment details. Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as
details on the various elements. PVElite will calculate the weight of each of these items
and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs are
also used to locate support points on the vessel—important data for load calculations.
Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight
(make current) the element which will hold the detail and click on the appropriate
DETAIL button. Allowing the cursor to rest on the Tool Bar Button will produce a fly out
definition of the button. Select the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. Use
the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested data.
Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
Help Screen ([F1]) for a Nozzle Detail:

PVElite - User Guide Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image

At any point during the input process a standard PCX file with the vessel image is avail-
able through the Output item on the Menu Bar. This file can then be incorporated into
reports or printed directly (on all printers) through most Microsoft Windows™ packages
with graphics capabilities (such as Microsoft’s Word for Windows™ or Paintbrush™).
Examples of the graphic dump and screen dump appear below following the illustration of
the pull-down menu under File.
The vessel graphic may also be sent directly to the printer using the Print command under
the File Menu.
File Menu:
Graphics dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:

Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image PVElite - User Guide
Screen dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:

PVElite - User Guide Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints

Although default values allow the analysis to proceed, other data should be set before the
analysis continues. These data are the required live loads & design constraints and the
optional vessel identification and report headings. These data are accessed and entered
through the Input item on the Menu Bar. The pull down menu under Input shows the
Report Headings, Design/Analysis Constraints, and Live Load Data along with the vessel
and component analysis data. The heading input allows the specification of three lines of
data which will appear at the top of each page in the printed output. The heading data also
includes title page entry which will appear at the beginning of the input echo report.
Clicking on Design/Analysis Contraints on the Input pull-down menu will present a screen
that shows four data areas - Design Data, Design Modification, Load Case and Nozzle
Design Modification.
Design Data includes vessel identification along with items which will affect the design
and analysis of the vessel; items such as type of hydrostatic testing and degree of radio-
graphic examination appear here. It is important to note that this is where the design code
is set - Division 1, Division 2, or PD:5500.
The Design Modification area holds four flags which control the redesign of the vessel
should the user-entered wall thickness be insufficient for the analyzed loads. If a box is
checked, the program will increase the element’s wall thickness so that it meets or exceeds
the requirements for that load category. There are four boxes for three load types - one box
for internal pressure, two boxes for external pressure (either increase the wall thickness or
locate stiffener rings along the vessel to satisfy the buckling requirements), and one box
for the variety of structural loads which develop longitudinal stresses in the vessel wall.
The program provides the option of rounding up a required thickness to a nominal value
(such as the next 1/16 inch or 1 mm). (Use the Configuration item from the Utility menu
on the Menu Bar.
The third area, Load Case, shows twelve default structural load cases for the analysis.
These twelve cases cover the extent of structural loads on the vessel wall. Each case con-
tains a pressure component (axial)1, a weight component (both axial and bending), and a
live load component (bending). The axial stresses are combined with the bending stresses
to produce a total stress in the vessel wall. Both tensile and compressive stresses are com-
pared to their allowable limits. Refer to the table and screen image below for a definition
of terms used in the Load Case input.
Note These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall
thickness requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD:5500. Here, inter-
nal and hydrostatic pressures are used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in
the vessel wall and the external pressure a similar compressive stress in the wall.
The fourth area, Nozzle Design Modification, is used to set the overall pressure require-
ments for the nozzles on this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure -
new and cold (MAP nc) case in the nozzle checks. There is also a button on this screen -
Install Option. Clicking on this button will produce a screen which allows the user to spec-

Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints PVElite - User Guide
ify where certain vessel details will be added - either at the fabrication shop or in the field.
This data is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and operating conditions.
Pressure Weight Live Load
NP - No Pressure EW - Empty Weight WI - Wind
IP - Internal Pressure OW - Operating Weight EQ - Earthquake
EP - External Pressure HW - Hydrostatic Weight HI - Wind at Hydrostatic

Weight conditions
HP - Hydrostatic Pressure CW – Empty Weight NO CA HE - Earthquake at

Hydrostatic Weight
conditions
VF - Vortex Shedding Filled
VO - Vortex Shedding
Operating
VE - Vortex Shedding
Empty
WE - Wind Bending Empty

New and Cold
WF - Wind Bend Filled New

and Cold
CW - Axial Weight Stress

New and Cold
Design/Analysis Contraints Screen:
Wind and earthquake information is supplied through the Live Load Data Screen. PVElite
generates the live loads based on the criteria established by one of four standards - the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASC), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the
(Canadian) National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads
may also be specified directly by the user as a wind pressure profile. PVElite references

PVElite - User Guide Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints
these codes for live loads only. The ASME Section VIII or PD 5500 rules apply for all
other calculations. The screen below shows the data required for the default codes.
PVElite will use these criteria to set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment
on each element of the vessel.
Live Load Data Screen:
Once the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for
error processing and analysis.

Running the Analysis PVElite - User Guide
Running the Analysis

The pull down menu under Analyze on the Menu Bar shows two options - Error Check
Only and Analyze. Use Error Check Only immediately after any questionable data is
entered.
Analyze will automatically perform the Error Check before the analysis starts. Comments
from the Error Check may be examined through the Review function under the Output
item on the Menu Bar (discussed below). Of course errors must be corrected before the
analysis can proceed.
At each step through the analysis, PVElite will display intermediate calculations of inter-
est to the user. For example, during the internal pressure calculations, the program will
pause after displaying the entered wall thickness and required wall thickness for each ele-
ment. At this point the user may move to the next step, continue non-stop through the rest
of the analysis, or terminate the analysis. If any Design Modifications were set (e.g. Select
Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure), PVElite will reset the thickness to the necessary
value and perfect these increased thicknesses in all output reports and in all other calcula-
tions. For example, if the user-entered wall thickness of 1/2 inch is insufficient for the load
and the design flag is turned on, the program will calculate the required thickness (say, 5/8
inch) and replace the user-entered input value (1/2) in the output report with the calculated
required thickness (here, 5/8). The original model data is not changed by the program.
PVElite will check the element wall thicknesses for the various pressure cases (internal,
external, and hydrostatic) and then assemble the axial and bending loads to construct each
load case defined in the Global Design data. PVElite will calculate the longitudinal stress
on both sides of the vessel (e.g. both “windward” and “leeward” for loads with wind) and
compare the calculated stresses with the allowable stresses, both tensile and compressive.
PVElite will display the (“windward” or “leeward” side) stress which is closest by ratio to
the allowable limit, again either tension or compression.
Once the analysis is complete, the Review processor is displayed on the screen.
The Vessel Analysis Screen:

PVElite - User Guide Reviewing the Results
Reviewing the Results

The PVElite output is stored in a binary data file which requires interpretation by a proces-
sor. In PVElite this processor is called Output. Output is invoked at the end of the analysis
and may also be accessed directly from the Output item on the Menu Bar. Review lists
every report contained in the output from input echo through stress reports. One or more
reports are selected by highlighting their titles though mouse clicks. Reports can be
reviewed on the screen or sent to a printer or file by using the appropriate tool bar button.
Review Output Screen:
Internal Pressure Calculation Report as it appears on the screen:

Analyzing Individual Vessel Components (Details) PVElite - User Guide
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components (Details)

PVElite provides for the analysis of a variety of vessel components that are not included in
the overall vessel analysis: Appendix Y Flange, Floating Heads, Lifting Lug, Pipe & Pad,
WRC 107 and 297, Thin Joints, Thick Joints, ASME Tubesheets, TEMA Tubesheets,
Halfpipe Jackets, Large Openings, and Rectangular Vessels. To enter the component data
select Component Analysis Data from the Input Menu. On the Component Screen select a
component type from the Component Menu and build the input for the analysis. Each
component, once entered, may be analyzed and reviewed by selecting Analyze from the
Tools Menu.
Component Analysis Menu:

PVElite - User Guide Analyzing Individual Vessel Components (Details)
Shell / Head:

Analyzing Individual Vessel Components (Details) PVElite - User Guide
Shell / Head on screen results:

PVElite - User Guide DXF File Generation Option
DXF File Generation Option

As of Version 4.00 PVElite provides an option to write out Data Interchange Files (3 all
together). This type of file is termed a DXF file. The DXF file is a text file that contains
commands for generating a 2D CAD drawing of the vessel. This drawing is on a one to
one scale and the border and text are scaled by the diameter conversion constant and the
scale factor generated by the program or typed in be the user. Many popular drawing pro-
grams such as AutoCad ® and MicroStation ® read and process these files. The DXF files
produced by PVElite are release 12 compatible. Any version of AutoCad including release
12 and after, should be able to read the DXF file.
Three files will be produced: the vessel drawing, the nozzle schedule, and the Bill of
Material. The files will be written in the directory where the input file for the vessel file is
located. These files are written at the end of the program’s execution. Please note that
nearly every individual has his/her own way of drafting. A conscious effort was made not
to be too specific. This approach allows the drafter to take the vessel drawing file and edit
it as necessary.
Setting Up the Required Parameters

In order for PVElite to generate these files, you must instruct it to do so. This is accom-
plished by pressing the red CAD Icon on the auxiliary toolbar, its look like a red letter A.
Optionally, you can use the menu option File->Export->Generate DXF File to set this
option. If the scale factor is not set the DXF options dialog will appear prompting for the
scale factor and any other necessary options. These options should be entered after the
vessel has been completely modeled. This is due to the fact that the scaling factor is based
on the overall height/length of the vessel. It is best to check the scaling factor at the con-
clusion of the data input and before the model is analyzed. The DXF options are available
under the Tools->Configuration menu. This is a tabbed dialog. Click the second tab and
set the options as necessary. The following options are in the dialog.
Create a Default Border—Checking this box instructs the program to put a border around
the drawing. The border style differs based on the border size. You can create your own
border styles. The borders are located in the PVElite\System subdirectory. They are named
ANSI_A.txt and so fourth. These text files are essentially the core of ACAD Release 12
Dxf files. See user border creation instructions below.
Create a Nozzle Schedule—Check this to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule
contains information pertaining to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number
and the necessity of reinforcing.
Create a Bill of Material—Causes the program to generate a Bill of Material for the major
components of the vessel including shells, heads, conical sections etc.
OD Lines Shown Only—Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for
the major shell sections. If you do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.
Show Dimensions—If you would like tail dimensions for the major shell courses, then
check this box. The element diameters and thicknesses are shown in the BOM.
Drawing Size—Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.
Scale Factor—It is best to let the program select this value. We then recommend rounding
up to the nearest typical scale factor.

User Border Creation PVElite - User Guide
User Border Creation

In order to do the following, you must be able to use your Windows Explorer, AutoCad
and Notepad. If you cannot, seek help from a seasoned support person.
Start AutoCad and open your border. The border should be ANSI standard dimensions 8 ½
by 11 and so fourth scaled for the non-printable area of the paper. After the border drawing
is open, save it as a release 12 Dxf file. After the file has been saved it will be necessary to
edit it with a text editor such as Notepad. Since the main drawing will have a Dxf header,
it will be necessary to delete the one in the border drawing. The Dxf header ends on about
line 960 with the word Entities. Delete through this line. Next delete the last 4 lines in the
file. This is the end of file marker. Save the file with a txt extension. Next rename the file
in the PVElite\system directory that you will be replacing. We suggest putting a new
extension on it. Save/Copy your border in the PVElite\system directory and then rename it
replacing our default border. You should now have new ANSI_?.txt file in the
PVElite\System subdirectory.
It may be wise to review our border drawing text files before you start. Also please note
that the border drawings must not contain any block attributes. These are not supported in
our current implementation. A typical drawing is shown below:

PVElite - User Guide Invoking the Drawing
Invoking the Drawing

If you have a drawing tool on your computer that supports Dxf files, PVElite can invoke it
directly. On the Analyze toolbar, there is a blue “A” button. If the button is lit up, the Dxf
file for this job was created during the last run. Pressing the button will submit the file to
Windows which will invoke your drawing tool. If the input is altered, the analysis must be
run in order to generate a new Dxf file.

Invoking the Drawing PVElite - User Guide

&KDSWHU
Element Data
PVElite has eight basic element types from which all vessels are constructed. PVElite
terms for these elements are as follows:
• Cylindrical Cylindrical Shell
• Elliptical Elliptical Head
• Torispherical Torispherical Head
• Spherical Spherical Head or Shell
• Conical Conical Head or Shell Segment
• Welded Flat Welded Flat Head
• Flange Body Flange
• Skirt Skirt Support with Basering
PVElite does not require the complete construction of a vessel for the analysis. Individual
elements or groups of elements may be defined and at least partially analyzed. Only com-
plete vessels, that is, vessels with proper supports, can be analyzed for deadweight and
live loads.
Except for the skirt element, all elements can be used to create either horizontal or vertical
vessels. Models for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top and models for horizontal
vessels are built from left to right. The vessel orientation is established with the first ele-
ment. If starting with a skirt, it’s a vertical vessel. If starting with a head, the head may be
“flipped” between a bottom head (vertical model) and a left head (horizontal model) by
clicking on the FLIP button. Once the second element is added to the model, the orienta-
tion is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel support that are modelled as elements. Other sup-
ports such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles for horizontal vessels are
modelled as “details” on the elements. These vessel details are in the next chapter.
Element Data 4-1

Element Basic Data PVElite - User Guide
Element Basic Data
All elements share a common set of parameters:
Element’s From Node

Enter a number associated with the starting point and ending point of this element. For
Heads, the From and To Nodes mark the straight flange attachment to the head, not the
overall extent of the head. (The straight flange length cannot equal zero.)
The ‘From’ node number for this element will also be used to define details such as noz-
zles, insulation, and packing which are associated with this element. The location of the
‘To’ node will be calculated by the program by adding the length of this element to the
location of the ‘From’ node. The From and To nodes establish the overall organization of
the vessel.
When creating a vessel model in the BUILD mode, node numbers are automatically
assigned to each element. The BUILD mode starts with node 10 and increments by 10
throughout the vessel. When DELETEing elements, the program will “reconnect” the ves-
4-2 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Element Basic Data
sel elements by changing the From node of the following element to the To node of the
previous element. When INSERTing elements, PVElite will ask for the new (added) To
node number and again “reconnect” the elements so that the From and To nodes match
with the previous and next elements in the model.
The program defines a vertical vessel from the bottom to the top. If the vertical vessel is
on a skirt, the first element would be the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element
would be a head and the legs or lugs are defined as details on the appropriate shell ele-
ment.
The program defines a horizontal vessel from the left end to the right end. The first ele-
ment in a horizontal vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details
on the appropriate shell element.
Element’s To Node
Enter the number associated with the starting point of this element, the ‘From’ node.
Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the element.
• For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, this should be the inside diameter of
the straight flange.
• For cones, this is the inside diameter at the From node end.
• For flanges, this is the inside diameter of the body flange.
• For skirts, this is the inside diameter at the top of the skirt.
Distance
Enter the distance between the ‘From’ Node and ‘To’ Node.
• For a cylindrical shell, enter the length of the shell from seam to seam.
• For an elliptical, torispherical, or spherical head, enter the length of the straight flange.
The straight flange length cannot equal zero.
• For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including toriconical
sections, if any) from seam to seam.
• For a welded flat head, enter the thickness of the head.
• For a body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including the weld neck, if
any.
• For a skirt support, enter the distance from the bottom of the basering to the skirt/head/
shell seam.
Finished Thickness
Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is typically the nominal thickness minus
any mill undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. Note that
the corrosion allowance is automatically subtracted from this thickness by the program
and should not be subtracted by the user.
• For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal
thickness of the plate used in order to take into account the thinning of the head due to
forming.
Element Data 4-3

Element Basic Data PVElite - User Guide
• For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible
mill undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness.
• For welded flat heads, enter the through thickness of the flange portion, but do not
include the hub and weld neck.
• For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and
taking into account any thinning due to forming. For cylindrical skirts made from
pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill undertolerance from the
nominal pipe wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The analysis program will subtract this value from the
entered thickness and add this value to inside diameter.
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier

Enter the wind load diameter multiplier. The value entered here will be multiplied by the
element outside diameter in order to determine the overall element diameter to be used in
wind load calculations. The element outside diameter will include the insulation.
When a number greater than 1 is used, it should be carefully chosen to account for the trib-
utary area of external attachments such as nozzles, piping, or ladders. The typical multi-
plier used to determine wind load diameter is 1.2. Thus if the actual element OD was 50
inches, the overall wind load diameter for this element would be 50 * 1.2 = 60.
The range of this value is normally greater than 1 and less than 2. However in some cases
it can be used to turn the wind loads off of certain elements. You can turn the wind load off
on the current element by setting this value to 0. A vessel that is supported by an interme-
diate skirt whose lower elements are protected from the wind would see no wind load on
those elements.
Material Name
Enter the material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alterna-
tively, the material can be selected from the material database by selecting the [Mat] but-
ton from the toolbar. Selecting one of the material names from the list will display the
significant material parameters for the analysis. If the current element temperature is out-
side the valid temperature range for the material, the material may not be specified or
selected. (Likewise, a temperature may not be entered if it exceeds the limits for the mate-
rial.)
Pressing Enter while on this field will display the material properties of the current ele-
ment or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are
directly from the program’s material database, otherwise the data are from the data struc-
ture of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in the
program’s material database, the program will assume that it is a “User-defined material”,
in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell section with welded longitudinal seams.
This will be the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in
spherical shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a
4-4 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Element Basic Data
stress reduction which my be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Sec-
tion VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The Joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the
inspection quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography
have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint effi-
ciency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7.
Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For exam-
ple, if circumferential seams receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have
a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. The practical effect of this
rule is circumferential seams, which are usually less highly stressed may be spot radio-
graphed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This results in the
same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Except for the skirt, these values should be set to 1.0 for PD:5500 and Division II.
Design Internal Pressure

Enter the design internal pressure for the component. This pressure need not include any
pressure due to liquid head, as that value is calculated automatically by the program
through the liquid Detail definition.
For skirts, this value is preset to zero and cannot be modified.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure

Enter the metal design temperature for the internal pressure condition. This value will be
used to collect the material allowable stress in the operating condition.
PVElite will check the entered value against the valid temperature range for the current
element material. The program will not allow the entry of a temperature outside the mate-
rial’s range. This value will be used to determine the material allowable stress.
Design External Pressure

Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value,
i.e. 14.7 psia. If you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pres-
sure calculations. For skirts, this value is preset to zero and cannot be modified.
Examples of external pressure

0—No external pressure calculation for the element
14.7—External pressure of one atmosphere (full vacuum)
Design Temperature for External Pressure

Enter the design temperature for external pressure. This value will be used as the metal
design temperature for external pressure calculations. When performing these calcula-
tions, the program will use the external design temperature along with the external chart
name (found on the material edit window) to access the material tables and thus determine
the allowable external pressure.
The maximum design temperature will be used for the allowable compressive stress on
each element.
Element Data 4-5

Element Additional Data PVElite - User Guide
Element Additional Data

Several elements require more information for complete definition. Once the element is
set, the Element Additional Data window appears below the Element Basic Data.
Cylindrical Shell
There is no additional data for cylinders.
Elliptical Head
Head Factor
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. A value of 2 is typical, that is, the major axis
(vessel diameter) is twice the minor axis (two times the head height). For example, a 60
inch diameter elliptical head would extend 15 inches beyond the straight flange.
Inside Head Depth

Enter the inside depth of the elliptical in this field. This value is in the new condition and
does not include the corrosion allowance. PVElite will compute the outer depth H and
uses this item in the calculation of the parameters needed to compute the required thick-
ness of the ellipse. This depth value is only required for PD:5500.
4-6 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Torispherical Head
Torispherical Head
Crown Radius
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and
Dished head, this is equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME Code, Sec-
tion VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The crown radius is ‘L’ in this figure.
For PD:5500, this is equal to the outside diameter of crown section of torispherical end
measured to tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure 3.5.2.1.
Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for the toroidal portion of the torispherical head. For a standard
ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is equal to 6 percent of the crown radius. Allowable
values range from 6 percent of the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown radius (hemi-
spherical head). See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-
4(b). The knuckle radius is r’ in this figure.
Element Data 4-7

Spherical Head PVElite - User Guide
Spherical Head
There is no additional data for spherical heads.
Conical Head or Shell Segment
To Node Diameter
The diameter entered in the Element Basic Data for a cone is the inside diameter of the
cone at the ‘From’ end of the cone. Enter the inside diameter of the cone at the ‘To’ end
here. For a conical head, either the ‘From’ node or ‘To’ node will have a diameter equal to
zero or two times the small end knuckle radius.
Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the
conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical sec-
tion.
Cone Length
Enter the design length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate
the effective length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle. For cases where there is a knuckle or a flare, you must
enter both the length and the angle.
Half Apex Angle

Enter the half apex angle of the cone. Refer to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
paragraph UG-33, figure UG-33.1 for a sketch of the half apex angle for some typical
geometries.
4-8 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Spherical Head
For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30
degrees, though the program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure
calculations it must not be greater than 60 degrees.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle.
Toriconical
Check this field if this cone has either a flare (at the small end) or a knuckle (at the large
end). See ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an
illustration of a toriconical section. By checking the field, the Cone Knuckle Data Edit
window will appear.
Toricone Dialog
The Toricone Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the knuckles which are parts of
a cone component. The following options are available:
• DELETE - Resets the input fields to values of 0.
• OK - Saves the data then closes the window.
• CANCEL - Exits the window without saving the data.
• HELP - Displays the button definitions.
Large End Knuckle Radius

Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end. Note that the Code requires
this radius to be no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than
three time the knuckle thickness (ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-
31(h)).
Large End Knuckle Thickness

Enter the minimum thickness after forming the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Small End Knuckle Radius

Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the small end. Note that the Code requires
this radius to be no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than
three times the knuckle thickness (ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-
31(h)).
Small End Knuckle Thickness

Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the small end.
Element Data 4-9

Welded Flat Head PVElite - User Guide
Welded Flat Head
Attachment Factor
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from either the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, or the British Standard PD:5500. For PD:5500, enter the factor C
computed per figures 3.5.5(1-2). Typical values are 0.35 or 0.41. For ASME Code, refer to
Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as follows:
0.17 (b-1) Head welded to vessel with generous radius
0.20 (b-2) Head welded to vessel with small radius
0.20 (c) Lap welded or brazed construction
0.13 (d) Integral flat circular heads
0.20 (e f g) Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
0.33 (h) Plate welded to end of shell
0.20 (i) Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
0.30 (j k) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment)
0.30 (m n o) Plate held in place by screwed ring
0.25 (p) Bolted flat head with full face gasket
0.75 (q) Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
0.33 (r s) Plate held in place by beveled edge
Non-Circ. Small Diameter

If the flat head is circular, you can leave this field at zero. However, if the flat head is non-
circular, the program can still calculate the required thickness, etc., using the formulas in
the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34. In this case the program
assumes that you entered the larger dimension of the flat head in the ‘Diameter’ field, and
that you will enter the smaller dimension of the head here.
4-10 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Flange Analysis
Flange Analysis
Body Flange
PVElite calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fab-
ricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules
found in Appendix 2 of the ASME Code, latest addenda.
The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by
Waters, Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by
Taylor Forge in 1937, and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical pur-
poses they have been unchanged since that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently
republished, is also still available, and is one of the most useful tools for flange analysis.
The input and results for the PVElite flange program are roughly modeled on the Taylor
Forge flange design sheets.
The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the
flange and hub) and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compress the
gasket. This load needs to be high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be high
enough to seal even when pressure is applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt load and
unloads the gasket.
Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps:
1. Identify operating conditions and materials: determine allowable stresses for the
flange material and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the
Code tables of allowable stress.
2. Identify the gasket material and flange facing type. Determine the effective width and
effective diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts.
3. From the design pressure and the gasket information, calculate the required area of the
bolts. Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the
Element Data 4-11

Flange Analysis PVElite - User Guide
required area. Based on the bolt areas and allowable stresses, calculate the flange
design bolt loads.
4. Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the
product of a load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to
the point of application of the load. The final result is one bending moment for operat-
ing conditions and a second for gasket seating conditions.
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., coun-
terclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consis-
tently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in this flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
The form of the stress equations is:
S = k(geometry)*M/t2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided
by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in “Modern Flange Design”, Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge. This
program includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed
by a mating flange. The program also takes full account of corrosion allowance. The user
enters uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before performing
the calculations. The program can treat corrosion in a special manner based on the input of
a Yes/No question in the input.
4-12 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Flange Analysis
The figure below shows geometry for the Flange analysis program:
Element Data 4-13

Flange Input Data PVElite - User Guide
Flange Input Data

Flange Type
Click the button for the type of flange that is being analyzed.
TYPE
Integral Weld Neck
Integral Slip On
Integral Ring
Loose Slip On
Loose Ring
Lap Joint
Blind
Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for purposes of analysis. These are
integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a
unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these
categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
Weld Neck Flanges

These have a hub which is butt welded to the vessel.
Slip-on Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they require a full penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do not have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange.
They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a full penetration
weld is used between the flange and the vessel.
Lap Joint Flanges

These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected from the
vessel, bearing only on a vessel ‘lap’. They are always analyzed as loose.
Reverse Geometry Flanges

Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use integral flange rules,
which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See Appendix 2-13.
Split Loose-type Flanges (mostly with lap joints)

A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the ves-
sel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange
is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be
designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment.
4-14 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Flange Input Data
The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 degrees from
the splits in the other.
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets

A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included in the Code sketches, nor even in
the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that extend from the ID of
the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of flange are
usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation
sheets.
Integral Ring (3) & Loose Ring (5) Additional Data

Number of Splits in the Ring
Enter the number of splits in the ring, if any, for loose type flanges. This value must be
either 0, 1, or 2. Typically split flanges are ring-type flanges. A split is used when it is
required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split
into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0.
If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it
were a solid flange - without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of
rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in
the other.
Weld Leg at Back of Ring
Enter the length of the weld leg at the back of the ring. This value is added to the
inside diameter during the design of ring type flanges to determine the minimum bolt
circle when the design option is turned on. If you are performing a partial or regular
analysis, PVElite will check to see if there is interference between the wrench and the
weld. PVElite will print a brief message letting you know there is a potential problem.
Lap Joint (6) Additional Data

Lap Joint Contact Point Inside Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange/joint contact surface.
Lap Joint Contact Point Outside Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange/joint contact surface.
required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split
into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0.
If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it
were a solid flange - without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of
rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in
the other.
Blind (7) Additional Data

Is this a TEMA Channel Cover (Y/N)
Element Data 4-15

This cell indicates whether or not the current flange is a TEMA channel cover. A sep-
arate thickness and MAWP are computed for channel covers, as well as the deflection.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (LONG SPAN)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the long side of the flange. This diam-
eter is used to calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (SHORT SPAN) (d)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the short side of the flange. This diam-
eter is used to calculate the non-circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Allowed Channel Cover Deflection
For TEMA Channel Covers, enter the magnitude of the allowed deflection at the cen-
ter of the cover. This value will be used in computing the channel cover thickness and
MAWP, even if it is larger than the allowed deflection. However, a warning message
will be printed stating this problem exists.
Perimeter along the Center of the Bolt Holes (L)
Enter the perimeter of the bolted head measured along the centerline of the bolts. This
value (L) is needed for both non-circular and circular geometries. For a circular head,
enter the value of (3.14159 * bolt circle diameter). For non-circular heads this value
will have to be computed and entered.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations?
The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states
that every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the
flange thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off
of the thickness for the stress calculations. Answering yes or no to this question will
inform the program what it is you wish to do.
Flange ID ( B’ for Reverse Types)
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be
the inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as “B” in the ASME code. The corro-
sion allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance
will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user. For a blind flange this entry
should be 0 (in flange dialog only).
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as “A” in the ASME
code.
Flange Face Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the
flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange
contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is
done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket.
Flange Face Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the
flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
4-16 Element Data

Gasket Outer Diameter

Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The program uses the minimum of the flange
face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange con-
tact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done
so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket.
Gasket Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange
face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
Hub Thickness, Small End

Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as “g0” in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. For weld neck
flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip-on flange
geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without
hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Hub Thickness, Large End

Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as “g1” in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. It is permissible
for the hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For
flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as
zero.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is referred to as “h” in the ASME code. When analyzing
an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of
the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When
you analyze a flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should
enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. How-
ever, when you design as a loose flange or a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back,
enter the size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the
program designs the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a
wrench around the nuts.
Bolt Material Specification

Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by using [D]
command. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties
can be entered manually.
Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temperature

This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification.
Element Data 4-17

Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Bolt Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

Diameter of Bolt Circle

Enter the diameter of the bolt circle of the flange.
Nominal Bolt Diameter

Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range
from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the
nominal size in this field, and also enter the root area of one bolt in the “Thread Series”
cell.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table, 2 - UNC Bolt Table, 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt.
User-Specified Root-Area Additional Data

Bolt Root Area
For nonstandard bolts, enter the root cross sectional area of the bolt.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
Gasket Factor m
The gasket factor m is one of two parameters defined by the ASME Code to characterize
the behavior of the gasket material. The gasket factor is the multiple of the line pressure
required as a stress on the gasket to ensure no leakage. For example, a gasket material with
a factor of 4 requires a gasket stress of 200 psi if the line pressure is 50 psi. The gasket fac-
tor m is listed in ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1. This table is
reproduced at the end of this Flange Analysis section.
Gasket Design Seating Stress y

The gasket design seating stress is the second of two parameters defined by the ASME
Code to characterize the behavior of the gasket material. The gasket seating stress is the
minimum stress required to seat the gasket in the flange. The gasket design seating stress y
is listed in ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1. This table is repro-
duced at the end of this Flange Analysis section.
4-18 Element Data

Flange Face Facing Sketch

The facing sketch characterizes the shape of the gasket and therefore its ability to seal the
flanged joint. Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number
according to the following correlation:
FACING SKETCH DESCRIPTION
1a flat finish faces

1b serrated finish faces
1c raised nubbin-flat finish
1d raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 1/64 inch nubbin
3 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 large serrations, one side
5 large serrations, both sides
6 metallic O-ring type gasket
Column for Gasket Seating (I, II)

Enter 1 for Column I and 2 for Column II. This value is used with the facing sketch
(above) to calculate the basic gasket seating width b0. Most gaskets are Column II gaskets;
solid flat metal and ring joint gaskets are Column I gaskets.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width (or width of Ring Joint)

If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Partition Gasket Additional Data

Length of Partition Gasket
This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associ-
ated with this flange. If the pass partition gaskets are a different width than the main
gasket, scale the length you enter so that the area of the gasket is correct.
Width of the Pass Partition Gasket
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. The gasket properties such as the facing
sketch, column, M and Y will be taken from the main gasket. Using these properties
and the known width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute
the gasket loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Element Data 4-19

External Loads PVElite - User Guide
External Loads
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pres-
sure. The program calculates a roughly approximate equivalent pressure for flanges
loaded axially and/or in bending using the following formula:
Peq = Pdes + 4F/πG2+16*Μ/πG3
Where:
Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi
Pdes = Design pressure, psi
F = Axial force, lbs
M = Bending moment, in-lbs
G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in.
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
External Loads Additional Data

Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force which acts on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment which acts on this flange.
4-20 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Mating Flange Loads
Mating Flange Loads

Mating Loads Additional Data
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating
Enter the bolt load from the mating flange in the operating case.
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating
Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for seating conditions.
Mating Flange Design Bolt Load
Enter the design bolt load for the mating flange.
Gasket Factor and Seating Stress
Gasket Factor Seating Stress
Gasket Material m y
Self Energizing Types, including
metallic and elastomer O ring 0.00 0
Flat Elastomers:
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0
75A Shore Durometer or higher 1.00 200
Flat asbestos with suitable binder:
1/8 inch thick 2.00 1600
1/16 inch thick 2.75 3700
1/32 inch thick 3.50 6500
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert 1.25 400
Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert:
3 ply 2.25 2200
2 ply 2.50 2900
1 ply 2.75 3700
Vegetable Fiber 1.75 1100
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled:
Carbon Steel 2.50 10000
Stainless Steel or Monel 3.00 10000
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or
Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled:
Soft aluminum 2.50 2900
Soft copper or brass 2.75 3700
Iron or soft steel 3.00 4500
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 3.25 5500
Stainless Steel 3.50 6500
Element Data 4-21

Mating Flange Loads PVElite - User Guide
Gasket Factor Seating Stress

Gasket Material m y
Corrugated metal, not filled:
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled:
Monel 3.50 8000
4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000
Solid flat metal:
Ring Joint:
4-22 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Skirt Support with Basering
Skirt Support with Basering
Inside Diameter at Base

Enter the inside diameter at the bottom of the skirt. This value must be larger than or equal
to the inside diameter at the top of the skirt.
Basering Dialog
The Basering Dialog lets the user input the basering data.
Note Use the Plot key to get a detailed sketch of the geometry you typed in.
Element Data 4-23

Basering Analysis PVElite - User Guide
Basering Analysis
The PVElite basering module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate
baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calcu-
lations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
Thickness of a Basering Under Compression

The equation for the thickness of the basering is the equation for a simple cantilever beam.
The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load caused
by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and bending
moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for the can-
tilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, including Jawad
& Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, formula 12.12:
t = SQRT ( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
Where:
fc = bearing stress on the concrete
l = cantilever length of basering
s = allowable bending stress of basering (typically 1.5 times Code allowable).
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the con-
crete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete
assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area
of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to:
fc = -W / A - M * c / I
Where:
W = Weight of vessel (worst case).
M = Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
A = Cross sectional area of basering on foundation
c = Distance from the center of the basering to the edge
I = Moment of inertia of the basering on the foundation
However, when a steel skirt and basering are supported on a concrete foundation, the
behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net
bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced
by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different
elastic modulii, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the
strain in the basering at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/
concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed
this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical
Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This for-
mulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabu-
lated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is
identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and
the angle alpha.
4-24 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Basering Analysis
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young’s moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-
adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
s = (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha = acos[ (s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where:
t3 = width of basering (similar to l in Jawad & Farr’s equations above)
c = bolt circle diameter
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh &
Soler equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed]. Then
alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless parameters
r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s
(say po’ and so’). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1 = .5 * (so + so ’)
p1 = .5 * (po + po ’)
This process is continue until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within speci-
fied tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value), where:
e i = (si’ - si) / si
E i = (pi’ - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
basering is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
Element Data 4-25

Thickness of Basering Under Tension

On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, there is disagreement on
how to do the analysis. For example, Megyesy uses a ‘Table F’ to calculate an equivalent
bending moment. Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but provides a table of coeffi-
cients in his book (pp 126-129 1st ed.), and Jawad & Farr use a ‘yield-line’ theory (page
435-436). Since Jawad & Farr is both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equa-
tion 12.13:
t = SQRT{ (3.91 * F) / [Sy * ( x + y + z)]}
Where:
x = 2*b/a
y = a / (2 * l)
z = d * ( 2 / a + 1 / [2 * l])
F = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
a = Distance between gussets
b = Width of base plate that is outside of the skirt
l = Distance from skirt to bolt circle
d = Diameter of bolt hole
Thickness of Top Ring Under Tension

If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is calculated using a simple beam formula. Tak-
ing the plate to be a beam supported between two gussets with a point load in the middle
equal to the maximum bolt load, we derive the following equation:
t = SQRT(6 * M / s)
Where:
M = 2 * Ft * Cg / 8.0, bending moment from Megyesy, beam formulas, case
11, fixed beam.
Ft = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
s = Allowable stress, 1.5 * plate allowable
Z = Section Modulus, from Megyesy, Properties of Sections
= Wt * t2 / 6.0
Wt = (Do/2.- Ds/2. - db) = Width of Section
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension

If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for both tension and compression. The stress
formula in tension is just the force over the area, where the force is taken to be the allow-
able bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset
times one half the width of the gusset (because gussets normally taper).
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression

In compression (as a column) we must iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking
the actual thickness as the starting point, we perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The
radius of gyration for the gusset is taken as 0.289 t per Megyesy, Fifth edition, page 404.
4-26 Element Data

The actual compression is calculated as described above, then compared to the allowed
compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and another calculation performed
until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one percent of one
another.
Basering Design
When the user requests a basering design, the program performs the following additional
calculations to determine the design geometry.
Selection of Number of Bolts

This selection is made on the basis of Megyesy’s table in Pressure Vessel Handbook
(Table C, page 67 in the fifth edition). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to
keep the anchor bolt spacing at about 24 inches.
Calculation of Load per Bolt: This calculation is made per Jawad & Farr, equation 12.3:
P = -W / N + W * M / (N * R)
Where:
W = Weight of vessel
N = Number of bolts
R = Radius of bolt circle
M = Bending moment
Calculation of Required Area for each Bolt

This is just the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress.
Selection of the Bolt Size

The program has a table of bolt areas, and selects smallest bolt with area greater than the
area calculated above.
Selection of Preliminary Basering Geometry

The table of bolt areas also contains the required clearances in order to successfully
tighten the selected bolt (wrench clearances and edge clearances). The program selects a
preliminary basering geometry based on these clearances. Values selected at this point are
the bolt circle, basering outside diameter, and basering inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Basering Geometry

Using the methods described above for the analysis section, the program determines the
approximate compressive stress in the concrete for the preliminary geometry.
Selection of Final Basering Geometry

If the compressive stress calculated above is acceptable, then the preliminary geometry
becomes the final geometry. If not, then the bolt circle and basering diameters are scaled
up to the point where the compressive stress will be acceptable. These become the final
basering geometry values.
Element Data 4-27

Analysis of Basering Thicknesses

The analysis then continues through the thickness calculation described above, determin-
ing required thicknesses for the basering, top ring, and gussets.
Basic Skirt Thickness

The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression loads is determined
using the same formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete, except using the
thickness of the skirt rather than the width of the basering:
s = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
A = Cross sectional area of skirt.
c = Distance from the center of the basering to the skirt (radius of skirt).
I = Moment of inertia of the skirt cross section.
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required
thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the
allowable stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where
the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials fac-
tor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calcu-
lations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated,
the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allow-
able stress approaches the actual stress.
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring

If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring included in the base plate geometry, there is
an additional load in the skirt. Jawad & Farr have analyzed this load and determined that
the stress in the skirt due to the bolt load on the base plate is calculated as follows:
s = (1.5 * F * b) / (π * h * t ** 2)
Where
F = Total load in one bolt = load on one gusset
b = Width of the gusset at the base
t = thickness of the skirt
h = height of the gusset
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight
and bending moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They
thus categorize this stress as secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of
this stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the
required thickness of the skirt at the top of the basering.
Brownell and Young Method

The Brownell and Young Method computes the required thickness of the baseplate, the
gussets and the top plate or top ring (if there is one). This method is discussed in the book,
4-28 Element Data

Process Equipment Design, by Brownell and Young. It is also discussed in the book, Pres-
sure Vessel Design Manual, by Dennis R. Moss. This baseplate design method is based on
the neutral axis shift method and will in general design a thinner basering than the method
discussed in the previous paragraphs.
Element Data 4-29

Basering Input Data PVElite - User Guide
Basering Input Data

Basering Description
Enter a 15 character or less description of this basering.
Analyze or Design Basering

The basering processor can either analyze existing baserings or design new ones. The
valid entries are
1. Analyze an existing basering
2. Design a new basering
3. Brownell and Young analyze
4. Brownell and Young design
The design mode may change the following items:
• Number of Bolts
• Size of Bolts
• Bolt Circle Diameter
• Outside Diameter of the Basering
• Inside Diameter of the Basering
Temperature of Basering (needed if not ambient)

Normally baserings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the basering is at a
higher temperature, enter it here, otherwise leave the default temperature.
Thickness of Basering
Enter the actual thickness of basering. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc.
should be subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required
basering thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user
entered thickness value will be used only for comparison.
Basering Material Specification

Enter the basering material. Plate materials such as SA-516 70 and SA-36 are commonly
used. Use the material button to look at materials contained in the database. If your mate-
rial is not present, enter the allowable stresses at the basering design metal temperature.
Inside Diameter of Basering

Enter the inside diameter of the basering. This entry must be greater than 0 and less than
the bolt circle diameter and the basering OD. If the you have specified the program to
design the basering, the program may change this value. A good approximation for the
basering ID should be entered when using either the analyze or design option.
Outside Diameter of Basering

Enter the outside diameter of the basering. This entry must be greater than the basering ID
and the bolt circle diameter. When in design mode, the program may change this value.
4-30 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Basering Input Data

Enter the bolt material. Use the material button to look at materials contained in the data-
base. If your material is not present, enter the allowable stresses at the bolt design metal
temperature.

The nominal bolt diameters accepted by PVElite range between 1/2 and 4 inches (1.27
and 10.16) centimeters. Values outside of this range will not be accepted. When in design
mode the program may change the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters are
Bolt Size Root Area Bolt Size Root Area
(inches) (sq. in.) (inches) (sq. in.)
1/2 0.12 1 7/8 2.304

5/8 0.202 2 2.652
3/4 0.302 2 1/4 3.423
7/8 0.419 2 1/2 4.292
1 0.551 2 3/4 5.259
1 1/8 0.728 3 6.324
1 1/4 0.929 3 1/4 7.487
1 3/8 1.155 3 1/2 8.749
1 1/2 1.405 3 3/4 10.108
1 5/8 1.680 4 11.566
1 3/4 1.980
This bolt information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of
Process Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the basering design calls for. If in design mode, the program may
change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the maximum load
per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad
and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 12ty0.
Diameter at Bolt Circle

Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This value must be greater than the basering ID and
less than the basering OD. When in design mode, the program may change the bolt circle
diameter. Whenever this happens, it will be reported in the output. The word DESIGN will
appear followed by the value and description of the input the program has changed.
Bolt Table (Fine Thread, TEMA ), (Coarse, UNC ) User

Enter the thread series identifier. If table 3 is selected, you will be prompted to enter the
root area of a single bolt. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering
handbook.
Element Data 4-31

Basering Input Data PVElite - User Guide
Bolt Table 3 Additional Data
User Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt

If your basering design calls for special bolts, enter the root area of a single bolt in this file.
Note, however, this option is mutually exclusive from the design option. If this condition
is detected, the numbers from Table 2 (UNC) will be used.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete

Enter the nominal compressive stress of the concrete to which the basering is bolted. This
value is f’c in Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Allowable Compressive Strength of Concrete

Enter the allowable compressive stress of the concrete to which the basering is bolted.
This value is fc in Brownell and Young. A typical entry is 1200 psi.
Bolt Corrosion Allowance

Enter the value of the corrosion allowance the bolts will be subjected to.
Gussets Additional Data
Thickness of Gusset Plates

Enter the thickness of the gusset plates to be used for this basering. Any allowances for
corrosion should be considered when making this entry.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the basering to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
Distance between Gussets

Enter the distance between the inside edges of the gusset plates.
Average Width of Gusset Plates

Enter the average width of the gusset plates.
Elastic Modulus for Plates

The elastic modulus is used to determine the allowable stress for plates in compression
according to AISC. This is a required value. For most common steels, this value is 29E6
psi.
Yield Stress for Plates

Enter the yield stress for the gusset plates. This value is typically 36,000 psi.
Thickness of Top Ring

If your basering design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness
greater than 0.0 is entered, the program will compute the required thickness of the top
plate. If no top ring thickness is entered, no top ring thickness calculations will be made.
4-32 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Basering Input Data
Width of Top Ring

If your basering design has a continuous top ring, enter its radial width here. This value
will normally be close to the (skirt OD - basering OD) /2. If this were an inside chair cap
type design, that would probably not be a good approximation.
External Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, baseplate, gussets and top
ring. The external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness of
these components.
Element Data 4-33

Tailing Lug Analysis PVElite - User Guide
Tailing Lug Analysis
Tailing Lug Edit Window
The tailing lug calculation is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type
design as depicted in the figure on the following page. The design is based on a lift posi-
tion where no bending occurs on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design
are the section modulus, shear and bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength.
The location of the center of the pin hole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer
most of the top ring or the basering, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/
plate the height of the tailing lug is required. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the
same material as the gusset or basering. Note that all input fields pertain to one tail lug.
4-34 Element Data

PVElite - User Guide Tailing Lug Input Data
Tailing Lug Input Data

Perform Tailing Lug Analysis
Select this checkbox to perform the Tailing Lug analysis.
Tail Lug Type

Select the type of tailing lug (single or dual) used as illustrated on the
Centerline Offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tailing lug.
Pin Hole Diameter

Enter the pin hole diameter. The center of the pin hole will be placed radially in line with
the larger of the outer most edge of the top ring or the basering (OD).
Weld Size Thickness

Enter the leg weld size.
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring)

Enter the tailing lug height measured from the top of basering.
Element Data 4-35

Tailing Lug Input Data PVElite - User Guide
Discussion of Results
The tailing lug design consists of a three part analysis:
• the basering assembly (basering, skirt and top ring),
• the strength of the weld
• the tailing lug itself
It is assumed that there is no bending in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only
the basering and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation.
The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
Stress Type Allowable Value
Shear at Pin Hole 0.4 Sy
Bearing Stress 0.75 Sy
Weld Stress 0.49 Sallow
4-36 Element Data

&KDSWHU
Vessel Detail Data
Introduction
PVElite vessel models are composed of the basic elements (heads, shells, cones, etc.) with
details added to these elements. Vessel details are included for two reasons—to develop
the total vessel deadweight loads, and to collect information for the analysis of vessel
components. Not all of these details are sensible additions to every element. The following
table defines the application of these vessel details to the different elements.
Elliptical Torispherical Spherical Flat Body

Cylinder Head Head Head Head Cone Flange Skirt
Ring #1 #
Nozzle # # # # # #
Lugs # # # # # # # #
Weight # # # # # # # #
Forces / # # # # # # # #
Moments
Platform 2 # # # # # #
Saddle 3 #
2
Tray Y/N 4
Legs5 Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Packing Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Liquid Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Insulation Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Lining Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Relationship of Elements and Details
1
# indicates that this element type may have several of these details defined
2
Vertical vessels only
3
Horizontal vessels only
4
Y/N (Yes or No) indicates that this element may have this detail turned on or turned off
5
Vertical vessels only and only if no skirt is defined
Vessel Detail Data 5-1

Introduction PVElite - User Guide
It is also useful to note here the positioning of certain vessel “details” are applied at a
point, such as over a length of the element. A good example is insulation. For a bottom (or
left) head, the insulation (element detail) actually starts before the “From” node and cov-
ers the head to the “To” node. For a 60 inch diameter elliptical bottom head, the start point
of the insulation is 15 inches below the “From” node (enter -15 for the “Distance from
From Node”). If the head has the standard 3 inch straight flange, then the insulation covers
18 inches of the element (enter 18 for the “Height/Length of the Insulation”). See the
chapter on Details for more information.
Locating “Continuous” Details
5-2 Vessel Detail Data

PVElite - User Guide Assigning Details to Elements
Assigning Details to Elements

Details may be assigned to elements by selecting them from the Detail toolbar located at
the top of the vessel input screen. The first step in this simple process is to make the ele-
ment of interest the current element by clicking on it. Next, click the appropriate detail
icon for the detail which you need to add. You will then be presented with a dialog box.
Fill in all of the information then press the OK button and PVElite will update the graphic
image showing your new detail. Since the image is scaled you can see if you have placed
your detail in the correct location.
Locating “Continuous” Details

Detail Definition Buttons PVElite - User Guide
Detail Definition Buttons

A detail is selected for definition by clicking on the detail name. An example of the result-
ing pop-up screen (here, a ring detail) is shown below.
The individual detail windows generally have the following buttons available:
• PREV. - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the previous detail of
the same type for the element. If there is no previous detail, an error message will be
displayed.
• NEXT - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the next detail of the
same type for the element. If no additional detail of this type exists, the program will
create a default detail for the user’s modification. PVElite registers details by the
Detail ID. If the current detail does not have a Detail ID defined, the program will dis-
play an error message if this button is used.
• DELETE - Deletes the current detail and displays the data of the next detail of this
type, if it exists. If there is not a next detail, the data of the previous detail, if it exists,
will be displayed on the window. If no previous detail exists for the element, a new
detail listing will be created.
• OK - Allows the user to save the data of the current detail and close the window. Note
that the program will generate an error and not save the data if no Detail ID is speci-
fied.
• CANCEL - Closes the window without saving the current data.
• MATERIAL - Brings up the material selection window. Clicking on a material name
from the program’s database will close the material selection window and bring that
material name into the detail data. As not all details require a material definition, not
all detail edit windows contain this button.
• HELP - Displays general help for the detail window.
Other buttons not shown in the illustration above:
• SECTIONID - This option is available for leg details. Clicking here will bring up the
database names for the wide variety of cross section data stored in PVElite. As with

PVElite - User Guide Detail Definition Buttons
MATERIAL..., clicking on a name in the database will close the database and copy the
selected name into the Section ID field.
• FULL - This option appears with those details which involve some length such as
insulation, packing and liquid. These details require a start position and end position
(entered as a distance from From node and height/length of detail). If the detail
extends throughout the element, clicking on this button will automatically calculate
and enter these values so that the detail “covers" ’the entire element. This feature is
very useful for heads where these two terms (distance and height/length) may not be
obvious. Remember that the From node and To node mark the ends of the straight
flange portion of the head element and the head itself starts before or extends beyond
this node pair. This leads to negative distances from the From node or a larger height/
length of the detail.
• ALL - This option allows some detail types such as insulation to be applied over the
entire vessel at one time. Of course the detail type can be edited on an individual basis
on any element if the ALL feature has been used.
Note that only the details of the current element are accessible. To review or define details
on other elements, the element of interest must be made current by clicking on it first.
Note The Detail Edit window may also be accessed directly from the graphic image
found in the Build and Define modes. Simply click the left mouse button on the
element to make it current and then click the right mouse button on the detail of
interest. For details that cannot be “right button” clicked such as liquid, simply
click the detail on the detail toolbar and its associated edit dialog will appear.

Defining the Details PVElite - User Guide
Defining the Details

Three items appear with every element detail. The From Node of the current element, the
distance from the element’s From Node (or Offset from Vessel Centerline for heads), and
the label given to the detail or Detail ID.
From Node
The From Node is an element identifier that cannot be entered or modified. The From
Node (and the highlighted element on the graphic) indicates the element which contains
the detail.
Distance from “From” Node or Offset from Vessel Centerline

Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the “From” Node to the start of the item to be
defined. Be aware that for heads this may be a negative value; for example, insulation on a
bottom head starts before the “From” node since the “From” node marks the beginning of
the straight flange. For nozzles on heads, enter the radial distance between the vessel cen-
terline and the centerline of the nozzle.
For the Detail Enter the axial distance between the “From” node and the
following location:
Ring Centerline of the ring
Nozzle Centerline of the nozzle
Lug Centroid of the lug attachment weld
Weight Point at which the weight acts
Force/Moment Point at which the force or moment acts
Platform Axial distance from the node to the bottom of the platform
Saddle Vertical centerline of the saddle
Trays Bottom of the lowest tray
Legs Centroid of the leg attachment weld
Packing Start of the packed section
Liquid Start of the liquid section
Insulation Start of the insulated section
Lining Start of the lined section
Detail ID
Enter any alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. While not required, it is suggested to
assign unique names for unique items for clear reporting. For example, nozzles should be
unique as their individual identification is important while insulation on all elements, if
consistent throughout, may be named INSUL on each element. Some consistency will
help your naming process. You may wish to use the From node number with an alphabeti-
cal extension showing the detail type and the number of such details if needed. For exam-
ple, for a nozzle, insulation and ring defined on the element From node 20 To node 30 you
may have Detail IDs of “NOZL A”, “INSUL”, and “20 RING 1 of 2”, respectively.
PVElite - User Guide Rings
Rings
The Stiffening Ring Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the rings which are
attached to the current element. These data are used in the calculation of the weight of the
ring and, for external pressure checks, in the calculation of the ring area and inertia.
When using the ASME Code, the following data screen is displayed.
As the stiffening ring data is entered, PVElite will automatically compute the inertias
required and available provided it is not a cone to cylinder junction ring. For bar rings, the
program will size a new ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the value
given in the Miscellaneous Options dialog located on the Design/Analysis window.
The Check Standards Bars button helps you to select a suitable ring. As you cursor
through the rings, the program will compute the results and place them in a display area at
the bottom of the dialog. A ring that meets the Code requirements is shown in blue and a
failed ring is displayed in red along with a failed message. Ensure the entire vessel is mod-
eled prior to placing and sizing the rings. The Bar Selection dialog is shown below. Use
the mouse, space bar, and arrow keys to navigate this tree.

Rings PVElite - User Guide
Inside Diameter of Ring

Enter the inside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually equal to the outside
diameter of the shell, except for the relatively rare case of a stiffening ring inside of the
vessel.
Outside Diameter of Ring

Enter the outside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually greater than the out-
side diameter of the shell.
Thickness of Ring
Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring.
Ring Material
Enter a name of the ring material from the program’s material database or select the mate-
rial name by first clicking on the Ring Material button. Individual material parameters
may be viewed and modified by pressing Enter when the cursor is in this field.
PVElite allows entry of the generic entry of any type of stiffener. To do this you must
know the cross sectional area of the stiffener as well as the moment of inertia and the dis-
tance from the shell surface to the ring centroid. If you are using an American type struc-
tural shape simply click on the section type button and then click on the type of geometry
being used. If a non-American type section ring is being used, enter in the properties for
your section type.
Moment of Inertia
A property of the stiffener typically taken from a structural handbook. Units of inertia are
length to the 4th power.
Cross Sectional Area

This is the area of the ring.
Distance to Ring Centroid

This is the distance from the surface of the shell to the center of the rings area. Again this
property is typically taken from a structural handbook.
Name of Section Type

This value is used for documentation purposes and it is used to look up the total height of
the stiffener for the horizontal vessel analysis (if a section type ring is used).

PVElite - User Guide Rings
When using British Standard PD:5500 for a cylindrical section, the following screen is
shown:

Nozzles PVElite - User Guide
Nozzles
Nozzle Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the nozzles which are attached to the
current element. These nozzles will add to the total deadweight of the vessel. Even if the
deadweight is not significant, entering the nozzles may be very important as the data
entered here will be used to evaluate the flange’s and vessel’s maximum allowable pres-
sure (MAP). The nozzle flange MAP will be set according to the element temperature, the
nozzle class and the flange grade according to ANSI B16.5.
If one of the nozzles controls the vessel’s MAP and a vertical hydrotest is carried out in
accordance with ASME UG 99(c), be sure to enter the correct “Flange Distance to Top” in
the Global Design Data. Flange distance to top will be the distance from the controlling
flange to the top of the vessel. See the Global Data chapter for more information.
Overriding Nozzle Weight

Normally the program calculates the weight of the nozzle from the information the user
has already entered and from internal tables of typical weights. If your nozzle is signifi-
cantly different from a standard weight nozzle, you can enter the weight here, and it will
override the program calculated weight.
Note This value must be entered in for type HB nozzles.

PVElite - User Guide Nozzle Analysis
Nozzle Analysis
PVElite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a
pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, noz-
zle and optional reinforcing pad. The program also calculates the strength of failure paths
for the nozzles. This calculation is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, 1995. The calculation procedure is based on figure UG-
37.1.
The program calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on
inside diameter for the following vessel components:
Component Paragraph Limitations
Cylinder G-27 (c) (1) None
2:1 Elliptical Head UG-32 (d) (1) None
Torispherical Head UG-32 (e) (1) None
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) None
The program evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpen-
dicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The NOZZLE program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thick-
ness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when
making calculations for the corroded condition.
The NOZZLE program also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design Metal Temperature
(MDMT) calculations for nozzles.
As the nozzle data is entered, PVElite will automatically perform the ASME area of
replacement or PD:5500 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed
every time the cursor is moved in between input cells. If there is any error in the input that
will not allow the analysis to be performed, a status of failed will appear at the bottom of
the Nozzle Dialog. The calculation is initiated once the pipe size is specified. If you are
changing data, such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells, press F5 to
force PVElite to recalculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result
will appear in red. A nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically
the area and minimum nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program will display the text failed
in brackets, even though the area of replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this
feature, we suggest that the entire vessel be modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle
pressure design options set. Also for vessels that have ANSI flanges note that the ANSI
flange rating will be shown on the main Status bar.

Nozzle Analysis PVElite - User Guide
The figure below shows geometry for the Nozzle module.

PVElite - User Guide Nozzle Input Data
Nozzle Input Data

Nozzle Description
Enter a 15 character or less description of this nozzle. If you type in the description
“MANWAY” the UG-45 check for minimum nozzle neck thickness will not be performed.
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell

Enter the angle between the centerline of the nozzle and a tangent to the vessel at the point
where the nozzle centerline intersects the vessel outside diameter. If left blank, and an off-
set is entered, the program will compute the angle.
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1)

Enter the distance from the center of the head to the nozzle centerline.
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange

Enter the letters “CL” followed by a space and the number corresponding to the flange
class. The following flange classes are available:
CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL 600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL 2500
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange

Enter the letters “GR” followed by a space and the number corresponding to the flange
material grade. The following flange grades are available:
GR 1.1 Med Carbon Steel
GR 1.2 High Carbon Steel
GR 1.4 Low Carbon Steel
Austenitic Steels:
GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 2.3 Type 304L,316L
GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 2.5 Type 347,348
GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 2.7 Type 310
Alloy Steels:
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo
High Alloy Steels

GR 3.1 NI-FE-MO-CB
GR 3.2 NI Alloy 200
GR 3.4 NI CU 400, 500
GR 3.5 NI-CR-FE 600
GR 3.6 NI CR-FE 800
GR 3.7 NI-MO B2
GR 3.8 Nickel Alloys

Modification of Reinforcing Limits PVElite - User Guide
Modification of Reinforcing Limits

You may enter any physical limitation which exists on the thickness available for rein-
forcement or the diameter available for reinforcement. An example of a thickness limita-
tion would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not extend normal to the vessel
wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation. An example of a diameter limi-
tation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you did not want to
take an available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit

Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An exam-
ple of a diameter limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for
which you did not want to take an available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit

Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An exam-
ple of a thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not
extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.
Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0

In some vessel design specifications it is mandated that no credit be taken for the area con-
tributed by the shell or nozzle. You can enter the text “A1” or “A2” in this field. If you do
so, that area will be set equal to 0. You can also enter “A1 A2”. This would give you no
credit for Area1 - available area in the vessel wall or Area2 - available area in the nozzle
wall.
Nozzle Material Specification

tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by pressing
D when the cursor is in the material field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its
specification and properties can be entered manually.
Nozzle Diameter Basis

Enter 0 for nozzles where the diameter you give is inside diameter. Enter 1 for nozzles
where the diameter you give is outside diameter.
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle

Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size
and thickness basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field.
Valid nominal diameters are
0.125 0.25 0.375 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8
10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis

Select the appropriate basis for nozzle diameter and thickness.

PVElite - User Guide Modification of Reinforcing Limits
Actual Diameter and Thickness

The program will use the actual diameter entered in the field above and the actual thick-
ness entered in the field below.
Nominal Diameter and Thickness

The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
nozzle size and thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the
schedule entered in the nominal schedule of nozzle field.
Minimum Diameter and Thickness

The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
nozzle size and thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the
schedule entered in the nominal schedule of nozzle field. It will then multiply the nominal
thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Actual Thickness of Nozzle

Enter the minimum actual thickness of the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if
you selected ACTUAL for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
schedule in the field below.
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle

Enter the schedule for the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected
NOMINAL or MINIMUM for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
thickness in the field above. Type in the schedule for the nozzle, i.e. SCH 40. Available
nozzle schedules are
SCH 10 SCH 20 SCH 30 SCH 40 SCH 60
SCH 80 SCH 100 SCH 120 SCH 140 SCH 160
SCH 10S SCH 40S SCH 80S
SCH STD SCH X-STG SCH XX-STG
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes

Enter the seam efficiency. The seam efficiency is used in the ‘area available’ calculations
to reduce the area available in the shell. Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness cal-
culations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0.
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck

Enter the seam efficiency of the nozzle. The seam efficiency is used in the UG45 calcula-
tion to determine the minimum required thickness of the nozzle due to internal pressure.
Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness calculations, the seam efficiency is always
1.0.

Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle

The nozzle type and depth of groove welds are used to determine the required weld thick-
nesses and failure paths for the nozzle. If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel
wall, it is abutting the vessel wall. If the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD
and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted. Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert
and abutting nozzles.
Nozzle Outside Projection
Enter the distance the nozzle projects outward from the surface of the vessel. This will
usually be to the attached flange or cover. This length will be used for weight calculations
and for external pressure calculations.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the nozzle and the
vessel are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the
depth of the component, that is the thickness of the nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a
partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a
zero, respectively, in this field.
Nozzle Inside Projection
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel. The program uses the least of the inside
projection and the thickness limit with no pad to calculate the area available in the inward
nozzle. Therefore, you may safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches if the
nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.
Local Shell Thickness
Some vessels have insert plates which are thicker than the surrounding shell. If your vessel
uses insert plates, enter the thickness of the plate here. This value will be thicker than the
shell course thickness this nozzle is located on. The maximum of this value and the ele-
ment thickness will be used in the nozzle reinforcement calculations. A basic assumption
here is that the diameter of the insert plate is greater than the diameter limit of reinforce-
ment which is roughly twice the diameter of the finished opening.
Shell Tr Value
For some vessel designs the nozzle reinforcement is governed by bending and normal
stresses in the local shell area where the nozzle is located. Normally the value of Tr (shell
required thickness) is based on internal pressure requirements. Some specifications call
out for "Full Replacement." If this is the case, enter in the actual shell thickness less the
corrosion allowance.
For another option, review the Nozzle Design Modification Section in the Design/Analy-
sis Constraints. The check box titled "Base Nozzle tr on Max. Stress ratio" can also satisfy
external loading criteria by computing the exact requirement for tr. If you enter the Shell
Tr, this is the value the program will use. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 0.

PVElite - User Guide Modification of Reinforcing Limits
This directive is for vertical vessels only. This option should not be checked if the vessel is
a horizontal vessel.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
This entry is for the exclusion of area needed when holes are tapped into studding outlets
and other similar connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the
area required by the tapped area loss. Values for tapped area loss are shown in the table
below adapted from the Pressure Vessel Design Manual.
Please note that PVElite will not multiply the tapped area loss by 2. It will simply use the
value that has been supplied.
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two
values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if
any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the
available area.
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the noz-
zle are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth
of the component, that is the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial pen-
etration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Pad Material
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by pressing
the button "Pad Material" when the cursor is in the material field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually.
ASME Code Weld Type
In many cases the Code does not require weld strength/path calculations for full penetra-
tion groove welds for pressure loadings. If your weld detail is per UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b),
(c), (d), (e), (f-1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1) or (z-1) and you do not wish the pro-
gram to perform the weld strength calculation, enter in a designation such as A. If you
wish PVElite to perform this calculation regardless of the type of weld, leave this field
blank.
ASME Code Weld Type

If it is a type I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, then PVElite will perform the additional weld
size calculations per UW-16(d)(1).

Flange Type
This is the type of nozzle flange. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out
for documentation purposes.
Flange Material
This is the material the flange is constructed of. This value is not used by the program, but
is echoed out for documentation purposes. The flange material should correspond to the
type listed for the flange grade.

PVElite - User Guide Lugs
Lugs
The Lugs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the sets of lugs which
are attached to the current element. If no skirt or legs are defined for a vertical vessel, the
lowest set of lugs will be used as the vessel support point for deadload and levelled calcu-
lations.
PVElite allows the entry of one of three types of support lug geometries:
1 - simple geometry with gussets
2 - gusseted geometry with top plate
3 - gusseted geometry with continuous top ring
Depending on the type of geometry selected, additional data will need to be entered.
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint

This is the radial distance from the wall of the vessel to the point where the lug attaches to
the structural steel.
Lug Bearing Width

This is the width of the structure that is in contact with the bottom lug support plate.
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate

This is the distance the bottom support plate extends from the OD of the vessel. This value
must be greater than or equal to the average gusset width.
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate

This value is typically equal to the distance between gussets plus two times the gusset
plate thickness.

Lugs PVElite - User Guide
Thickness of Bottom Plate

This value is the thickness of the bottom support plate.
Distance between Gussets

This is the distance between the insides of the gusset plates.
Mean Width of Gussets

This value is equal to the gusset width at the top plus the gusset width at the bottom
divided by two. PVElite uses the mean gusset width in order to compute the actual
stresses in the gusset plates.
Height of Gussets
Enter the height of one gusset.
Thickness of Gussets
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring

This is the radial dimension from the OD of the shell to the edge of the top plate. This
value should be less than or equal to the mean gusset width.
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring

Enter the thickness of the top plate which sits above the gussets.
Overall Height of Lug

Enter the distance from the bottom of the support lug to the top.
Overall Width of Lug

Enter the width of the support lug.
Weight of One Lug

The program does not gather enough information to be able to do the detailed calculation
of the support lug weight. Therefore you must enter the actual weight of one support lug.
Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.
Perform WRC 107 Calc

If the box is checked to perform the WRC 107 local stress and analysis, you will need to
fill out the pad dimensions (if there is a pad) and the allowable stress increase factor.
Pad Width
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel.
The pad width must be greater than the attachment width. The length of the attachment is
measured along the axis of the vessel.If the box is checked to perform the analysis

PVElite - User Guide Lugs
and the pad properties are filled in, the program will compute the stresses at the edge of
the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness o of the pad. Any allowances for the external corrosion should be
taken in to account for the pad thickness.
Pad Length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, though these two val-
ues will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.

Weight PVElite - User Guide
Weight
The Weight Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the weights which
are added to the current element.
Miscellaneous Weight
Enter a weight value. This could be generated by an attached piece of equipment such as a
motor, by internals such as piping, or by externals such as structural elements. Note that
this value will affect the seismic analysis.
Offset from Centerline

Enter the distance of this generic weight from the centerline of the vessel. The value will
be multiplied by the weight to obtain a moment that will be a part of the stress calcula-
tions.
For horizontal vessels, the weight will add to the saddle loads and the offset dimension
will not be used, but will be echoed for documentation purposes.

PVElite - User Guide Forces and Moments
Forces and Moments

The Force and Moment Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the sets
of forces and moments which are added to the current element. In most cases these are
operating loads imposed on the vessel; usually piping loads on nozzles.
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction
Enter the force in the selected direction. Note that the Y direction is always vertically up,
the X direction is from left to right, and the Z direction is out of the page. Loads perpen-
dicular to the vessel will be resolved into a single vector and applied to create the worst
combination with the live load. Unlike miscellaneous weight, this force is not included in
the seismic analysis.
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis

Enter the moment about the selected axis. The rules stated for the forces apply here as
well.
Acts During Wind or Seismic

If the force or moment acts during either the Wind or Seismic case, check the appropriate
box. Please note you can check both boxes but you must at least check one.

Platforms PVElite - User Guide
Platforms
The Platform Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the platforms
which are attached to the current vertical vessel element.
Platform Start Angle (degrees)

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the start angle of
the platform.
Platform End Angle (degrees)

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the ending angle
of the platform.
Platform Wind Area

Enter the tributary wind area of the platform. Typically this value will be the greatest span
of the platform perpendicular to the vessel multiplied by a nominal platform height,
between 12 and 36 inches on the hand rails and other equipment on the platform.
Platform Weight
Enter the weight of the platform.
Platform Railing Weight

Enter the weight of the railing in units of force/length in this field. This input will be used
to compute the weight of the platform when the “calculate weight” button is pressed.
Platform Grating Weight

The grating is the plate that one stands on while standing on a platform. This input will be
used to compute the weight of the platform when the “calculate weight” button is pressed.

PVElite - User Guide Platforms
Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. The platform width, grating weight and railing
weight are used to compute the weight of the platform when the “Calculate Weight” but-
ton is pressed.
Platform Height
The platform height is the distance from the floor plate to the top hand rail. This dimen-
sion is usually 42 inches. The program uses this value to compute the wind area when one
of the Wind area calculation buttons is pressed.
Platform Clearance
The platform clearance is distance between the outer shell surface and the inner diameter
of the platform. The value is used to compute the floor area of the platform.
Platform Force Coefficient

The force coefficient is a term used to compute the wind area and consequently the wind
force acting on a platform. This value is taken from ASCE7-95 from Table 6-9 and is
referred to as Cf. A typical value for Cf is 1.2. This value should always be greater than or
equal to 1.0.
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options]

PVElite can perform platform area wind calculations in one of four ways. The methods are
• The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative).
• One half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient.
• The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by 3.
• The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by 3. Note that
this option will yield the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep
angle of greater than 180 degrees.
To have the program compute the area, simply fill in the required data such as the platform
height , width, start and end angles and the force coefficient. As you enter the data the pro-
gram will compute the result and insert it into the wind area cell. If you want to use your
own value, type it in and do not press one of the area options.
Platform Length (Non- Circular)

If the platform is the non-circular top head type, enter the long dimension of the
platform.

Saddles PVElite - User Guide
Saddles
The Saddle Edit Window lets the user input and edit the data of the saddles which are
attached to the current horizontal cylinder. The size and location of the saddles are impor-
tant for the Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports.
For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined and they do not have to be
symmetrically placed about the center of the vessel axis. If no saddles are defined for a
horizontal vessel, the deadload and live load calculations will not be performed.
Width of Saddle
Enter the width of the saddle support. This width does not include any wear pad on the
vessel side.
Centerline Dimension (B)

Enter the distance from the base of the saddle to the centerline of the vessel. This is
referred to as dimension "B" in some pressure vessel texts. This value is used in determin-
ing additional saddle loads due to wind or seismic events.
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees)

Enter the angle contained between the two ‘horns’ (contact points) of the saddle, measured
from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value ranges from 120 to 150 degrees.
Height of Composite Stiffener

Enter the overall height of the composite stiffener over the saddle (if there is one).
Width of Wear Plate

Enter the width of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.
Thickness of Wear Plate

Enter the thickness of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.

PVElite - User Guide Saddles
Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees)

Enter the angle contained from one edge of the wear plate to the other edge, measured
from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value is approximately 130 degrees.
Saddle Dimension A
This distance is the length between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line
of the nearest head. This dimension is usually labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
Perform Saddle Check (Y/N)

By answering Y to this prompt and pressing <Enter> and entering the following informa-
tion PVElite will perform a structural design check on the saddle supports.
Material Yield Stress

Enter the yield stress for the saddles at their design temperature.
E for Plates
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the material used to make the saddles.
Baseplate Length
This is the long dimension of the baseplate which is in contact with the supporting surface.
This value is comparable with the vessel diameter.
Baseplate Thickness
This is the thickness of the baseplate support.
Baseplate Width
This is the short dimension (Width) of the baseplate.
Number of Ribs
The ribs run parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Enter the number of ribs on one saddle
support.
Rib Thickness
Enter the thickness of the rib supports.
Web Thickness
The web is the part of the support structure to which the ribs are attached. Enter the thick-
ness of the web here.
Web Location
There are 2 possible locations for the webs, Center or Side. Enter a 0 for center and a 1 for
side.
Height of Center Web

Enter the distance from the bottom of the center rib to top plus the thickness of the shell.

Trays PVElite - User Guide
Trays
The Tray Edit Window allows the user to enter and edit the one set of equally spaced trays
with a set liquid height for the current element. The Distance from “From” Node will be to
the bottom of the lowest tray. Trays may only be entered for vertical vessels.
Number of Trays
Enter the number of trays for the current element.
Tray Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between trays.
Tray Weight Per Unit Area

Enter the unit weight of each tray. Do not enter the total weight, since the program will
multiply the unit weight by the cross sectional area of the element.
Height of Liquid on Tray

Enter the height of the liquid on each tray.
Density of Liquid on Tray

Enter the density of the liquid on each tray.

PVElite - User Guide Legs
Legs
The Legs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the legs which are
attached to the current element. Legs may be entered for vertical vessels that have no skirt
element.
Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline

For shell elements enter the distance between the centerline of the leg to the element out-
side diameter. Usually, this data is the half value of the leg’s width. For heads where the
legs may not necessarily attach at the vessel OD but somewhere else along the head, enter
the distance between the centerlines of two legs that are opposite to one another. If there
are an odd number of legs (therefore no two are opposite), then enter the diameter of a cir-
cle drawn through the centerlines of the legs; this would be the outside diameter at the
head attachment elevation plus the depth of the leg.
Leg Orientation
Select the orientation of the leg to the centerline. Here each selection stands for
P. Strong Axis - Strong axis perpendicular to vessel:

Legs PVElite - User Guide
P. Weak Axis - Weak axis perpendicular to vessel:
D. Weak Axis - Strong axis diagonal to vessel:
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs.
Section Identifier
Enter the AISC section identifier for the vessel. The program holds data on 929 different
AISC sections. The Section ID database may be displayed by pressing the “SectionID”
button or press [Alt-S] keystroke combination. The section identifier can be selected
directly from the database.
Length of Leg
Enter the distance from the attachment point of the leg to the ground.

PVElite - User Guide Packing
Packing
The Packing Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the packing which
is attached to the current element.
Height of Packed Section

Enter the height of the packed section on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the packed section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the packed
section will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have a packed horizontal vessel (rare) the value entered in this cell will be
the length of the packed section.
Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in
lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Size Density Size Density

(in.) (lb/ft3) (in.) (lb/ft3)
Ceramic Raschig Ring Carbon Raschig Ring
1/4 60.0 1/4 46.0
3/8 61.0 1/2 27.0
1/2 55.0 3/4 34.0
5/8 56.0 1 27.0
3/4 50.0 1 1/4 31.0

Packing PVElite - User Guide
1 42.0 1 1/2 34.0
1 1/4 46.0 2 27.0
1 1/2 46.0 3 23.0
2 41.0 Carbon Steel Pall Ring
3 37.0 5/8 37.0
4 36.0 1 30.0
Carbon Steel Raschig Ring 1 1/2 26.0
1/4 133.0 2 24.0
3/8 94.0 Plastic Pall Ring
1/2 75.0 5/8 7.25
5/8 62.0 1 5.50
3/4 52.0 1 1/2 4.75
1 39.0 2 4.50
1 1/2 42.0 3 4.50
2 37.0
3 25.0

PVElite - User Guide Liquid
Liquid
The Liquid Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the liquid which
exists in the current element.
Height/Length of Liquid
Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the liquid
section will be taken at half this height. This value is also used to calculate the operating
pressure at all points below the liquid.
Density of Liquid
Enter the density of the liquid. Some typical specific gravities and densities are shown
below in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you use another units sys-
tem.
Density
Name Gravity
(lb/ft3)
Ethane 0.3564 22.23

Propane 0.5077 31.66
N-butane 0.5844 36.44
Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11
N-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
N-hexane 0.6640 41.41
2-methypentane 0.6579 41.03

Liquid PVElite - User Guide
3-methylpentane 0.6689 41.71

2,2-dimethylbutane 0.6540 40.78
2,3-dimethylbutane 0.6664 41.56
N-heptane 0.6882 42.92
2-methylheptane 0.6830 42.59
3-methylheptane 0.6917 43.13
2,2-dimethylpentane 0.6782 42.29
2,4-dimethylpentane 0.6773 42.24
1,1-dimethylcyclopen- 0.7592 47.34
tane
N-octane 0.7068 44.08
Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79
Methylcyclopentane 0.7536 46.99
Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85
Methylcyclohexane 0.7740 48.27
Benzene 0.8844 55.15
Toluene 0.8718 54.37
Alcohol 0.7900 49.26
Ammonia 0.8900 55.50
Benzine 0.6900 43.03
Gasoline 0.7000 43.65
Kerosene 0.8000 49.89
Mineral oil 0.9200 57.37
Petroleum oil 0.8200 51.14

PVElite - User Guide Insulation
Insulation
The Insulation Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the insulation
which is attached to the current element.
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing

Enter the height or length of the insulation on this element. This value is used only to cal-
culate the weight of the insulation. For seismic calculations the weight center of the insu-
lated section will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have insulation on a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be
the length of the insulated section. Note also that the only distinction between insulation
and lining, from the program’s point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of the element,
while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to enter OD
fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing

Enter the thickness of the insulation or fireproofing.
Insulation Density
Enter the density of the insulation. The following table lists some typical densities, shown
in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units sys-
tem.
Density
Name
(lbs/ft3)
Calcium Silicate 22.5

Foam Glass 16.0
Mineral Wool 14.0
Glass Fiber 11.0
Asbestos 30.0
Careytemp 18.0
Kaylo 10 22.0
Perlite/Celo-temp 1500 23.0
Polyurethane 4.0
Styrofoam 3.0
Lining PVElite - User Guide
Lining
The Lining Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the lining which is
attached to the current element.
Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined sec-
tion will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have lining in a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the
length of the lined section.
Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing. Note that the only distinction between
insulation and lining, from the program’s point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of
the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to
enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing. The following table lists some typi-
cal densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using
another units system.
Density
Name
(lbs/ft3)
Alumina Brick 170.0

Fire Clay 130.0
High Alumina 130.0
Kaolin 135.0
Magnesite 180.0
Silica 110.0
Concrete 140.0
Cement 100.0

&KDSWHU
General Vessel Data
Global data edit mode allows the user to input and edit the data used by the whole vessel
for analysis and design purposes. Global data includes hydrotest information, structural
load cases, and program re-design instructions.
Rev. A
General Data Window
General Vessel Data 6-1

Design Data PVElite - User Guide
Design Data
Following is a discussion of the design data parameters that are used for overall vessel
analysis:

Enter the specified design internal pressure for the vessel. This value is used as general
design data and also to set the UG-99(b) footnote 34 hydrotest pressure.
Design Internal Temperature

This value is simply used by the input echo to help insure the correct design data was
entered. This value is not used by the analysis portion of the program.
Datum Line Distance

Enter the location of the datum line from the first elements from node. After this is done
you can use the list command to enter the locations of nozzles, platforms, etc. from the
datum line.
Hydrotest Type
The Internal Pressure Calculations report from PVElite will list hydrotest pressures for all
three test types described below. It is important to properly identify the information
requested throughout this input group. That is, even though “Hydrotest Test Position,”
“Projection from Top,” “Projection from Bottom,” and “Flange Distance to Top” are not
used for ASME UG-99(b) or for ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34, these data are necessary to
report the proper hydrostatic test pressure for ASME UG-99(c).
Select the hydrotest type. The analysis program provides three different ways to determine
hydrotest pressure:
1 - ASME UG-99(b)
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure for the
vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the
stress value S for the design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-
carbon steel vessels where the allowable stress changes with temperature starting even at a
somewhat low temperature.
2 - ASME UG-99(c)
The hydrotest pressure will be determined by multiplying the minimum MAP by 1.3 and
reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element or flange. If the vessel is tested
in the horizontal position, the hydrostatic head will be based on the maximum shell diam-
eter plus the “Projection from Top” plus the “Projection from Bottom” specified later in
this input group. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a vessel element sets the
minimum MAP, then the hydrostatic head is set by the distance of that element from the
top of the vessel plus the “Projection from Top.” If the vessel is tested in the vertical posi-
tion and a flange has the minimum MAP, the hydrostatic head is composed of the “Flange
Distance to Top” plus the “Projection from Top.”
6-2 General Vessel Data

PVElite - User Guide Design Data
3 - ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34

The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the “Design Internal Pressure” specified at the
beginning of this input group, multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the
test temperature to the stress value S for the design temperature.
Hydrotest Position
This input is required so that the total static head can be determined and subtracted in
accordance with UG-99(c). This field is used in conjunction with the “Projection from
Top,” “Projection from Bottom,” and “Flange Distance to Top” fields to determine the
total static head.
Select one of the following Hydrotest Positions.
• Vertical—the vessel would be tested in the upright or vertical position. Note that not
very many vessels are tested in the vertical position.
• Horizontal—this is the position for the majority of vessels tested. The vessel would
normally be on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal position (for a
horizontal vessel).
Projection from Top

Enter the distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the
highest flange in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test
positions) or to the maximum diameter of the vessel (for horizontal test positions) to deter-
mine the static head for the UG-99(c) hydrostatic test.
Projection from Bottom

Enter this distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the
lowest flange in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test
positions) or to the maximum vessel diameter (for horizontal test positions) to determine
the static head for the UG-99(c) hydrostatic test.
Min. Metal Temperature

Enter the specified minimum design metal temperature for the vessel. This value is listed
in the Internal Pressure Calculations report for comparison with the calculated UCS-66
minimum temperature.
Flange Distance to Top

If a flange controls the MAP of the vessel, the hydrostatic head associated with that flange
may be important in determining the overall MAP of the vessel. The value entered here
will be used by PVElite to calculate the hydrostatic head at this point and adjust the UG-
99(c) MAP for vertically tested vessels. Once the controlling flange is identified (usually
through a previous analysis) the distance from that flange to the top of the vessel is entered
in this field. If the vessel is to be tested in the vertical position in accordance with UG-
99(c), this value and the “Projection from Top” will be used to adjust hydrostatic test pres-
sure should a (the) flange govern.
Construction Type
Select the type of construction to be included on the name plate. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of construction are:

Design Data PVElite - User Guide
• Welded—Welded
• Press. Welded—Pressure Welded
• Brazed—Brazed
• Resist. Welded—Resistance Welded
Special Service
Select a type of special service in which the vessel will be used. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of special service are:
• None—None
• Lethal—Lethal Service
• Unfired Steam—Unfired Steam Boiler
• Direct Firing—Direct Firing
• Nonstationary—Nonstationary Pressure Vessel
Degree of Radiography
Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Options include:
• RT 1—When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not been
applied.
• RT 2—When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a)(5) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been
applied.
• RT 3—When the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW-
11(b).
• RT 4—When only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or when
none of the other requirements are applied.
Miscellaneous Weight
Many designers like to include extra weight to account for vessel attachments and inter-
nals not otherwise included in the models. The total weight of the vessel is multiplied by
1.0 plus this percent (i, e. 1.03, 1.05). The two most common choices are 3.0 or 5.0.
Use Higher Long. Stresses?

Entering Y (yes) will increase the allowable stresses for vessel loads which include wind
or earthquake by twenty percent. The ASME Code (Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph
UG-23(d)) allows the allowable stress for the combination of earthquake loading, or wind
loading with other loadings to be increased by a factor of 1.2.
Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N)

By default PVElite uses the hydrotest stress times the stress increase factor for occasional
loads ( times the joint eff. on the tensile side ). However, for stainless steel vessels this
value is often limited to 0.9 times the yield stress. In that instance you must enter in the

PVElite - User Guide Design Data
hydrotest allowable stress for the hydrotest. Then this field should be set to Y so that
PVElite will use the defined value without any modification.
Consider Vortex Shedding?

For vertical vessels which are susceptible to wind induced oscillations, check this field.
This will cause the program to compute fatigue stresses based on loads generated by wind
flutter. The program will then go on to compute the number of hours of safe operation
remaining under the wind vibration conditions.
User Defined MAWP/MAPnc

Normally PV Elite computes the MAWP and the MAPnc based on pressure ratings for the
elements and ANSI flanges. In some cases it may be necessary to override the program’s
generated results with a pre-defined value.
If this value is zero it will be ignored by the program. This is the default behavior.
User Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure

Normally the hydrostatic test pressure is computed by the program. It is then used to deter-
mine the stresses on the elements when subjected to this pressure. If this value is greater
than 0, PVElite will use this pressure plus the applicable hydrostatic head which will be
computed based on the hydrotest position. If this value is 0, the program will use the com-
puted value based on the hydrotest type and position.
Corroded Hydrotest?
By default PVElite uses the uncorroded wall thickness when the stresses on the elements
during the hydrotest are computed. In some cases it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel
after it has corroded. If you wish to use a corroded thickness in the calculations, check this
box. Please note that longitudinal stresses due to Hydrostatic test pressure will also be
computed in a similar manner.
Is This a Heat Exchanger

If the Dimensional Solutions 3D file interface button is checked, PV Elite will Rev. A
write out an ASCII text file that contains the geometry and loading information for
this particular vessel design. If this box is checked, the program will simply write
this data out to the Jobname.ini file created in the current working directory.

Installation Options PVElite - User Guide
Installation Options
The installation options shown below allow the specification of where the equipment such
as platforms, insulation, lining, etc. will be installed. This information is used to calculate
the center of gravity of the vessel in both the shop and the field (operating ) positions.
Additionally, when computing such items as the fabricated weight, operating weight,
empty weight, etc., PVElite will consider these detail weights as appropriate for the vari-
ous weight cases.
Installation and Miscellaneous Options
Platform Area Calculation Method

PVElite uses the area of the platforms in the computation of forces that are applied to the
vessel during the wind loading analysis. Unfortunately, there is no standard method for
computing the amount of area that a platform provides for wind load calculations. Select
one of the 4 options in the pull down box: This selection will be used to compute the wind
area for all platforms specified in this job.
Stiffener Type
For ASME VIII 1 and VIII 2 the program has the ability to determine the maximum stiff-
ener spacing and add rings to the model. If you have selected this position to model, it can
select an appropriate stiffener from the AISC database. The stiffener types are:
• Equal Angle
• Unequal Angle (hard way shown)
• Double Angles with large or small sides back to back
• Channels
• Wide Flanges
PVElite - User Guide Installation Options
• Structural Tees
• Bar
For the bar ring design, the program will design a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00.
The height of the ring is 10 times its thickness. The minimum ring width the program will
start out with is 0.5 inches or 12mm.
For Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way

If the stiffener above is an angle type, they are frequently rolled to have the strong axis of
the ring perpendicular to the vessel wall. If they are rolled the hardway check this box.
Bar Thickness to use Designing

When the bar ring option is selected the program must have a thickness to use when com-
puting a suitable ring. For the ring design, the program will generate a ring with a 10 to 1
aspect ratio. In other words, the width of the ring will be 10 times bigger.
This value can be left blank. If it is blank, the program will use a default thickness of 0.375
inches or 9 mm. When computing the ring width to meet the moment of inertia require-
ments.
Rigging Data
The rigging analysis calculates and locates the bending and shear stresses created during
erection process. Where the vessel is lifted from the horizontal position at two lifting
points up to the vertical position where the vessel is set onto the foundation. The safety of
the maximum combined stresses is also analyzed using the unity check method. This anal-
ysis however, does not evaluate the design of any rigging attachment such as, lugs, shack-
les, cables etc
Rigging analysis is performed when the vessel is in the horizontal position where the com-
binations of stresses are at its maximum. The torsional effect is not considered in this anal-
ysis. The vessel is erected using two lifting points where the tail and lifting lugs are
located. The design weight of the vessel is calculated by multiplying the erected empty
weight, including internals and externals, with an impact factor to simulate the initial lift.
The rigging analysis reports the field and design weight of the vessel, the center of gravity,
the reaction forces at the lifting points, the location for the maximum bending and shear
stresses, and the unity check. As a comparison, the allowable bending (per UG-23) and
shear (0.4 Sy @ ambient) stresses are also reported, and can be plotted with the fore-men-
tioned parameters.
The stresses are calculated in 1 foot increments along the vessel taking into account the
varying diameter and thickness of the shell. A circular cross sectional shape is assumed
throughout the vessel sections with no corrosion allowance included for the thicknesses.
Node numbering starts at the base of the vessel and ends at the top section of the vessel
where the straight line ended. For elliptical heads, the end node is the end of the straight-
line portion. Thus the total height of the vessel is the elevation of the last node.
Impact Factor
PVElite can perform a rigging (combined shear plus bending stress) analysis granted that Rev. A
the vessel has a support such as a skirt and the impact factor and lug elevations defined.

Installation Options PVElite - User Guide
When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor Rev. A
takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high
as 3.0 may be entered in. The impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the
vessel by the impact factor. If you do not wish to perform the rigging analysis, set the
impact factor to 0.
Lug Distances from Base

You will have to enter two distances (one in each field) to perform the rigging analysis.
These distances are measured from the bottom of the vertical vessel or from the left end of
the horizontal vessel. It does not matter which dimension goes in which box. The lesser
distance will be the minimum of the two values.
Select from Standard Bar Ring List

If this box is checked and the program is set to add reinforcing rings during runtime,
PVElite will check all rings from smallest to largest and determine the minimum ring that
will satisfy the moment of inertia requirements per UG-29(a) or Appendix 1-5 or 1-8 in
the case of cone cylinder junction ring design. A list of sizes is shown in the table below:

PVElite - User Guide Design Modification
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
If the user toggles on this button and the required element thickness for internal pressure
exceeds the user’s finished thickness for the element, the program will increase the user’s
finished thickness to meet or exceed the thickness required for internal pressure. PVElite
will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is activated in the program
configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the next 1/8 inch in English
units or to the next millimeter in metric units). The program will perform this calculation
automatically as the model data is being typed in. Check this box before any part of the
vessel has been modelled. If the given thickness is greater than the required thickness, then
the program will not alter the given value.
Note that during the input phase, the program cannot check the required thickness for
flanges. That check will be performed during the analysis phase.
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure

If this check box is checked the program will calculate the required thickness of each ele-
ment (or group of elements) and increase the given thickness appropriately for the external
pressure. Note that if the user selects this button, the program will not calculate stiffening
rings for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If
any of the elements have been thickened, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your
model will be updated with the current changes.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure

If the user toggles on this button, the program will calculate the location and size stiffen-
ing rings needed for the external pressure. Note that if the user selects this button, the pro-
gram will not modify thickness for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If
any rings have been added, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your model will be
updated with the current changes.
Please note that in order to do this the program computes the allowable length between
stiffeners. This result must come out to be some reasonable value. If the maximum stiff-
ened is too small, the program will not be able to add rings. In that case, you must increase
the thickness of the shell and try the design again. Also note that the heads must also be
properly designed for external pressure. Please verify that the thickness for external pres-
sure is adequate.
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress

If the user toggles on this button he program will calculate the required thickness of
each element (or group of elements) for longitudinal loadings (wind, earthquake,
weight of vertical vessels) and increase the given thickness appropriately for the
axial stress. PVElite will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is
activated in the program configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the
next 1/8 inch in English units or to the next millimeter in metric units).

Load Case PVElite - User Guide
Load Case
The program performs calculations for various combinations of internal pressure, external
pressure, hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic load. You can define up to twelve
combinations of these loadings for the program to evaluate. Load cases are defined by a
string that shows the loads to be added, i.e. “IP+OW+WI”, which would be the sum of
internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. Typical definitions for the load cases
are shown below, followed by the definition of the load case abbreviations:
• Load Case 1: NP+EW+WI+FW
• Load Case 2: NP+EW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 3: NP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 4: NP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 5: NP+HW+HI
• Load Case 6: NP+HW+HE
• Load Case 7: IP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 8: IP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 9: EP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 10: EP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 11: HP+HW+HI
• Load Case 12: HP+HW+HE
• Load Case 13: IP+WE+EW
• Load Case 14: IP+WF+CW
• Load Case 15: IP+VO+OW
• Load Case 16: IP+VE+OW
• Load Case 17: IP+VF+CW
Where:
NP = No Pressure
IP = Internal Pressure
EP = External Pressure
HP = Hydrotest Pressure
EW = Empty Weight
OW = Operating Weight
HW = Hydrotest Weight
WI = Wind Load
EQ = Earthquake Load
HE = Hydrotest Earthquake
HI = Hydrotest Wind
WE = Wind Bending Empty New and Cold
WF = Wind Bending Filled New and Cold
CW = Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
FS = Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Seismic)
FW = Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Wind)

PVElite - User Guide Load Case
If you checked the box to perform vortex shedding calculations, the following load case
descriptors may be used:
VO = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Ope)
VE = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Emp)
VF = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Test No CA.)
The live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for two conditions - operating and
hydrotest. In both cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads
are usually a fraction of the operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are
entered in the live load definitions.

Nozzle Design Modifications PVElite - User Guide
Nozzle Design Modifications

PVElite has three mutually exclusive options for determination of the pressure where the
nozzle is located. The fourth design option allows reinforcing calculations for the geome-
try to be made in the new and cold condition helping to satisfy hydrotest requirements.
The last option deals with compliance with nozzle design for wind and seismic consider-
ations. Check the option(s) you wish the program to use.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, M.A.W.P. + Static Head

This option computes the internal pressure on the nozzle on the bottom of the element
where the nozzle is located. This pressure is the MAWP of the vessel plus the static head
to the bottom of that element. Thus, the design pressure can vary for nozzles located on
different elements. This option is OK to use if you know for certain that your nozzle loca-
tions will not vary during the design process. If you use this option and a nozzle is lowered
in the vessel and under additional pressure due to liquid head, you need to rerun the analy-
sis in order to determine if your nozzle geometry is satisfactory.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Design Pressure + Static Head

This option computes the exact internal pressure at the nozzle location. Normally, this
option would be used for re-rating vessels. This would allow one to get the exact results
for each nozzle, because the static head on each nozzle is computed on an individual basis.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Overall MAWP + Static Head

This option computes one single design internal pressure for all of the nozzles located on
the vessel. If the nozzle location on a vessel changes due to a client request, there would be
no need to rerun nozzle calculations since the pressure used in the calculations would not
change. This design option is ideal for designing new vessels.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Consider MAP nc in Analysis

Some design specifications require that nozzle reinforcement calculations are performed
for the MAP new and cold condition. PVElite will check to see if the nozzle is reinforced
adequately using the MAPnc generated during the internal pressure calculations. When
the area of replacement calculations are made for this case, cold allowable stresses are
used and the corrosion allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for this case helps the ves-
sel to comply with UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your design
requirements to see if this case is required by your client.
Modify Tr based on the Maximum Stress Ratio

Some Nozzle designs need to comply with ASME Section VIII Division 1 paragraph UG-
22 which deals with supplemental loadings. One factor in ASME nozzle design is the
required thickness of the shell (tr). Usually internal pressure (hoop stress) governs. In
some cases, such as when a nozzle is located on a shell course at the bottom of a tall tower,
longitudinal stresses will govern. In this case the shell required thickness must be based on
longitudinal stresses and not the hoop stress. If you check this option, PVElite will look at
all of the defined load cases and select the highest stress ratio. It will then use this number
as a multiplier on the shell thickness. Thus the nozzle design is based on the precise load-
ing at the bottom of that shell course.

PVElite - User Guide Nozzle Design Modifications
Note Optionally, for full replacement options, you can type in your own value of tr for
each nozzle. That value will override this directive.
Consider Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design

For Div. 1 nozzles of integral construction, the Code in Code Case 2168 allows a different
set of rules to be used from those in UG-37. It if is within the project specifications to use
these rules check this box.
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings

If this box is checked and pad defined geometries are inadequately reinforced, PVElite
will determine the diameter and thickness of the pad required to reinforce the opening. If
the program has changed the pad data during the analysis, it will prompt you to reload the
file so that you can view the new changes. Note that this functionality is restricted to
ASME VIII analysis at this time.

Wind & Seismic Data PVElite - User Guide
Wind & Seismic Data

Wind & Seismic Data Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the wind code data and
the seismic code data for the current job. The wind code data and the seismic code data
will be used for the wind load and the earthquake analysis.
Wind & Seismic Data Edit Mode Window
Wind Data
Wind Design Code
Select one wind of the design codes:
• ASCE — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
The program implements ASCE 7-93.
• UBC — Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
• NBC — National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edi-
tion.
• User Defined Wind Profile. — Instead of supplying the wind parameters required by
the above codes, the user may specify the elevation vs. wind pressure directly.
• ASCE-1995/98 — The American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 1995/1998.
This revision includes a new calculation for the gust factor as well as the wind pres-
sure at height Z. These calculations are based on a 3 second gust.
• IS-875 — This is India’s National Standard Wind design code. The year of this code is
1987.
The remaining wind load data required by PVElite changes based on which Wind Design
Code is selected. These data requirements are reviewed here according to the design code
specification.

PVElite - User Guide ASCE Wind Data
ASCE Wind Data

Design Wind Speed
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical loca-
tion and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, Large city centers
2 Exposure B, Urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, Open terrain
4 Exposure D, Flat unobstructed coastal areas
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Percent Wind for Hydrotest

Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor

Enter the value of the importance factor that you wish the program to use. Please note the
program will use this value directly without modification.
In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11. It is taken from Table 5 of the ASCE stan-
dard.
Category 100 mi or more from Less than 100 miles from
Hurricane Oceanline Hurricane Oceanline
I 1.00 1.05
II 1.07 1.11
III 1.07 1.11
IV 0.95 1.00

ASCE Wind Data PVElite - User Guide
Category Classification
I Buildings and structures not listed below
II Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area.
III Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc.
IV Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure.
Note that most petrochemical structures are Importance Category I.
ASCE Roughness Factor

Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Roughness Factor (from ASCE 7-93, Table 12
Force Coefficients for Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures, Cf)
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth
2 Round, rough (D’/D = 0.02)
3 Round, very rough (D’/D = 0.08)
Where: D’ is the depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers and D is the
diameter or least horizontal dimension.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter. The value Cf will vary between 0.5 and 1.2 depending on the
type of surface and height to diameter ratio.

PVElite - User Guide UBC Wind Data
UBC Wind Data

Design Wind Speed
speed.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the UBC Exposure Factor as defined in Section 2312:
Entry Definition
2 Exposure B, Terrain with buildings, forest or surface irregularities

20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area
extending one mile or more from the site.
3 Exposure C, Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending
one-half mile or more from the site in any full quadrant.
4 Exposure D, The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of
80 m.p.h. or more. Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing
large bodies of water over one mile or more in width relative to any
quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from
the shoreline 1/4 mile or 10 times the building (vessel) height,
whichever is greater.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set
the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Base Elevation

UBC Wind Importance Factor

Enter the value of the UBC Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value
directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:

UBC Wind Data PVElite - User Guide
Entry Definition
1.15 Category I: Essential facilities
1.15 Category II: Hazardous facilities
1.0 Category III: Special occupancy structures
1.0 Category IV: Standard occupancy structures
Most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0. The four Occupancy Cat-
egories (I-IV) are defined in Table 23-K of the code.

PVElite - User Guide NBC Wind Data
NBC Wind Data

Design Wind Speed
speed.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, open or standard exposure
2 Exposure B, urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, centers of large cities
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Base Elevation

Critical Damping Ratio

The dynamic gust evaluation in NBC requires that the user assign a critical damping ratio
for the tower. NBC recommends the use of the value 0.0016 (dimensionless) for tall metal
unlined stacks, but says that these values will go up for shorter towers. We recommend the
following:
Entry Definition
0.0016 for tall towers ( L/D > 7 )
0.0032 for moderately tall towers
0.0064 for short towers ( L/D < 1) or horizontal

NBC Wind Data PVElite - User Guide
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Roughness Factor as found in Figure B-15:
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth surface
2 Round, rough surface (rounded ribs, h = 2%d)
3 Round, very rough surface (sharp ribs, h = 8%d)
increased wind diameter.

PVElite - User Guide ASCE 95 Wind Data
ASCE 95 Wind Data

Design Wind Speed

speed.
Base Elevation
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, large city centers
2 Exposure B, urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, open terrain
4 Exposure D, flat unobstructed costal areas
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.

ASCE 95 Wind Data PVElite - User Guide
Importance Factor
This value varies between .087 and 1.15 and is found in Table 6-2 of ASCE 95.
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the Roughness Factor as found in Table 6-7:
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth surface
2 Round, rough surface
3 Round, very rough surface
increased wind diameter.
Height of Hill (H)

Height of Hill or Escarpment relative to the upwind terrain.
Distance to Site (x)

Enter the distance ( upwind or downwind ) from the crest to the building site
Height above Ground

ASCE defines this value as height above local ground level.
Crest Distance
This is the distance upwind of the crest where the difference in ground elevation is half the
hill or escarpment height.
Type of Hill
• 0 - none
• 1 - 2-D ridge
• 2 - 2-D escarpment
• 3 - 3-D axisymmetric hill
Damping Factor
Enter the structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping). The damping
factor is used in the calculation of the gust response factor. Additionally, if you wish to run
another case empty or filled (or both), specify the values of the damping factor (beta) for
these cases. By entering these values PVElite will compute the gust response factor for
each case and the subsequent wind loads. The results will be displayed in the Wind Load
Calculation and Wind Shear and Bending reports.

PVElite - User Guide ASCE 95 Wind Data
Technical Note Computation of h/d from table 6-7
For vessels that have a constant diameter the value of h/d is straightforward. The ratio is
merely the total height of the vessel divided by the insulated outside diameter. This com-
putation is more difficult for vessels of more than 1 diameter (i.e.: vessels that have
cones). The first step is to compute the total height h. Next the total cross sectional area of
the vessel is computed. To get a properly weighted value for h/d we square the maximum
height and divide by the total area. Finally to get Cf we index into the table as needed and
interpolate for the final value. If you have a shape factor specified and do not wish to use
the computed value, specify your own shape factor in the Tools, Configuration option
from the Main Menu.

IS 875 Wind Code PVElite - User Guide
IS 875 Wind Code

speed.
Base Elevation
Wind Zone Number

India is divided into 6 wind zones. Refer to figure 1 in the IS-875 code to determine which
wind zone the vessel will operate in. The program will gather the basic wind speed based
on the zone. However, this value can be overridden by typing in a basic wind speed in the
Design Wind Speed field.
Risk Factor
This is the value of K1 and it varies between 1.05 and 1.08 depending on which zone has
been entered above.
Terrain Category
The terrain category varies between 1 and 4.
Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions including open sea coasts and treeless
plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights between 1.5 to 10 meters. This
category is generally used for design purposes.
Category 3
This is terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions which have buildings up to 10
M in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns and industrial areas fully or partially
developed.
Category 4
Terrain consisting of large closely spaced obstructions. This category includes large urban
centers and well developed industrial centers.

PVElite - User Guide IS 875 Wind Code
Equipment Class
This field accepts a value of 1, 2, or 3.
Class A - 1
Class B - 2
Class C - 3
Consider Gust Response Factor

If you wish to include the gust response factor per IS-875, check this box. However, since
this factor increases the wind load 3 to 6 times, it may lead to a very conservative wind
design.

User-Defined Wind Profile PVElite - User Guide
User-Defined Wind Profile

Wind Profile Data

With this selection, PVElite will forego all code calculations and simply use the user’s
profile of height versus wind pressure. Enter the profile in the area below the standard
wind design code data. Enter the height above grade (in length units) in the left cell, and
the wind pressure at that height in the right cell. If you have more cells available than you
need to describe the profile, simply enter zeros in all the remaining cells. Zero elevation
corresponds to the bottom of the skirt or leg supports for a vertical vessel and to the bot-
tom of the saddle which supports a horizontal vessel.
Note When entering this data, you need to multiply the wind pressure at each elevation
by the shape factor you wish to use. If you do not do this, your wind loads will be
higher (conservative) than they really are.
The first Elevation field should not be zero. If it is zero the program will not compute the
wind loads on the following elements. The input should follow the convention below.

PVElite - User Guide Seismic Data
Seismic Data
Seismic Design Code
Select the design code to use for seismic calculations:
• ASCE-88 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
released in 1988.
• ASCE-93 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
released in 1993. The new ASCE 7 earthquake standards released in 1993 are signifi-
cantly more involved than the previous standards, and are also more strictly limited to
buildings, and thus not as easily applied to vessels. Temporarily the program does not
implement the complete dynamic analysis according to this standard. However the
program does address the computation of the element mass multiplier as outlined on
page 62 of the standard. In effect, the factors Av, Cc, P, and ac are multiplied together
and then by the weight of the element to obtain the lateral force on the element. The
program then computes the moments on the tower based on these results. One should
have a good understanding of this code before using it.
• UBC — Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
• NBC — National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edi-
tion.
• IS-1893 RSM — India's seismic design code based on the response spectrum method.
• IS-1893 SCM — India's seismic design code based on the seismic coefficient method.
• ASCE-95 — American Society of Civil Engineers 1995 edition. The methodology of
this calculation is very similar to other earthquake codes. Essentially the base shear is
computed based on paragraph 9.2.3.4 and the paragraphs which proceed it. The base
shear is then distributed to the elements according to the equation 9.2.3.4-2 on page 70
of the standard.
• UBC97 — Uniform Building Code. The 1997 version of this code is implemented.
• G Loading — Acceleration of the vessel based on a fraction of gravity. Rev. A
• ASCE 7-98 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI
A58.1) released in 1998.
Rev. A
• IBC-2000 — International Building Code released in 2000.
• Response Spectrum —The response spectrum analysis allows the use of modal time Rev. A
history analysis. The general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the
ASCE 7-98 or IBC 2000 Codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program,
such as the 1940 Earthquake El Centro and various spectra from the United States
National Regulatory Commission Guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is user-
defined, the table of points that define the response spectra must be entered in the
table, in the appropriate units. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more
accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually the computed
loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using the conventional Building
Code techniques.

ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data PVElite - User Guide
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data

Importance Factor
Enter the value of ASCE 7-88 Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this
value directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 22, Occupancy Importance Factor, I (Earthquake Loads) of
the ASCE standard. Building categories are defined in Table1 of the standard.
Entry Definition
1.00 Category I: Buildings not listed below
1.25 Category II: High occupancy buildings
1.50 Category III: Essential facilities
0.00 Category IV: Low hazard buildings
Note that most petrochemical structures are Importance I.
Soil Type
Enter an integer indicating the Soil Profile Coefficient, S found in Table 24 of the stan-
dard. Soil Profiles are identified in Section 9.4.2 of the standard. Note that where soil
properties are not known, soil profiles S2 or S3 shall be used, whichever produces the
larger value of CS. (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the standard.)
Entry Definition
1 Soil Profile S1: Rock or stiff soil conditions (S Factor = 1.0)
2 Soil Profile S2: Deep cohesion less deposits or stiff clay conditions
(S Factor = 1.2)
3 Soil Profile S3: Soft- to medium-stiff clays and sands
(S Factor = 1.5)

PVElite - User Guide ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data
Horizontal Force Factor

Enter the seismic force factor per ANSI A58.1 Table 24. Typical values for this factor are
as follows:
Entry Definition
1.33 Buildings with bearing walls
1.00 Buildings with frame systems
2.50 Elevated tanks
2.00 Other structures
Note that the value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks sup-
ported by structural steel or legs.
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest

Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earth-
quake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See ASCE 7-88 Figures 14 & 15 to select the
appropriate zone. Values for Seismic Coefficient, Z are found in Table 21 of the standard.
Zone Definition
0 Zone 0: Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 1/8)
1 Zone 1: Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 3/16)
2 Zone 2: New England, Carolinas, Ozarks, valley area west of the

Rockies and the Pacific Northwest. (Z = 3/8)
3 Zone 3: Sierras. (Z = 3/4)
4 Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 1)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 4 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.

ASCE 7-93 Seismic Data PVElite - User Guide
ASCE 7-93 Seismic Data

Seismic Coefficient Av
Enter Av, the seismic coefficient representing the effective peak velocity-related accelera-
tion from Section 9.1.4.1 of the code. This value may be obtained from the map on pages
36 and 37 of the standard. In general this value ranges from 0.05 (low incidence of earth-
quake) to 0.4 (high incidence of earthquake).
Seismic Coefficient Cc
Enter Cc, the system seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical components from
Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. For tanks, vessels and heat exchangers this value is
normally taken as 2.0.
Performance Criteria Factor P

Enter P, the performance criteria factor from Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. This fac-
tor depends on the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group which is defined in Section 9.1.4.2 of
the standard.
Entry Definition
1.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III: Essential facilities required for
post-earthquake recovery
1.0 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II: Buildings that have a substantial
public hazard due to occupancy or use
0.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I: All other buildings

Amplification Factor ac
Enter ac, the attachment amplification factor determined in accordance with ASCE 7-93
Table 9.8-3. Values for this entry may be 1.0 or 2.0 depending on the relationship between
the fundamental period of the vessel and the fundamental period of its supporting struc-
ture.

PVElite - User Guide UBC Seismic Data
UBC Seismic Data

Importance Factor
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
Entry Definition
1.25 Category I: Essential facilities
1.25 Category II: Hazardous facilities
1.00 Category III: Special occupancy structures
1.00 Category IV: Standard occupancy structures
Note that most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0.
Soil Type
Select the soil type (S1 to S4) defined in Table 23-J of the code. Note that where soil prop-
erties are not known, soil profile S3 shall be used.
Soil Definition
1 Soil Profile S1:Rock (S Factor = 1.0)
2 Soil Profile S2:Dense or stiff soil (S Factor = 1.2)
3 Soil Profile S3:Not more than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 1.5)
4 Soil Profile S4:More than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 12.0)
Horizontal Force Factor

Enter an integer corresponding to the factor RW found in UBC Table 23-Q. RW is used in
determining the seismic force factor for nonbuilding structures. As per UBC: tanks, ves-
sels or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs have RW = 3 and distributed mass
cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt-supported vertical vessels
have RW = 4.


UBC Seismic Data PVElite - User Guide
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appro-
priate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
Zone Definition
0 Zone 0:Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 0.00)
1 Zone 1:Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 0.075)
2 Zone 2a:New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks. (Z = 0.15)
3 Zone 2b:Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest
(Z = 0.20)
4 Zone 3:Sierras. (Z = 0.30)
5 Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 0.40)

PVElite - User Guide NBC Seismic Data
NBC Seismic Data

Importance Factor
Enter the value of the NBC Importance Factor found in Sentence 4.1.9.1 (10). Please note
the program will use this value directly without modification.
Entry Definition
1.5 Post-disaster buildings
1.3 Schools
1.0 All other buildings
Note that most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0.
Soil Type
Select the soil factor (From Table 4.1.9C) for the site:
Soil Definition
1 Category 1:From rock to stiff fine-grained soils up to 15 m deep
2 Category 2:From compact coarse-grained soils to soft fine-grained

soils up to 15 m deep
3 Category 3:Very loose and loose coarse-grained soils with depth
greater than 15 m
4 Category 4:Very soft and soft fine-grained soils with depth greater
than 15 m
Force Modification Factor

Enter an integer to indicate the type of lateral load resisting system. This value will be
used to set the Force Modification Factor (R) per Table 4.1.9.B and sentences 4.1.9.1 (8)
and 4.1.9.3 (3):
Entry Definition
1 Case 18 - Elevated tanks (such as equipment on legs). (R = 1.0)
2 Case 6 - Ductile structures (such as towers on skirts). (R = 1.5)
Note Elevated tank analysis also includes the special provisions of sentence 4.1.9.3 (3).

NBC Seismic Data PVElite - User Guide

Acceleration Zone
Select the acceleration-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and
acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC.
Here are some examples of each zone:
Entry Acceleration-Related Zone
0 Calgary, Alberta
1 Toronto, Ontario
2 Saint John, New Brunswick
3 Varennes, Quebec
4 Vancouver, British Columbia
5 Duncan, British Columbia
6 Port Hardy, British Columbia

PVElite - User Guide NBC Seismic Data
Velocity Zone
Select the zone indicating the velocity-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the
velocity and acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supple-
ment to NBC. Here are some examples of each zone:
Zone Velocity-Related Zone
0 Steinbach, Manitoba
1 Calgary, Alberta
2 Montreal, Quebec
3 Quebec City, Quebec
4 Dawson, Yukon
5 Victoria, British Columbia
6 Destruction Bay, Yukon

India’s Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM PVElite - User Guide
India’s Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM

Importance Factor
The importance factor is taken from table 4 in the IS-1893 standard. This value ranges
from a maximum of 6.0 to 1.0.
• 6.0—A value typically used in nuclear applications.
• 2.0—Dams of all types and lethal service applications
• 1.5—Used in the design of important structures such as hospitals, tanks, water towers,
and large assembly structures.
• 1.0—All others
Soil Factor
The soil factor (Beta) is taken from Table 3 of the IS-1893 seismic design code. This value
ranges between 1 and 1.5.
• Type I soils and hard rock should have a value of 1.
• Type II soils should also use a value of 1 except for well foundations or isolated RCC
footings without tiebeams or unreinforced strip foundations which receive a value of
2.0.
• Type III soils can receive a value between 1.0 and 1.5.
Zone Number
The zone number ranges between 1 and 5 and depends on where the vessel will operate in
India. You can determine the zone from a colored map of which is Figure 1 in IS 1893.
Period of Vibration
This field is optional. PVElite computes the natural frequency of the vessel and can thus
compute the period of vibration. If this field is not 0 the program will use the entered
value. This value is used in conjunction with Beta in order to determine Sa/g.
Damping Factor
This value which is used with the period of vibration to determine Sa/g. Values of damp-
ing in the IS 1893 standard are 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. The program will interpolate for
intermediate values in between 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. Extreme values will be used if a
damping factor is entered which is outside the range above.

PVElite - User Guide ASCE-95 Seismic Data
ASCE-95 Seismic Data

Importance Factor
ASCE-95 does not address an importance factor. However, this value is multiplied times
the other values to compute the base shear. Thusly, this entry can be used as a scale factor
for the base shear. If you do not wish to use this value simply enter a value of 1.0.
Force Factor ( R )
This value is taken from table 9.2.7.5. For vertical vessels, towers, stacks etc. this value is
2.0.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a func-
tion of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically this will be a given value. How-
ever, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a func-
tion of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically, this will be a given value. How-
ever, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
The help facility in PVElite contains the above referenced tables.

UBC 1997 Earthquake Data PVElite - User Guide
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data

UBC Earthquake Importance Factor

This value is taken from Table 16-K of the UBC 1997 standard. The following is the con-
text of Table 16-K.
Category Value
1 - Essential facilities 1.25
2 - Hazardous facilities 1.25
3 - Special occupancy structures 1.0
4 - Standard occupancy structures 1.0
UBC Seismic Coefficient CA

Enter the value of CA per the project specifications and table 16-Q of UBC 1997 edition.
This value is a function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient
ranges from 0.44 to 0.06. In zone 4 this value is also a function of Na.
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV

Enter the value of CV per the project specifications and table 16-R of UBC 1997 edition.
This value is a function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient
ranges from 0.96 to 0.06. In zone 4 this value is also a function of Nv.
UBC Near Source Factor

This factor is only used in UBC Seismic Zone 4. This value ranges from 1 to 2 and is a
function of the distance relative to the seismic source.
UBC Seismic Zone

See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The zone establishes the Seis-
mic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
• Zone 0 - Gulf and prairies (Z=0.00)
• Zone 1 - Rockies and Appalachian areas (Z=0.075)
• Zone 2a - New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks (Z=0.15)
• Zone 2b - Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest (Z=0.20)
• Zone 3 - Sierras (Z=0.30)
• Zone 4 - California fault areas (Z=0.40)

PVElite - User Guide UBC 1997 Earthquake Data
Note that Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates
the greatest chance of an earthquake.
UBC Horizontal Force Factor

Enter the seismic force factor R per UBC Table 16-P 1997 edition:
• 2.2 - Tanks on braced or unbraced legs
• 2.9 - Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt
supported vertical vessels.
R is defined as the numerical coefficient representative of the inherent overstrength and
global ductility of lateral force resisting systems.

Seismic Load Input in G’s PVElite - User Guide
Seismic Load Input in G’s

Enter the value of g’s that your vessel will be subjected to in the specified direction. For
vertical vessels, the horizontal component used will be the maximum of the Gx and Gz
values. The horizontal force computed will be equal to the element’s weight times this
maximum G factor. This force times its distance to the support will be computed and
summed with all of the others. The Y component is also considered. This value is usually
2/3 of the Gx or Gz value, but note however any of these values can be zero.
For horizontal vessels, the lateral (Gz) and longitudinal (Gx) directions are considered
independently. The vertical load component (Gy) acting on the saddle supports is also
computed.
Typical values of G loads are from 0 to 0.4.

PVElite - User Guide IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters
Rev. A IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters

Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the
International Building Code 2000 (which happens to mirror those of ASCE 7).
EarthQuake Parameters Ss and Sl

The values for Ss and Sl are taken from the ASCE 7-98 / IBC 2000 publication. These fac-
tors are for short and long periods (0.2 and 1.0). These tables are found on pgs. 100 - 117
(ASCE 98), page 351 (IBC) publication.
Response Modification Factor R

Enter the value from table 9.5.2.2 (ASCE) 1617.6 (IBC) as required. R is usually equal to
2.5 for inverted pendulum systems and cantilevered column systems. For elevated tanks
use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
Importance Factor
This is the occupancy importance factor as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The
importance factor accounts for loss of life and property. This value typically ranges
between 1.0 and 1.5.
Moment Reduction Factor Tau

This value is used to reduce the moment at each level. A value greater than one will scale
the moments up, while a value that is less than one will lower the moments. We suggest a
value of 1.0. This value should not be less than 0.8.
Seismic Design Category

Select an appropriate category from the pulldown. The choices are A through F. The pro-
gram uses these values only to check the minimum value of Cs per equation 9.5.3.2.1-4
(ASCE), 1615.1.1 (IBC). This additional check is only performed if the Seismic Design
Category is E or F.
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv

Enter the coefficient from table 9.4.1.2.4A or 9.4.1.2.4B (ASCE), 1615.1.2(1) or
1615.1.2(2) (IBC) as required

IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters PVElite - User Guide
Rev. A
Table—9.4.1.2.4.A Values of Fa as a Function of Site Class and Mapped Short-Period
Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration
Site Class Ss<+0.25 Ss=0.5 Ss=0.75 Ss=1.0 Ss>1.25b
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 a
F a a a a a
Table—9.4.1.2.B (ASCE) 1615.2(2) (IBC), Values of Fv as a function of Site Class and

Mapped 1-Second Period Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration
Site Class Sl<+0.1 Sl=0.2 Sl=0.3 Sl=0.4 Sl>0.5b
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 a
F a a a a a
Note For intermediate values, the higher value of the straight line interpolation shall be
used to determine the value of Ssor Sl.
a
Site specific geo-technical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be
performed.
b
Site specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of
than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.

PVElite - User Guide Response Spectrum
Rev. A
Response Spectrum
Selecting this method performs a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loading based
upon the selected seismic Response Spectrum.
Initially, the vessel is modeled as a 2- dimensional structure (note that for asymmetric leg
arrangements, the horizontal direction of interest is taken as that corresponding to the
weakest axis of the arrangement). Next an eigensolution is performed on the vessel, which
determines system mode shapes and modal natural frequencies (all modes with natural fre-
quencies up through 100 HZ are calculated). The seismic response of each mode is then
extracted from the Response Spectrum according to the natural frequency of each mode,
and then adjusted according to the mode’s "participation factor". The system response is
then determined by combining all of the modal responses.
For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical
static equivalent method. Usually the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those
computed using conventional building Code techniques.
Seismic for Hydrotest

hydrotest. Although you cannot predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
Response Spectrum Name

The following seismic response spectra are available:

Response Spectrum PVElite - User Guide
User Defined
This option allows the user to enter a custom seismic response spectrum of type Frequency
or Period vs. Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration (see instructions below). The same
spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
El Centro
This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California earthquake,
North-South component, 5-10% damping as described in Introduction to Structural
Dynamics by John Biggs. This spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical
directions.
ASCE
modal analysis procedure of ASCE Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is a built
according to the ASCE-7 Section 9.4.1.2.6, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat
acceleration of 0.2S
IBC
modal analysis procedure of the International Building Code 2000 (which happen to mir-
ror those of ASCE-7). The horizontal spectrum is built according to IBC-2000 Section
1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2 (as per IBC-2000
Section 1617. 1).
1.60D.5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D2
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 2 % of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
1.60D5
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
1.60D7
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 7% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-

1.60D10
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 10% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
Importance Factor
This is used for the ASCE and IBC options. FOr ASCE, this is the I, the occupancy impor-
tance factor determined from ASCE-7 Section 9.14. For IBC, this is the Ie, the occupancy
importance factor in accordance with IBC 1616.2.
Shock Scale X|Y dir

This is used for User defined, El Centro, and the 1.60Dxx spectra; and is used to scale the
horizontal and vertical spectra respectively. For example, many seismic specifications
require that the vertical spectrum be identical to, but with 2/3 of the magnitude, of the hor-
izontal spectrum. This corresponds to an X scale of 1.0 and a Y scale of 0.6667.
Traditionally in the analysis of vertical vessels, the component in the vertical direction is
typically ignored. If you wish to do so, enter a value of 0 in the Y direction field.
Zero Period Acceleration

This is used to scale the normalized 1.60 Dxx spectra. The Zero Period Acceleration corre-
sponds to the acceleration of the rigid (high frequency) portion of the spectrum, which
usually corresponds to the maximum ground acceleration expected at the site.
Combination Method
Modal responses must be combined in a way that most accurately captures the statistical
correlation of the responses to each other. The available options are:
• SRSS: This method performs a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares combination of
the modal results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be
uncorrelated with, or totally unrelated to, each other. If the ASCE or IBC method has
been chosen, modal combinations will automatically be performed using this method.
This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close fre-
quencies, since those modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approx-
imately the same time during the load profile.
• Group: This method performs a group combination method as described in the United
States National Regulatory Commission’s Regulatory Guide 1.92 - responses of
modes with natural frequencies within 10% of each other are combined using the
Absolute Value method, while those sums are combined with each other and with
m0ore far-flung modes, using the SRSS method. This simulates a response where the

results of similar modes are assumed to be correlated, while those of all dissimilar
modes are assumed to be uncorrelated.
• Absolute: This method performs an Absolute Value combination of the modal results.
This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be correlated with
each other.
This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load.
This is usually overly-conservative, since modes with different natural frequencies
will probably experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load pro-
file.
Acc.Based Factor Fa:

This factor is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC-
2000 it is determined from Table 1615.1.2(1). Typical values are 0.8 through 2.5 and
above. For more information on the values of Fa refer to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters
in this chapter.
Acc Based Factor Fv:

This factor is required for ASCE - 7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC-
2000 it is determined from Table 1615.1.2(2). Typical value are 0.8 through 3.5 and
above. For more information on the values of Fv refer to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters
in this chapter.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss:

This factor, the "mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration
at short periods" is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1, while
for IBC-2000 it is determined from Section 1615.1. Typical values are 0.0 through 2.0g.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl:

This factor, the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration
at a period of 1 second", is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizon-
tal response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1,
while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Section 1615.1. Typical values are 0.0 through
1.5g.
Response Modification R:
This factor is required for ASDCE-7 and IBC, and is used to reduce the spectrum
response. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is deter-
mined from Table 1617.6 Typical values are 1.25 through 8.0.
For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and oth-
ers use a value of 3.0.

Coefficient Cd:
This factor, the "deflection amplification factor", is used to scale up the calculated seismic
displacements. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is
determined from Table 1617.6. Typical values are 1.25 through 6.5.
Range Type:
User Defined spectra may be enter with a range X axis representing either Frequency or
Period. In either case, the data points should be entered with ascending range values.
Note A zero entry for either Frequency or Period is invalid. Interpolation will be made
linearly for intermediate range values. Data points defining the spectrum can be
entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Ordinate Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with an ordinate Y axis representing Displacement,
Velocity, or Acceleration entered in units of Diameter, Diameter /second, of G’s respec-
tively. Interpolation will be made linearly for intermediate Ordinate values. Data points
defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Include Missing Mass Components:

Since only a limited number of modes of vibration i.e., only those with natural frequencies
up to 100 HZ or so are used in the analysis, the entire mass of the structure doesn’t get
considered in the seismic analysis. Clicking this box causes PVElite to estimate the contri-
bution of the neglected modes of vibration and add that to the dynamically calculated
response.
Note Selecting this option should always lead to a more conservative result.


&KDSWHU
PVElite Analysis
Once all the data for the vessel model and analysis have been entered and corrected, the
model is ready for analysis. The pull-down menu under Analyze shows two options:
• Analyze
• Error Check Only
Error Check Only will review all the data and produce an output report listing any errors
that are found. These messages can be examined through the Output - Review option. If
Analyze is selected, PVElite will also run through the error checker but then continue on
(if no errors are found) through the complete analysis.
The analysis program is the heart of the PVElite system. All the data entered into the
model is used by the analysis program to evaluate or design the pressure vessel. In any
given analysis there will be between 16 and 20 analysis steps. As the program completes
each calculation, important information from the step is displayed on the screen. The
screen display at the completion of the internal pressure calculations, for example, lists
both the given element thickness and the required thickness for each element in the vessel.
The program waits for a user response before clearing the screen and moving on to the
next analysis step. The user may respond by continuing on to the next step, continue non-
stop through the remainder of all analysis steps, or quit the analysis. The results of the
analysis are stored in two separate files on the hard disk. The text results of the job are
held in a file with the extension .TAB (e.g. the jobname VES01 will have an input file
named VES01.PVI and a text results file of VES01.TAB) The output processor replaces
this .TAB file with a .T80 file (VES01.T80). The .T80 file contains a complete report for
each analysis step for inspection and printing through the Review processor. The analysis
also creates a .PVR file (e.g.. VES01.PVR); this file is used by the output Review proces-
sor for component analysis. The program transfers to the Review processor at the comple-
tion of the analysis.
PVElite not only analyzes vessels, it also designs vessel walls for pressures and loads. In
addition to increasing the vessel wall thickness, the program can instead introduce stiff-
ener rings to accommodate external pressures. The program directives for these design
modifications are set in each job in the Design Data section of Global Data. In increasing
the wall thickness to meet the required values, PVElite can either set the thickness to the
PVElite Analysis 7-1

exact requirement, or, round up to the next nominal value (1/16 inch in English units or 1
mm in metric units). This switch, too, is a setting in the Configuration option under Utility.
If PVElite’s design process changes any of the original input, the program will automati-
cally erase the current output report and return to the beginning of the analysis and restart
the run. All results will reflect the design changes, from the input echo to the added dead-
weight. The user’s original input, however, will not be changed. If a design flag is turned
on and the required thickness is less than the entered thickness, PVElite will increase the
thickness as needed and continue.
7-2 PVElite Analysis

PVElite - User Guide Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Re-
Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results

Each of these steps calculates and displays specific results of the vessel analysis. Here is a
brief description of the key analysis steps:
Step 0: Error Checking

Most of the errors that are easily made will have already been caught by the input pro-
gram. However, there are some errors which can only be discovered after the analysis
begins. There are also some warnings that may be of help to the user. This first routine
check creates a report in the output. If any of the input errors would prevent the program
from running, execution stops right here. Check the output to determine the exact error
discovered by the program.
Step 1: Input Echo

PVElite provides a very complete listing of your input. This includes the geometry and
materials for each element (head, shell, cone, flange, skirt, etc.) and the information for
any details attached to that element.
Step 2: XY Coordinate Calculations

The program simply calculates the X and Y locations of the first end of every element.
Step 3: Internal Pressure Calculations

The geometry, material, and loading data from your model are used to calculate the
required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each element (except
skirts and flanges). The calculations are done using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Divi-
sion 1 rules, or the British Standard PD:5500 rules. The internal design pressure at any
point is taken to be the given design pressure for that element, plus the pressure due to liq-
uid head, if any.
If you checked the design flag ‘increase thickness for internal pressure’ and any element is
too thin for the given pressure, the program will automatically (or under interactive con-
trol) increase the thickness of the element. There is a computation control (under Utilities
on the Main Menu) that allows you to increase the element thickness to exactly that
required, or to round the thickness up to the next nominal size.
If the program has increased the thickness, it will recalculate all the required thicknesses
and maximum allowable working pressures for the vessel, and create a new table showing
these results.
After the internal pressure calculation is complete, PVElite prints the formulas and substi-
tutions, as well minimum design metal temperatures for the elements.
Step 4: Hydrotest calculations

The user specifies what kind of hydrotest (and/or the hydrotest pressure) on the global
input screens. The program uses this information to calculate the maximum allowed
hydrotest pressure and required thickness at the given pressure for each element.
Step 5: External Pressure calculations

Two of the three key variables for external pressure calculations are explicitly defined by
the user: diameter and thickness. The third variable, length of section, is calculated by the

Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results PVElite - User Guide
program for the given geometry. Thus if the vessel has two heads and some number of
cylindrical elements with no stiffening rings, the program will calculate the design length
for each cylinder using the full length of the vessel plus 1/3 the depth of the heads. If there
are stiffening rings, the program will calculate an appropriately shorter value.
The program displays the formulas and substitutions for the external pressure calculations
on each element. Then the same results are displayed in tabular form.
If the element is not thick enough for the external pressure (and you checked the design
boxes in the input) the program will allow you to increase the thickness and/or add stiffen-
ing rings (which are created automatically and added to your model). If the thickness is
increased the program has to go all the way back to step 3. For rings it simply repeats this
step with the new lengths.
British Standard PD:5500

When performing the PD:5500 external pressure calculations, the program first computes
the length of section for the given geometry. The length of section is either the distance
between stiffeners, or, if there are no stiffeners, it is the full length of the vessel plus 0.4
times the depth of the heads.
Using the length of section computed, the program first tests to see whether the thickness
of the unsupported cylinder (or distance between supports) is satisfactory for the given
pressure. A value of Pmax is determined.
If there are stiffeners, then the program performs the calculations described in section
3.6.2.3. The program first performs the computations described in Method A, and then
performs the more rigorous calculations described in Method B. For each of these meth-
ods (and each value of n), a value of Pn and Fn are obtained.
Pn is the elastic instability pressure of the stiffened cylinder or cone. The value of Pn must
not be less than 1.8*Pext in the case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2.0*Pext in
the case of cold formed stiffeners.
Fn is the maximum stress in the stiffener flange divided by the yield stress of the stiffener.
A value for Fn is computed for both fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and cold formed
stiffeners. These values must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Step 6: Weight of Elements

Element weights are calculated in both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. Note that
for heads the distance given in the input program is taken as the length of the straight
flange on the head. This step also calculates the volume of the element.
Step 7: Weight of Details

Each detail has a separate weight calculation. Of note is the fact that partial volumes of
liquid in both heads and cylinders and in both the horizontal and vertical directions are
correctly calculated.
Step 8: ANSI Flange MAWP

If you entered nozzles, you specified the material and class of the attached flanges.
PVElite has the full ANSI flange tables built in, and tells you the rating of the flanges at
the operating temperature.

Steps 9 and 10: Total weight and detail moment

Several weight cases are calculated including: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The vari-
ous detail weights/loads are included in the following cases:
Detail: Empty Operating Hydrotest
Saddle 9 9 9
Platform 9 9 9
Packing 9
Liquid 9
Insulation 9 9 9
Lining 9 9 9
Rings 9 9 9
Nozzles 9 9 9
Trays 9
Legs 9 9 9
Lugs 9 9 9
Weight 9 9 9
Forces/Moments 9
This step also calculates the moment due to individual detail which may not be on the cen-
terline of the vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the
support. The vertical force and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated
for the ‘one support’ cases (skirts, legs, lugs) and the vertical force at each support is cal-
culated when there are two saddle supports.
Note : In addition to computing the above weights PVElite also computes the fabricated
weight, shop test weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test
weight. The computed weights may or may not include removable or field installed items
such as packing and other details. You can specify where these details are to be installed
(either shop or field) in the Global Input. Simply switch to the global input screen and
click the Installation Miscellaneous Options button located on the button bar at the top of
the screen. By default the program assumes that all details will be installed in the shop and
calculate these various weights based on that assumption.
The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels
on saddle supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight
force at the ends or in the middle.
Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at
the support. If there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be nega-
tive.
The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually
quite small (except in the case of a large applied moment).

Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results PVElite - User Guide
Step 11: Natural Frequency Calculation

PVElite uses two classical solution methods to determine the first order natural frequen-
cies of vessels. For vertical vessels, the program uses the Freese method, which is com-
monly used in industry. For horizontal vessels a similar method attributed to Rayliegh and
Ritz is used. Each method works by calculating the static deflection of the vessel (for ver-
tical, the vessel as a horizontal cantilever beam). The natural frequency is proportional to
the square root of the deflection. Note that the screen display shows only the deflection -
you must look at the output to see the frequency.
Step 12: Wind Load Calculation

PVElite uses the rules of ASCE-7, NBC, UBC, and IS-875 to calculate wind loads. Each
of these codes uses a basic wind pressure, a function of the velocity squared, along with
several surface and site factors to determine the final wind pressure.
Step 13: Earthquake Load Calculation

The five codes used by PVElite - ASCE-7, UBC, NBC, IS-1893 RSM and IS-1893 SCM
each use a static equivalent load to model the earthquake load. Simple site data and load-
ing data are used to determine an expected static equivalent horizontal load on the vessel.
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel,
but can cause high overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the
cumulative shear and bending moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
Step 15: Wind Deflection

PVElite calculates the deflection at every point in either horizontal or vertical vessels.
Step 16: Longitudinal Stress Constants

As the program prepares to do structural calculations on the vessel, it first calculates the
cross sectional area and section modulus of each element in both the corroded and uncor-
roded condition.
Step 17: Longitudinal Allowable Stresses

There are four allowable stresses in the longitudinal direction for each element: (1) Longi-
tudinal tension based on the basic allowable stress, often multiplied times 1.2 (as specified
on the global input), (2) Hydrotest longitudinal tension - 1.5 times the allowable stress
new & cold. (3) Longitudinal compression - based on paragraph UG-23 of the Code, and
the material’s external pressure chart. (4) Hydrotest allowable compression - the basic
allowable compression new & cold, multiplied by 1.5.
Step 18: Longitudinal stresses due to . . .

Each load (wind, earthquake, weight, pressure) generates a stress. These are calculated
individually and displayed by this routine. Note that bending stresses, though only dis-
played once, are actually positive on one side of the vessel and negative on the other.
Step 19: Stress due to Combined Loads

In this step the various load cases combinations defined by the user are evaluated.

There can be as many as twelve cases, combining pressure loads, weight loads, and
moments in various ways. A fairly complete set of load cases is included as a default:
Load Case Definition
1 NP+EW+WI+FW No pressure + empty weight + wind
2 NP+EW+EQ+FS No pressure + empty weight + earthquake
3 NP+OW+WI+FW No pressure + operating weight + wind
4 NP+OW+EQ+FS No pressure + operating weight + earthquake
5 NP+HW+HI No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
6 NP+HW+HE No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro earthquake
7 IP+OW+WI+FW Internal pressure + operating weight + wind
8 IP+OW+EQ+FS Internal pressure + operating weight + earthquake
9 EP+OW+WI+FW External pressure + operating weight + wind
10 EP+OW+EQ+FS External pressure + operating weight + earthquake
11 HP+HW+HI Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
12 HP+HW+HE Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest wind + hydro earthquake
13 IP+WE+EW Internal pressure + wind empty + empty weight
14 IP+WF+CW Internal pressure + wind filled + empty weight NO CA
15 IP+VO+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (OPE) + operating weight
16 IP+VE+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (EMP) + operating weight
17 IP+VF+CW Internal pressure+ vortex shedding (Filled) + empty weight no ca
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage)
defined by the user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global
Data - usually about 33% (thus setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating
wind load). Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake load is a percentage of the earthquake
load; this percentage is defined in the Seismic Data definition of Global Data.
Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will
not be printed. Also, if a vessel has no supports, steps greater than 10 will not be com-
puted.

Optional Steps PVElite - User Guide
Optional Steps
PVElite includes two analyses that are done under specific circumstances:
1. Cone evaluation - cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large
and small ends, and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated.
2. Zick stresses - stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allow-
able stresses using the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for
each saddle, since in PVElite each saddle can have different loading. Note also that
the stresses are not evaluated at the mid span, since the program automatically does
that for all the various load case combinations.
3. AISC Leg Check: After the program has computed all of the weights, forces and
moments, it can then determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity
check method. The program typically looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind
or seismic in the operating condition and then applies the AISC method of checking
the legs. The unity check must be less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical designs fall in
the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good check both in terms of economy and safety.
4. Lug Support Check : In a similar manner to the leg check the program gathers the
worst loads on the support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of accept-
able standards. In this case, gussets are checked by the AISC method and the lug
plates are checked by common industry standard methods. These methods are outlined
in common pressure design handbooks.
5. Baserings: With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the
basering, PVElite will analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry.
6. Flanges: For main body flanges, the program will compute the required thickness of
the flange, all relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen
in the output are based on the input thickness. The program additionally computes
the required thickness of the flange. Please note that the program does not include the
forces and moments to determine an equivalent design pressure. There are separate
fields in the input that can be entered in if these effects are to be considered. In order
to do this two runs would have to made. After run 1 was made the forces and moments
on the flange could be entered in as needed.
7. Nozzle Analysis : Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the program based
on the rules in the ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External
Pressure and MAPnc. The internal pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire
vessel or the exact pressure at the nozzle location. These options are located in the
Global Input section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles, hillside geome-
tries are also considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered in by using the
ANG=xx.x command in the nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also com-
putes MDMT, weld size and strength calculations along with provisions for large noz-
zles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of the ASME Code.

PVElite - User Guide Component Analysis
Component Analysis
Once the program has completed the above calculations, the results may be reviewed in
the output processor. These results (such as required wall thickness vs. finished wall thick-
ness) may also be used for the evaluation of other components of the vessel. Rather than
automatically analyzing all the possible vessel element details, the output processor pro-
vides component analysis for only those details selected by the user. Other details that are
not part of the current vessel may also be analyzed here. This processor is described in the
next chapter.

Component Analysis PVElite - User Guide

&KDSWHU
Output / Review
Generating Output
Output may be reviewed or generated for any job that has some input. Results of any pre-
vious analysis, of course, are only available if the analysis has been run. To access the out-
put, first bring up the proper job through the File item on the Main Menu bar. Then,
clicking on Output on the Main Menu bar will produce a pull-down menu that controls the
program’s output. The pull-down menu provides two options:
• Review Report —Enters the Review processor where results of the analysis may be
inspected on the screen, printed, or copied to a file.
• Review the DXF File—Invokes a compatible DXF processor on the machine if one
exists.
The remainder of this chapter will focus on the many capabilities of the Review processor.
Output / Review 8-1

The Review Screen PVElite - User Guide
The Review Screen

The body of the Review screen shows all the reports available for the current job or file.
These reports follow the analysis steps described in the previous chapter. To select one or
more reports, simply use the mouse and (CTRL) key to select one or more reports.
Once you have selected some reports, click on the Monitor icon to review them on the
screen or press the Printer icon to print them.
Note Once a report has been selected for screen viewing, it can be edited just as if it
were in a word processor. Comments can be added for clarity and entire lines and
parts of reports can be deleted or rearranged.
8-2 Output / Review

PVElite - User Guide Using Review
Using Review
The following screen shows a selected report:
Below is an on-screen display of the Internal Pressure Report.
Output / Review 8-3

Component Analysis
Analysis of vessel details is initiated from the Input Menu.
8-4 Output / Review

PVElite - User Guide Component Analysis
The units for the component analysis are extracted from the current vessel input. In the
example here, Half Pipes Jacket was selected. The initial screen is shown below.
To produce a report, click the Analyze Current Item icon.
Analyze Current Item icon
Output / Review 8-5

8-6 Output / Review

&KDSWHU
Component Analysis Tutorial
Purpose of This Chapter

This purpose of this chapter is to explain the basics of the PVElite component analysis
operation by guiding you through one application of it. Each of the main menu choices
used to control the program is described and illustrated. In addition, certain comments on
how things are made in this chapter and not elsewhere.
Use of the PVElite program assumes that the software has been installed as per the
instructions detailed in Chapter 2.
Starting the PVElite Component Analysis Module

The PVElite Component Analysis program may be started by selecting Component Anal-
ysis Data... from the Input option on the main menu. At this point the Main Menu is
loaded.
PVElite Component Analysis Main Menu
Component Analysis Tutorial 9-1

Component Analysis Main Menu PVElite - User Guide
Component Analysis Main Menu

PVElite always starts with the Vessel Data Input Screen. Across the top of this screen is a
line of items which is called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions
of the program. This chapter will review the functions available in each of these menu
items.
The items in the Main Menu - File, Edit, Analyze, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, ESL, View
and Help - may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character
while pressing the Alt key. For example, the Output processor may be selected by pressing
the Alt and O keys simultaneously.
First, we will begin by going over each of the Main Menu items.
File Menu
File Menu
9-2 Component Analysis Tutorial

PVElite - User Guide Component Analysis Main Menu
The File Menu controls the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected.
The File Menu may be used to
New
• New - Start a new file.
New Dialog
• Open - Open a previously created file.

Open
Open Dialog

Component Analysis Main Menu PVElite - User Guide
When the Open option is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of
type *.cci will be displayed for selection.
Save • Save - Save the current file in its present condition.
Save As Dialog
• Save As - Save a file that has not been previously named or save the current file under
another name.
Print • Print - Send the current vessel graphic image directly to a postscript or laser jet printer.
• Print Preview - Display the page that will be sent to the printer (see above).
• Print Setup - Display the standard Windows printer setup screen.
• Exit - Exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user a last opportunity
to save any modifications to the current job.
The File Menu will also list the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be
opened with a mouse click.

PVElite - User Guide Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Once a file is selected, the Edit Menu indicates the options available for editing. The Edit
Menu may be used to
• Title Page - Enter report title for a report.
• Insert Default Title Page - Insert a
• Project Data - Enter up to 3 title lines which appear at the top of each page of a printed
report.
Add New New
Insert Item • Add New Item - Add a new element.
Item
• Insert New Item - Insert a new element after the current element.
Insert New Item
Delete • Delete Current Item - Delete the current element.
Current
Item
• Select All - Select all of the items in the browse window.
Delete • Deselect All - Deselect all of the items in the browse window.
Current Item

Analysis Menu PVElite - User Guide
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
The Analysis options enable the program to quit the input process and enter the analysis
process. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename,
then process the analysis. The Analyze Menu may be used to
• Analyze Current Item- Perform calculations for the current analysis type. The analy-
sis program looks for appropriate data in the current analysis file and performs calcu-
lations, saving the results in a text file. The results of the analysis will then be ready
for display or printing.
• Analyze File - Allows the analysis of the input file.
Analyze File
• Analyze Selected Items - Perform calculations for selected analysis types. The calcu-
Analyze lations will be saved in a binary file and will be ready for display or printing.
Selected Item • Summary - Prepare a brief summary of data in the current analysis file.
• Choose Analysis Type - Select the type of component you wish to work on.

PVElite - User Guide Analysis Menu
Choose Analysis Type Menu
The analysis types chosen from this menu can also be selected from the Analysis Tool Bar
by simply clicking on the icon.

Output Menu PVElite - User Guide
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output option allows the user to review the analysis results and print the graphics of
the vessel. The Output Menu may be used to
• Review - Review the analysis results of the current job, if those results are available.

Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu controls the utility processors as summarized here.
Configuration
• Configuration - This option allows the user to define a variety of system variables for
the program. The first screen of the Configuration menu looks like this:
Computation Control Tab
The Computation Control Tab lets some specific program computation control parameters
be set. Following is a description of the options:
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness? In many cases pressure vessels are designed
and built long before the piping system is attached to them. This means that the nozzle
loadings are unknown. If this field is checked, then your minimum nozzle thickness (trn)
will be the maximum of:
trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) less than or equal Nps 18
trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) greater than Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some
additional metal to work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels

are designed for. Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are
used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input.
If you do so, that will override this calculation.
Calculate F in Flohead if the Pressure is Zero? In the design of Floating heads, a
factor F is computed. The factor F is a direct function of the internal pressure. If the inter-
nal pressure is 0, then F is equal to 0. However, some interpret the Code to mean that F
should always be computed regardless of which case we are analyzing. Typically, the case
in question is the flange bolt up case. When bolting up the unit there is no internal pres-
sure. That is why the default is not checked.
If you wish F to always be considered in the thickness calcs, then check this box. This is
conservative.
Use P instead of MAWP for UG-99B? The Code paragraph UG-99(b) discusses the
subject of Hydrostatic test pressure on vessels. The equation that would normally be used
is as follows :
Test Pressure = 1.5 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-98 addenda)
Or
Test Pressure = 1.3 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-99 addenda & later)
The code in note 35 states that if the MAWP may be assumed to be the same as the design
pressure when calculations are not made to determine the MAWP.
This will allow for lower test pressures. This directive should be used with caution.
Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles? The Code paragraph UG-36 dis-
cusses the requirement of performing area placement calculations when small nozzles are
involved. The Code States:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforce-
ment other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this box is not checked, then no area of reinforce-
ment calculations will be performed.
Print Water Volume in Gallons/Liters? Normally the volumes computed by the pro-
gram are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The pro-
gram will use cubic units if the default value if it is not checked. For non-English units, the
volume will be printed in liters if this box is checked.
Use Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads in UG-45 b1? The Code in
paragraph UG-45 requires a calculation of the required head thickness at the location of
the nozzle. This may lead one to believe that the thickness may be computed per paragraph
UG-37. However a recent code interpretation states that the thickness should be computed
by the rules of paragraph UG-32 or by the rules in Appendix 1.Thus, this directive should
always be checked.

Use Pre-1999 Addenda? As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is
mandatory. This mandatory revision includes changes to the material properties of many
materials used for Division 1 vessel construction found in Section 2 Part D. Namely, the
allowable stresses were increased in certain ranges. PV Elite contains 2 databases of mate-
rial properties. The default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress database.
If you are re-rating an older vessel to the pre-1999 addenda and would like to use the older
material allowables, then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked
before any vessel modeling occurs. In case of an existing file, you must access the material
database for each material on each element defined so far, to update material properties
per the selected database. Other design codes will not be affected by this directive.
Use Code Case 2260? Code Case 2260 Approval Date: May 20, 1998. This Code Case
is entitled "Alternate Design Rules for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Formed Heads". It
applies for Section VIII Division 1. If this flag is checked then CodeCalc will use the mod-
ified equations in the Code Case to compute the required thickness of Elliptical/Torispher-
ical heads. The typical net result is that by using these modified rules, a thinner head will
designed.
Select the Addenda for the Material Database.
For Div, 1 the user can select between post 1999 material databases, up to the current
addenda. The default behavior is to use the current addenda database.
Miscellaneous Tab
The second screen of the Configuration Menu looks like this:
The Miscellaneous Tab of the Configuration Menu enables the user to select directives
that controls printout style, and default unit options. Following is a description of the
options:

Report Content. This directive allows the user to change the length of the printed
reports. When the summary option is checked, the formulas and substitutions will not be
printed out. Thus, this option will generate less paper and more compact reports. When the
detailed option is checked, the reports will be the normal length.
External Printout in Rows? There are 2 choices for the style of printing external pres-
sure results; rows and columns. Printing the values row wise tend to reduce the length of
the printouts. This is the default.
If you wish to use the column wise printout, do not check this directive.
Reload last file at startup? Check this box to automatically load the last file you were
working with when this processor is started.
Default units file. Select the system of units you typically prefer to work in.
• Set Unit - This option allows the user to change the current job’s units system. Once
this option is selected, a File Open dialog will appear and allow the user to select a
new units file. These units files have the extension .fil. English, Metric, Newton, Bars,
and SI units are available in the system subdirectory. After you select a units file, the
following window will appear:
If the units selection is acceptable, then click the OK button; otherwise, click Cancel.
After OK is clicked, the current units will be overlayed with the selected units.
• Make Unit - This option allows the creation of a custom units file. Simply pull down
the appropriate conversion constant or label and the corresponding unit or label will
change accordingly. If your conversion constant is not one of the choices, enter the

label and constant for your particular unit. (The program will continue to use English
units internally).
Create a New Units File Dialog
This window presents a table of items, the internal units used for each item, a conversion
factor, and the user units. The conversion factor is used to obtain the user units from the
internal units. The up and down arrow keys can be used to move the selection to the
desired item. If a desired unit conversion is not available as a default program selection, it
can be entered manually by typing it in. Insure that your conversion constants are correct
and that your labels go with the constants. Once all units have been set, press OK to exit
this screen and save the new units file. A safe place to save it would be in the system sub-
directory where the supplied units files are stored.
After you have saved the new units file, you will need to overlay the current units in your
job file with the new units. This option is the Set Unit option. After you set your file with
the new units, all of the entered data will be converted into the new set of units immedi-
ately.

• Calculator - This option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.
Calculator
You can use the calculator to compute a number and transfer that number into PVElite by
using the Edit, Copy feature. From the desired field, right click and choose the Paste
option. Before pasting, ensure that the fields current contents have been removed.
• Units Conversion Viewer -
COADE Units Conversion Utility

• Edit/Add Materials - Allows you to add materials to the COADE Material database.
The screen appears as follows:
User-Defined Material Editor Dialog
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
• Drawing Options - Allows the user to set the options for the graphics. Such as drawing
line thickness, font and the background color.

Diagnostics Menu PVElite - User Guide
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics Menu helps to troubleshoot problem installations. The following options
are available:
• CRC Check - This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
• Build Version - This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
• Error Review
• DLL Version Check - This option checks to make sure the PVElite .dll files are cur-
rent. Please note that if the dll’s are not current the program may behave in an unusual
manner or may not run at all.
• Register Servers - Sometimes the icons for various modules (Shells, Nozzles, Cones,
etc. ...) are grayed out, the user can enter the path to the PVElite installation directory
and select to register the DLLs. Then close the program and restart.(Does the icon
become active after this happens?

PVElite - User Guide ESL Menu
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities that interact with the External Software Lock. The
options are as follows:
• Show Data - This option will display the data stored on the ESL.
• Phone Update - This option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
• Generate Fax Codes - This option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
• Enter Fax Authorization Codes - Choose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL.
• Check HASP Driver Status - This option provides information about the ESL device
drivers.
• Install HASP Device Driver - This option installs the ESL device drivers.

View Menu
View Menu
The View Menu allows the user to move between the Input, Drawing, Quick Analysis, and
Browse views.

PVElite - User Guide Help Menu
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
• Help Topics - Starts the help facility.
• Online Documentation - Opens the Users Guide in Acrobat Reader.
• Desktop (online) Help - Starts an interactive help session with COADE personnel.
• Tip of the Day - Provides tips for running PVElite.
• Info - Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for techni-
cal support, and provides a link to COADE’s Web Site.
• About This Program
• On-Line Registration - Allows you to electronically register this product with
COADE.
On-Line Registration screen

Performing an Analysis PVElite - User Guide
Performing an Analysis
The remainder of this chapter will help you perform an actual analysis using the Shell pro-
gram.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
New From the Input menu click Component Analysis Data.
From the Main Menu click on File, New or click the New icon. This will allow you to
Add New Item specify the current analysis type. From the Analysis Toolbar, select Shells and Heads, then
click the Add New Item icon. The following screen will appear:
Shell analysis can be defined on the Design Tab of this screen. You can use the Tab or
Enter keys to move the cursor up and down the column of data. Notice also that many of
the fields have default values built in.
The first field on the input screen is the Item Number. A value must be entered in this field
or the analysis will not be performed. We suggest that you number the different calcula-
tions sequentially. Enter a 1 in this field (type 1 and press [Tab]).
The next field is for a description of the shell to be analyzed. This can be the part number
or a short description of the part. This field is optional. For this tutorial, type in Spherical
Head.
The next block of fields concern the pressure and temperature. Tab to the Design Internal
Pressure field and type 100 (assuming you are in English units). Now tab to the Design
Temperature for Internal Pressure field and type 700. When you press Tab, the program
will pause momentarily to check whether the material specified has allowable stresses
greater than zero at the temperature which you entered. Note that the allowable stress for

PVElite - User Guide Performing an Analysis
SA516-70 material is 18100 psi at this temperature. This is precisely the value that
PVElite extracted from the material database.
The Design External pressure for this problem is 15. The Design Temperature for External
pressure should be 650.
Now you are ready to enter the material. Let’s say this vessel is constructed of SA-516-70.
As you might expect, one way to enter that material is just to type it in the field. When you
do so, the program will check the database, and then update the allowable stresses. This
material happens to be the program default, but type the name anyway just to see what the
program does.
Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this
list, click the Material Database icon. The Material Database screen will appear showing
the materials list, which will look like this:
Material Database Screen
You can move the scroll bar up and down the screen and see the relevant properties for all
of the materials in the PVElite database or, from the Search String field type the material
name. Note that each major material classification is divided into columns. You can also
view the material parameters by clicking on the material name.
Material Database Record

By clicking the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters are
returned. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the Material Edit win-
dow. To see this window, click the "A" button next to the material input.
By clicking the >> button, PVElite will scan the yield stress database for an exact material
match and fill in the appropriate yield stress at operating temperature. For many applica-
tions, this value is not needed.
Yield Stress Record
In the Joint Efficiency, Longitudinal Seams field, enter the value of E, the longitudinal
joint efficiencies to be used in the calculator. For full radiography, choose a value of 1.
The next question asks if you would like to include Hydrostatic Head Components to our
vessel design. Click on the box to activate the dialog. The Hydrostatic Head dialog
appears and prompts you for a few items. The first item is the operating liquid density.
Enter a value of 38 lb/cu.ft. The next two fields request the height of the liquid column in
the operating position and the hydrotest position of the vessel. This particular vessel is a
horizontal drum that will be operating in a partially filled position. When the shop
hydrotests the vessel it will be filled and in the horizontal position. Enter values of 54 and
72 in. for these two fields. Click OK to get back to the main data input screen.
Hydrostatic Heads Dialog
You can now click on the Geometry Tab of the input screen. The first field is the Type of
Shell or Head. Six options are shown on the pull-down, but if you need more details on
this field you can press [F1] for help.
We will analyze a hemispherical head, a cylinder and an elliptical head. These are compo-
nents of the particular horizontal vessel we are analyzing. First enter the Diameter Basis,
OD, for an Outside Diameter measurement (and calculation). Next, tab to the Diameter of
Shell/Head field and enter the diameter, 72 inches.

PVElite - User Guide Performing an Analysis
Now, enter the Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches, and the Nominal Thickness
of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches.
Enter 0.0625 inches for the Corrosion Allowance. Since the input fields have a calculator
capability, you could also enter the .0625 inch Corrosion Allowance as ‘1/16’.
For the Type of Reinforcing Ring, there is no reinforcing ring required for internal pres-
sure, so you can choose None from the pulldown list.
You have now completed the hemispherical head input. Your screen should look like this:
Completed Hemispherical Head Input Screen
Note You may view the drawing of the current item at any time by clicking on the slider
at the right of the window and dragging it to the left.
Add New Item This horizontal tank has two more sections, the shell section and the elliptical head on the
other end. To add the new section, click the Add New Item icon. This will take you back
to the Design Tab of the input screen and prompt you to enter the second item.
Type in the number 2 in the Item Number field. Enter Cylind. Shell in the Description
Field. Click the Geometry Tab to enter the type of shell. Since this is a cylinder type, from
the pull down, select Cylindrical . A window will appear prompting for the Design Length
of Section and the Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations; enter 180 inches for
both. Click OK to resume.
Next, we will enter in the data for the elliptical head. Click on the Add New Item icon.
Type in the number 3 in the Item Number field and Elliptical head in the Description field.

Since the data from the previous element is brought forward, you will only have to modify
the shell/head type. Click on the Geometry Tab of the Input screen and from the Type of
Shell pulldown, select Elliptical. You will then be prompted for the head ratio. Enter the
number 2 for a 2:1 elliptical head. Click OK to continue.
Note When entering new components be sure to type in appropriate descriptions in the
description field. This will help make your finished reports more clear and easier
to follow.
Save You are now ready to analyze these three components for internal pressure and hydrostatic
head considerations. First, save the file. Now, click on the Analyze Item Icon on the anal-
Analyze Current ysis toolbar.
Item
Your screen will now look like this:
Next click the Analyze File Icon and you will be ready to review the results.
Analyze File

PVElite - User Guide Reviewing the Results - The Output Option
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option

You can quickly review the results of this analysis using the Output Option. From the
Main Menu select the Output, Review. The Output program will load and display the fol-
lowing screen. If you have analyzed the components from the input, PVElite will auto-
matically display the output for you. You will see the following screen:
Available Reports Menu

Reviewing the Results - The Output Option PVElite - User Guide
There are now three analyses in the output file. However, if you were to do additional runs
of the Shell program, or analyze nozzles, flanges, tubesheets, or anything else, those anal-
yses would also appear on this list. Thus you can review (and print) all of the calculations
View Reports you have done for a given vessel or job at one time. Select the first analysis, then select
View, Report from the menu, or click on the View Reports Icon. Your screen should look
like this:
PVElite Output Screen
You can scroll up and down in the text to see all of the input and results. Note especially
the Summary of Internal Pressure Results, where you can clearly see that the required
thickness is less than the actual thickness for this job, while the Maximum allowable
working pressure is greater than the design pressure. Therefore, the shell thickness you
selected is acceptable. After you finish reviewing the results, click the Done button to
return to the Available Reports Menu.
You may also select more than one analysis at a time by holding down the [Ctrl] key while
selecting the items to view. You can also select all reports by selecting Edit, Select All,
from the menu. When viewing the reports, click the Next Report Button to move to the
next component.

PVElite - User Guide Printing or Saving Reports to a File
Printing or Saving Reports to a File

Printing the Reports
Select Font The PVElite output results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print
a hard copy of the reports, first select the report font by clicking on the Select Font Icon
Page Number from the Available Reports Menu Toolbar. You may then select a new font for your reports
by clicking on the Select Font Icon. You can also enter a new starting page number by
Print
clicking on the Page Number Icon on the Toolbar. Now, simply click on the Printer Icon.

Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel PVElite - User Guide
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel

This section of the tutorial discusses the summary program in PVElite. The summary pro-
gram will pull selected information from within the input file and summarize it. Selected
portions of the output generated by PVElite are stored in the input file. To use the sum-
mary program follow these simple steps.
1. Perform the analysis on each type chosen. Click the Analyze File icon from the Anal-
Analyze File ysis Toolbar.
2. From the Main Menu, choose Analyze, Summary. The vessel summary will be
appended to the current output files as seen on the Available Reports Screen. You may
view this file or print it just as you would the analysis files.
View The view below is the Microsoft Word view. If you want to return to the Home Screen,
Reports click the Output Processor menu option..
Using Word
Home Screen
Rev.A

PVElite - User Guide Tutorial Problem Printout
Tutorial Problem Printout

CodeCalc 6.20 Licensee: COADE, Inc. (Network Lock on Novell Server)
FileName : Example --------------------------------------- Page 1
Shell Analysis : CYLINDER Item: 2 8:47a Dec 1,1999
Input Echo, Component 2, Description: CYLINDER
Design Internal Pressure P 100.00 psig
Temperature for Internal Pressure 700.00 F
Design External Pressure PEXT 15.00 psig
Temperature for External Pressure 650.00 F
External Pressure Chart Name CS-2
Include Hydrostatic Head Components NO
Material Specification (Not Normalized) SA-516 70
Allowable Stress At Temperature S 18100.00 psi
Allowable Stress At Ambient SA 20000.00 psi
Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 B
Joint efficiency for Head Joint E 1.00
Inside Diameter of Hemispherical Head D 40.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate T 0.5000 in.
Corrosion Allowance CA 0.0000 in.
Type of Element: Spherical Head or Shell
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: CYLINDER
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 1998, A-99
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR):
= (P*(D/2+CA))/(2*S*E-0.2*P) per UG-27 (d)
= (100.00*(40.0000/2+0.0000))/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= 0.0625 in. ( >= 0.0625 in. Per Ug 16b )
Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP):
= (2*S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (d)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 900.50 psig
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC):
= (2*SA*E*T)/(D/2+0.2*T) per UG-27 (d)
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(40.0000/2+0.2*0.5000)
= 995.02 psig

Tutorial Problem Printout PVElite - User Guide
Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact):
= (P*((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 2010.00 psi
SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS:
Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca 0.0625 in.
Actual Thickness as Given in Input 0.5000 in.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP 900.50 psig
Design Pressure as Given in Input P 100.00 psig
Shell Analysis : CYLINDER Item: 2 8:47a Dec 1,1999
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Measured at High Point ):
Hydro. per UG-99(b); 1.3 * MAWP * Sa/S 1293.53 psig
Hydro. per UG-99(c); 1.3 * MAPNC 1293.53 psig
Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 -6 F
Min. Metal Temp. at Req’d thk. (per UCS 66.1) -146 F
WEIGHT and VOLUME RESULTS, NO C.A. :
Volume of Shell Component VOLMET 1288.3 in.^3
Weight of Shell Component WMET 364.6 lb.
Inside Volume of Component VOLID 16755.2 in.**3
Weight of Water in Component WWAT 605.0 lb.
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: CYLINDER
External Pressure Chart CS-2 at 650.00 F
Elastic Modulus for Material 25125000.00 psi
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp):
Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.5000 in.
Outside Diameter of Shell OD 41.0000 in.
Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 82.0000
Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0030488
Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 10675.6992 psi
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 260.38 psig
EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 10675.6992/( 82.0000 / 2 ) = 260.3829
Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca):

EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 4853.4785/( 647.0875 / 2 ) = 15.0010
SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS:
Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness 260.38 psig
Required Pressure as entered by User 15.00 psig
Required Thickness including Corrosion all. 0.0634 in.
Actual Thickness as entered by User 0.5000 in.
The CODECALC Program, (c) 1989-2000 by COADE Engineering Software
Shell Analysis : HEMI HEAD Item: 1 8:47a Dec 1,1999
Input Echo, Component 1, Description: HEMI HEAD
Inside Diameter of Hemispherical Head D 40.0000 in.
Type of Element: Spherical Head or Shell
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: HEMI HEAD

= (P*(D/2+CA))/(2*S*E-0.2*P) per UG-27 (d)
= (100.00*(40.0000/2+0.0000))/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= 0.0625 in. ( >= 0.0625 in. Per Ug 16b )
= (2*S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (d)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 900.50 psig
= (2*SA*E*T)/(D/2+0.2*T) per UG-27 (d)
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(40.0000/2+0.2*0.5000)
= 995.02 psig
= (P*((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 2010.00 psi
Shell Analysis : HEMI HEAD Item: 1 8:47a Dec 1,1999
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: HEMI HEAD

EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 10675.6992/( 82.0000 / 2 ) = 260.3829
EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 4853.4785/( 647.0875 / 2 ) = 15.0010
The CODECALC Program, (c) 1989-2000 by COADE Engineering Software
Shell Analysis : ELLIPTICAL Item: 2 8:47a Dec 1,1999
Input Echo, Component 2, Description: ELLIPTICAL

Inside Diameter of Elliptical Head D 40.0000 in.
Aspect Ratio AR 2.0000
Length of Straight Flange STRTFLG 2.0000 in.
Type of Element: Elliptical Head
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: ELLIPTICAL
= (P*(D+2*CA)*K)/(2*S*E-0.2*P) Appendix 1-4(c)
= (100.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)*1.00)/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= 0.1106 in.
= (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-4 (c)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/(1.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 451.37 psig
= (2*SA*E*T)/(K*D+0.2*T) per Appendix 1-4 (c)
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(1.00*40.0000+0.2*0.5000)
= 498.75 psig
= (P*(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*(1.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 4010.00 psi
Shell Analysis : ELLIPTICAL Item: 2 8:47a Dec 1,1999

Inside Vol. of 2.00 in. Straight VOLSCA 2513.3 in.**3
Total Volume for Head + Straight VOLTOT 10890.9 in.**3
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: ELLIPTICAL
EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 9539.9775/( 0.9000 * 82.0000 ) = 129.2680
EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 4853.4790/( 0.9000 * 359.4930 ) = 15.0010


&KDSWHU
The Shell Module
Introduction
The Shell module performs internal and external pressure design of vessel and exchanger
components using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2001.
This module also considers static liquid head in the pressure design, performs stiffening
ring calculations, sizes stiffening rings, and computes weld shear flows on stiffening ring
welds.
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis

The Shell module calculates the required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working
Pressure for cylindrical shells and heads under internal or external pressure. The module is
based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001 Edi- R
tion, A-2001. Under internal pressure, the module analyzes six types of heads or shells,
using applicable code formulae as follows:
Shell or Head Type ID Basis OD Basis

Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) App 1-1 (a) (1)
Elliptical App 1-4 (c) (1) App 1-4 (c) (2)
Torispherical App 1-4 (d) (3) App 1-4 (d) (4)
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) App 1-1 (a) (2)
Conical Head or Shell UG-32 (g) App 1-4 (e) (1)
Flat Head UG-34 (1) and (3)
Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed.
Torispherical heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be
analyzed. Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be ana-
lyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the
Conical Sections module. Welded flat heads, circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this
module. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the Flange module. Bolted dished heads under
internal or external pressure are analyzed in the Floating Heads module.
The Shell Module 10-1

Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis PVElite - User Guide
Under external pressure, the module analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applica-
ble code formulae as follows:
Shell or Head Type Code Paragraph

Cylinder G-28 (c)
2:1 Elliptical UG-33 (d)
Torispherical UG-33 (e)
Spherical Head or Shell UG-33 (c) and UG-28 (d)
Conical Shell or Head UG-33 (f)
All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than
10. Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed. Torispherical
heads with any crown radius may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of
conical heads or sections is analyzed in the Conical Sections module.
The Shell module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition. Figure 10A shows geometry for the Shell module.
In addition, the Shell module also accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For
carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be used for UCS-66 calculations.
10-2 The Shell Module

PVElite - User Guide Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis
Figure 10A - Geometry for The Shell Module

Figure 10B - Head Geometry

PVElite - User Guide Discussion of Input Data
Discussion of Input Data

Main Input Fields

Enter the Internal Design Pressure. You must define either the design pressure or the min-
imum metal thickness, preferably both. Design pressure is used to determine the required
thickness and minimum metal thickness is used to determine the Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure.

Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.

sure calculations.
Design Temperature for External Pressure

Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for external pressure calculations when you
change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a com-
pletely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this temperature
may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the
lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above
the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Shell Section Material

tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. Examples of material
names are: SA-516-70, SA-285-C. If a material is not contained in the data base, its speci-
fication and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials,
from the Main Menu. Press [F1] for details.
Include Hydrostatic Head Component

If your shell or head design needs to account for hydrostatic liquid head, check this box.
PVElite will add the hydrostatic pressure head to the internal design pressure for the
required thickness calculation.
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the module
will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the

Discussion of Input Data PVElite - User Guide
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the design
temperature.
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the pro-
gram will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter
the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance
with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the
ambient temperature.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be
the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in a spherical
shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a stress
reduction which may be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Section
VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the
inspection quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography
have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint effi-
ciency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7.
Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For exam-
ple, if circumferential seams receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have
a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. The practical outworking of
this is that circumferential seams, which are usually less highly stressed, may be spot
radiographed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This provides the
same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Is the Shell/Head Material Normalized?

If your vessel material has been produced to a fine grain structure, check this box. PVElite
will use the normalized material curve for the UCS 66 calculations.
Type of Shell or Head

Enter the type of shell for this shell section. Choose one of the following shell types:
• Shell or Head Type
• Cylindrical Shell
• Elliptical Head
• Torispherical Head
• Hemispherical Head or Spherical Shell
• Conical Shell
• Welded Flat Head

Diameter Basis
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the
dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For flat
heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head.
Diameter of Shell/Head
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For torispherical heads, enter the crown radius. For
flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the largest diameter of
the cone. The program allows you to use either an inside diameter or an outside diameter.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate

Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the vessel, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a mini-
mum specified wall thickness which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should
enter the minimum thickness.
Nominal of Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate (optional)

Enter the NOMINAL or AVERAGE thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to construct
the vessel.
This thickness is used to calculate the volume and weight of the metal only if it is between
1 and 1.5 times the minimum thickness. If this value is left blank or 0 the program will use
the minimum thickness to compute the weight and volume of this shell element.
Corrosion Allowance
Type of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the index for the type of reinforcing ring on the cylindrical or conical section. Three
options are available:
• No Reinforcing Ring
• Simple Bar Reinforcing Ring—You will be required to enter the width and thickness
of the bar.
• General Beam Section—You will be required to enter the moment of inertia, cross-
sectional area and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam. In all cases
the program includes the shell in the calculation of the moment of inertia for the stiff-
ening ring. This calculation will only be performed for external pressure calculations.
Also, the detailed analysis for the required moment of inertia and cross-sectional area
for cones is contained in the separate Conical Sections module.
Minimum Design Metal Temperature

Enter in the minimum design metal temperature for the component. This value will only
be printed in the input echo and will not be used in the calculation. Note that if this entry is
zero, the minimum design metal temperature will not be echoed in the input.

Skip UG-16(B) Minimum Thickness Calculation

Check this box to skip UG-16(b) calculations. The section UG-16(b) states the minimum
thickness for pressure retaining components as 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). There are certain
exemptions from this requirement such as in the case of heat exchanger tubes. Refer to the
ASME Section VIII, Div-1, UG-16(b) for more details.

Pop-up Input Fields
Operating Liquid Density

Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of
the liquid column in order to compute the static head pressure.
Height of Liquid Column Operating

Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liq-
uid. The head pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the
fluid to the point of interest.
Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest

Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid
when the vessel is being hydrotested. If this is shop hydrotest, and the vessel is laying on
its side, then the height of the liquid column should be equal to the inside diameter of the
vessel. In the case of a vertical or field hydrotest this liquid height can be greater than the
vessel diameter.
Design Length of Section

Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one third the
depth of the heads or, alternately, the distance between stiffening rings. For a vessel with 2
elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus
the diameter/6. For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the
design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/3. For a vessel with 2 flanged and
dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the
diameter/9. When analyzing a head, enter zero for the length.
Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations

Enter the distance that you want PVElite to use for the liquid volume computation. For a
horizontal vessel this would be the tangent to tangent distance.
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads

Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis
to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads

Enter the crown radius for torispherical heads. The crown radius for a torispherical head is
referred to as the dimension “L”, in the ASME VIII Div. 1 code book.
Length of Straight Flange

Enter the length of the straight section of the elliptical or torispherical head. This is used in
volume and weight calculations.
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads

Enter the knuckle radius for torispherical heads. This dimension is “r”, in the ASME VIII
Div. 1 code book.

Half APEX Angle for Conical Sections

Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half
apex angle for cones under internal pressure and without toriconical transitions is 30
degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections
is 60 degrees. The largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you
exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning.
Large Diameter for Non-Circular Welded Flat Heads

If you have a non-circular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and
enter the small dimension as the component diameter above.
Attachment Factor for Flat Head

Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from ASME Code, Section
VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as
follows, but please be careful to consult Paragraph UG-34 before using these values:
• 0.17 (b-1)Head welded to vessel with generous radius
• 0.20 (b-2)Head welded to vessel with small radius
• 0.20 (c)Lap welded or brazed construction
• 0.13 (d)Integral flat circular heads
• 0.20 (e f g)Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
• 0.33 (h)Plate welded to end of shell
• 0.20 (I)Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
• 0.30 (j k)Bolted flat heads (include bending moment)
• 0.30 (m n o)Plate held in place by screwed ring
• 0.25 (p)Bolted flat head with full face gasket
• 0.75 (q)Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
• 0.33 (r s)Plate held in place by beveled edge
Width of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the width of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is
the dimension that is perpendicular to the surface of the shell.
Thickness of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the thickness of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this
is the dimension that is parallel to the surface of the shell.
Size of Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell

Enter the dimension of the weld leg which connects the stiffening ring to the shell section.
This value will be used in the weld shear flow calculations if a simple bar stiffener has
been selected as the type of reinforcing ring.

Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements

Entering a structural ring type here will cause PVElite search the structural database for a
suitable member that will meet the inertia requirements for the ring. The valid types of
structural shapes to enter here are
• EQUAL ANGLE—Equal Leg Angles
• UNEQUAL ANGLE—Unequal Angle
• DBL LARGE ANGLE—Double Angles Large Legs back to back
• DBL SMALL ANGLE—Double Angles Small Legs back to back
• CHANNEL—Channel Sections
• I-BEAM—Wide Flange Sections
• WT SECTION—Wide Flange Sections (T type)
• MT SECTION—Miscellaneous Tee
• ST SECTION—Structural Tee
• MC SECTION—Miscellaneous Channel
Ring Weld Attachment Style (Intermittent, Continuous, Both)

Enter the style of the weld that attaches the stiffening ring to the shell section. Per UG-29
of the Code there are 3 “styles”:
• INTERMITTENT
• CONTINUOUS
• BOTH
This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for
the computation of the maximum spacing between weld segments.
Location of Ring (Internal or External)

There are two possibilities for the location of the stiffening ring.
• INTERNAL—Attached to the inside of the Shell
• EXTERNAL—On the outer surface of the Shell
Moment of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing ring,
in the direction parallel to the surface of the shell.
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing
ring.
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface

Enter the distance from the surface of the shell to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This
distance should be measured normal to the shell surface.

Is the Ring Angle Rolled the Hard Way?

If you have selected an angle type ring to satisfy the inertia requirements above, this
prompt is meaningful; otherwise it is ignored. When this option is used the program will
compute the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid based on information in
the ASIC Steel handbook.

Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being mod-
eled. The information includes:
• Required Thickness Due to Internal Pressure
• Required Thickness Due to External Pressure
• Internal MAWP
• MDMT
• Warning Messages if the Stiffening Ring or the Welds Connecting It Fails
Note Results that display red in color indicate a failure.
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure

The appropriate formula from ASME Section VIII is referenced, and the formula and sub-
stitution are shown. The diameter or crown radius are adjusted to take into account the
corrosion allowance. If your shell design includes hydrostatic head components, the addi-
tional pressure due to the height of the liquid column and the operating liquid density will
be included to the basic design pressure. The hydrostatic head will be subtracted in order
to properly determine the MAWP for the vessel part that is being analyzed. Remember,
when pressures are being read from the pressure gauge, the gauge is usually at the high
point of the vessel. The pressure registered by the gauge would be different if were at the
bottom of the liquid filled vessel.
• For elliptical heads, the K factor is (2 + Ar * Ar) / 6, per App. 1-4 (c).
• For torispherical heads the factor M is (1/4) * (3 + SQRT (L / R)), where “L” (the
crown radius) and “R” (the knuckle radius) were entered by the user.
Important The PVElite program does not replace the given thickness with this
calculated minimum. If you are choosing the thickness for a compo-
nent, compare the values shown under “Summary of Internal Pres-
sure Results” (required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up
or down accordingly.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness

This value is calculated as described above, using the given thickness minus corrosion
allowance and the operating allowable stress. The hydrostatic head component is sub-
tracted from this value. The pressure gauge is assumed to be at the top of the vessel.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold

This value is calculated as described above, using the uncorroded thickness and the ambi-
ent allowable stress.
Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness

Note that the joint efficiency is included in this value, so this can be considered the stress
at the welded joint rather than in the base metal.
Summary of Internal Pressure Results

Either of two conditions can indicate a problem in your design. First, if the required thick-
ness plus corrosion allowance is greater than the given thickness, then you must increase
the given thickness. Second, if the M.A.W.P. is less than the design pressure then you must
either decrease the design pressure or increase the given thickness to achieve an accept-
able design.
The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure times
1.3 times the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature to the allowable stress at
design temperature.
The hydrotest pressure may not be appropriate for the entire vessel for three reasons. First,
some other component may have a lower maximum allowable working pressure, which
may govern the hydrotest pressure. Second, you may choose to base hydrotest pressure on
design pressure rather than maximum allowable working pressure. Third, if the vessel is
tested in the vertical position you may have to adjust the hydrotest pressure for the head of
water in the vessel.
For the UG99-C hydrotest, the liquid head is subtracted from the basic result.
Minimum Metal Temperatures

For carbon steels, these temperatures represent the minimum design metal temperature for
the given thickness and, in the second case, the given pressure. The first temperature is
interpolated directly from chart UCS-66. The second temperature is reduced if the actual
stress is lower than the allowable stress, using figure UCS-66.1. The program also checks
for materials which qualify for the -20 minimum design temperature per UG-20 and
assigns that temperature if it is less than the value found on the charts. See the input notes
above to enter normalized or non-normalized materials.
Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance

The PVElite program computes the volume and weight of the shell component. Addition-
ally, the inside volume for a 2.00 inch straight flange is computed and used in the compu-
tation of the total volume for the head and the flange. The dimensions used in the volume
and weight calculations are non-corroded dimensions.
Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure

For the given diameter, thickness, and length, the maximum allowable external pressure is
computed per UG-28.

Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure

The required thickness is computed using the rules of UG-28 iteratively. Such items as the
length and outside diameter are held constant, and the program calculates the required
thickness based on the user entered external pressure.
Summary of External Pressure Results

Summary listing displaying external pressure results for both the user entered thickness
and the computed required thickness.

Example Problems PVElite - User Guide
Example Problems
Example problem 1 is an example cylinder design. This particular problem involves most
of the inputs available in the shell module. Note the form of the printout regarding the
external pressure calculations. This form of the output can be selected by first choosing
Tools from the Main Menu, and then selecting Configuration, Miscellaneous. Turn on the
flag to print the external calculations in rows. This form of the output report is preferred if
trying to conserve paper.
There are many more example problems. The PVElite input file CHECKS contain several
shell and head design examples taken directly from the ASME Code Appendices 1 and L.
PVElite Licensee: COADE ESL
FileName : SHELL ------------------------------------------- Page 1
Shell Analysis : SHELL SECTION ITEM: 1, 10:49am, 05/14/98
INPUT VALUES, COMPONENT 1, Description: SHELL SECTION

Include Hydrostatic Head Components YES

Operating Liquid Density 38.000 lb./cu.ft.
Height of Liquid Column ( Operating ) 54.00 in.
Height of Liquid Column ( Hydrotest ) 72.00 in.

Joint efficiency for Shell Joint E 1.00
Design Length of Section L 100.0000 in.

Length of Cylinder for Volume Calcs. CYLLEN 100.0000 in.
Outside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell D 72.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate T .5000 in.

Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate T .5000 in.
Corrosion Allowance CA .0625 in.
Stiffening Ring Material Specification SA-516 70

External Pressure Chart Name for Ring CS-2
Size of Fillet Weld Leg Ring to Shell .375 in.
Width of Reinforcing Ring WRING 4.0000 in.
Thickness of Reinforcing Ring TRING 1.0000 in.
Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Req. NONE
Ring Weld Attachment Style INTERMITTENT
Location of Reinforcing Ring EXTERNAL
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Description: SHELL SECTION

= (P*D/2)/(S*E+0.4*P) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)

PVElite - User Guide Example Problems
= (101.19*72.0000/2)/(16600.00*1.00+0.4*101.19)
= .2189 in.

Less Operating Hydrostatic Head Pressure of 1.19 psig
= (S*E*(T-CA))/(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
= (16600.00*1.00*(.4375))/(72.0000/2-0.4*.4375)
= 202.72 - 1.19 = 201.53 psig

= (SA*E*T)/(D/2-0.4*T) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
= (17500.00*1.00*.5000)/(72.0000/2-0.4*.5000)
= 244.41 psig

= (P*(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA))
= (101.19*((72.0000/2-0.4*(.4375)))/(1.00*(.4375))
= 8285.81 psi

Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca .2814 in.
Actual Thickness as Given in Input .5000 in.

Hydro. per UG-99(b); 1.5 * P * SA / S 160.01 psig
Hydro. per UG-99(c); 1.5 * MAPNC - Head (Hydro) 364.02 psig
Minimum Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 -6 F

Minimum Metal Temp. at Required thickness -50 F
WEIGHT and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS:

Volume of Shell Component VOLMET 11231.2 in.**3
Inside Volume of Component VOLID 1713.9 Gals.
WEIGHT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS:

Volume of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA 9835.9 in.**3
Weight of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA 2783.6 lb.
Inside Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA 1720.0 Gals.
Weight of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA 14347.5 lb.
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Description: SHELL SECTION


TCA OD SLEN D/T L/D Factor A B
.4375 72.0000 100.00 164.57 1.3889 .0004433 6428.54
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6428.5380)/(3*164.5714)=52.0831 psig


.2659 72.0000 100.00 270.76 1.3889 .0002101 3046.24
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3046.2380)/(3*270.7614)=15.0009 psig
Results for Maximum Length Between Stiffeners (Slen):

.4375 72.0000 347.19 164.57 4.8221 .0001277 1851.57
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*1851.5680)/(3*164.5714)=15.0011 psig
Effective Length of Shell 6.17 in.

Area (sq.in.) Distance (in.) Area*Dist
Shell: 2.701 .2188 .591
Ring : 4.000 2.4375 9.750
Total: 6.701 10.341
Centroid of Ring plus Shell = 1.543 in.
Inertia Distance A*Dist^2
Shell: .043 1.3244 4.738
Ring : 5.333 -.8943 3.199
Total: 5.376 7.937
Available Moment of Inertia, Ring plus Shell 13.314 in**4
Required Stress in Ring plus Shell BREQ 1696.34 psi

Required Strain in Ring plus Shell AREQ .0001170
Required Moment of Inertia, Ring plus Shell

= ( OD^2 * SLEN * (TCA+ARING/SLEN) * AREQ )/ 10.9
= (72.0000^2*100.0000*(.4375+4.0000/100.0000)*.0001170)/10.9
= 2.6570 in**4
RESULTS for STIFFENING RING WELD CALCULATIONS

Radial Pressure Load PEXT*SLEN 1500.00 lb./in.
The Radial Shear Load V 1080.00 lb.
The First Moment of the Area ( Ring + Shell ) Q 3.58 in.^3
Weld Shear Flow due to Rad. Shear Load VQ/I 290.19 lb./in
The Weld Allowable Stress .55*S 9130.00 psi
Minimum Weld Thickness Min(.25,TCA,TRING) WLDMIN .25 in.
Minimum Space between Welds 8*TCA 3.50 in.
The Weld Allowable Load WLDMIN*.55*S 2282.50 lb./in
The Combined Weld Load SRSS of VQ/I and PEXT*SLEN 1527.81 lb./in

Required Thickness including Corrosion all. .3284 in.
Actual Thickness as entered by User .5000 in.
Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure 347.194 in.
Actual Length as entered by User 100.00 in.
Required Inertia, Ring + Shell 2.657 in**4
Available Inertia, Ring + Shell 13.314 in**4
The PVElite Program, (C) 1989-2001 by COADE Engineering Software

&KDSWHU
The Nozzle Module
Introduction
This module calculates required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs fail-
ure path calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1 rules, 2001, A-2001.

The Nozzle module calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a noz-
zle in a pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the
shell, nozzle and optional reinforcing pad. The module also calculates the strength of fail-
ure paths for the nozzles. The Nozzle module is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, 2001, A-2001. The calculation procedure is
based on Figure UG-37.1.
The module calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on
inside diameter for the following vessel components:
Component Paragraph Limitations Per UW-37
Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) None

2:1 Elliptical Head UG-32 (d) (1) Nozzle concentric within 0.8D
Torispherical Head UG-32 (e) (1) Nozzle in spherical portion
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) None
The module evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpen-
dicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The Nozzle module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the module adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
The Nozzle module also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.
Figure 11A shows geometry for the Nozzle module.
The Nozzle Module 11-1

Figure 11A - Geometry for The Nozzle Module
11-2 The Nozzle Module


Main Input Fields
Nozzle Description
Enter a 15 character or less description of this nozzle. If you type in the description
“MANWAY” the UG-45 check for minimum nozzle neck thickness will not be performed.

Enter the Internal Design Pressure. This is a non-zero positive value and is usually
obtained from the design drawings or vessel design specification. Required information
such as the required thickness tr and trn are determined from the design internal pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the design pressure. The PVElite program will
automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the
design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to
update them for the given temperature.

Enter the external design pressure. PVElite will compute the required thickness of the
given geometry for the external pressure entered. If you are designing for a full vacuum
you would enter a value of 15.00 psig. If you are entering an external pressure there are
some prompts such as shell design length which will appear. PVElite will compute the
required thickness for both external and internal pressure. It will then choose the greatest tr
and proceed with the calculations.
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New & Cold

The normal entry in this field will be the minimum new and cold pressure of the major
vessel components. When the program computes the areas for this case it will use ambient
allowable stresses and 0 corrosion allowance. If this is the case that governs the area anal-
ysis, the corrosion allowance used in the remainder of the calculations will be set to 0.0
Shell, Nozzle, or Pad Material Name

tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-
ing Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

gram will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II
Part D at the design temperature.

Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II
Part D at the ambient temperature.
Is the Shell/Head/Nozzle Material Normalized?

If your nozzle material has been produced to fine grain practice, check this box. The
appropriate minimum design metal temperatures will be computed based on the normal-
ized curve for this material from the chart UCS-66.
Include Hydrostatic Head Component

If your nozzle design needs to account for hydrostatic liquid head, then select this option.
PVElite will add the hydrostatic pressure head to the internal head pressure for the
required thickness calculation.
Shell or Head Type

Enter the type of shell for this shell section. Choose one of the following shell types:
ID Number Shell or Head Type

1 Cylindrical Shell
2 Elliptical Head
3 Torispherical Head
4 Hemispherical Head or Spherical Shell
5 Conical Head or Shell
6 Welded Flat Head
The thickness of an elliptical head is analyzed as an equivalent spherical head, as specified

in the Code, paragraph UG-37 (a). Similarly, the thickness of the spherical portion of a
torispherical head is analyzed using the same paragraph. If your nozzle is outside 80% of
the diameter of an elliptical head, or in the toroidal portion of a torispherical head, you
must enter the required thickness to accurately perform the analysis. You must enter the
required thickness (below) under the following circumstances:
Shell Diameter Basis

If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the
dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For tori-
spherical heads, select ID if the section is specified by inside crown radius, select ID if the
section is specified by outside crown radius. Normally, for a flanged & dished torispheri-
cal head, the inside crown radius is equal to the vessel outside diameter. For flat heads, this
value is ignored. Always enter the diameter of the flat head that is exposed to the pressure.

Shell Diameter or Crown Radius for Torispherical Head

Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For torispherical heads, enter the crown radius. For
flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the diameter of the cone
at the point where the nozzle intersects the shell.
Actual Thickness of Shell

Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the shell, or the min-
imum thickness measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a minimum
specified wall thickness which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should enter
the minimum thickness.
Enter Required Thicknesses

The only time the required thickness must be entered is if the component being analyzed is
a bolted flat head. Otherwise, the required thickness of the shell/head will be computed by
the program.
For hillside nozzles, as of Version 5.40, several changes have been made relating to the use
of the required thickness. They are as follows:
• If the user wishes to enter an offset and allow PVElite to compute the nozzle angle,
the required thickness must be left blank.
• If an angle less than 90 has been entered, or computed via the entered offset values,
and the user would like to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required
thickness times the F-correction factor should be entered.
• If an angle less than 90 has been entered and the user does not which to take credit for
the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required thickness should be entered.
Shell Corrosion Allowance

Rating of Attached Flange

If your check this prompt the program will ask you the class and grade of the attached
flange. The program will use these two items along with the temperature to rate the flange
using the tables in ANSI B16.5.
Modification of Reinforcement Limit

Enter Y or N. You may enter any physical limitation which exists on the thickness avail-
able for reinforcement or the diameter available for reinforcement. An example of a thick-
ness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not extend normal to
the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation. An example of a
diameter limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you
did not want to take an available area reduction.
Set AREA1 or AREA2 Equal to 0

In some vessel design specifications it is mandated that no credit be taken for the area con-
tributed by the shell or nozzle. You can enter the text “A1” or “A2” in this field. If you do
so, that area will be set equal to 0. You can also enter “A1 A2”. This would give you no
credit for area1 or area2.

Is the Nozzle Outside the 80% Diameter Limit?

If the nozzle is outside of the spherical portion of the elliptical or torispherical head, check
this field. Doing so will cause PVElite to use the standard internal pressure equation from
UG-27 instead of the equation from UG-37.
Nozzle Diameter Basis

Enter 0 for nozzles where the diameter you give is inside diameter. Enter 1 for nozzles
where the diameter you give is outside diameter.
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle

Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size
and thickness basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field.
Valid nominal diameters are:
0.125 2.010.0
0.25 2.512.0
0.375 3.014.0
0.50 3.516.0
0.75 4.018.0
1.00 5.020.0
1.25 6.024.0
1.5 8.030.0
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis

From the pull-down menu, select the appropriate size and thickness basis for the nozzle.
For actual diameter and thickness, the program will use the actual diameter entered in the
field above and the actual thickness entered in the field below.
For nominal diameter and thickness, the program will look up the actual diameter based
on the nominal diameter entered in the field above, and will look up the nominal thickness
based on the schedule entered in the second field below.
For minimum diameter and thickness, the program will look up the actual diameter based
on the nominal diameter entered in the field above, and will look up the nominal thickness
based on the schedule entered in the second field below. It will then multiply the nominal
thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Actual Schedule of Nozzle

Enter the minimum actual thickness of the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if
you selected ACTUAL for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
schedule in the field below.
Nominal Thickness of Nozzle

Enter the schedule for the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected
NOMINAL or MINIMUM for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
thickness in the field above. Type in the schedule for the nozzle, i.e. SCH 40. Available
nozzle schedules are

SCH 10 SCH 80 SCH STD

SCH 10S SCH 80S SCH X-STG
SCH 20 SCH 100 SCH XX-STG
SCH 30 SCH 120
SCH 40 SCH 140
SCH 40S SCH 160
SCH 60
Required Thickness of Nozzle

The program normally calculates the required thickness of the nozzle but under the follow-
ing circumstances you must enter the required thickness:
• When your job specification requires that no area be included from the nozzle. Enter
the actual thickness minus the corrosion allowance.
• When the nozzle is non-circular.

Efficiency of Shell Seam Through Which Nozzle Passes

Enter the seam efficiency. The seam efficiency is used in the ‘area available’ calculations
to reduce the area available in the shell. Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness cal-
culations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0.
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle

Select the insert or abutting nozzle from the pull-down menu. The nozzle type and depth
of groove welds are used to determine the required weld thicknesses and failure paths for
the nozzle. If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel
wall. If the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into
the hole, it is inserted. Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert and abutting nozzles.
Reinforcing Pad
If there is a reinforcing pad on the nozzle, or if you wish to specify the geometry for a rein-
forcing pad, check this field.
Note Although PVElite will design and recommend a reinforcing pad if one is needed,
the analysis of areas is based only on what you have entered. If PVElite recom-
mends a pad or a larger pad than the one you enter, you must go back into input
and enter a pad of the correct size in order for the final configuration to be
reflected in the final analysis.
ASME Code Weld Type

The type of weld can optionally be netered in this field. If it is a type A, B, C, D, E, F-1, F-
2, F-3, F-4, G, X-1, Y-1, or Z-1 weld then PVElte will not perform the weld calculations
If it is a type I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, then PVElite will perform the additional weld

size calculations per UW-16(d)(1). The Code exempts these calculations per paragraph
UW-15 when one of the above weld classifications such as "A" is used. If you wish
PVElite to perform the weld strength calculation regardless of the type of weld geometry,
leave this field blank.
Compressed Air, Water, or Steam Service

Checking this box sets the minimum thickness for use in the UG-45 Calculations. If left
unchecked, a value of 1/16-in. will be used. Otherwise, if checked, a value of 3/32-in. will
be incorporated. See UG-16 for more details.
Manway or Access /Inspection Opening

The ASME code states that it is not required to perform UG-45 minimum nozzle neck
thickness calculations on manways and inspection openings. If this box is checked, the
program will not perform these calculations.
Nozzle Angle Geometry

Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and the noz-
zle centerlines, and the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle
can vary from 0 to a limiting value depending upon the specific gravity. Figure 1 below
illustrates these dimensions.
To specify a radial nozzle on a head or shell just click the "Is Radial ..’ checkbox. In this
case the input for the offset dimension and vessel -nozzle centerline angle are optional,
only required for the graphic and not for the analysis.
Figure 11B - Radial Nozzle
Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area require-
ments in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases CodeCalc automatically checks the
area requirements in both the planes using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle open-
ing. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be
applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be
used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one half of
the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and con-

ical sections. A hill-side nozzle example based on ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix L-7.7 is
illustrated in the CHECKS file under the PVElite examples directory - Nozzle items 10
and 11.
Some examples are shown below.
Figure 11C - Hillside and Angular Nozzle
Y angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections by
clicking on the "Is Lateral..." checkbox. In this case only the vessel-nozzle centerline
angle needs to be specified. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 11D - Y-Angle Nozzle on a Cylinder and on a Cone

For users of version prior to 6.40 the input specification for non-radial and non-hillside
nozzles has changed. The current requirement is the angle between the centerline of the
nozzle and the centerline of the vessel.
Pop-Up Input Fields
Enter the Shell Design Length for External Pressure

Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one third the
depth of the heads or, alternatively, the distance between stiffening rings.
For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent to tangent length plus the shell diameter /6.
For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent length plus the diameter /3.
For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design
length is the tangent length plus the diameter /9.
When analyzing a conical head enter the axial length of the cone. If any other head types
are being analyzed, enter a 0 here and you must enter the required thickness of the compo-
nent in the required field.
Print Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure

If checked, PVElite will print out the parameters used for external pressure design. If this
field is not checked, PVElite will not print out these intermediate computations.
Operating Liquid Density

Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of
the liquid column in order to compute the static head pressure.
You can enter a number of specific gravity units and CodeCalc will convert the number
entered to the current set of units. To do this, enter a number followed by the letters "sg".
Height of Liquid Column, Operating

Enter the distance from the nozzle to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is deter-
mined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest.
Enter the Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads

The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a stan-
dard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Head

Enter the inside crown radius of torispherical head.
Inside Knuckle Radius of the Torispherical Head

Enter the inside knuckle radius of the torispherical head. This value is typically 0.17 * the
head inside diameter.

Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections

Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half
apex angle for cones under the internal pressure and without toriconical transitions is 30
degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections
is 60 degrees. The largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you
exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning.
Attachment Factor for Welded Flat Heads

Enter the attachment factors for the welded flat head. These factors are found in Section
VIII, Division 1, Figure UG-34. The typical value for an attachment factor is 0.3.
Large Diameter for Non-Circular Flat Heads

If you have a non-circular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and
enter the small dimension as the component diameter.
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange

Select the applicable class of the attached ANSI flange. The following flange classes are
available:
CL 150
CL 300
CL 400
CL 600
CL 900
CL 1500
CL 2500
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange

Select the appropriate material grade for the attached ANSI flange. The following flange
grades are available:
GR 1.1 Med C Steel GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 1.2 High C Steel GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 1.4 Low C Steel GR 2.3 Type 304L,316L
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo GR 2.5 Type 347,348
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo GR 2.7 Type 310
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit

Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An exam-
ple of a diameter limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for
which you did not want to take an available area reduction.

Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit

Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An exam-
ple of a thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not
extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.

Enter the distance the nozzle projects outward from the surface of the vessel. This will
usually be to the attached flange or cover. This length will be used for weight calculations
and for external pressure calculations.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel

Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the nozzle and the
vessel are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the
depth of the component, that is the thickness of the nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a
partial penetration weld, or just a fillet welds, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a
zero, respectively, in this field.
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell

Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.

Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel. The program uses the least of the inside
projection and the thickness limit with no pad to calculate the area available in the inward
nozzle. Therefore, you may safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches if the
nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface

along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two
values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter

Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if
any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the
available area.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Neck

Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the noz-
zle are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth
of the component, that is the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial pen-

etration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
• Reinforcement Area Contributions, Available Area, Required Area
• MDMT
• Warning Messages if UG-45 Fails
Note Results that display red in color indicate a failure.
Actual Nozzle Diameter and Thickness

If you specified an ‘actual’ basis for nozzle diameter and thickness, the diameter and
thickness shown will be the same as those which you entered. If you specified ‘Nominal’,
these values will be the nominal diameter and thickness found in the programs pipe size
tables. If you entered minimum the program will have looked up the diameter and thick-
ness in the pipe size tables and then multiplied the thickness by 0.875.
Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle

The required thickness for the shell and nozzle will be calculated as follows:
CYLI (and the nozzle wall) - Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user.
HEMI- Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user.
TORI- Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
ELLI- Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
CONE- Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
FLAT- Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
The joint efficiency used in this calculation is always 1.0. In 1989 we submitted a request
for interpretation to the ASME Code in order to show that the use of 1.0 under all circum-
stances was justified. The reply was published in the A-90 addenda as Interpretation VIII-
1-89-171. The question and reply were as follows:
Question: In reinforcement calculations, is the joint efficiency used in calculating the
required thickness of the vessel wall tr and the required thickness of the wall trn 1.0
regardless of the joint efficiency determined for the vessel wall and nozzle wall from the
rules in UW-12, provided the nozzle does not pass through a weld?
Reply: Yes

Note The program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld
by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.
Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits

The diameter limit is the maximum distance from the centerline of the nozzle along the
vessel wall which can be taken credit for when calculating available areas in the shell or a
pad. If your pad has a greater diameter than the diameter limit, only the area inside the
limit will be credited. If you entered a DMAX value for the analysis, that value will be
used only if it is the least of all the diameter limit candidates.
The thickness limit is the distance from the vessel surface along the nozzle axis which can
be taken credit for when calculating the areas available in the nozzle wall and the pad. If
your inward nozzle projection or outward pad projection are greater than the diameter
limit, only the area inside the limit will be credited. If you entered a TMAX value for the
analysis, that value will be used only if it the least of all the thickness limit candidates.
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness

The design rules from paragraph UG-45 for minimum nozzle neck thickness are used. If
the thickness used by PVElite for your nozzle calculation is less than required by UG-45,
your Code Vessel is in violation of this paragraph.
Required and Available Areas

The area required is calculated per UG-37(c). For external pressure and flat heads, this
value is multiplied by 0.5. The required areas are calculated per Fig. UG-37.1.
Note The program uses dl-d, (Diameter limit minus inside hole radius) in the calculate
for area available in shell. This is because the Code wrongly assumes that the dl-d
is always equal to d, which is only true when the natural diameter limit is used.
Since we allow the user to enter a reduced diameter limit, we could not use the
pure Code equation.
Selection of Reinforcing Pad

The program gives up to three possible reinforcing pad selections. The first is a pad thick-
ness based on the given pad diameter. The second is a pad diameter based on the given pad
thickness. Finally, the program selects a thickness based on the thinner of the shell and
nozzle walls, and calculates a required diameter. If this exceeds the diameter limit, it
selects a thickness based on a pad at the diameter limit. All thickness results are rounded
up to the nearest sixteenth, while all diameter results are rounded up to the nearest eighth.
Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations

For large diameter nozzles, the rules of Appendix 1-7 require that two-thirds of the rein-
forcement be within 0.75 of the natural diameter limit for the nozzle. If the calculated
value of the percent within this limit is greater than 66%, the nozzle is adequately rein-
forced for the large diameter rules. For a large nozzle geometry to meet Code requirements
both sets of area calculations must meet their respective area requirements.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure Calculation

The MAWP for reinforcement is an estimate, usually accurate to within 1 or 2 psi. Enter
the given MAWP as the design pressure to check its accuracy. The MAP for the flange is
based on ANSI B16.5 tables for the given grade and class of flange.
Minimum Design Metal Temperature

The minimum design metal temperature is computed for the nozzle. The program consid-
ers UG-20(f), UCS-66 and UCS-66.1 when performing these calculations.
Weld Size Calculations

Nozzle weld thicknesses are based on Figure UW-16.1. The outward nozzle weld is com-
pared to the cover weld required by the Code. Note that the minimum dimension of a weld
is 0.7 times its leg dimension. Note also that for cover welds the maximum weld the Code
requires is 0.25 inches. The pad weld requirement is typically at least one half of the ele-
ment thickness. In addition to the cover welds, the total groove weld plus cover weld for
inserted nozzles must be at least 1.25 times the minimum element thickness.
Weld Strength Calculations

The strength of connection elements is their cross sectional area times the allowable unit
stress for the element. The last two terms in the equations shown give the stress factor and
basic allowable stress for the element in the direction considered.
Failure Path Calculations

The failure paths differ based on whether there is a reinforcing pad, whether the nozzle is
inserted or abutting, and whether there is an inward projection. Note that the strength of
each path must exceed either the W value or the W#-# associated with that path. Note also
that UW-15(b) indicates that no strength calculations for nozzle attachment welds are
required for figure UW-16.1, sketches (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f-1),
(f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1), and (z-1).
Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area, and UG-45

Assuming the same corrosion allowance for the shell and nozzle, the maximum (failure)
corrosion allowance, the minimum (discard) nozzle thickness and the minimum (failure)
shell thickness are computed. The user can project the nozzle service lifetime based on the
rate of corrosion and the above results.

Example Problems
The \example directory contains the input for most of the other example problems for noz-
zles shown in Appendix L of the Code. The file these examples are contained in is
CHECKS. Some large nozzle examples are included in LG_NOZZLE.CCI.
Pressure Vessel Component Analysis

Large Nozzle Examples per ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix 1-7
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
FileName : LG_NOZZL --------------------------------- Page 1
Nozzle Analysis : 24" Nozzle ITEM: 1, 11:00am, 05/14/98
INPUT VALUES, NOZZLE NUMBER 1, Description: 24" Nozzle
Design Internal Pressure ( Case 1 ) P 100.00 psig

Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMP 350.00 F
Design External Pressure ( Case 2 ) PEXT 100.00 psig
Temperature for External Pressure TEMPEX 350.00 F
Shell Material (Not Normalized or NA) SA-516 70

Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature S 17500.00 psi
Shell Allowable Stress At Ambient SA 17500.00 psi
Outside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell D 55.2500 in.

Design Length of Section L 184.5000 in.
Actual Thickness of Shell or Head T .9900 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Shell or Head CAS .3125 in.
Angle between Nozzle and Shell or Head ANGLE 90.00 Degrees

Nozzle Material (Not Normalized or NA) SA-106 B

Nozzle Allowable Stress at Temperature SN 15000.00 psi
Nozzle Allowable Stress At Ambient SNA 15000.00 psi
Diameter Basis for Nozzle BASISN OD

Diameter of Nozzle DIA 24.0000 in.
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis DBN Actual

Actual Thickness of Nozzle THK 1.0660 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Nozzle CAN .3125 in.
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam at Nozzle ES 1.00
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck EN 1.00
Insert or Abutting Nozzle Type NTYP Insert

Outward Projection of Nozzle HO 4.0000 in.
Weld leg size between Nozzle and Pad/Shell WO .5000 in.
Groove weld depth between Nozzle and Vessel WGNV .6250 in.
Pad Material (Not Normalized or NA) SA-516 70

Pad Allowable Stress at Temperature SN 17500.00 psi
Pad Allowable Stress At Ambient SNA 17500.00 psi
Diameter of Pad along vessel surface DP 31.0000 in.
Thickness of Pad TP .6250 in.
Weld leg size between Pad and Shell WP .6250 in.
Groove weld depth between Pad and Nozzle WGPN .6250 in.
ASME Code Weld Type per UW-16.1
NOZZLE CALCULATION, NOZZLE NUMBER 1, Description: 24" Nozzle
Actual Nozzle Diameter Used in Calculation 24.000 in.

Actual Nozzle Thickness Used in Calculation 1.066 in.
Internal Pressure Results for SHELL/HEAD :
Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Cylindrical Shell, TR, CASE 1

= (100.00*55.2500/2)/(17500*1.00+0.4*100.00)
= .1575 in.
External Pressure Results for SHELL/HEAD :
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Description: 24" Nozzle

ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 1995 & A-96


.6775 55.2500 184.50 81.55 3.3394 .0005286 7532.86
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*7532.8560)/(3*81.5498)=123.1616 psig


.6233 55.2500 184.50 88.64 3.3394 .0004665 6647.86

EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6647.8600)/(3*88.6356)=100.0029 psig
Results for Maximum Length Between Stiffeners (Slen):

.6775 55.2500 227.22 81.55 4.1126 .0004292 6116.58
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6116.5810)/(3*81.5498)=100.0056 psig

Actual Thickness as entered by User .9900 in.
Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure 227.220 in.
Internal Pressure Results for NOZZLE :
Required thickness per UG-37(a) of Nozzle Wall, TRN CASE 1

= (100.00*24.0000/2.0)/(15000*1.00+0.4*100.00)
= .0798 in.
External Pressure Results for NOZZLE :
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Description: 24" Nozzle


.7535 24.0000 4.00 31.85 .1667 .0474581 17600.00
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*17600.0000)/(3*31.8514)=736.7556 psig

.1183 24.0000 4.00 202.85 .1667 .0029529 15215.24
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*15215.2400)/(3*202.8471)=100.0112 psig
Results for Maximum Length Calculation: No Closure

.7535 24.0000 .17E+24 31.85 .6911E+22 .0010843 12079.53
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*12079.5300)/(3*31.8514)=505.6627 psig

Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure .1659E+24 in.
UG-40, Thickness and Diameter Limit Results : CASE 1

Effective material diameter limit, DL 44.9860 in.

Effective material thickness limit, no pad TLNP 1.6938 in.
Effective material thickness limit, pad side TLWP 1.6938 in.
RESULTS of NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT AREA CALCULATIONS:

AREA AVAILABLE, A1 to A5 Design External Mapnc
Area Required AR 3.576 7.077 NA sq.in.
Area in Shell A1 11.584 1.207 NA sq.in.
Area in Nozzle Wall A2 1.956 1.844 NA sq.in.
Area in Inward Nozzle A3 .000 .000 NA sq.in.
Area in Welds A4 .605 .605 NA sq.in.
Area in Pad A5 4.375 4.375 NA sq.in.
TOTAL AREA AVAILABLE ATOT 18.521 8.031 NA sq.in.
Pressure Case 2 Governs the Analysis
Nozzle Angle Used in Area Calculations 90.00 Degs.
The area available without a pad is Insufficient.

The area available with the given pad is Sufficient.
SELECTION OF POSSIBLE REINFORCING PADS: Diameter Thickness

Based on given Pad Thickness: 29.5000 .6250 in.
Based on given Pad Diameter: 31.0000 .5000 in.
Based on Shell or Nozzle Thickness: 27.5000 1.0000 in.
Reinforcement Area Required for Nozzle:

AR = 0.5*(DLR*TR+2*THK*TR*(1-FFR1)) per UG-37(d) or UG-39
AR = 0.5*(22.4930*.6233+2*(1.0660-.3125)*.6233*(1.00-.86))
AR = 7.077 sq.in.
Areas per UG-37.1 but with DL = Diameter Limit, DLR = Corroded ID:
Area Available in Shell (A1):
A1 = (DL-DLR)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)-2*(THK-CAN)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)*(1-FFR1)
A1 = (44.986-22.493)*(1.00*(.9900-.313)-.623)-2*(1.066-.313)
*(1.00*(.9900-.3125)-.6233)*(1.0-.86)
A1 = 1.207 sq.in.
Area Available in Nozzle Wall, no Pad:

A2NP = ( 2 * MIN(TLNP,HO) ) * ( THK - CAN - TRN ) * FFR2
A2NP = ( 2 * 1.6938 ) * ( 1.0660 - .3125 - .1183 ) * .86 )
A2NP = 1.844 sq.in.
Area Available in Nozzle Wall, with Pad:

A2WP = (2*MIN(TLWP,HO))*(THK-CAN-TRN)*FFR2
A2WP = ( 2 * 1.6938 ) * ( 1.0660 - .3125 - .1183 ) * .86 )
A2WP = 1.844 sq.in.
Area Available in Welds, no Pad:

A4NP = WO^2*FFR2 + (WI-CAN/0.707)^2*FFR2
A4NP = .5000^2 * .86 + ( .0000 )^2 * .86
A4NP = .214 sq.in.
Area Available in Welds, with Pad:

A4WP = WO^2*FFR3+(WI-CAN/0.707)^2*FFR2+WP^2*FFR4
A4WP = .5000^2 * .86 + ( .0000 )^2 * .86 + .6250^2 * 1.00
A4WP = .605 sq.in.
Area Available in Pad:

A5 = (MIN(DP,DL)-(DIA+2*THK))*(MIN(TP,TLWP,TE))*FFR4
A5 = ( 31.0000 - 24.0000 ) * .6250 * 1.00
A5 = 4.375 sq.in.
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness Requirement:

= Max(Min(Max(Max(UG45B1,UG16B),Max(UG45B2,UG16B)),UG45B4),UG45A)
= Max(Min(Max(Max( .4700, .3750),Max( .4700, .3750)), .6406), .4308)
= .4700 < Minimum Nozzle Thickness 1.0660 in. OK
M.A.W.P. RESULTS FOR THIS NOZZLE GEOMETRY

Approximate M.A.W.P. for given geometry AMAP 304.2 psig
Nozzle is O.K. for the External Pressure AMAPEXT 100.0 psig
Weight of Nozzle, with Pad, Uncorroded 161.94 lb.

Weight of Nozzle, with Pad, Corroded 123.84 lb.
MINIMUM DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE RESULTS: Nozzle Shell Pad

Minimum Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 34 31 6 F
Minimum Temp. at operating stress -76 -79 -104 F
Minimum Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) NA -20 -20 F
Nozzle MDMT Thickness Calc. per UCS-66 1(b), MIN(tn,t,te)

Minimum Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 6 F
Minimum Metal Temp. at Required thickness -104 F
Minimum Metal Temp. w/o impact per UG-20(f) -20 F
SUMMARY of REINFORCEMENT AREAS for LARGE NOZZLE (Per Appendix 1-7):
AREA REQUIRED for reinforcement of nozzle AR 4.719 sq.in.
AREA AVAILABLE, A1 to A5 No Pad With Pad

Area Available in Shell A1 .597 .597 sq.in.
Area Available in Nozzle Wall A2 1.844 1.844 sq.in.
Area Available in Inward Nozzle A3 .000 .000 sq.in.
Area Available in Welds A4 .214 .605 sq.in.
Area Available in Pad A5 .000 4.375 sq.in.
TOTAL AREA AVAILABLE ATOT 2.656 7.422 sq.in.
The area available without a pad is Insufficient.

The area available with the given pad is Sufficient.
WELD SIZE CALCULATIONS, NOZZLE NUMBER 1, Description: 24" Nozzle
Minimum thickness for nozzle/shell welds TMIN .6250 in.

Minimum thickness for pad/shell welds TMINPAD .6250 in.
Results Per UW-16.1, Required Thickness Actual Thickness

Nozzle Weld .2500 = Min per Code .3500 = 0.7 * WO , in.

Pad Weld .3125 = 0.5*TMINPAD .4375 = 0.7 * WP , in.
WELD STRENGTH AND WELD LOADS PER UG-41.1, SKETCH (a) OR (b)
W = (AR-A1+2*(THK-CAN)*FFR1*(E1(T-CAS)-TR))*S
W = ( 7.0775 - 1.2066 + 2 * ( 1.0660 - .3125 ) * .8571 *
( 1.00 * ( .9900 - .3125) - .6233 ) ) * 17500
W = 103965. lb.
W1 = (A2+A5+A4-(WII-CAN/.707)^2*FFR2)*S
W1 = ( 1.8443 + 4.3750 + .6049 - .1953 * .86 ) * 17500
W1 = 116494. lb.
W2 = (A2+A3+A4+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W2 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + .2143 + .8751 ) * 17500
W2 = 51340. lb.
W3 = (A2+A3+A4+A5+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W3 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + 4.3750 + .6049 + .8751 ) * 17500
W3 = 134739. lb.
STRENGTH OF CONNECTION ELEMENTS FOR FAILURE PATH ANALYSIS
SHEAR, OUTWARD NOZZLE WELD:

SONW = (PI/2)*DLO*WO*0.49*SNW
SONW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 24.0000 * .5000 * 0.49 * 15000
SONW = 138544. lb.
SHEAR, PAD ELEMENT WELD:

SPEW = (PI/2)*DP*WP*0.49*SEW
SPEW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 31.0000 * .6250 * 0.49 * 17500
SPEW = 260973. lb.
SHEAR, NOZZLE WALL:

SNW = (PI*(DLR+DLO)/4.0)*(THK-CAN)*0.7*SN
SNW = ( 3.1416 * 11.6233) * ( 1.0660 - .3125 ) * 0.7 * 15000
SNW = 288902. lb.
TENSION, PAD GROOVE WELD:
TPGW = (PI/2.0)*DLO*WGPN*0.74*SEG
TPGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 24.0000 * .6250 * 0.74 * 15000
TPGW = 261538. lb.
TENSION, NOZZLE GROOVE WELD:

TNGW = (PI/2)*DLO*(WGNVI-CAS)*0.74*SNG
TNGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 24.0000 * ( .6250 - .3125 ) * 0.74 * 15000
TNGW = 130769. lb.
STRENGTH OF FAILURE PATHS:

PATH11 = ( SPEW + SNW ) = ( 260973 + 288901 ) = 549874 lb.
PATH22 = ( SONW + TPGW + TNGW + SINW )
= ( 138544 + 261537 + 130768 + 0 ) = 530850 lb.
PATH33 = ( SPEW + TNGW + SINW )
= ( 260973 + 130768 + 0 ) = 391741 lb.
SUMMARY OF FAILURE PATH CALCULATIONS:

Path 1-1 = 549875. lb., must exceed W = 103965. lb. or W1 = 116494. lb.

Iterative Results per Pressure, Area and UG-45:

(Assuming same Corr. Allowance for shell and nozzle)
Maximum (failure) Corrosion Allowance: .347 in.
Minimum (failure) Nozzle Thickness: .719 in.
Minimum (failure) Shell Thickness: .643 in.

&KDSWHU
The Flange Module
Introduction
The PVElite Flange module calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of
flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The module
uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the 2001 Code, A-2001.

The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by
Waters, Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by
Taylor Forge in 1937, and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical pur-
poses they have been unchanged since that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently
republished, is also still available, and is one of the most useful tools for flange analysis.
The input and results for the PVElite flange program are roughly modeled on the Taylor
Forge flange design sheets.
The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the
flange and hub) and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compresses the
gasket. This load needs to be high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be
enough higher to seal even when pressure is applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt
load and unloads the gasket.
Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps:
1. Identify operating conditions and materials: determine allowable stresses for the
flange material and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the
Code tables of allowable stress.
2. Identify the gasket material and flange facing type. Determine the effective width and
effective diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts (Tables 2-
5.1 and 2-5.2).
3. From the design pressure and the gasket information, calculate the required area of the
bolts. Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the
required area. Based on the bolt areas and allowable stresses, calculate the flange
design bolt loads.
4. Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the
product of a load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to
the point of application of the load. The final result is one bending moment for operat-
ing conditions and a second for gasket seating conditions.
The Flange Module 12-1

The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., coun-
terclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consis-
tently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in the PVElite flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
S = k(geometry)*M/t^2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment,
divided by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thick-
ness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in “Modern Flange Design,” Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge.
The Flange module includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting
loads imposed by a mating flange. The module also takes full account of corrosion allow-
ance. You enter uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before
performing the calculations. The module can treat corrosion in a special manner based on
the input of a Yes/No question in the input.
The module can also be used for two levels of flange design. The PARTIAL option forces
the program to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The
DESIGN option forces the program to select all of the relevant flange geometry including
bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter, thickness, and hub geometry.
12-2 The Flange Module

PVElite -User Guide Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis
Figure 12A - Geometry for The Flange Module


Main Input Fields
Flange Number
Enter the flange ID number. It is recommended that the flange numbers start at 1 and
increase sequentially. If this field is left blank PVElite will assume there is no data here to
be analyzed. The only exception to this is the first element, if an analysis is attempted and
the item number is blank, PVElite will assign a value of 1 to the item number.
Flange Designation
Enter an alpha-numeric tag for this flange. This entry is optional.
When performing a partial analysis, PVElite iterates for the required thickness of the
flange. The final set of results you see is made using the final required thickness.
If you would like to see the results using the input thickness, then enter a colon “:” as the
last character in the description. In both cases, PVElite will determine the required thick-
ness.
Flange Type
Enter the flange type number for this flange. Flange types are
• Integral Weld Neck
• Integral Slip On
• Integral Ring
• Loose Slip On
• Loose Ring
• Lap Joint
• Blind
• Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for purposes of analysis. These are
integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a
unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these
categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
Weld Neck Flanges

These have a hub which is butt welded to the vessel.
Slip-on Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they required a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do no have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange. They
are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is
used between the flange and the vessel.

PVElite -User Guide Discussion of Input Data
Lap Joint Flanges

These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected from the
vessel, bearing only on a vessel ‘lap’. They are always analyzed as loose.
Reverse Geometry Flange

Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use integral flange rules,
which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See Appendix 2-13.
Loose-Type Flanges, especially lap joints, may be split

A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the ves-
sel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange
is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be
designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment.
The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the
splits in the other.
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets

A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included in the Code sketches, nor even in
the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that extend from the ID of
the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of flange are
usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation
sheets.
Analysis Type
Enter the analysis type for the computations to be performed on this flange.
Analyze
For this analysis type, the complete flange definition must be given by the user. The pro-
gram will compute the resulting stresses.
Partial
For this analysis type, all information except for the flange thickness must be specified.
The program will select a flange thickness such that the resulting flange stress equals the
allowable stress.
Design
For this analysis type, only the flange diameter and thickness, gasket and flange face
geometry, and gasket properties are specified. The program computes all other flange
dimensions and stresses.
Design Pressure
Enter the internal design pressure. If the value entered in this field is negative, it will be
treated as external pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for the flange. This temperature will be used to interpolate
the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.

Flange/Bolt Material Specification



Flange Thickness
Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted
from the flange and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the compu-
tations.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations

The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states that
every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the flange
thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off of the
thickness for the stress calculations.
Flange ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is refereed to as “B” in the ASME code. The corrosion
allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be
added to the uncorroded ID given by the user). For a blind flange this entry should be 0.
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as “A” in the ASME code.
Shell Material
Select the shell material name. This is used for computing the longitudinal hub allowable
stress for optional type flanges that are analyzed as integral.


Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the flange
face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact
point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that
the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange

Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the Flange
Face ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.

Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The program uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point,
but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the
bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange face
ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.

Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the Flange Face
ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Hub Thickness, Small End

Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as “g0” in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. For weld neck
flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on flange
geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without
hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Hub Thickness, Large End

Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as “g1” in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. It is permissible
for the Hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For
flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as
zero.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is refereed to as “h” in the ASME code. For flange geom-
etries without hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an optional type
flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the
thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When you analyze a
flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should enter zero for the
hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However, when you
design as a loose flange a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back, enter the size of a
leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the program designs
the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the
nuts.



cell.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table, 2 - UNC Bolt Table, 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt.
Number of Bolts
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings, TABLE 2-5.1
Gasket Factor Seating Stress Facing Column
Gasket Material (m) (y)
Self Energizing Types, including
metallic and elastomer O ring 0.00 0 II
Flat Elastomers
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0 II
75A Shore Durometer or higher 1.00 200 II
Flat asbestos with suitable binder

1/8 inch thick 2.00 1600 II
1/16 inch thick 2.75 3700 II
1/32 inch thick 3.50 6500 II
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert 1.25 400 II
Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert

3 ply 2.25 2200 II
2 ply 2.50 2900 II
1 ply 2.75 3700 II
Vegetable Fiber 1.75 1100 II
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled

Carbon Steel 2.50 10000 II
Stainless Steel or Monel 3.00 10000 II
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or

Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled
Soft aluminum 2.50 2900 II
Soft copper or brass 2.75 3700 II
Iron or soft steel 3.00 4500 II
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 3.25 5500 II
Stainless Steel 3.50 6500 II
Corrugated metal, not filled


Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled
Monel 3.50 8000 II
4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000 II
Grooved metal
Solid flat metal

Soft aluminum 4.00 8800 I
Soft copper or brass 4.75 13000 I
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18000 I
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 6.00 21800 I
Stainless Steel 6.50 26000 I
Ring Joint
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18000 I
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 6.00 21800 I
Stainless Steel 6.50 26000 I

Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the fol-
lowing correlations:
FACING SKETCH PVELITE EQUIVALENT DESCRIPTION
1a 1 flat finish faces

1b 2 serrated finish faces
1c 3 raised nubbin-flat finish
1d 4 raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 5 1/64 inch nubbin
3 6 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 7 large serrations, one side
5 8 large serrations, both sides
6 9 metallic O-ring type gasket
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).

Nubbin Width
Is There a Partition Gasket?

If your exchanger geometry has a pass partition gasket, check this entry. PVElite will then
prompt for the overall length and width of the gasket.
Specify External Loads

In order for leakage computations to be performed, the external loads acting on the flange
must be specified. By checking this field, a pop-up input form is displayed to allow the
entry of this loading data. Loading data of this nature would typically come from a pipe
stress analysis program, such as CAESAR II.
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pres-
sure. The program calculates a roughly approximate equivalent pressure for flanges loaded
axially and/or in bending using the following formula:
Peq = Pdes + 4*F/3.14G^2+16*M/3.14*G^3
Where:
Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi
Pdes = Design pressure, psi
F = Axial force, lbs
M = Bending moment, in-lbs
G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in.
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
Mating Flange Loads

If loads from the mating flange are to be considered, check this field. A pop-up spread-
sheet will appear for additional data entry. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if
it is greater then the standard bolt loads computed using the ASME formulas.
Caution The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will
result in incorrect MAWP calculations.
Note You probably don’t want to calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values,
but rather based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure. Also
you definitely don’t want to do “design” when you have a mating flange, since the
program will certainly pick a different bolt circle, etc. than the one chosen for the
other flange. You can however, do a partial (thickness) design.

Compute Thickness Based on Flange Rigidity?

Appendix S has some equations that attempt to determine whether or not a given flange
geometry will leak. If the computed rigidity index is greater than 1.0 then the leakage is
predicted. By checking this box users can instruct the program to compute the thickness
such that the corresponding rigidity index is 1.0.
Please note that Appendix S is non-mandatory appendix and that these calculations
regardless of the type flanges, that are analyzed as integral.
Pop-Up Input Fields

required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into
two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the
flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid
flange - without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The pair of rings shall be
assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the splits in the other.
Weld Leg at Back of Ring

Enter the length of the weld leg at the back of the ring. This value is added to the inside
diameter during the design of ring type flanges to determine the minimum bolt circle when
the design option is turned on. If you are performing a partial or regular analysis, PVElite
will check to see if there is interference between the wrench and the weld. PVElite will
print a brief message letting you know there is a potential problem.
Lap Joint Contact Inside Diameter

Enter the inner diameter of the flange/joint contact surface as shown in the figure below.
Lap Joint Contact Outside Diameter

Enter the outer diameter of the flange/joint contact surface as shown in the figure above.

TEMA Channel Cover

This checkbox indicates whether or not the current flange is a TEMA channel cover. A
separate thickness and MAWP are computed for channel covers, as well as the deflection.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (Long Span)

Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the long side of the flange. This diameter
is used to calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind flanges. This
factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (Short Span)

Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the short side of the flange. This diameter
is used to calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind flanges. This
factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Allowed Channel Cover Deflection

For TEMA Channel Covers, enter the magnitude of the allowed deflection at the center of
the cover. This value will be used in computing the channel cover thickness and MAWP,
even if it is larger than the allowed deflection. However, a warning message will be printed
stating this problem exists.
Perimeter Along the Center of the Bolt Holes (L)

Enter the perimeter of the bolted head measured along the centerline of the bolts. This
value (L) is needed for both non-circular and circular geometries. For a circular head, enter
the value of (3.14159 * bolt circle diameter). For non-circular heads this value will have to
be computed and entered in.
Length of the Partition Gasket

This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated
with this flange. If the pass partition gaskets are a different width than the main gasket,
scale the length you enter so that the area of the gasket is correct.
Width of the Pass Partition Gasket

sketch, column, M and Y will be taken from the main gasket. Using these properties and
the known width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gas-
ket loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Node Number (Optional)

Enter the node number of this flange. This entry represents the node point in a stress anal-
ysis model from which the loads are obtained.
Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force which acts on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment which acts on this flange.

Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating

Enter the bolt load from the mating flange in the operating case.
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating

Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for seating conditions.
Mating Flange Design Bolt Load

Enter the design bolt load for the mating flange.

Discussion of Results PVElite - User Guide
Status Bar
In CodeCalc the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
Required Thickness due to pressure
MAWP (minimum of operating and seating conditions)
Note Results displaying red in color indicate a failure.
Flanges with Different Bending Moments

The flange design moments differ from the norm for external pressure, reverse flanges,
and flat flanges.
Under external pressure only the end load and flange pressure are included in the design,
and their sense is reversed.
For reverse flanges all the moments are present, but the moment arm hd is negative, mak-
ing MD negative. The load HT is negative, and the moment arm ht may be either positive
or negative. The absolute value of the moment is used in the calculations.
For flat faced flanges an alternate value of hg (h’’g) is used to calculate a reverse moment
at the bolt circle. No calculations for seating conditions for full faced flanges are required.
Blind Flanges and Channel Covers

The ASME Code formula for a circular blind flange is
t = d * SQRT(C*P/S*E + 1.9*W*Hg/S*E*d^3)
The first term in this formula is the bending of a flat plate under pressure. The second term
is the bending of the plate due to an edge moment. The stress is limited to 1.5 times the
allowable stress, but the 1.5 factor is already built into the equation. For bolt-up conditions
the first term is zero - the thickness of the flange depends only on the edge bending.
For non-circular blind flanges the term Z is added to the first term in the square root. Once
again, Z is a simple function of the ratio of the large dimension to the small dimension of
the flange. It is interesting to note that the Code covers non-circular blind flanges, but no
other type of non-circular flange (not even in the rectangular vessel appendix).
Channel Covers designed to TEMA must meet at least the minimum thickness require-
ments of the Code. In addition, if there is a pass partition groove, the cover deflection is
limited.
The formula for flange deflection limitation is found in paragraph 9.21 of TEMA. The
deflection is, of course, a function of t^3 and G^3. Thus, a very small increase in flange
thickness will decrease the deflection significantly. The Seventh Edition of TEMA also
gives recommended deflections as a function of flange size. The previous editions hid the
actual deflection you were working toward in a thickness equation.

PVElite -User Guide Discussion of Results
Allowable Flange Stresses

Allowable flange stresses are based on the ASME Code Allowable Stress for the flange
material at the Ambient and Operating design temperatures. In the case of bending
stresses, these allowable are multiplied by 1.5. This takes into account the higher maxi-
mum strain required to yield a section in bending versus pure tension.
The stresses calculated and the allowable stresses are as follows:
Operating Ambient
Longitudinal Hub Stress (bending) 1.5 x Sfo 1.5 x Sfa
Radial Flange Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Tangential Flange Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Maximum Average Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Stress in Bolts 1.0 x Sbo 1.0 x Sba
Stress in Reverse Flanges 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Stress in Full Faced Gasket Flanges 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Where:
Sfo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at operating temperature.
Sfa = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature.
Sbo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at operating temperature.
Sba = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at ambient temperature.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

The following graph shows conceptually how the program extrapolates for the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure:
1. For Operating Pressure MAWP:

The program calculates the stresses at the pressure given by the user.
The program calculates the slope between the stress at zero pressure and the stress at
the given pressure
The program extrapolates the slope out to the point where the stress is equal to the
allowable stress. The pressure at this point is the maximum allowable working pres-
sure.
2. For Gasket Seating MAWP:
Note At low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design
pressure. At higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP
can be calculated as described above, except that the extrapolation is from the
point where pressure comes into the calculation of the seating stress.
The program calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on
the input geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the
input pressure. However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the
MAWP may depend on the pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please
note that in Partial or Design mode, the program will calculate MAWP based on the
required flange thickness.

PVElite -User Guide Discussion of Results
Flange Rigidity Calculations

Appendix S has some equations that attempt to determine whether or not a given flange
geometry will leak. Two cases are considered, ambient and operating. If the computed
rigidity factor is greater than 1.0, then leakage is predicted. Please note that Appendix S is
a non-mandatory appendix and that these calculations are also non-mandatory.
Flange Design
The geometry defined by the user is the basis for the design performed by the program.
Specifically, the inside diameter, materials, pressure, gasket geometry and gasket proper-
ties remain fixed throughout the design. Beginning from this point, the program uses the
following approach to design the rest of the flange:
1. For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the
thickness required for the design pressure
2. For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as
the small end of the hub plus 1/16th (for small end thicknesses less than one inch)
or 1/8th (for small end thicknesses greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub
length equal to the small end thickness plus the minimum slope (3:1) for the hub.
The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared with standard-
ized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diam-
eters (of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light.
Finally, the selection of a small hub keeps the amount of machining required for
the flange to a minimum.
3. Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diam-
eter of the flange. The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts
than would be found on standard flanges. This also has the effect of minimizing
the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange.
4. Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts.
5. Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on:
• The area required divided by the area available per bolt -OR-
• The maximum allowed spacing between bolt of this size.
6. Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle base on:
• The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -OR-
• The OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -OR-
• The minimum spacing distance between the bolts -OR-
• For reverse flanges, the vessel OD plus the bolt ID spacing.
7. Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the mini-
mum edge spacing for the bolt size chosen.
8. For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for
the values chosen, and recalculate the moment arms for the flange.
9. Finally (and this step also applies to partial design of the flange), select a thick-
ness for the flange and calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allow-
able, adjust the thickness based on the difference between the actual and allowable

stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. This process continues until the
actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable stress.

PVElite -User Guide Example Problems
Example Problems
The example problem presented below is taken from “Modern Flange Design,” Page 12.
This problem is the calculation of stresses for a typical weld neck flange.
The results from the example problem agree very well with the Taylor Forge results. The
detailed calculations on the second and third pages of the printout show the formulas and
substitutions for the loads, distances and stresses calculated by the program.
There are several additional example problems included in the files CHECKS, FEXAM-
PLE & FEXAMPL2.
COADE Verification Problem Set
FileName : CHECKS -------------------------------- Page 1
Flange Analysis : TAYLOR FORGE ITEM: 1, 03:31pm, 05/18/98
INPUT VALUES, FLANGE NUMBER 1, Description: TAYLOR FORGE
Description of Flange Geometry (Type) Integral Weld Neck

Description of Flange Analysis Analysis Only
Design Pressure P 400.00 psig
Design Temperature 650.00 F
Corrosion Allowance FCOR .0000 in.
Flange Inside Diameter B 32.0000 in.

Flange Outside Diameter A 39.1250 in.
Flange Thickness T 2.0000 in.
Thickness of Hub at Small End G0 .5000 in.
Thickness of Hub at Large End G1 1.1250 in.
Length of Hub HL 2.7500 in.
Flange Material SA-516 70

Flange Allowable Stress At Temperature SFO 17500.00 psi
Flange Allowable Stress At Ambient SFA 17500.00 psi
Bolt Material SA-193 B7

Bolt Allowable Stress At Temperature SBO 25000.00 psi
Bolt Allowable Stress At Ambient SBA 25000.00 psi
Diameter of Bolt Circle C 37.0000 in.

Nominal Bolt Diameter DB 1.0000 in.
Type of Threads TEMA Thread Series
Number of Bolts 36
Flange Face Outside Diameter FOD 34.5000 in.

Flange Face Inside Diameter FID 33.0000 in.
Flange Facing Sketch 1, Code Sketch 1a
Gasket Outside Diameter GOD 36.0000 in.

Gasket Inside Diameter GID 33.0000 in.
Gasket Factor, m, M 2.7500
Gasket Design Seating Stress Y 3700.00 psi

Column for Gasket Seating 1, Code Column I
FLANGE ANALYSIS, FLANGE NUMBER 1, Description: TAYLOR FORGE
Corroded Flange ID, BCOR = B+2.0*FCOR 32.000 in.

Corroded Large Hub, G1COR = G1-FCOR 1.125 in.
Corroded Small Hub, G0COR = G0-FCOR .500 in.
Code R Dimension, R = ((C-BCOR)/2.0)-G1COR 1.375 in.
Gasket Contact Width, N = (GOD-GID) / 2.0 .750 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = N / 2.0 .375 in.
Effective Gasket Width, BE = SQRT(B0) / 2.0 .306 in.
Gasket Reaction Diameter, G = GOD-2.0*BE 33.888 in.
BASIC FLANGE AND BOLT LOADS:

Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure:
H = PI/4 * G * G * PEQ
H = ( .7854 * 33.8876 * 33.8876 * 400.0000 )
H = 360771. lb.
Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces:
HP = 2.0 * BE * PI * G * M * PEQ
HP = 2.0 * .3062 * 3.1416 * 33.8876 * 2.7500 * 400.00
HP = 71713. lb.
Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID:
HD = PI * BCOR * BCOR * PEQ / 4.0
HD = 3.1416 * 32.0000 * 32.0000 * 400.0000 / 4.0
HD = 321699. lb.
Pressure Force on Flange Face:
HT = H - HD
HT = 360771 - 321699
HT = 39072. lb.
Operating Bolt Load:
WM1 = H + HP + HPP
WM1 = ( 360771 + 71713 + 0 )
WM1 = 432485. lb.
Gasket Seating Bolt Load:
WM2 = Y * (( BE * PI * G ) + (BEPG * GLPG)) + HPGY
WM2 = 3700.00*((.3062*3.141*33.888)+(.00*.0000))+.00
WM2 = 120609. lb.
Required Bolt Area:
AM = Maximum of WM1/ABSTR, WM2/ABASTR
AM = Maximum of 432484 / 25000 , 120608 / 25000
AM = 17.2994 sq.in.
Bolting Information for TEMA Thread Series:

Total Area of Bolts, AB 19.836 sq.in.
Minimum radial distance between hub and bolts 1.375 in.
Minimum radial distance between bolts and edge 1.063 in.
Minimum circumferential spacing between bolts 2.250 in.
Actual circumferential spacing between bolts 3.225 in.
Maximum circumferential spacing between bolts 5.692 in.
Min. Gasket Contact Width (Brownell&Young) Nmin = 1.437 in.

PVElite -User Guide Example Problems
Flange Design Bolt Load, Gasket Seating:

W = ABASTR * ( AM + AB ) / 2.0
W = 25000.00 * ( 17.2994 + 19.8360 ) / 2.0
W = 464192.40 lb.
Gasket Seating Force:
HG = WM1 - H
HG = 432484 - 360771
HG = 71713.25 lb.
MOMENT ARM CALCULATIONS:

Distance to Gasket Load Reaction:
DHG = (C - G ) / 2.0
DHG = ( 37.0000 - 33.8876 ) / 2.0
DHG = 1.5562 in.
Distance to Face Pressure Reaction:
DHT = ( R + G1COR + DHG ) / 2.0
DHT = ( 1.3750 + 1.1250 + 1.5562 ) / 2.0
DHT = 2.0281 in.
Distance to End Pressure Reaction:
DHD = R + ( G1COR / 2.0 )
DHD = 1.3750 + ( 1.1250 / 2.0 )
DHD = 1.9375 in.
SUMMARY OF MOMENTS FOR INTERNAL PRESSURE:

LOADING Force Distance Bolt Corr Moment
End Pressure, MD 321699. 1.9375 1.0000 51941. ft.lb.
Face Pressure, MT 39072. 2.0281 1.0000 6604. ft.lb.
Gasket Load, MG 71713. 1.5562 1.0000 9300. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, MA 464192. 1.5562 1.0000 60198. ft.lb.
TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION, RMO 67844. ft.lb.

TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING, RMA 60198. ft.lb.
Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(BCOR*G0COR) 4.000 in.

Hub Ratio, HRAT = HL / H0 .688
Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR) 2.250
Flange Factors for Integral Flange:

Factor F per 2-7.2 .777
Factor V per 2-7.3 .162
Factor f per 2-7.6 1.000
Factors from Figure 2-7.1 K = 1.223
T = 1.830 U = 10.740
Y = 9.773 Z = 5.041
d = 66.480 in.^3 e = .194 in.^-1
Stress Factors ALPHA = 1.388
BETA = 1.518 GAMMA = .759
DELTA = .120 LAMBDA = .879
Longitudinal Hub Stress, Operating:

SHO = ( f * RMO / BCOR ) / ( RLAMBDA * G1COR^2 )
SHO = ( 1.0000 * 814133 / 32.0000 ) / ( .8792 * 1.1250^2 )
SHO = 22865. psi
Longitudinal Hub Stress, Seating:

SHA = ( f * RMA / BCOR ) / ( RLAMBDA * G1COR^2 )

SHA = ( 1.0000 * 722370 / 32.0000 ) / ( .8792 * 1.1250^2 )
SHA = 20288. psi
Radial Flange Stress, Operating:
SRO = ( BETA * RMO / BCOR ) / ( RLAMBDA * TH^2 )
SRO = ( 1.5180 * 814133 / 32.0000 ) / ( .8792 * 2.0000^2 )
SRO = 10982. psi
Radial Flange Stress, Seating:
SRA = ( BETA*RMA/BCOR ) / ( RLAMBDA*TH^2 )
SRA = ( 1.5180 * 722370/ 32.0000 ) / ( .8792 * 2.0000^2 )
SRA = 9744. psi
Tangential Flange Stress, Operating:
STO = ( Y*RMO / (TH*TH*BCOR) ) - Z*SRO
STO = ( 9.7733 * 814133 / ( 2.0000^2 * 32.0000) ) - 5.0413 * 10981
STO = 6800. psi
Tangential Flange Stress, Seating:
STA = ( Y*RMA / (TH^2*BCOR) ) - Z*SRA
STA = ( 9.7733 * 722370 / ( 2.0000^2 * 32.0000) ) - 5.0413 * 9744
STA = 6033. psi
Average Flange Stress, Operating:
SAO = ( SHO + MAX( SRO, STO ) ) / 2
SAO = ( 22864 + MAX( 10981, 6799 ))/ 2
SAO = 16923. psi
Average Flange Stress, Seating:
SAA = ( SHA + MAX( SRA, STA ) ) / 2
SAA = ( 20287 + MAX( 9744, 6033 ))/ 2
SAA = 15016. psi
Bolt Stress, Operating:
SBO = ( WM1 / AB )
SBO = ( 432484 / 19.8360 )
SBO = 21803. psi
Bolt Stress, Seating:
SBA = ( WM2 / AB )
SBA = ( 120608 / 19.8360 )
SBA = 6080. psi
Stress Computation Results: OPERATING GASKET SEATING

Actual Allowed Actual Allowed
Longitudinal Hub 22865. 26250. 20288. 26250. psi
Radial Flange 10982. 17500. 9744. 17500. psi
Tangential Flange 6800. 17500. 6033. 17500. psi
Maximum Average 16923. 17500. 15016. 17500. psi
Bolting 21803. 25000. 6080. 25000. psi
Estimated M.A.W.P. ( Operating ) 413.6 psig

Estimated M.A.W.P. ( Gasket Seating ) 542.0 psig
Estimated Finished Weight of Flange 290.5 lb.
Estimated Unfinished Weight of Forging 535.0 lb.
APP. S Flange Rigidity Index for Seating Case .796
APP. S Flange Rigidity Index for Operating Case 1.035

&KDSWHU
The Conical Sections Module
Introduction
The PVElite Conical Sections Module performs internal and external pressure design of
conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules,
2001, A-2001.

The PVElite Conical Sections Module calculates the required thickness and Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure for conical shells and sections under either internal or exter-
nal pressure. The module is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2001. Specifically, the module is based on the rules in para-
graphs UG-32, UG-33, and Appendix 1, Sections 1-5, and 1-7.
The module calculates required thickness for the cone under both internal and external
pressure. Also calculated are the required thickness of the attached cylinders under either
internal or external pressure. Calculations for the required thickness of a transition
knuckle are included.
The required area of reinforcement and actual reinforcement available are calculated for
both internal and external pressures. Reinforcement is limited to the area available in the
shell sections plus simple stiffening rings.
The Conical Sections Module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual
thickness and corrosion allowance, and the module adjusts thicknesses and diameters
when making calculations for the corroded condition.
The Conical Sections Module 13-1

Figure 13A shows geometry for the Conical Sections Module.
Figure 13A - Geometry for the Conical Sections Module
Cone Number
Enter an ID number for the Cone. This may be the item number on the drawing, or num-
bers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Cone Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Internal Design Pressure

You may analyze both internal and external pressure at the same time, since the two cases
are analyzed and reported separately. Enter zero for internal pressure if you only wish to
analyze the external pressure case.
Internal Design Temperature

External Design Pressure

sure calculations.
External Design Temperature

Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for external pressure calculations when you
13-2 The Conical Sections Module

change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a com-
pletely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this temperature
may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the
lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above
the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name

Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature

the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design tem-
perature.
Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient tem-
perature.
Cone Joint Efficiency

Cone Actual Thickness

minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel Many pipe materials have a minimum
Cone Corrosion Allowance


Cone Diameter Basis ( ID, OD )

Enter ID for shell sections based on inside diameter. Enter OD for shell sections based on
outside diameter. Note that this diameter basis is also used for the cylinder at the small end
of the cone, and the cylinder at the large end of the cone.
Cone Diameter at Small End

Enter the diameter of the cone at the small end. This diameter is also used for the cylinder
at the small end of the cone. Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a
knuckle or flare intersects the conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare
intersects the cylindrical section. The program will calculate the other diameter.
Cone Diameter at Large End

Enter the diameter of the cone at the large end. This diameter is also used for the cylinder
at the large end of the cone. Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a
knuckle or flare intersects the conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare
intersects the cylindrical section. The program will calculate the other diameter.
Cone Half Apex Angle

For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30
degrees, though the program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure
calculations it must not be greater than 60 degrees. If you enter a zero for the angle, the
PVElite program will calculate an angle based on the cone diameters and length.
Cone Axial Length

Enter the length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate the
effective length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Are There Axial Forces on the Cone?

If there are axial forces on the cone, check this field. Examples of axial forces would
include weight loads, loads from external attachments, and possibly thermal loads. The
axial force due to internal or external pressure are already taken into account by the pro-
gram. Note that in general loads causing compression are significant for the external pres-
sure case, while loads causing tension are significant for the internal pressure case.
Small Cylinder Joint Efficiency

Small Cylinder Actual Thickness


Small Cylinder Corrosion Allowance

Small Cylinder Axial Strength

Enter the length of the cylinder along the axis of the vessel. This value is not used in inter-
nal pressure calculations, but is required for external pressure calculations.
Small End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle)

Enter the type of reinforcing bar for the small end:
• NONE = no reinforcement at the small end and no knuckle.
• BAR = reinforcing bar at small end (width and thickness).
• SECTION = reinforcing beam section at small end (inertia, area, and depth of
beam).
• KNUCKLE = toroidal knuckle at small end ( radius and thickness )
Note Whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material.
If there is no reinforcing material, enter the small end shell material. The values
for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia
calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Large Cylinder Joint Efficiency

Large Cylinder Actual Thickness

Large Cylinder Corrosion Allowance

Large Cylinder Axial Length

Enter the length of the cylinder along the axis of the vessel. This value is not used in inter-
nal pressure calculations, but is required for external pressure calculations.
Large End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle)

Enter the type of reinforcing bar for the large end:
• NONE=no reinforcement at the large end and no knuckle.

• BAR=reinforcing bar at large end (width and thickness).

• SECTION=reinforcing beam section at large end (inertia, area, and depth of
beam).
• KNUCKLE=toroidal knuckle at large end (radius and thickness).
Note Whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material.
If there is no reinforcing material, enter the large end shell material. The values
for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia
calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Cone Circumferential Joint Efficiency

This value is used in the computation of allowable stresses for discontinuity stresses. It
should be in the range of 0.7 to 1.0.

PVElite - User Guide Pop-Up Input Fields
Pop-Up Input Fields

Take Cone as Lines of Support for External Pressure?
The ASME Code allows you to take the intersections of the cone and the two cylinders as
lines of support for external pressure, provided that the moment of inertia and area of rein-
forcement requirements of Appendix 1-8 are satisfied. Alternately, you may calculate
external pressure using an equivalent design length which includes the cone and both the
large and small cylinders. For details see Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-28 and
Figure UG-28.1 (A-90 Addenda and following.)
Normally it is preferable to take the cone as lines of support, since the equivalent length of
the large cylinder / cone / small cylinder combination may easily result in low allowable
external pressures. However, the moment of inertia is very easy to be less than the required
for knuckle-to-cylinder junction — because the shell/knuckle/cone is usually so close to
the resulting neutral axis. Starting from CC version 5.6, the moment of inertia with the
knuckle is calculated, following the procedure of code example L-3.3.
Total Axial Force on Large End for Internal Pressure Case

Enter the axial force, not the force per unit circumferences as used by the Code (f1, f2).
The program calculates the force per unit circumference before performing the calcula-
tion. Note that we have formulated the calculations so that a positive (tensile) axial force
adds to the tension due to internal pressure, while a negative (compressive) axial force
subtracts from the tension due to internal pressure.
Total Axial Force on Large End for External Pressure Case

tion. Note that we have formulated the calculations so that a negative (compressive) axial
force adds to the compression due to external pressure, while a positive (tensile) axial
force subtracts from the compression due to external pressure.
Total Axial Force on Small End for Internal Pressure Case

tion. Note that we have formulated the calculations so that a positive (tensile) axial force
adds to the tension due to internal pressure, while a negative (compressive) axial force
subtracts from the tension due to internal pressure.
Total Axial Force on Small End for External Pressure Case

tion. Note that we have formulated the calculations so that a negative (compressive) axial
force adds to the compression due to external pressure, while a positive (tensile) axial
force subtracts from the compression due to external pressure.
Location of Reinforcing Cone ( Shell, Cone )

Enter the location of the reinforcing bar:

Pop-Up Input Fields PVElite - User Guide
• SHELL = welded to the shell (cylinder).

• CONE = welded to the cone.
Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the width of the reinforcing bar. You can also think of this as the projection of the
bar out from the vessel OD. For example, a donut shaped plate 10 inches by 1 inch has a
radial width of 10.
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring

Enter the thickness of the reinforcing bar. For example, a donut shaped plate 10 inches by
1 inch has an axial thickness of 1.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section

Enter the moment of inertia of the beam section (I, T, etc.) used to reinforce the cone/cyl-
inder junction. This can usually be found in the ‘Manual of Steel Construction’ for com-
mon beam sections.
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section

Enter the cross sectional area of the beam section (I, T, etc.) used to reinforce the cone/cyl-
inder junction. This can usually be found in the ‘Manual of Steel Construction’ for com-
mon beam sections.
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section

Enter the distance to the centroid of the beam section ( I, T, etc.) used to reinforce the
cone/cylinder junction. This can usually be found in the ‘Manual of Steel Construction’
for common beam sections.
Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End

this radius to be no less than 6% of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three
times the knuckle thickness (UG-31, (h)).
Knuckle Thickness, Large End

Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End

this radius to be no less than 6% of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three
times the knuckle thickness (UG-31, (h)).
Knuckle Thickness, Small End

Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the large end.

PVElite - User Guide Discussion of the Results
Discussion of the Results

Internal Pressure Results
The first section of results shows the required thicknesses and Maximum Allowable Work-
ing Pressures for the cone and for the upper and lower cylinders under internal pressure.
Note This section is shown even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required
thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum Allowable Working Pressures will be
meaningful.
Next the program summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allow-
ances as necessary.
External Pressure Results

The External pressure module calculates materials properties and required thicknesses
under external pressure. Because the program uses Young’s modulus values in both the
internal and external reinforcement calculation, this module is called even when the exter-
nal design pressure is zero. However, in this case the required thickness and Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure calculations for external pressure are skipped.
The required thickness under external pressure is calculated using the interactive method
outlined in Paragraph UG-33 of the ASME Code. The effective length for toriconical sec-
tions is adjusted to include a fraction of the knuckle in the design length.
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure

The program calculates required reinforcement for the cone/cylinder junctions at both the
large and the small ends. This calculation is performed whenever the internal pressure is
greater than zero, and the reinforcing material is defined. If a knuckle is specified instead
of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle calculation will be performed and the required area cal-
culation will not.
When a knuckle calculation is performed, the program calculates both the required thick-
ness and the maximum allowable working pressure for the toroidal portion of the knuckle,
using the rules in Appendix 1-4(d).
When there is no knuckle, the program calculates the required area of reinforcement at the
intersection of the cylinder and the two cones. Cones are required to have reinforcement at
the large and small ends under internal pressure (Appendix 1-5) because of the tendency
of the cone/cylinder junction to buckle under the radial load developed in the cone.
The Code calculates the maximum angle below which buckling will not occur as a func-
tion of the design pressure and allowable stress. This ratio is used because it is a pretty
good indication of the diameter thickness ratio for the cylinder, and takes into account the
strength of the material. This approach has the odd effect that when you increase the
allowable stress you decrease the allowable cone angle. However, you will normally find
that for a given thickness this effect is offset by the increase area available in the cone for
reinforcement.
Given that reinforcement is required, the area required is a function of the pressure and the
square of the radius. Area available in the shell within one decay length may be included
in the area available for stiffening.

Discussion of the Results PVElite - User Guide
The PVElite program will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the
allowed apex angle is higher than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is
greater than the area required.
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure

The program calculates required reinforcement and moment of inertia for the cone/cylin-
der junctions at both the large and the small ends. This calculation is performed whenever
the external pressure is greater than zero, the cone is taken as lines of support and reinforc-
ing material is defined. If a knuckle is specified instead of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle
calculation will be performed and the area of reinforcement calculation will not. If the user
specifies that the cone/cylinder junctions are not to be taken as a line of support, then the
area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations will not be performed.
Cones are required to have reinforcement at the large and small ends under external pres-
sure (Appendix 1-7) because of the tendency to buckle under axial external loads.
At both the large and small ends there are requirements for area of reinforcement and
moment of inertia of the reinforcement. The area of reinforcement is based on consider-
ations similar to those described for internal pressure. The required moment of inertia of
the reinforcement is a function of the strain in the ring at the cone/shell junction, which is
in turn calculated using the Code materials chart from the stress in the ring. See the com-
ments on stiffening rings in the external pressure section for further insight.
The maximum apex angle is taken from Tables 1-8.1 in Appendix 1 of the ASME Code.
The ratio P/SE is calculated by the program. Note that this angle applies only to the large
end of the cone - the small end always requires at least a little reinforcement.
The area required in the reinforcing ring will be set to zero if either the cone angle is less
than the maximum angle (large end only), or the area of reinforcement available in the
shell is greater than the area required.

Example Problems
Example Problem #1
Example problem 1 is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3, Example 3. The Code example problem requests determination of the required thick-
ness for the knuckle and cone with a small end diameter of 200 inches and a half apex
angle of 30 degrees. The cone is to be designed for 50 psi internal pressure. Agreement
with the required thickness per the Code is exact. Page 2 of the printout is included to
illustrate the detailed calculations for internal pressure.
These examples are contained in the file CHECKS.
Examples per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix L

FileName : CHECKS ----------------------------------- Page 1
Conical Analysis : APP L, L-2.3 ITEM: 2, 01:55pm, 06/05/97
INPUT ECHO, CONE NUMBER 2, Description: APP L, L-2.3
Design Internal Pressure PINT 50.00 psig

Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMPIN 650.00 F
Design External Pressure PEXT .00 psig
Temperature for External Pressure TEMPEX .00 F
Cone Material SA-516 70

Cone Allowable Stress at Temperature SAC 17500.00 psi
Cone Allowable Stress At Ambient SOC 17500.00 psi
Joint Efficiency of Cone EC .8500
Actual Thickness of Cone TC .4380 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Cone CAC .0000 in.
Diameter Basis for Cone and Cylinders BASIS ID

Diameter of Small End of Cone DS 100.0000 in.
Diameter of Large End of Cone DL 200.0000 in.
Half Apex Angle for Cone ANGLE 30.00 degrees
Axial Length of Cone LC 86.6000 in.
Total Axial Force on Large End, Internal Pressure 157079.00 lb.

Total Axial Force on Small End, Internal Pressure 19635.00 lb.
Small End Cylinder Material SA-516 70

Small Cylinder Allowable Stress at Operating SAS 17500.00 psi
Small Cylinder Allowable Stress At Ambient SOS 17500.00 psi
Joint Efficiency of Small Cylinder ES 1.0000
Actual Thickness of Small Cylinder TS .1880 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Small Cylinder CAS .0000 in.
Axial Length of Small Cylinder LS 75.0000 in.
Large End Cylinder Material SA-516 70

Large Cylinder Allowable Stress at Operating SAL 17500.00 psi
Large Cylinder Allowable Stress At Ambient SOL 17500.00 psi
Joint Efficiency of Large Cylinder EL 1.0000
Actual Thickness of Large Cylinder TL .3130 in.

Corrosion Allowance for Large Cylinder CAL .0000 in.

Axial Length of Large Cylinder LL 250.0000 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Large End of Cone: Bar

Large End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-36
Large Reinforcing/Knuckle Allowable, Operating 14500.00 psi
Large Reinforcing/Knuckle Allowable, Ambient 14500.00 psi
Location of Reinforcement at Large End of Cone: Shell
Radial Width of Reinforcing Bar(Large End) RWLB .0001 in.
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Bar RTLB .0001 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Small End of Cone: Bar
Small End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-36

Small Reinforcing/Knuckle Allowable, Operating 14500.00 psi
Small Reinforcing/Knuckle Allowable, Ambient 14500.00 psi
Location of Reinforcement at Small End of Cone: Shell
Radial Width of Reinforcing Bar(Small End) RWSB .0001 in.
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Bar RTSB .0001 in.
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, CONE NUMBER 2, Description: APP L, L-2.3
INTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for CONE:
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure:

TR = (P*(Di+2*CA))/(2*COSA*(S*E-0.6*P)) per App 1-4(e)
TR = ( 50.00 * ( 200.0000 + 2 * .0000 )) /
( 2 * .8660 * ( 17500 * .85 - 0.6 * 50.00 ))
TR = .3889 in.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness:

MAWP = (2*S*E*(T-CA)*COSA)/((Di+2*CA)+1.2*(T-CA)*COSA) App 1-4(e)
MAWP = ( 2 * 17500 * .85 * ( .4380 - .0000 ) * .8660 ) /
(( 200.0000 + 2 * .0000 ) + 1.2 * ( .4380 - .0000 ) * .8660 )
MAWP = 56.30 psig
INTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for SMALL CYLINDER:

TR = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(2)
TR = ( 50.00 * ( 100.0000 / 2 + .0000 )) /
( 17500 * 1.00 - 0.6 * 50.00 )
TR = .1431 in.

MAWP = (S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (c)(2)
MAWP = ( 17500 * 1.00 * ( .1880 - .0000 )) /
(( 100.0000 / 2 + .0000 ) + 0.6 * ( .1880 - .0000 ))
MAWP = 65.65 psig
INTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for LARGE CYLINDER:

TR = (P*(D/2+CA))/(S*E-0.6*P) per UG-27 (c)(2)

TR = ( 50.00 * ( 200.0000 / 2 + .0000 )) /
( 17500 * 1.00 - 0.6 * 50.00 )
TR = .2862 in.

MAWP = (S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2+CA)+0.6*(T-CA)) per UG-27 (c)(2)
MAWP = ( 17500 * 1.00 * ( .3130 - .0000 )) /
(( 200.0000 / 2 + .0000 ) + 0.6 * ( .3130 - .0000 ))
MAWP = 54.67 psig
SUMMARY of INT. PRESSURE RESULTS: Small Cyl Cone Large Cyl
Required Thickness plus CA .1431 .3889 .2862 in.
Actual Given Thickness .1880 .4380 .3130 in.
Max. All. Working Pressure 65.65 56.30 54.67 psig
Design Pressure as Given 50.00 50.00 50.00 psig
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS for CONE / LARGE CYLINDER:
REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT for LARGE END UNDER INTERNAL PRESSURE

Large end ratio of pressure to allowable stress .00286
Large end max. half apex angle w/o reinforcement 17.571 degrees
Large end actual half apex angle 30.000 degrees
REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT, LARGE END, INTERNAL:

ARL = (RKL*QL*RCLI/(SAL*EL))*(1-DELTA/ANGLE)*TANA
ARL = ( 1.21 * 2749 * 100.0000 / ( 17500 * 1.00 ) ) *
( 1.0 - 17.57 / 30.00 ) * .5774
ARL = 4.5363 sq.in.
AREA of REINFORCEMENT AVAILABLE in LARGE END SHELL:

AeL = ( TLC - TREQL ) * SQRT( RCLO * TLC ) +
( TCC - TREQC ) * SQRT( RCLO * TCC / COSA )
AeL = ( .3130 - .2862 ) * SQRT( 100.0000 * .3130 ) +
( .4380 - .3889 ) * SQRT( 100.0000 * .4380 / .8660 )
AeL = .4990 sq.in.
SUMMARY of REINFORMENT AREA, LARGE END, INTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area of reinforcement required per App. 1-5(1) 4.5363 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in shell per App. 1-5(2) .4990 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in stiffening ring .0000 sq.in.
Additional Area needed to satisfy requirements 4.0374 sq.in.
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS for CONE / SMALL CYLINDER:
REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT for SMALL END under INTERNAL PRESSURE

Small end ratio of pressure to allowable stress .00286
Small end max. half apex angle w/o reinforcement 4.571 degrees
Small end actual half apex angle 30.000 degrees
REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT, SMALL END, INTERNAL:

ARS = ( RKS * QS * RCSI / ( SAS * ES ) ) * ( 1 - DELTA/ANGLE )* TANA
ARS = ( 1.21 * 1312 * 50.0000 / ( 17500 * 1.00 ) ) *
( 1.0 - 4.57 / 30.00 ) * .5774
ARS = 2.2148 sq.in.

AREA of REINFORCEMENT AVAILABLE in SMALL END SHELL:

Aes = .78*(Rs*Ts)^«*((Ts-t)+(Tc-Tr)/Cosà ))
Aes = .78*( 50.000* .188)^«*(( .188- .143 )+( .438- .194 )/ .87 ))
Aes = .7799 sq.in.
SUMMARY of REINFORMENT AREA, SMALL END, INTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area of reinforcement in shell per App. 1-5(4) .7799 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in stiffening ring .0000 sq.in.
Additional Area needed to satisfy requirements 1.4350 sq.in.
Results for Discontinuity Stresses per Bednar p. 236 2nd Edition

----------------------------------------------------------------
Stress Type Stress Allowable Location
----------------------------------------------------------------
Tensile Stress 66477.39 70000.00 Small Cyl. Long.
Compres. Stress -53154.52 -70000.00 Small Cyl. Long.
Membrane Stress 35423.96 26250.00 Small End Tang.
Tensile Stress 14500.67 70000.00 Cone Longitudinal
Compres. Stress -7814.98 -70000.00 Cone Longitudinal
Tensile Stress 28704.24 26250.00 Cone Tangential
Tensile Stress 103483.40 70000.00 Large Cyl. Long.

Compres. Stress -87483.91 -70000.00 Large Cyl. Long.
Membrane Stress -25324.62 26250.00 Large End Tang.
Tensile Stress 56745.75 70000.00 Cone Longitudinal
Compres. Stress -43213.55 -70000.00 Cone Longitudinal
Tensile Stress -28121.92 26250.00 Cone Tangential
Example Problem #2
The second example problem illustrates the calculation of a cone under external pressure.
This example is also taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3.3. The cone is similar to the one used in Example 1, but under external pressure.
Agreement with the example problem results for area of reinforcement required, area
available in shell, area available in reinforcing ring and the moment of inertia of the rein-
forcement is good at both the large and small ends of the cone. The third page of the print-
out is included to show the detailed calculations for external pressure at the large and
small ends. Note that beginning from A-95, the code’s computation has good agreement
with PVElite for this example.
Examples per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix L

FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------------ Page 1
Conical Analysis : APP L, L-3.3 ITEM: 1, 02:09pm, 06/05/97
INPUT ECHO, CONE NUMBER 1, Description: APP L, L-3.3
Design Internal Pressure PINT .00 psig

Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMPIN .00 F


Take Cone as Line of Support for External Pressure: Yes
Cone Material
Joint Efficiency of Cone EC .8500
Actual Thickness of Cone TC 1.2500 in.
Diameter Basis for Cone and Cylinders BASIS OD

Total Axial Force on Large End, External Pressure -157079.00 lb.

Total Axial Force on Small End, External Pressure -9964.00 lb.


Joint Efficiency of Large Cylinder EL .8500
Actual Thickness of Large Cylinder TL 1.2500 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Large End of Cone: Beam Type
Large End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-36

Location of Reinforcement at Large End of Cone: Shell
Moment of Inertia of Section at Large End RILS 26.90 in**4
Area of Reinforcing Section at Large End RALS 5.28 sq.in.
Centroid Distance for Section at Large End RDLS 6.05 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Small End of Cone: Bar
Small End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-36

Location of Reinforcement at Small End of Cone: Shell
Radial Width of Reinforcing Bar(Small End) RWSB 3.5000 in.
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Bar RTSB .5000 in.

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, CONE NUMBER 1, Description: APP L, L-3.3
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for CONE:

Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure:

1.2500 202.5000 130.00 187.06 .4014 .0013249 9059.26
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*9059.259)/(3*187.0615)=64.5724 psig
Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure:

1.0325 202.5000 130.00 226.47 .4014 .0009946 8493.51
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*8493.511)/(3*226.4709)=50.0050 psig
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for SMALL CYLINDER:


.3750 50.7500 75.00 135.33 1.4778 .0005587 7019.19
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*7019.191)/(3*135.3333)=69.1546 psig

.3294 50.7500 75.00 154.08 1.4778 .0004600 5778.14
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*5778.136)/(3*154.0769)=50.0022 psig
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for LARGE CYLINDER:


1.2500 202.5000 250.00 162.00 1.2346 .0005107 6415.52
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6415.521)/(3*162.0000)=52.8026 psig

1.2231 202.5000 250.00 165.57 1.2346 .0004943 6209.19
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6209.191)/(3*165.5692)=50.0028 psig

Elastic Modulus for Large End Reinforcement 25125000.00 psi

Elastic Modulus for Small End Reinforcement 25125000.00 psi

SUMMARY of EXT. PRESSURE RESULTS: Small Cyl Cone Large Cyl

Reqd. Thickness + CA .3294 1.0325 1.2231 in.
Actual Given Thickness .3750 1.2500 1.2500 in.
REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT for LARGE END UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Large end ratio of pressure to allowable stress .00336
Large end max. half apex angle w/o reinforcement 5.908 degrees
Large end actual half apex angle 30.000 degrees
Area of Reinforcement Required in Large End Shell:

ARLE = (RKLE*QL*RCLO*TANà*/(SOL*EL))*
(1.0-0.25*((PEXT*RCLO-QL)/QL)*(DELTE/ANGLE)
ARLE = ( 1.2069 * 2778.1630 * 101.2500 * .577/( 17500 * .85 )) *
( 1.0 - 0.25 * (( 50.00 * 101.2500 - 2778.1630 ) / 2778.1630 )
( 5.9076 / 30.0000 )
ARLE = 12.6433 sq.in.
AREA of REINFORCEMENT AVAILABLE in LARGE END SHELL:

AeL = .55*( Dl*ts )^« * ( ts + tc/Cosà )
AeL = .55 * ( 202.500 * 1.250 )^« * ( 1.250 + 1.250/ .866 )
AeL = 23.5682 sq.in.
SUMMARY of REINFORCEMENT AREA, LARGE END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area of reinforcement in shell per App. 1-8(2) 23.5682 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in stiffening ring 5.2800 sq.in.
Additional Area needed to satisfy requirements .0000 sq.in.
REQUIRED MOMENT of INERTIA, LARGE END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area Available in Cone, Shell, and Reinforcement 255.28 sq.in.
Force per Unit Length on Shell / Cone Junction 7670.39 lb./in.
Actual Buckling Stress associated with this Force 4563.38 psi
Material Strain associated with this stress .000363

ISL = AL * DCLO * DCLO * ATL / 10.9
ISL = .000363 * 202.5000 * 202.5000 * 255.28 / 10.9
ISL = 348.86 in.**4
AVAILABLE MOMENT of INERTIA, LARGE END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area Centroid Ar*Ce Dist I Ar*Di^2
Shl 10.938 .0000 .000 .1159 1.424 .1
Con 12.630 -2.5259 -31.902 2.6417 29.053 88.1
Sec 5.280 6.6750 35.244 -6.5591 26.900 227.2
TOT 28.848 3.342 57.377 315.4
Centroid of Section .1159 Moment of Inertia 372.82
SUMMARY of LARGE END INERTIA CALCULATIONS

Available Moment of Inertia ( Large End ) 372.823 in**4
Required Moment of Inertia ( Large End ) 348.860 in**4

REQUIRED AREA of REINFORCEMENT for SMALL END under EXTERNAL PRESSURE
Area of Reinforcement Required in Small End Shell:

ARSE = (RKSE * QS * RCSI * TANANG / (SOS*ES) )
ARSE = (1.2069*696.8704*25.3750*.5774/(17500*1.00))
ARSE = .7041 sq.in.
AREA of REINFORCEMENT AVAILABLE in SMALL END SHELL:

Aes = .55*(Ds*ts)^«*[(ts-t)+(tc-tr)/cosà )]
Aes = .55*( 50.750* .375)^«*[( .375- .329)+( 1.250- .393)/ .866 )]
Aes = 2.4844 sq.in.
SUMMARY of REINFORCEMENT AREA, SMALL END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Area of reinforcement required per App. 1-8(1) .7041 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in shell per App. 1-8(2) 2.4844 sq.in.
Area of reinforcement in stiffening ring 1.7500 sq.in.
Additional Area needed to satisfy requirements .0000 sq.in.
REQUIRED MOMENT of INERTIA , SMALL END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:


ISS = AS * DCSO * DCSO * ATS / 10.9
ISS = .000214 * 50.7500 * 50.7500 * 109.56 / 10.9
ISS = 5.54 in.**4
AVAILABLE MOMENT of INERTIA, SMALL END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Shl .900 .0000 .000 .9470 .011 .807
Con 3.463 .6926 2.399 .2544 1.155 .224
Sec 1.750 1.9375 3.391 -.9905 1.786 1.717
TOT 6.113 5.789 2.952 2.748
SUMMARY of SMALL END INERTIA CALCULATIONS

Available Moment of Inertia ( Small End ) 5.700 in**4
Required Moment of Inertia ( Small End ) 5.543 in**4
Example Problem #3
The third example shows the calculation for moment of inertia with knuckles. The avail-
able I is less than the required because the resulting neutral axis is very close to the shell/
knuckle (cone) juncture.
FileName : CHECKS ---------------------------------- Page 1

Conical Analysis : KNUCKLE ITEM: 4, 02:09pm, 05/18/98

INPUT ECHO, CONE NUMBER 4, Description: KNUCKLE
Design Internal Pressure PINT .00 psig

Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMPIN .00 F
Take Cone as Line of Support for External Pressure: Yes
Cone Material SA-516 70

Joint Efficiency of Cone EC 1.0000
Actual Thickness of Cone TC 1.0000 in.
Diameter Basis for Cone and Cylinders BASIS ID



Joint Efficiency of Large Cylinder EL 1.0000
Actual Thickness of Large Cylinder TL 1.0000 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Large End of Cone: Knuckle
Large End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-285 C

Bend Radius for Knuckle at Large End RBLK 10.0000 in.
Thickness for Knuckle at Large End RTLK 1.0000 in.
Type of Reinforcement at Small End of Cone: Knuckle
Small End Reinforcing/Knuckle Material SA-285 C

Bend Radius for Knuckle at Small End RBSK 7.0000 in.
Thickness for Knuckle at Small End RTSK .5000 in.

EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, CONE NUMBER 4, Description: KNUCKLE
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for CONE:


1.0000 100.6068 70.00 107.41 .5265 .0022902 11752.49
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*11752.490)/(3*107.4087)=145.8911 psig

.2734 100.6068 70.00 392.86 .5265 .0003274 4419.89
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*4419.892)/(3*392.8625)=15.0006 psig
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for SMALL CYLINDER:


.5000 51.0000 50.00 102.00 .9804 .0012885 10514.21
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*10514.210)/(3*102.0000)=137.4406 psig

.1685 51.0000 50.00 302.59 .9804 .0002522 3404.33
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3404.330)/(3*302.5871)=15.0010 psig
EXTERNAL PRESSURE CALCULATIONS for LARGE CYLINDER:
External Pressure Chart HA-2 at 500.00 F


1.0000 102.0000 100.00 102.00 .9804 .0012885 9164.62
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*9164.623)/(3*102.0000)=119.7990 psig

.3465 102.0000 100.00 294.35 .9804 .0002628 3311.67
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3311.668)/(3*294.3505)=15.0010 psig
SUMMARY of EXT. PRESSURE RESULTS: Small Cyl Cone Large Cyl

Reqd. Thickness + CA .1685 .2734 .3465 in.
Actual Given Thickness .5000 1.0000 1.0000 in.



ISL = AL * DCLO * DCLO * ATL / 10.9
ISL = .000076 * 100.6068 * 100.6068 * 87.00 / 10.9
ISL = 6.13 in.**4
AVAILABLE MOMENT of INERTIA, LARGE END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Shl 5.555 .0000 .000 -.2539 .463 .358
Con 2.004 1.0159 2.036 .7621 .273 1.164
Knu 3.757 .2226 .836 -.0313 .475 .004
TOT 11.316 2.873 1.211 1.526
SUMMARY of LARGE END INERTIA CALCULATIONS

Available Moment of Inertia ( Large End ) * LOW * 2.737 in**4
Required Moment of Inertia ( Large End ) 6.130 in**4


ISS = AS * DCSO * DCSO * ATS / 10.9
ISS = .000054 * 51.9499 * 51.9499 * 49.50 / 10.9
ISS = .66 in.**4
AVAILABLE MOMENT of INERTIA, SMALL END, EXTERNAL PRESSURE:

Shl 1.389 .0000 .000 .1114 .029 .017
con .254 .5037 .128 -.3923 .024 .039
knu 1.297 .1537 .199 -.0423 .053 .002
TOT 2.940 .328 .106 .059
Centroid of Section .1114 Moment of Inertia .16
SUMMARY of SMALL END INERTIA CALCULATIONS

Available Moment of Inertia ( Small End ) * LOW * .165 in**4
Required Moment of Inertia ( Small End ) .661 in**4


&KDSWHU
The Floating Head Module
Introduction
The PVElite Floating Head Module performs internal and external pressure design of
spherically dished covers (bolted heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1
rules, 2001, A-2001.

The PVElite Floating Head Module calculates the required thickness of spherically dished
covers (bolted heads) according to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 analysis
rules found in Appendix 1, Paragraph 1-6. A more detailed analysis of bolted dished heads
is included, based on Soehren’s analysis, “The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-
Exchangers,” ASME 57-A-7-47. The more detailed analysis may be used for design of
floating heads, as specifically mentioned in the ASME Code, Paragraph 1-6 (h).
The module calculates required thickness for the dished part of the head under both inter-
nal and external pressure. Also calculated are the required thickness of the flange and the
backing ring. Three types of heads as defined in the Code are included. The Soehren’s
analysis applies only to the most common type of head, type d.
The Floating Head Module 14-1

Figure 14A shows geometry for the Floating Heads Module.
Figure 14A - Geometry for the Floating Heads Module
14-2 The Floating Head Module


Main Input Fields
Floating Head Identification Number

Enter the floating head ID number. It is recommended that the floating head numbers start
at 1 and increase sequentially, but you may also enter some other meaningful number. This
field is required, since the program uses this field to determine if a floating head has been
defined.
Floating Head Description

Enter an alpha-numeric tag for this floating head. This entry is optional.
Floating Head Type (b, c, d)

Enter the type of floating head or spherically dished cover which you are analyzing.
b = solid thick head, spherically dished.
c = thin dished head, continuous across flange face.
d = spherical cap welded to flange ID.
Type d is the most common type of head used for heat exchanger floating heads.
Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure

Enter the internal pressure, which is the pressure on the concave side of the head, and is
also the tubeside pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both
the shellside and the tubeside pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis.
However, when analyzing a type ‘d’ head, the interaction between shellside and tubeside
pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is entered separately. There-
fore you may want to run the program twice, with first internal and then external pressures
set to zero.
Shell Side (External) Design Pressure

Enter the external pressure, which is the pressure on the convex side of the head, and is
also the shellside pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both
the shellside and the tubeside pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis.
However, when analyzing a type ‘d’ head, the interaction between shellside and tubeside
pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is entered separately. There-
fore you may want to run the program twice, with first internal and then external pressures
set to zero.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature will be used to interpolate
the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Material Specification

Allowable Stress, Design Temperature

When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
Inside Crown Radius of Head

Enter the inside crown radius of the head. This value may be any dimension greater than
the inside radius of the flange. However, values roughly equal to the flange ID are more
typical.
Actual Thickness of Head

Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate used to build the floating head or spheri-
cal cap, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing floating head or spherical cap.
Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance on the concave side of the head. The shellside and tubeside
corrosion allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses
and diameters are adjusted by the program for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They
are also added to the required thicknesses.

Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance on the convex side of the head. The shellside and tubeside
corrosion allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses
and diameters are adjusted by the program for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They
are also added to the required thicknesses.
Outside Diameter of Flange

Inside Diameter of Flange

Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as “B” in the ASME code. The corrosion
allowance will be used to adjust this value (two times the corrosion allowance will be
added to the uncorroded ID given by the user).
Actual Thickness of Flange

Enter the through thickness of the flange. For type c spherical caps this includes the thick-
ness of the head.


nominal size in this field, and also enter the root area of one bolt in the “Root Area” cell
which will pop up when you specify “root area” as the thread series.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry:
• TEMA Bolt Table
• UNC Bolt Table
• User specified root area of a single bolt
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. Note that the number of bolts is
almost always a multiple of four.
Full Face Gasket

Check this field if there is a full face gasket on the floating head. A full face gasket extends
from the ID of the flange to the OD, enclosing the bolt holes. These gaskets are usually
soft materials such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the bolt stresses do not go too high
during gasket seating. The program adjusts the flange analysis and the design formulas to
account for the full face gasket.





ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. For gasket proper-
ties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.

FACING PVElite
DESCRIPTION
SKETCH EQUIVALENT
Gasket Thickness

Nubbin Width

Width of Partition Gasket

the know width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket
loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline

HR is the distance from the flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and
the flange. HR is positive if it is above the flange centroid, and negative if it is below the
flange centroid. HR is used in the Code calculation, but not in the Soehren’s calculation.
Is the Flange Slotted?

Check this box if the flange has slotted bolt holes for quick opening. A slotted flange has
bolt holes which extend radially to the outer edge of the flange. The program automati-
cally adjusts for this condition - you do not have to change the flange outside diameter.
Do You Need to Perform Soehren’s Calculation?

Check this box if you wish to perform the Soehren’s Calculation. Soehren’s calculation is
a more detailed analysis of the interaction between the spherical cap and the flange. Fre-
quently the stresses calculated using this method will be acceptable for heads or flanges
that are slightly less thick than required by the normal code rules. Note that this analysis
can only be done for type d heads. Note also that the Code (Par. 1-6(h)) allows this type of
analysis.
Is There a Backing Ring?

Check this box if there is a backing ring. A backing ring is a second flange used to sand-
wich the tubesheet of a floating head heat exchanger. The backing ring may be a split ring.
If the ring has one split, then it has been split along a diameter, into two pieces. The bend-
ing moment on the ring is multiplied by 2.0 for this case. A ring with two splits has been
sliced in half like a bagel, and then each half has been split along a diameter. The ring is
assembled with the diametral splits offset by 90 degrees. For this case, enter the thickness
of one half of the original ring, since each half is required to support 75 percent of the
original design moment.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Bolt Root Area
For nonstandard bolts, enter the root cross sectional area of the bolt.
Inside Depth of Flange from Flange Face to Attached Head

Q is the distance from the bolting face of the flange to the intersection of the head inside
diameter and the flange. Q is used in the Soehren’s calculation, while HR is used in the
Code calculation.
Backing Ring Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the backing ring. This value is usually a little larger than the
inside diameter of the flange.
Backing Ring Actual Thickness

Enter the actual through thickness of the backing ring. Note that for doubly split rings, this
is the thickness of each piece.
Number of Splits in Backing Ring (0, 1, or 2)

The backing ring may be a split ring. If the ring has one split, then it has been split along a
diameter, into two pieces. The bending moment on the ring is multiplied by 2.0 for this
case. A ring with two splits has been sliced in half like a bagel, and then each half has been
split along a diameter. The ring is assembled with the diametral splits offset by 90 degrees.
For this case, enter the thickness of one half of the original ring, since each half is required
to support 75 percent of the original design moment.

PVElite - User Guide Discussion of Results
Internal Pressure Results for the Head
The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the
head under internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads:
t = 5PL/6S
The program solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working
pressure, and actual stress, and displays the results. Note that these results are also dis-
played in the thickness summary at the end of the printout.
External Pressure Results for the Head

The required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each head type is
based on the external pressure requirements for an equivalent sphere.
Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head

Three separate bending moments are calculated for each head. These are the bolt up
moment, the moment due to external pressure, and the moment due to internal pressure. In
each case the moment is calculated per the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appen-
dix 2. However, in the case of the type d head the moment is further modified to take into
account the force imposed on the flange by the pressure on the head. This force is shown
in the printout as MH. The sign of this force will be negative if the head is attached above
the centroid of the flange, and positive if the head is attached below the centroid.
Required Thickness Calculations

The required thickness formulae for each flange type and loading condition are printed by
the program. These formulae are taken from Appendix 1-6, paragraphs (e)(2) and (3),
(f)(2) through (5) and (g)(2).
The required thickness calculations for the backing ring are also shown. The backing ring
is taken as a ring flange and calculated per Appendix 2. The analysis is corrected for the
number of splits in the backing ring, and shows the required thickness for each piece of the
split ring.
The thickness calculations for the main flange and backing ring involve the factor F which
is directly proportional to the design pressure. Thus when the pressure is 0, for the bolt-up
condition, the factor F is theoretically equal to 0. Some however interpret the Code to
mean that F should be computed using the design pressure even for the bolt-up cases.
There is a setup file directive that allows you to toggle this to work one way or the other.
To keep the program results consistent with older versions, this setup file parameter is set
to compute F with 0 pressure for the bolt-up conditions.
After the required thicknesses are calculated, a summary table is printed.
Soehren’s Calculations
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states:
These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between
the flange ring and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis which takes this into
account may be used if it meets the requirements of U-2.

The analysis referred to in this paragraph is the Soehren’s calculation, based on the paper
“The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-Exchangers”, ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate
results and calculated stresses are shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included
from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not shown in the printout, but bending
stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress, while membrane
stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.

Example Problems
The following 2 examples show the same floating head subjected to internal and external
pressure. Separate runs have been made to clarify the individual calculations. These exam-
ples are included in the CHECKS file.
Example Problem #1
INPUT ECHO, Floating Head Analysis: 2, Description: FLOHEAD-INT
Floating Head Type Appendix 1-6 type (d)

Tube Side ( Internal ) Design Pressure PTS 100.00 psig
Shell Side ( External ) Design Pressure PSS 0.00 psig
Design Temperature for Spherical Head TEMP 360.00 F
Head Material SA-516 70

Head Allowable Stress at Temperature SOH 17500.00 psi
Head Allowable Stress at Ambient SAH 17500.00 psi
Crown Radius for Spherical Head CR 43.8750 in.

Head Thickness TH 0.6250 in.
Tube Side ( Internal ) Corrosion Allowance CATS 0.0625 in.
Shell Side ( External ) Corrosion Allowance CASS 0.1250 in.

Flange Allowable Stress at Temperature SOC 17500.00 psi
Flange Allowable Stress at Ambient SAC 17500.00 psi
Flange Outside Diameter FOD 47.6250 in.

Flange Inside Diameter FID 43.8750 in.
Flange Thickness TC 3.1250 in.
Bolt Material SA-193 B7M

Diameter of Bolt Circle DB 45.7500 in.

Nominal Bolt Diameter DBOLT 0.7500 in.
Number of Bolts 44
Full Face Gasket ( Yes or No ) No


Column for Gasket Seating 2, Code Column II
Gasket Thickness 0.1250 in.
Flange Face Nubbin Width 0.0000 in.

Length of Partition Gasket 0.0000 in.

Width of Partition Gasket 0.0000 in.
Distance from Head Centerline to Flange Centroid 0.6875 in.
The Flange is not Slotted.
This unit does not have a Backing Ring.
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS FOR SPHERICAL HEADS

t = 5PL / 6S per Appendix 1-6
t = ( 5 * 100.00 * 43.9375 ) / ( 6 * 17500 )
t = 0.2092 in.

Pa = 6S(T-Cass-Cats) / 5L per Appendix 1-6
Pa = ( 6 * 17500 * 0.4375 ) / ( 5 * 43.9375 )
Pa = 209.10 psig
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New and Cold:

Pnc = 6ST / 5L per Appendix 1-6
Pnc = ( 6 * 17500 * 0.6250 ) / ( 5 * 43.8750 )
Pnc = 299.15 psig
Actual stress at given pressure and thickness:

Sact = 5PL / 6(T-Cass-Cats) per Appendix 1-6
Sact = ( 5 * 100.00 * 43.9375 ) / ( 6 * 0.4375 )
Sact = 8369. psi
INTERMEDIATE CALCULATIONS FOR FLANGED PORTION:
Gasket Contact Width, RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0 0.375 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = RN / 2.0 0.188 in.
Effective Gasket Width, BE = B0 0.188 in.
Gasket Reaction Diameter, G = (GODC+GIDC) / 2.0 44.250 in.
Bolting Information for TEMA Thread Series :

Total Area of Bolts 13.288 sq.in.

Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure H 153785.9 lb.
Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces HP 19549.1 lb.
Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID HD 152053.1 lb.
Pressure Force on Flange Face HT 1732.8 lb.
Radial Component of Head Membrane Force HH 264950.1 lb.
Operating Bolt Load: WM1 173334.9 lb.

Gasket Seating Bolt Load WM2 198097.1 lb.

Required Bolt Area AM 9.905 sq.in.
Flange Design Bolt Load W 231928.5 lb.

Gasket Seating Force HG 19549.0 lb.
Distance to Gasket Load Reaction DHG 0.7500 in.
Distance to Face Pressure Reaction DHT 0.8125 in.
Distance to End Pressure Reaction DHD 0.8750 in.

End Pressure, Md 152053. 0.8750 1.0000 11087. ft.lb.
Face Pressure, Mt 1733. 0.8125 1.0000 117. ft.lb.
Gasket Load, Mg 19549. 0.7500 1.0000 1222. ft.lb.
Floating Hd. Load, Mh 264950. 0.6875 1.0000 -15179. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, Ma 231929. 0.7500 1.0000 14496. ft.lb.
TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION ( Internal Pressure ) 2753. ft.lb.

TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING ( Int. Pressure ) 14496. ft.lb.
Required thickness for Main Flange, internal operating conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.710 + SQRT( 0.710 * 0.710 + 1.162 )
T = 2.0001 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, internal bolt-up conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 6.116 )
T = 2.4731 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, external operating conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 0.000 )
T = 0.0000 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, external bolt-up conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 6.116 )
T = 2.4731 in.
SUMMARY OF REQUIRED THICKNESSES: Head Flange

Tubeside (Internal) Pressure 0.2092 2.0001 in.
Tubeside Gasket Seating Load 2.4731 in.
Shellside Gasket Seating Load 2.4731 in.
Maximum + Corrosion Allowance 0.3967 2.6606 in.
Actual Thickness as Given 0.6250 3.1250 in.
WEIGHT OF HEAD AND FLANGE:

Weight of Spherical Head, Uncorroded WHD 286.3 lb.
Weight of Spherical Head, Corroded WHDCA 201.7 lb.
Weight of Flange Ring, Uncorroded WFL 238.3 lb.
Weight of Flange Ring, Corroded WFLCA 222.4 lb.
The PV Elite Program, (c) 1989-1998 by COADE Engineering Software

Example Problem #2
INPUT ECHO, Floating Head Analysis: 3, Description: FLOHEAD-EXT
Floating Head Type Appendix 1-6 type (d)

Tube Side ( Internal ) Design Pressure PTS 0.00 psig
Shell Side ( External ) Design Pressure PSS 55.00 psig
Design Temperature for Spherical Head TEMP 360.00 F

Head Allowable Stress at Temperature SOH 17500.00 psi
Head Allowable Stress at Ambient SAH 17500.00 psi
Crown Radius for Spherical Head CR 43.8750 in.

Head Thickness TH 0.6250 in.
Tube Side ( Internal ) Corrosion Allowance CATS 0.0625 in.
Shell Side ( External ) Corrosion Allowance CASS 0.1250 in.

Flange Allowable Stress at Temperature SOC 17500.00 psi
Flange Allowable Stress at Ambient SAC 17500.00 psi
Flange Outside Diameter FOD 47.6250 in.

Flange Inside Diameter FID 43.8750 in.
Flange Thickness TC 3.1250 in.
Bolt Material SA-193 B7M


Nominal Bolt Diameter DBOLT 0.7500 in.
Number of Bolts 44
Full Face Gasket ( Yes or No ) No


Gasket Thickness 0.1250 in.
Flange Face Nubbin Width 0.0000 in.
Length of Partition Gasket 0.0000 in.
Width of Partition Gasket 0.0000 in.
Distance from Head Centerline to Flange Centroid 0.6875 in.
The Flange is not Slotted.

This unit does not have a Backing Ring.
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SPHERICAL HEAD


TCA OD D/T Factor A B
0.4375 44.3750 101.43 0.0012324 12411.07
EMAWP = B/DT = 12411.0674 / 101.4286 = 122.3626

TCA OD D/T Factor A B
0.2470 44.3750 179.64 0.0006958 9880.94
EMAWP = B/DT = 9880.9414 / 179.6388 = 55.0045
INTERMEDIATE CALCULATIONS FOR FLANGED PORTION:
Gasket Contact Width, RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0 0.375 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = RN / 2.0 0.188 in.
Bolting Information for TEMA Thread Series :


Hydrostatic End Load due to Pressure H 84582.2 lb.
Contact Load on Gasket Surfaces HP 10752.0 lb.
Hydrostatic End Load at Flange ID HD 83629.2 lb.
Pressure Force on Flange Face HT 953.0 lb.
Radial Component of Head Membrane Force HH 145805.6 lb.
Operating Bolt Load: WM1 95334.2 lb.
Gasket Seating Bolt Load WM2 198097.1 lb.
Required Bolt Area AM 9.905 sq.in.

Gasket Seating Force HG 10752.0 lb.
Distance to Gasket Load Reaction DHG 0.7500 in.
Distance to Face Pressure Reaction DHT 0.8125 in.
Distance to End Pressure Reaction DHD 0.8750 in.
SUMMARY OF MOMENTS FOR EXTERNAL PRESSURE:


Floating Hd. Load, Mh 145806. 0.6875 1.0000 -8353. ft.lb.

Gasket Seating, Ma 231929. 0.7500 1.0000 14496. ft.lb.
TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION ( External Pressure ) 7477. ft.lb.

TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING ( Ext. Pressure ) 14496. ft.lb.
Required thickness for Main Flange, internal operating conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 0.000 )
T = 0.0000 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, internal bolt-up conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 6.116 )
T = 2.4731 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, external operating conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.390 + SQRT( 0.390 * 0.390 + 3.155 )
T = 2.2089 in.
Required thickness for Main Flange, external bolt-up conditions:

T = F + SQRT( F * F + J ) per 1-6(g)
T = 0.000 + SQRT( 0.000 * 0.000 + 6.116 )
T = 2.4731 in.
SUMMARY OF REQUIRED THICKNESSES: Head Flange

Shellside (External) Pressure 0.2470 2.2089 in.
Tubeside Gasket Seating Load 2.4731 in.
Shellside Gasket Seating Load 2.4731 in.
Maximum + Corrosion Allowance 0.4345 2.6606 in.
Actual Thickness as Given 0.6250 3.1250 in.
WEIGHT OF HEAD AND FLANGE:

Weight of Spherical Head, Uncorroded WHD 286.3 lb.
Weight of Spherical Head, Corroded WHDCA 201.7 lb.
Weight of Flange Ring, Uncorroded WFL 238.3 lb.
Weight of Flange Ring, Corroded WFLCA 222.4 lb.

&KDSWHU
The Horizontal Vessel Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Horizontal Vessel module of the PVElite program. To use the
Horizontal Vessel module the current analysis type should be Horizontal Vessel. This
module computes stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by the combination of
internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings. If
included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE-95 or 93 and earthquake
will be included. The module is based on “Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pres-
sure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports”, The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and sub-
sequent interpretations of that work. This is also termed Zick’s Analysis.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Vessel Number
Enter the vessel number for this analysis. This number can be up to 15 digits in length.
Vessel Description
Any combination up to 15 letters and numbers can be used to briefly identify the vessel
that is being analyzed. This description is reflected in the output reports and is used in
error checking.
If you want to use the factor 6.0 instead of 1.5 for the saddle reaction force FWT (due to
wind load) or FST (due to seismic load) (equation for Q2 per D. Moss “Pressure Vessel
Design Manual” p.109), you need to type the single character “:” at the very end of this
input field for description. It is generally conservative to use the factor of 6. The program
uses 1.5 as default.
Vessel Design Pressure

Enter the pressure under which the horizontal vessel is operating. A positive entry here
indicates internal pressure while a negative number indicates external pressure. Please
note that no external pressure check for adequate wall thickness will be performed. Use
the shell program and analyze the geometry before using the HORIZONTAL VESSEL
module.
The Horizontal Vessel Module 15-1

Discussion of Input PVElite - User Guide
Vessel Design Temperature

Enter the maximum temperature the horizontal vessel will be operating at. The tempera-
ture will be used in determining the allowable stress of the material chosen. If the temper-
ature is changed, note that the allowable stress of the material at operating temperature
will change accordingly.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the allowance given for corrosion in this field. The corrosion allowance cannot be
greater than the vessel wall thickness. In addition, it must be greater than 0.
Enter the material specification for the shell section of the horizontal vessel. An example
of a material type is SA-516 70. Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively,
the material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting
Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its
specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materi-
als, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature

The stress value at the design/operating temperature should appear in this cell. This num-
ber must always be greater than 0.

The stress value at ambient temperature should appear in this cell. This number must
always be greater than 0.
Density of Stored Liquid

Enter the density of the fluid in the horizontal vessel. The program will conservatively
assume the vessel is filled with this liquid. The units for fluid density are displayed above.
Liquid Height from Bottom of Tank

Enter the height of the liquid in the tank. Normally, a Zick analysis is run with the vessel
full of water, however, it may be necessary to run a partially filled tank for wind or seismic
analysis for an operating type load case.
Extra Weight
Enter any additional weight present on the vessel. Additional weight may come from insu-
lation, steel structures or piping loads. There is no on screen range checking for this entry
since it may be positive or negative. However, if negative, this entry should not be greater
than the total weight of the vessel.
Check Saddle Webs & Base Plate

If you wish PVElite to perform computations on the structure which supports the vessel
check this field. PVElite will compute the inertia’s, moments and forces on the members
necessary to perform an AISC unity check.
15-2 The Horizontal Vessel Module

PVElite - User Guide Discussion of Input
Apply Wind Loads to Vessel

If wind loads are to be considered, check this field. If checked, other information such as
basic wind speed and input prompts will have to be answered.
Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel

If seismic loads are a design consideration check this field. Both seismic and wind loads
will increase the saddle load reaction forces, and thus higher vessel stresses will result.
Shell and Head Diameter Basis

If the diameter basis is Inside Diameter enter a 0 in this field. If the basis is Outside Diam-
eter enter a 1 in this field.
Shell Diameter
Enter the shell diameter with respect to the shell and head diameter basis. The diameter
must be greater than 0 and greater than 2.0 times the wall thickness.
Shell Length Tangent to Tangent

Enter the length of the cylindrical shell from tangent to tangent. In previous versions of
PVElite this entry was in inches. Now the default unit for this entry is feet.
Shell Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the shell in this cell. PVElite will automatically corrode
the wall thickness as necessary.
Shell Joint Efficiency

Enter the seam efficiency of the shell. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to
1.0. This entry is used to compute the required thickness of the shell.
Head Type
Enter the type of head that is used on the vessel ends. If a flat head is selected then it is
assumed to be round and the same diameter as the shell. The acceptable range of input is
between 1 and 4.
Head Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the head. The value must be greater than 0.0. Effects of
corrosion are handled automatically.
Head Joint Efficiency

Enter the seam efficiency of the head. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to
1.0. This entry is used to compute the required thickness of the head.
Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent

Enter the length from the vessel tangent to the saddle support. This distance must be posi-
tive and less than 1/2 of the vessel tangent to tangent length.

Saddle Width
Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact the vessel.
Saddle Bearing Angle

Enter the number of degrees that the saddle bears on the shell surface. Valid entries range
from 120 to 180 degrees.
Wear Pad Thickness

If there is a wear pad on the vessel, enter that thickness here. If the distance from the ves-
sel tangent to the saddle location is less than or equal to 0.5 times the shell radius and the
wear pad extension above the horn of the saddle is greater than the shell radius divided by
10.0 then the thickness of the wear pad will be included. If this is not the case then the
shell thickness - ca will be used.
Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle

If the vessel has a wear pad and it extends above the horn of the saddle enter that extension
distance here. For more information on wear pads, see the help text for wear pad thickness.
Wear Pad Width

If the vessel has a wear pad enter the width here. The width of the wear pad is measured
along the long axis of the vessel.
Stiffening Ring Present

If the vessel is equipped with stiffening rings check this field. Stiffening rings are used to
reduce stresses in the vicinity of the saddle supports and are also used to meet external
pressure requirements. When equipped with rings the assumption is that there are either 1
or 2 rings located directly over the saddle. The rings are assumed to span (360 - saddle
bearing angle) degrees around the vessel. This is mainly used for the calculation of the
ring weight.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Base Plate Length
Enter the length of the base plate. This is typically referred to as dimension “A”. This
value is usually close to the diameter of the vessel.
Base Plate Thickness

Enter the thickness of the base plate. If you wish to consider any external corrosion or ero-
sion enter the corroded thickness value, not the uncorroded value. The base plate thickness
will be computed using a beam bending type equation found in pressure vessel texts. The
base plate thickness is not a function of the number of ribs.
Base Plate Width

Enter the width of the base plate. This is the short dimension.
Number of Ribs
Enter the number of ribs in your design. This number should include the outside ribs.
Thickness of Ribs
Enter the thickness of the ribs. The ribs run in a direction that is parallel to the long axis of
the vessel. Any external corrosion allowance should be taken into account when this value
is entered.
Thickness of Web
Enter the thickness of the Webs. The webs run in a direction perpendicular to the long axis
of the vessel. Any external corrosion should be taken into account when this value is
entered.
Web Location Center or Side

Select the web location. Center webs run through the middle of the middle of the base
plate. Side webs will run along the edge of the base plate.
Height of Center Web

The height of the center web extends from the bottom of the base to the shell ID.
Force Coefficient
Enter the force coefficient for vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5
and 1.2. This can be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, plat-
forms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the
input diameter known.
Wind Pressure on Vessel

If your vessel specification calls out for a constant wind pressure design, and you know
what that pressure is, enter it here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure

requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area
calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number in here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the
information in the following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Val-
ues up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed

Enter the basic wind speed which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be
accepted. A minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A)- “Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in
excess of 70 ft.”
Exposure (B)- “Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings.”
Exposure (C)- “Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less
than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands.”
Exposure (D)- “Flat, unobstructed costal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over
large bodies of water.”
Note Most petrochemical sites use Exposure C.
Height of Vessel Above Grade

Enter the height of the vessel above the surface of the earth (grade).
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base

Enter the distance from the center of the vessel to the base of the saddle support on which
the vessel sits.
Use ASCE 7-95 Code

If you choose to use ASCE 7-95 code, check this field. Then enter the following cells.
Types of Hill
Enter the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
• None
• 2-D Ridge

• 2-D Escarpment
• 3-D Axisym. Hill
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H)

Enter height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2
for detail.

Enter distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site. See ASCE 7-95
Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Height Above Ground (z)

Enter height above local ground level for the vessel. You may use the approximate dis-
tance between the center of the vessel to LOCAL ground. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for
detail.
Distance to Crest (Lh)

Enter distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) — Optional (Hz)

Enter the natural frequency for the structure. The program will use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6
category III if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0.
Damping Ratio (beta) — Optional

Enter the damping ratio for the structure if you like to use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6 category III
(if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0).
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in
ASCE #7. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will
produce the highest saddle load reactions.
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base

Enter the distance from the center of the vessel to the bottom of the saddle support. This
distance must be greater than the vessel outside radius. If both wind and seismic loads are
both considered simultaneously this value should be the same.
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS

When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or 0, PVElite will look the
seismic zone factor up from an applicable table. This number is then used in conjunction
with the operating weight of the vessel to compute the forces which act on the saddle sup-
ports. If for any reason the table value of Cs is unacceptable, entry of a non-zero value will
cause this to be used in lieu of the table value. This might occur if the building code in
your project specifications is different from the one used by PVElite.

Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads

Enter the aspect ratio for elliptical heads here. A very typical aspect ratio for an elliptical
head is 2:1. This would mean entering a 2 in this field.
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads

The knuckle ratio for a torispherical head is defined as the crown radius of the head
divided by the knuckle radius. This ratio is typically 16.6667:1 which means that a value
of 16.667 would be entered here. Note since this is a ratio, this value is unitless.
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads

Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head in this cell.
Stiffening Ring Location

If the stiffening rings are located on the outside of the vessel select ID. If the rings are
located inside the vessel select OD.
Stiffening Ring Material Specification

Enter the material specification for the stiffening ring. An example of a material type is
SA-516 70. Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively, the material can be
selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while the
cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and
properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main
Menu.
Stiffening Ring Properties
Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring

If the stiffening ring properties cannot be defined in the fields above then use these fields.
The entry in this cell is for the moment of inertia of the ring about its neutral axis. For typ-
ical cross-sections this property can be calculated or “looked up” in a handbook that lists
properties of steel shapes. An example of such a book would be the AISC steels handbook.
Cross-Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring

For the user defined ring enter the cross-sectional area of the ring in this field. This num-
ber can be calculated or “looked up” in a steels handbook.

Distance to Ring Centroid from Shell Surface

Enter the distance from the outside surface of the shell to the centroid of the cross-section.
The distance units are shown above.
Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface

If the stiffening ring is on the outside of the vessel then enter the distance from the outside
shell surface to the top most part of the ring. If the ring is on the inside of the vessel then
enter the distance from the inner surface of the shell to the top of the ring.

PVElite will determine the volume of the vessel as well as the empty and full weights.
These weights are computed with the vessel in the corroded condition. Knowing the
weights may be useful for cost estimating and for design of supporting attachments, such
as lifting lugs.
The longitudinal stresses displayed in the output include the stress effects due to internal
pressure. Since these are normal stresses they add together. The tension allowable is the
basic operating allowable times the joint efficiency. The compressive allowable is the fac-
tor B taken from UG-23 using the materials chart for the given material.
The tangential shear in the shell varies depending on whether the shell is stiffened or the
head acts as a stiffener, or neither of these cases. Tangential stress in the head only exists if
the head is close enough to the saddle to be used as a stiffener. The allowable stress in
shear is 80% of the allowable tensile stress for the head or shell.
The stress at the horn of the saddle depends on the location of the saddle and the equiva-
lent thickness of the saddle and wear pad. It is zero if the shell is stiffened by rings. This
stress is always compressive and the allowable stress is -1.5 times the allowable tensile
stress.
Use of the head as a stiffener creates additional tension stress in the head. The allowable
additional stress in the vessel head is limited to 0.25 times the allowable tension stress in
the head. If pressure is added, the resulting stress must be less than 1.25 times the allow-
able tensile stress.
If the tip of the stiffening ring is in compression its allowable will be -0.5 times the yield
stress. If a tensile condition exists the basic material allowable will be used.

PVElite - User Guide Saddle Wear Plate Design
Saddle Wear Plate Design

The horizontal vessels considered by PVElite are assumed to have saddle supports. One
of the problems with this type of support is the high localized stresses which exist in the
vessel in the region of saddles. Typically, the highest stress is the outside circumferential
stress at the saddle horn.
The ASME code does not address the details of saddle support design, nor does it offer
guidance in the computation of the resulting vessel stresses. Instead, the code directs
designers to other references for these methods. To date, the design of saddle supports and
their associated stresses are based on past practice and experience, without theoretical
analysis.
A recent paper published in the Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology addresses the issue
of local vessel stresses due to saddle supports. This paper (Effectiveness of Wear Plate at
the Saddle Support, Ong Lin Seng, Transactions of the ASME, Journal of Pressure Vessel
Technology, Vol 114, February 1992) provides a method for the estimation of the wear
plate thickness, extension above the saddle horn, and the amount of stress reduction. (It is
interesting to note that this paper suggests some of Zick’s recommendations are non-con-
servative.)
This optimum thickness of the wear plate is a function of the mean radius of vessel, the
thickness of vessel, and the width of wear plate. The optimum wear plate thicknesses is
determined for both welded and non-welded conditions, with wear plate angular exten-
sions of 5, 10, and 15 degrees.
Restrictions of this Method

The restrictions of this method are
• The saddle angle must be greater than 120 degrees. Saddle angles of 120 degrees with
an appropriate wear plate can result in a 15 to 40 percent stress reduction at horn of the
saddle. Larger saddle angles cause a greater stress reduction for the same wear plate
ratios.
• The value of ( (r/b) * sqrt(r/t) ) must be between 10 and 60, when this term is not
within this range, no thickness will be selected. (r = mean radius of the vessel, b =
width of the wear plate, t = thickness of the vessel)
Conclusions
The conclusions drawn in this paper are
• The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent
when a wear plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and
extends at least 5 degrees above the saddle horn.
• The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate.
• The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle.

Saddle Wear Plate Design PVElite - User Guide
• A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.
Figure 15A- Geometry for the Horizontal Vessel Module

PVElite - User Guide Saddle Wear Plate Design
Figure 15B - Wear Plate and Saddle Detail for a Typical Horizontal Tank

Example Problem PVElite - User Guide
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------- Page 1
Horizves Analysis : C TEST ITEM: 1, 02:36pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, HORIZVES Number 1, Description: C TEST
Design Internal Pressure 300.00 psig

Corrosion Allowance for Vessel .0000 in.
Shell Material SA-516 70

Shell Operating Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Shell Ambient Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Head Operating Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Head Ambient Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Density of Shell and Head Material .2830 lb./cu.in

Liquid Height in Vessel 108.1180 in.
Density of Stored Liquid 62.4000 lb./cu.ft
Extra Weight 11225.000 lb.
Baseplate Length 60.0000 in.

Baseplate Thickness .5000 in.
Baseplate Width 12.0000 in.
Number of Ribs ( inc. outside ribs ) 5
Rib Thickness .5000 in.
Web Thickness .5000 in.
Web Location Center
Height of Center Web 8.0000 in.
Design Temperature of Base Structure 100.00 F

Saddle\Baseplate\Rib\Web Material SA-516 70
Operating Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Ambient Allowable Stress 17500.00 psi
Use ASCE 7-95 No

Force Coefficient .600
Extra Area .0000 sq.in.
Importance Factor 1.000
Wind Velocity 100.000 mile/hr
Exposure Category C
Height above Grade 9.9167 ft.
Distance from Center of Vessel to Support 64.0000 in.
Seismic Loads Present N
Diameter Basis for Vessel OD

Shell Diameter 110.0000 in.
Shell Length Tangent to Tangent 66.0000 ft.
Thickness of Shell .9410 in.

PVElite - User Guide Example Problem
Shell Joint Efficiency 1.0000
Head Type Elliptical

Head Thickness .9290 in.
Head Joint Efficiency 1.0000
Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent 30.0000 in.

Saddle Width 10.0000 in.
Saddle Bearing Angle 120.0000 degrees
Wear Pad Thickness .3750 in.
Wear Pad Extension above Horn of Saddle 10.0000 in.
Wear Pad Width 12.0000 in.
Stiffening Ring Present N
Results for HORIZVES Number 1, Description: C TEST
Shell Allowable Stress used in Calculation 17500.00 psi

Shell Compressive Yield used in Calculation 38000.00 psi
Head Allowable Stress used in Calculation 17500.00 psi
Ring Allowable Stress used in Calculation 17500.00 psi
Volume of Vessel 32909.77 Gals.

Weight of Vessel, Empty 90584.07 lb.
Weight of Vessel, Full 365106.40 lb.
Required Actual
Shell Thickness, Reqd. vs. Actual .936 .941 in.
Head Thickness, Reqd. vs. Actual .929 .929 in.
Shell M.A.W.P. , Reqd. vs. Actual 300.00 301.47 psig
Head M.A.W.P. , Reqd. vs. Actual 300.00 300.15 psig
Actual Allowable
Long. Stress at Top of Saddles 8776.65 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Bottom of Saddles 8337.89 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Top of Midspan 5041.68 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Bottom of Midspan 12072.86 17500.00 psi
Tangential Shear in Shell 3743.68 14000.00 psi

Circ. Stress at Horn of Saddle -8102.35 -26250.00 psi
Circ. Stress at Tip of Wear Plate -6352.63 -26250.00 psi
Ring Compressive Stress in Shell -9098.41 -19000.00 psi
WIND( ASCE #7 ) and SEISMIC RESULTS :
Transverse Wind Load Component Ft

Ft = ( AFT * CF * GH * QZ ) * 0.5
Ft = ( 763.476 * .6000 * 1.3604 * 20.5030 ) * 0.5
Ft = 6388.6830 lb.
Saddle Reaction Force due to Wind Ft

Fwt = 1.5 * Ft * B / E
Fwt = 1.5 * 6388.7 * 64.0000 / 95.2628
Fwt = 6438.1230 lb.

Longitudinal Wind Load Component Fl

Fl = ( AFL * CF * GH * QZ )
Fl = ( 91.892 * .6000 * 1.3604 * 20.5030 )
Fl = 1537.8800 lb.
Saddle Reaction Force due to Wind Fl

Fwl = Fl * B / Ls
Fwl = 1537.8800 * 64.0000 / 732.0000
Fwl = 134.4595 lb.
Load Combination Results for Q + Wind or Seismic

Q = Wo/2 + Max( Fwl, Fwt, Fsl, Fst )
Q = 182553 + Max( 134, 6438, 0, 0 )
Q = 188991.3000 lb.
OPTIMUM WEAR PLATE THICKNESS RESULTS : WELDED UNWELDED

Optimum Thickness ( Ext. = 5 deg. ) .9410 .9410 in.
Optimum Thickness ( Ext. = 10 deg. ) 1.6468 1.6468 in.
Optimum Thickness ( Ext. = 15 deg. ) 1.8820 2.3525 in.
FORMULAS and SUBSTITUTIONS for ZICK ANALYSIS RESULTS

Shell and Head Required Thickness and MAWP :
TR = (P*D/2)/(S*E+0.4*P) per App. 1-1 (a)(1) : Shell

TR = ( 300.00 * 110.0000 / 2.0 ) /
( 17500 * 1.00 + 0.4 * 300.00 ) + CA
TR = .936 in.
MAWP = (S*E*(T-CA))/(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)) per App. 1-1 (a)(1) : Shell

MAWP = ( 17500 * 1.00 * ( .9410 - .0000 )) /
( 110.0000 / 2 - 0.4 * ( .9410 - .0000 ))
MAWP = 301.5 psig
TR = (P*D*K)/(2*S*E+2*P*(K-0.1)) per App. 1-4 (c) : Elli. Hd.

TR = ( 300.00 * 110.0000 * 1.00 ) /
( 2 * 17500 * 1.00 + 2 * 300.00 * ( 1.00 - 0.1 )) + CA
TR = .929 in.
MAWP = (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*D-2*(T-CA)*(K-0.1)) per App. 1-4 (d) Elli. Hd.

MAWP = ( 2 * 17500 * 1.00 * ( .9290 - .0000 )) /
( 1.00 * 110.0000 - 2 * ( .9290 - .0000 ) * ( 1.00 - 0.1 ))
MAWP = 300.2 psig
Longitudinal Bending (+-) at Midspan

= ( 3 * Q * L * K.2 / ( PI * R^2 * ( TS - CA )))
= ( 3 * 188991 * 66.00 * .8116 ) /
( PI * 54.0590 * 54.0590 * ( .9410 - .0000 )))
= 3515.59 psi
Longitudinal Bending (+-) at Saddle

= ( 3 * Q * L * K.1 / ( PI * R^2 * ( TS - CA )))
= ( 3 * 188991 * 66.00 * .0506 ) /
( PI * 54.0590 * 54.0590 * ( .9410 - .0000 )))

= 219.38 psi
Tangential Shear in Shell near Saddle
= Q * K.4 * (( L-H-2A )/( L+H ))/( R*(TS-CA))
= 188991 * 1.1707 * (( 66.00 - 2.25 - 2 * 2.50 )/
( 66.00 + 2.25 ))/( 54.0590 * ( .9410 - .0000 ))
= 3743.68 psi
Circumferential Stress at Tip of the Wear Plate

= -Q/(4*(TS-CA)*(SADWTH+1.56*SQRT(R*(TS-CA))))-3.0*Q*K13/(2*(TS-CA)^2)
= -188991 /( 4 * .9410 * ( 10.00 + 1.56*SQRT( 54.0590 * .9410 )))
-3 * 188991 * .0124 / ( 2 * .8855 )
= -6352.63 psi
Circumferential Stress at Horn of Saddle

= -Q /(4*TEM*(SADWTH+1.56*SQRT(R*(TS-CA))))-3.0*Q*K.7/(2*TEB)
= -188991 /( 4 * .9410 * ( 10.00 + 1.56*SQRT( 54.0590 * .9410 )))
-3 * 188991 * .0179 / ( 2 * .8855 )
= -8102.35 psi
Circumferential Compression at Bottom of Shell

= (Q*( K.9/( TEM9 * WPDWTH ) ) )
= ( 188991 *( .7603/( 1.3160 * 12.000 ) ) )
= -9098.41 psi
Longitudinal Pressure Stress

= DP*((SID/2+CA)-0.4*(TS-CA))/(2.0*(TS-CA))
= 300.0 * (( 108.12 / 2 + .0000 - 0.4 * ( .941 - .0000 )) /
( 2.0 * ( .941 - .0000 ))
= 8557.27 psi
RESULTS for VESSEL RIBS, WEB and BASE
Moment of Inertia of Saddle - Lateral Direction
Y A AY Ay^2 Io
Shell .4705 21.7619 10.2390 4.8174 1.6058
Wearplate 1.1285 4.5000 5.0782 5.7308 .0527
Web 4.4080 3.0920 13.6295 60.0790 9.8537
BasePlate 7.7500 6.0000 46.5000 360.3750 .1250
Totals 13.7570 35.3539 75.4468 431.0023 11.6372
Value C1 = äAy/äA = 2.1340 in.

Value I = äAy^2 + äIo - C1*äAy = 281.6328 in**4
Value As = äA - Ashell = 13.5920 sq.in.
K1 = (1+Cos(á)-.5*Sin(á)^2 )/(ã-á+Sin(á)*Cos(á)) = .2035
Fh = ( K1 * Q ) = 38463.8400 lb.
Tension Str., St = ( 2.0 * Fh/As ) = 5659.7770 psi

Allowed Str., Sa = .6 * Yield Stress = 22800.0000 psi
Bending Mom., M = ( 2.0 * Fh*d ) = 111241.1000 ft.lb.

Bending Str., Sb = ( M * C1 / I ) = 10115.0100 psi

Allowed Str., Sa = .66 * Yield Str. = 25080.0000 psi
Minimum Thickness of Baseplate

Baseplate Min., = (3*Q*F/(4*A*SA))^.5 = 1.0632 in. ** LOW **
Calc. of Axial Load, Inter. Values and Comp. Stress
e = ( BPLEN - 1 ) / ( NRIBS - 1)
e = ( 60.0000 - 1 ) / ( 5 - 1 ) = 14.7500 in.
AP = e * BPWID / 2
AP = 14.7500 * 12.0000 / 2 = 88.5000 sq.in.
P = AP * BP
P = 88.5000 * 262.4880 = 23230.1900 lb.
AR = ( BPWID - 1 - WEBTK ) * RIBTK + e/2 * WEBTK

AR = ( 12.000 - 1 - .500 ) * .500 + 14.7500/2 * .500 = 8.938 sq.in.
SC = P/AR
SC = 23230.1900 / 8.9375 = 2599.1820 psi
Check of Outside Ribs

Inertia of Saddle, Outer Ribs - Axial Direction
Y A AY Ay^2 Io
Rib 5.0000 5.2500 26.2500 .0000 41.6615
Web 5.0000 3.6875 18.4375 .0000 .1536
Values 5.0000 8.9375 44.6875 .0000 41.8151
KL/R < Cc ( 15.9773 < 122.7360 ) per AISC 1.5.1.3

Sca = (1-(Klr)^2/(2*Cc^2))*Fy/(5/3+3*(Klr)/(8*Cc)-(Klr^3)/(8*Cc^3)
Sca = ( 1-( 15.98 )^2/(2 * 122.74^2 )) * 29000000 /
( 5/3+3*( 15.98)/(8* 122.74)-( 15.98^3)/(8* 122.74^3)
Sca = 21967.05 psi
AISC Unity Check on Outside Ribs ( must be ó 1.0 )

Check = Sc/Sca + Sb/Sba
Check = 2599.18 / 21967.05 + 40.98 / 25080.00
Check = .12
Check of Inside Ribs

Inertia of Saddle, Inner Ribs - Axial Direction
Y A AY Ay^2 Io
Rib 5.5000 5.2500 28.8750 .0000 55.4531
Web 5.5000 7.3750 40.5625 .0000 .1536
Values 5.5000 12.6250 69.4375 .0000 55.6068
KL/R < Cc ( 4.1381 < 122.7360 ) per AISC 1.5.1.3

Sca = (1-(Klr)^2/(2*Cc^2))*Fy/(5/3+3*(Klr)/(8*Cc)-(Klr^3)/(8*Cc^3)
Sca = ( 1-( 4.14 )^2/(2 * 122.74^2 )) * 29000000 /
( 5/3+3*( 4.14)/(8* 122.74)-( 4.14^3)/(8* 122.74^3)
Sca = 22615.54 psi

AISC Unity Check on Inside Ribs ( must be ó 1.0 )

Check = Sc/Sca + Sb/Sba
Check = 3680.03 / 22615.54 + 14.20 / 25080.00
Check = .16


&KDSWHU
The TEMA Tubesheet Module
Introduction
The PVElite TEMA Tubesheet Module performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all
tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet exchangers, based on the Standards of the
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association, 8th Edition, 2001.

The PVElite TEMA Tubesheet Module calculates required thickness and Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure of tubesheets for all of the exchanger types described in the
Seventh Edition of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
(TEMA). It also calculates thermal stresses and forces in the shell and tubes of fixed
tubesheet exchangers. The calculations are taken from paragraphs 7.11 through 7.25.
This module will analyze the following tubesheet types:
• Stationary tubesheets, gasketed between the shell and the channel.
• Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell and the channel.
• Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell only.
• Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel only.
• U-tube exchangers, tubesheet gasketed between shell and channel
• U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with channel only.
• Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head (P).
• Floating tubesheets, floating head with backing device (S).
• Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head (T).
• Floating tubesheets, externally sealed floating head (W).
• Floating tubesheets, divided floating head.
• Fixed tubesheets, stationary at both ends.
The module does the required calculations for the thickness of a tubesheet (stationary or
U-tube) which has been extended as a flange. It also calculates the required thickness of
the extension. The user must enter the geometry of the flange extension, including the gas-
ket and bolting for the flange.
The TEMA Tubesheet module takes into account the following additional loadings for
fixed tubesheet exchangers:
The TEMA Tubesheet Module 16-1

• Expansion joints - thin walled, thick walled, or none.

• Tubesheets - integral, gasketed, or extended as flanges.
• Pressure and thermal loads - on shell, tubesheet, tubes and tube-to-tubesheet joints.
• Differential pressure designs.
The TEMA Tubesheet module calculates required thicknesses in the corroded condition.
Occasionally the tubesheet thickness will be governed by the uncorroded condition, so a
case with shellside and tubeside corrosion allowances set to zero should be analyzed for
most exchangers.
Figures 16A, 16B and 16C show geometry for the TEMA Tubesheet Module
Figure 16A - Geometry for the TEMA Tubesheet Module
16-2 The TEMA Tubesheet Module

Figure 16B - Geometry for the TEMA Tubesheet Module

Figure 16C - Geometry for the TEMA Tubesheet Module


Main Input Fields
Shell Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external
pressure, enter a negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pressure with
the positive pressure on the other side. Note that if you specify a differential pressure in
the differential pressure input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside will usually be
ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the differential pres-
sure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate calculations
for differential pressure should be performed.
Shell Metal Design Temperature

Enter the design metal temperature for the shell side components. This is the design tem-
perature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the
metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual
metal temperature.
Shell\Channel\Tube\Tube Sheet Material Specification


with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design
temperature.

with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient
temperature.
Shell Wall Thickness

Enter the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the
program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calcu-
lating longitudinal shell stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers.


Enter the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculated
the corroded thickness of the shell and the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Shell Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the program
to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calculating lon-
gitudinal shell stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Channel Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum
design condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pres-
sure with the positive pressure on the other side. Note that if you specify a differential
pressure in the differential pressure input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside
will usually be ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the dif-
ferential pressure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate
calculations for differential pressure should be performed.
Channel Metal Design Temperature

Enter the design metal temperature for the tube side components. This is the design tem-
perature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the
metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual
metal temperature.
Channel Wall Thickness

Enter the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by
the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types.
Channel Corrosion Allowance

Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the channel and the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Channel Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the pro-
gram to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets.
Tubesheet Type
The program analyzes the following tubesheet types:
A Stationary tubesheets, gasketed on both sides.
B Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell.
C Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel.
N Stationary tubesheets, integral on both sides.
U U-tube tubesheets gasketed on both sides
V U-tube tubesheets integral with the channel.
U-tube tubesheets integral with the shell.
P Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head.
S Floating tubesheets, head with backing device.

T Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head.

W Floating head, externally sealed floating tubesheet.
D Divided floating tubesheet.
F Fixed tubesheet exchanger - two stationary tubesheets.
Tube Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75,
.875, 1.0, or 1.25. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term ‘eta’
in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated trian-
gular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
Tube Corrosion Allowance

Enter the tube corrosion allowance.
Tube Pitch (Distance Between Tube Centers)

Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and
pattern are used to calculate the term ‘eta’ in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules
are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for
square or rotated square layouts.
Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square)

Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calcu-
late the term ‘eta’ in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular
and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square lay-
outs.
Are Tubes Attached by a Groove or Fillet Weld?

Check this field if the tubes are joined to the tubesheet by a fillet or groove weld. Do not
check this field if the tubes are not welded to the tubesheet.
Perimeter of Tube Layout (if Needed)

Enter the length of a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. This can be calcu-
lated by counting the number of tubes on the outside of the layout and multiplying by the
tube pitch. When a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the
perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. You will see an error message
when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you over-
estimate the area and underestimate the perimeter.
Area of Tube Layout

Enter the area enclosed by a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. When a
tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area
of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. You will see an error message when these values
are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and
underestimate the perimeter.
Differential Design Pressure (Used if > 0.0)

Enter the differential design pressure if you wish the program to use the differential design
rules. The differential pressure is used as the design pressure on both the tubeside and the

shellside, except for fixed tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero
serves as a flag to tell the program to turn on the special differential design pressure rules
for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and tube side design pressures for fixed
tubesheet exchangers.
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet

If the tubesheet has a groove, enter its depth here. This value is used as a candidate when
finalizing the required thickness of the tubesheet. The maximum of this value or the chan-
nel corrosion allowance plus the shellside corrosion allowance will be added to the com-
puted required tubesheet thickness. If your tubesheet is not grooved, enter a 0 in this field.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable guess at the thickness if the actual
thickness is unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the
shell side or the tube side. The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also
used in the equivalent thermal pressure calculation. When you have finished your design
you should come back and put the actual thickness into this field and make sure the
required thickness doesn’t change.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the
tubesheet corrosion allowance shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the
tubesheet.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side

Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the channel side. his value is combined with
the tubesheet corrosion allowance channel side to calculate the corroded thickness of the
tubesheet.
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature

Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for
determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal tem-
perature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temper-
ature.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange?

Check this field if the tubesheet is extended and used as a bolted flange. Do not check this
field unless the tubesheet actually sees bending moments the bolting. If the tubesheet is
bolted between a pair of flanges, the tubesheet itself will not experience a bending
moment. It is only when the tubesheet replaces one of the flanges that a moment develops.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)

Enter the kind of gasketing associated with this tubesheet. If the tubesheet has a circular
gasket, even if the gasket is not extended as a flange, you must enter the details of the gas-
keting, so that the program can correctly evaluate the mean diameter of the gasket load
reaction (G).

Actual Shell Metal Temperature

Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell under a realistic operating condition. It is
important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you
enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have
to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently
the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal
resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the
tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will
be quite close to the shell temperature. Don’t forget to evaluate the condition of shellside
or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may
govern the exchanger design.
Actual Tube Metal Temperature

Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubes under a realistic operating condition. It is
important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you
enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have
to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently
the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal
resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the
tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will
be quite close to the shell temperature. Don’t forget to evaluate the condition of shellside
or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may
govern the exchanger design.
Actual TEMA Tubesheets Metal Temperature

Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet under a realistic operating condition.
This value does not affect the thermal expansion design, but it is used to determine the
elastic modulus of the tubesheet.
Number of Tubes
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Length of Tubes
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.

Tube Wall Thickness

Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area
and stiffness. The following table gives thicknesses for some common tube gauges:
BWG Thickness BWG Thickness

Gauge (inches) Gauge (inches)
7 .180 17 .058
8 .165 18 .049
10 .134 19 .042
11 .120 20 .035
12 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
Tube Material Specification

Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (Chap-
ter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking
and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length

If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or
groove weld leg length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld,
sometimes both are used. These values are used to determine the weld strengths. PVElite
will determine will determine the minimum required weld sizes afm and agm. Refer to
paragraph UW-20 in the ASME Code for more details.
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor

The ASME Code tube joint reliability factor is found in the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Table A-2, and is used to calculate the allowable tube-to-tubesheet joint loads.
A typical value for tubes rolled into two grooves is 0.70.
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate

If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint,
enter a one (1.0). If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant
for the joint. The expansion joint spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite
THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique.

Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate

THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique. The
spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of pounds per inch.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, different inputs for the uncorroded and corroded spring rates
will be reported, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the outer annular plate. This value is used by the program to
calculate the force on the cylinder, and thus the equivalent pressure of thermal expansion.
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for Max (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
SL: Unsupported Span of the tube
k: Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
k Condition
0.6 For unsupported spans between two tubesheets.
0.8 For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support.
1.0 For unsupported spans between two tube supports.
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tube span between two support baffles.

Enter the Tube End Condition k, Corresponding to Span SL
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
SL: Unsupported Span of the tube
k: Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. See above for possible values of k.
Is this a Kettle Type Heat Exchanger ?

Check here if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in
Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Length of Kettle Port Cylinder (LP)

Enter the length of the Kettle port cyclinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure
N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Thickness of Kettle Port Cylinder (TP)
Enter the thickness of the Kettle port cyclinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
Mean Diameter of Kettle Port Cylinder (DP)

Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle port cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell
is shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Fig-
ure N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Length of Kettle Cylinder
Enter the length of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like
a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the
TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Thickness of Kettle Cylinder
Enter the thickness of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped
like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in
the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Mean Diameter of Kettle Cylinder

Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
Axial Length of Kettle Cone (LC)
Enter the axial length of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped
like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in
the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.

Thickness of Kettle Cone (KC)

Enter the thickness of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like
a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the
TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ?

Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the
TEMA standard.
Load
Load Case Description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fts, Fvs - User-defined shell side and tube side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell side and tube side design pressures.
Th - With or without thermal expansion.
Ca - With or without corrosion allowance.
Enter the Shell/Channel Side Vacuum Pressures

When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel
side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example, for full atmospheric
vacuum conditions enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi is used.
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout

When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate sum-
marized results for all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and
intermediate calculations for any load cases, select that load case.
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion



Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet

Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will used in the calculation of the required thick-
ness. The final results should, therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five per-
cent.

cell.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table 2 - UNC Bolt Table 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt
Bolt Root Area (Used if > 0)

If you exchanger design has non-standard bolts, enter a 3 in the field above this one and
enter the root area of a single bolt in this field.
Number of Bolts
Fillet Weld Between Flange and Shell/Channel

Enter the fillet weld height between the tubesheet flange and the shell or channel outside
surface. pvelite will use this number to calculate g1 ( the hub thickness at the large end).
Operating Bolt Load ?

Specify the alternate operating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value
will be used if it is greater than the operating bolt load computed by the program.
Seating Bolt Load ?

Specify the alternate seating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value
will be used if it is greater than the seating bolt load computed by the program.
Flange Design Bolt Load ?

Specify the alternate flange design bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This
value will be used if it is greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the pro-
gram.

point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. The program uses

the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point
of the gasket.


Facing PVElite-
Description
Sketch Equivalent


ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. For gasket proper-
ties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.
Gasket Thickness
Nubbin Width



Intermediate Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flanges

Two major additions to the tubesheet calculation occur when a tubesheet is extended as a
flange. First, a moment is added to the pressure moment which governs the thickness of
most tubesheets. Second, a moment exists on the portion of the tubesheet which serves as
the flange, and the effects of this moment must be evaluation. The TEMA standard
requires that these conditions be evaluated using the rules in the ASME code, appendix 2.
Those rules, in turn, require the complete evaluation of bending moments on the flange. It
is those bending moment calculations which are reflected in this section of the output.
These calculations represent the basic bolt loading for the flanged portion of the tubesheet,
and will be the same for the mating flange. The actual bending moments may change
when compared to the mating flange. The flanged extension of the tubesheet is calculated
as a ring type flange. Since no stresses are shown, you need to check the adequacy of the
bolting by comparing the required to actual area. The bolt spacing correction factor is
automatically included in the bending moment, such that the moment is the force times the
distance times the bolt correction.
Geometric Constants, Pressure and Thickness Calculations

The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term ‘eta’ in the tubesheet
thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The
rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. When a tubesheet may be con-
trolled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the
shear calculation. You will see an error message when these values are required but not
given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the
perimeter.
The G dimension is calculated based on the exchanger type and either the diameter of the
pressure component or the mean diameter of the gasket. Similarly, the F dimension is cal-
culated based on the exchanger type and the type of connection to the shell and channel.
These calculations are based on Table RCB-7.132 and Table RCB-7.133.
Differential Expansion Pressure

The program contains tables of Young’s modulus and coefficient of thermal expansion. It
selects these values from the tables based on the materials classification you enter on the
material editing screen of the input spreadsheet. You should make sure that the program
has selected the right identification number for the material. You should also check the
values to make sure that they agree with your expectations. A good place to find this data,
and the source of these tables in the program, is the TEMA Standard, tables D-10 and D-

11. The following list shows the program identification numbers for the materials in this
standard:
Chart Cross Reference

to Elastic Chart
Chart Name
Number
1 3 B31.3: Carbon Steel
2 4 B31.3: 5Cr-9Cr
3 5 B31.3: 12,17,27Cr
4 6 B31.3: 18Cr-8Ni
5 6 B31.3: 25Cr20Ni
6 8 B31.3: 67Ni30Cu
7 1 B31.3: 3.5Ni
8 10 B31.3: Aluminum
9 7 B31.3: Cast Iron
10 13 B31.3: Bronze
11 12 B31.3: Brass
12 9 B31.3: 70Cu-30Ni
13 6 B31.3: Ni-Fe-Cr
14 6 B31.3: Ni-Cr-Fe
15 7 B31.3: Ductile Iron
16 14 TEMA: Plain Carbon Stl & C-Mn Stl.
17 14 TEMA: C-SI, C-1/2Mo & Cr-1/2Mo
18 16 TEMA: C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
19 14 TEMA: Mn-Mo
20 20 TEMA: 2-1/2 & 3-1/2 Ni
21 17 TEMA: 2-1/4Cr-1Mo
22 18 TEMA: 5Cr-1/2Mo
23 18 TEMA: 7Cr-1/2Mo & 9Cr-1Mo
24 19 TEMA: 12Cr & 13Cr
25 19 TEMA: 15Cr & 17Cr
26 15 TEMA: TP316 & TP317
27 15 TEMA: TP304
28 15 TEMA: TP321
29 15 TEMA: TP347
30 15 TEMA: 25Cr-12Ni, 23Cr-12Ni,

31 23 TEMA: Aluminum 3003
32 23 TEMA: Aluminum 6061
33 32 TEMA: Titanium, Grades 1,2,3,7
34 21 TEMA: Ni-Cu (Alloy 400
35 24 TEMA: Ni-Cr-Fe (Alloy 600)
36 25 TEMA: Ni-Fe-Cr (Alloy 800 & 800H)
37 35 TEMA: Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu (Alloy 825)
38 34 TEMA: Ni-Mo (Alloy B)
39 27 TEMA: Ni-Mo-Cr (Alloy C-276)
40 28 TEMA: Nickel (Alloy 200)
41 33 TEMA: 70-30 Cu-Ni
42 22 TEMA: 90-10 & 80-20 Cu-Ni
43 29 TEMA: Copper
44 30 TEMA: Brass
45 29 TEMA: Aluminum Bronze
46 29 TEMA: Copper-Silicon
47 31 TEMA: Admiralty
48 37 TEMA: Zirconium
49 15 TEMA: Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb
50 38 TEMA: Ni-Cr-Mo-Cb (Alloy 625)
When a fixed tubesheet is analyzed, the following calculation procedure is followed:

1. Calculate G, F, and ETA per RCB-7.132 and RCB-7.133
2. Calculate equivalent differential expansion pressure per RCB-7.161
3. Calculate equivalent bolting pressure per RCB-7.162
4. Calculate effective shell side design pressure per RCB-7.163
5. Calculate effective tube side design pressure per RCB-7.164
6. Calculate required thickness per RCB-7.132 or RCB-7.133
7. Calculate shell longitudinal stress per RCB-7.22
8. Calculate tube longitudinal stress per RCB-7.23
9. Calculate allowable tube compressive stress per RCB-7.24
10. Calculate tube to tubesheet joint loads per RCB-7.25

Example Problems
Example problem 1 is a comparison problem for a fixed tubesheet exchanger that has a
thick walled metal bellows expansion joint. The results compare very well to the other
exchanger program. There are several additional example problems contained in the files
TEXAMPLE.
FileName : CHECKS --------------------------------- Page 1
Tubesheet Analysis: COMPARISON ITEM: 1, 02:56pm, 12/14/2000
INPUT ECHO, TUBESHEET NUMBER 1, Description: COMPARISON
Shell Design Pressure PS 50.00 psig

Shell Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMPS 649.00 F
Shell Material SA-240 304H
Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature SOS 15900.00 psi
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient SAS 18800.00 psi
Shell Thickness TS 0.2500 in.
Shell Corrosion Allowance CAS 0.0000 in.
Inside Diameter of Shell DS 112.0000 in.
Channel Design Pressure PC 50.00 psig

Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure TEMPC 649.00 F
Channel Material SA-240 304H
Channel Allowable Stress at Temperature SOC 15900.00 psi
Channel Allowable Stress at Ambient SAC 18800.00 psi
Channel Thickness TC 0.2500 in.
Channel Corrosion Allowance CAC 0.0000 in.
Inside Diameter of Channel DC 112.0000 in.
TUBESHEET TYPE: Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger

Tube Outside Diameter DT 0.7500 in.
Tube Pitch (Center to Center Spacing) PT 1.3500 in.
Tube Layout Pattern Triangular
Fillet Weld Leg at Back of Tube af 0.0000 in.
Groove Weld Leg at Back of Tube ag 0.0000 in.
Tubesheet Design Metal Temperature TEMPTS 649.00 F
Tubesheet Material Specification SA-240 304H
Tubesheet Allowable Stress at Temperature SOTS 15900.00 psi
Tubesheet Allowable Stress at Ambient SATS 18800.00 psi
Thickness of Tubesheet TTS 2.5625 in.
Tubesheet Corr. Allowance (Shell side) CATS 0.000 in.
Tubesheet Corr. Allowance (Chanel side) CATC 0.000 in.
Depth of Groove in Tube Sheet GROOVE 0.0000 in.
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR FIXED TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS

Actual Metal Temperature for Shell ACTUAL1 156.00 F
Actual Metal Temperature for Tubes ACTUAL2 226.00 F
Actual Metal Temperature for Tubesheet ACTUAL3 233.00 F
Number of Tubes TNUMT 3100
Length of Tubes TLENT 152.2500 in.
Tube Material SS304-WLD-HI
Tube Allowable Stress at Temperature SOT 13500.00 psi

Tube Allowable Stress At Ambient SAT 16000.00 psi

Tube Yield Stress At Operating Temperature SYT 18008.00 psi
Tube Wall Thickness TT 0.0490 in.
Tube Corrosion Allowance Tbca 0.0000 in.
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor FASME 0.7000
Expansion Joint Spring Rate (Corroded) SJF 49250.00 lbs./in.
Expansion Joint Spring Rate (New and Cold) Sjnc 49250.00 lbs./in.
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter at Bellows DJ 117.7500 in.
Unsupported Tube Length for max. (k*SL) SL 50.0000 in.
Tube end condition corres. to span (SL) k 1.0000 in.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheets Yes
Shell side Vacuum Pressure PEXTS 0.0000 psi
Chanel side Vacuum Pressure PEXTC 0.0000 psi
Is this a Kettle - type configuration No
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR TUBESHEETS EXTENDED AS FLANGES:

Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion DF 116.2500 in.
Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet TF 5.1250 in.
Nominal Bolt Diameter DBOLT .6250 in.
Type of Threads ( Thread Series ) TEMA Thread Series
Number of Bolts NUMBER 176
Weld between Flange and Shell/Channel WLDH 0.0000 in.
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR GASKETED TUBESHEETS:

Tubesheet Gasket on which Side SIDE CHANNEL
INTERMEDIATE CALCULATIONS FOR TUBESHEETS EXTENDED AS FLANGES:
Gasket Contact Width, RN = (GOD-GID)/2 .500 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = RN / 2.0 .250 in.
Effective Gasket Width, BE = B0 .250 in.
Gasket Reaction Diameter, G = (GOD+GID) / 2.0 113.125 in.

H = PI/4 * G * G * PEQ
H = ( .7854 * 113.1250 * 113.1250 * 50.0000 )
H = 502547. lb.
HP = 2.0 * BE * PI * G * GM * PEQ
HP = 2.0 * 3.1416 * .2500 * 113.1250 * 3.7500 * 50.00
HP = 33318. lb.


HD = PI * B * B * PEQ / 4.0
HD = 3.1416 * 112.0000 * 112.0000 * 50.0000 / 4.0
HD = 492602. lb.
HT = H - HD
HT = 502547 - 492601
HT = 9946. lb.
Operating Bolt Load:
WM1 = H + HP + HPP
WM1 = ( 502547 + 33318 + 0 )
WM1 = 535866. lb.
Gasket Seating Bolt Load:
WM2 = GY * (( BE * PI * G ) + (BEPG * GLPG) )
WM2 = 10000.00 * (( .2500 * 3.141 * 113.125 ) + ( .00 * .0000 ))
WM2 = 888482. lb.
Required Bolt Area:
AM = Maximum of WM1/ABSTR, WM2/ABASTR
AM = Maximum of 535865 / 25000 , 888481 / 25000
AM = 35.5393 sq. in.
Bolting Information for TEMA Thread Series:

Minimum radial distance between hub and bolts .938 in.
Minimum radial distance between bolts and edge .750 in.
Flange Design Bolt Load:

W = ABASTR * ( AM + AB ) / 2.0
W = 25000 * ( 35.5393 + 35.5520 ) / 2.0
W = 888640.88 lb.
Gasket Seating Force:
HG = WM1 - H
HG = 535865 - 502547
HG = 33318.09 lb.

DHG = (DBCRL - G ) / 2.0
DHG = ( 114.7500 - 113.1250 ) / 2.0
DHG = .8125 in.
DHT = ( R + GONE + DHG ) / 2.0
DHT = ( 1.1250 + .2500 + .8125 ) / 2.0
DHT = 1.0938 in.
DHD = R + GONE / 2.0
DHD = 1.1250 + .2500 / 2.0
DHD = 1.2500 in.


Gasket Load, Mg 33318. .8125 1.0000 2256. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, Ma 888641. .8125 1.0000 60169. ft.lb.
TUBESHEET ANALYSIS, TUBESHEET NUMBER 1, Description: COMPARISON

TEMA Standards, Seventh Edition, 1988, RCB-7, Tubesheets
Shellside Fixity Factor, F, per RCB 7.132 FS 1.0000

Shellside Effective Diameter,per RCB 7.132 GS 112.0000 in.
Tubeside Fixity Factor, F, per RCB 7.132 FC 1.0000
Tubeside Effective Diameter, per RCB 7.132 GC 112.0000 in.
TEMA Eta factor used in calculation ETA .7201
MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL EXPANSION ANALYSIS:

SHELL - TEMA : TP304
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion at Actual Temp. .08684E -05 / deg F
Elastic Modulus at actual Metal Temperature .02782E +08 psi
TUBES - TEMA : TP304
TUBESHEET - TEMA : TP304
TEMA RCB-7.161 J Factor for Thermal Expansion .0030

TEMA RCB-7.161 K Factor for Thermal Expansion .2672
TEMA RCB-7.161 Fq Factor for Thermal Expansion
8.2034
TEMA RCB-7.161 Differential Expansion / Length -.63E-03
TEMA RCB-7.161 Equivalent Differential Thermal Expansion Pressure:
PD = 4 * RJ * ELAS * TSCA * DLL /
( DOS - 3.0*TSCA ) * ( 1.0 + RJ * RK * FQ )
PD = 4 * .0030 * 27820000 * .2500 * -.0006 /
( 112.5000 - 3.0 * .2500 ) * ( 1.0 + .0030 * .2672 * 10.5620 )
PD = -.48 psig
RCB 7.162 Equivalent Shellside Bolting Pressure:

PBS = 6.2 * RMA / ( F**2 * G**3 )
PBS = 6.2 * 722024 / ( 1.0000^2 * 112.0000^3 )
PBS = 3.19 psig
RCB 7.162 Equivalent Tubeside Bolting Pressure:
PBT = 6.2 * RMO / ( F**2 * G**3 )
PBT = 6.2 * 653701 / ( 1.0000^2 * 112.0000^3 )
PBT = 2.88 psig
TEMA RCB 7.163 Effective Shellside Design Pressure:

TEMA RCB-7.163 Fs Factor for Shellside Design .8610
PSP1 = 0.4 * RJ * ( 1.5 + RK * (1.5 + FFS ) )
= 0.4 * .0030 * ( 1.5 + .2672 * (1.5 + .8610 ) )
PSP2 = ( ( 0.5 - RJ / 2.0 ) * ( DJ**2 / G**2 - 1.0 )

= ( ( 0.5 - .0030 / 2.0 ) * ( 117.7500**2 / 112.0000**2 - 1.0 )

PSP3 = 1.0 + RJ * RK * FQ
= 1.0 + .0030 * .2672 * 8.2034
PSP = PS * ( ( PSP1 - PSP2 ) / PSP3 )
= 50.00 * ( ( .0026 - .0282 ) / 1.0086 )
PSP = -2.48 psig
TEMA RCB-7.163 Eff. Shell Side Design Pressure:

PSU = Max (absolute) of PSP : -2.48
or PBS : 3.19
or ( PSP - PD ) / 2 : ( -2.48 - -.48 ) / 2.0
or ( PSP - PD - PBS ) / 2 : ( -2.48 - -.48 - 3.19 ) / 2.0
or ( PBS + PD ) / 2 : ( 3.19 + -.48 ) / 2.0
or ( PSP - PBS ) : ( -2.48 - 3.19 )
PSU = : 5.66 psig
TEMA RCB 7.163 Shellside Shear Design Pressure, PBS=0:
PSS = : 2.48 psig
RCB 7.164 Effective Tubeside Design Pressure:

TEMA RCB-7.164, Ft Factor for Tubeside Design .8949
PTP1 = 1.0 + 0.4 * RJ * RK * ( 1.5 + FFT )
= 1.0 + 0.4 * .0030 * .2672 * ( 1.5 + .8949 )
PTP2 = 1.0 + RJ * RK * FQ
= 1.0 + .0030 * .2672 * 8.2034
PTP = PT * PTP1 / PTP2
= 50.00 * 1.0008 / 1.0067
PTP = 49.71 psig
TEMA RCB-7.164 Effective Tube Side Design Pressure:

PTU = Max (absolute) of :
( PTP + PBT + PD ) / 2 : ( 49.71 + 2.88 + -.48 ) / 2.0
or ( PTP + PBT ) : ( 49.71 + 2.88 )
( PTP - PSP + PBT + PD) / 2 : ( 49.71 - -1.27 + 2.88 + -.48 ) / 2.0
or ( PTP - PSP + PBT ) : ( 49.71 - -1.27 + 2.88 )
PTU = : 55.07 psig
RCB 7.164 Tubeside Shear Design Pressure (PBT=0):
PTS = : 52.19 psig
TEMA RCB-7.132 Required Thickness for Shellside Pressure :

TRS = FS * GS * SQRT ( PSU / ( ETA * SOTS ) ) / 3.0
TRS = 1.0000 * 112.0000 * SQRT( 5.66 / ( .7201 * 15900 ) ) / 3.0
TRS = .8304 in.
TEMA RCB-7.132 Required Thickness for Tubeside Pressure :
TRC = FC * GC * SQRT ( PTU / ( ETA * SOTS ) ) / 3.0
TRC = 1.0000 * 112.0000 * SQRT( 55.07 / ( .7201 * 15900 ) ) / 3.0
TRC = 2.5892 in.
TEMA RCB-7.132 Required Thickness for Bending + CAS + MAX( CAC,GROOVE):
TREQ = 2.5892 in.
No Shear Calculation, since Pressure is less than 5025.1846 psig
TEMA RCB-7.134 Required Thickness for Tubesheet Flanged Extension :

TFREQ = .98* SQRT((RM*(R^2 - 1 + 3.72* R^2 * LOG(R)))
/ ( SOTS * ( DF - G ) * ( 1.0 + 1.8 * R^2 ))

TFREQ = .98* SQRT(( 722024*( 1.04^2 - 1 + 3.72* 1.04^2*LOG( 1.04)))

/ ( 15900 * ( 116.25 - 112.00 ) * ( 1.0 + 1.8 * 1.04^2 ))
TFREQ = .8790 in.
RCB-7.22 Shell Longitudinal Stress :

Max. Effective Pressure for Longitudinal Stress, .77 psig
Min. Effective Pressure for Longitudinal Stress, -2.48 psig
TEMA RCB-7.22 Maximum Shell Longitudinal Stress :

STSMAX = PSSMAX * CS * ( DOS - TSCA ) / ( 4 * TSCA )
STSMAX = .77 * .50 * ( 112.5000 - .2500 ) / ( 4 * .25 )
STSMAX = 43. psi
TEMA RCB-7.22 Allowable Shell Longitudinal Stress :
STSALL = 15900. psi
TEMA RCB-7.22 Minimum Shell Longitudinal Stress :

STSMIN = PSSMIN * CS * ( DOS - TSCA ) / ( 4 * TSCA )
STSMIN = -1.27 * 1.00 * ( 112.5000 - .2500 ) / ( 4 * .25 )
STSMIN = -278. psi
TEMA RCB-7.22 Allowable Shell Compressive Stress :
Geometry Factor, A = 0.125/(Ro/t) A .0005556
Materials Factor, B, Function(A, Chart) B 5038. psi
STSCOM = -5038. psi
RCB-7.23 Tube Longitudinal Stress Results :

Max. Effective Pressure for Longitudinal Stress, 51.98 psig
Min. Effective Pressure for Longitudinal Stress, -.48 psig
TEMA RCB-7.23 Maximum Tube Long. Stress (Tension):

STTMAX = PTTMAX*CT*FQ*G*G /(4*TNUMT*TT*(DT-TT))
STTMAX = 50.72* 1.00* 10.56* 112.0000* 112.0000
/ ( 4* 3100* .0490*( .7500- .0490) )
STTMAX = 12557.97 psi
TEMA RCB-7.23 Allowable Tube Long. Stress (Tension):

STSALL = 13500.00 psi
TEMA RCB-7.23 Minimum Tube Comp. Longitudinal Stress :

STTMIN = PTTMIN*CT*FQ*G*G/(4*TNUMT*TT*(DT-TT))
STTMIN = -.48* 1.00* 8.20* 112.0000* 112.0000
/ ( 4* 3100* .0490*( .7500- .0490) )
STTMIN = -115.25 psi
Modulus of Elasticity of Tubes at Mean Tube Temperature

Elastic Modulus for Tube Material, ET 27118000.00 psi
TEMA RCB-7.24 Allowable Tube Compressive Stress :

STTCOM = -PI**2 * ET / ( FSAF * RKLR**2 )
STTCOM = - 3.14**2 * 27118000 / ( 1.25 * 201.25**2 )
STTCOM = -5286.52 psi

RCB-7.25 Tube-To-Tubesheet Joint Load :

Effective Pressure for Tube-to-Tubesheet Load : 51.98 psig
TEMA RCB-7.25 Actual Tube-To-Tubesheet Load :

WJ = PI * FQ * PTLOAD * G * G / ( 4.0 * TNUMT )
WJ = 3.14 * 8.20 * 50.72 * 112.00 * 112.00 / ( 4.0 * 3100 )
WJ = 1355.14 lb.
TEMA RCB-7.25 Allowable Tube-To-Tubesheet Load :
WJA = (PI/4.0)*(DT^2-(DT-2*TT)**2)*SOT*FASME
WJA = ( 3.14/4.0)*( .7500^2-( .7500-2.0 * .0490)**2) * 13500 * .70
WJA = 1019.75 lb.
Fixed Tubesheet Required Thickness per TEMA 8th Edition:
Thickness Reqd ----- P r e s s u r e s Case Pass/

Case# Tbsht Extnsn Pt’ Ps’ PDif Type Fail
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1c 2.531 0.879 49.72 0.00 0.00 Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca Ok
2c 0.831 0.879 0.00 -2.48 0.00 Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca Ok
3c 2.590 0.879 49.72 -2.48 0.00 Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Fail
4c 0.750 0.879 0.00 0.00 -0.48 Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca Ok
5c 2.530 0.879 49.71 0.00 -0.48 Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca Ok
6c 0.830 0.879 0.00 -2.48 -0.48 Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca Ok
7c 2.589 0.879 49.71 -2.48 -0.48 Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Fail
8c 0.750 0.879 0.00 0.00 0.00 Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca Ok
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Max: 2.590 0.879 in.
Given Tubesheet Thickness: 2.5625 in.
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.
Tube and Shell Stress Summary:

---------- Shell Stresses ---------- Tube Stresses Tube Loads Pass
Case# Ten Allwd Cmp Allwd Ten Allwd Cmp Allwd Ld Allwd Fail
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1c 32 15900 0 -5038 10689 13500 0 -5458 1153 1020 Fail
2c 0 15900 -279 -5038 1867 13500 0 -5458 201 1020 Ok
3c 32 15900 -279 -5038 12556 13500 0 -5458 1355 1020 Fail
4c 27 15900 0 -5038 0 13500 -115 -5287 0 1020 Ok
5c 43 15900 0 -5038 10691 13500 -115 -5287 1154 1020 Fail
6c 27 15900 -278 -5038 1867 13500 -115 -5287 201 1020 Ok
7c 43 15900 -278 -5038 12558 13500 -115 -5287 1355 1020 Fail
8c 0 15900 0 -5038 0 13500 0 -5458 0 1020 Ok
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAX RATIO 0.003 0.055 0.930 0.022 1.329
The PVELITE Program, (c) 1989-2001 by COADE Engineering Software


&KDSWHU
The WRC 107/FEA Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the WRC 107/FEA Module in PVElite. To begin, make sure that
the current analysis type is WRC 107/FEA. This can be determined when viewing the
main menu. From version 4.0 of PVElite, an interface for performing finite element analy-
sis (FEA) of nozzle-shell junctions, is available. You can choose to perform either WRC
107 or FEA.
WRC 107 is a method for determining stresses on the shell of a vessel when a nozzle or
some rectangular attachment is being loaded. A typical case is to analyze the vessel
stresses on a nozzle due to external piping loads. These loads are obtained from a piping
flexibility analysis. This type of stress analysis is based on “Local Stresses in Spherical
and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings,” Welding Research Council Bulletin
107, August 1965, and revision 1979, based on the prior work of P.P. Bijlaard.
As of Version 3.3, PVElite features a stress summation capability. The program computes
overall stress intensities on a vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section
VIII Division 2. Local vessel stress calculations for sustained, expansion, and occasional
loads along with pressure stresses are transformed into code-defined stress components.
The output, in the form of Pm, Pl, and Q and their appropriate combinations, can be com-
pared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values.
There are times when the applicability of the WRC bulletin 107 is in question or a particu-
lar design is out of the scope of the bulletin. Examples include large nozzles, hillside noz-
zles, and lateral nozzles. In these cases and others, FEA is the best way to get accurate
results. The FEA interface in PVElite uses an encapsulated finite element program (Noz-
zlePro) available from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com). To run the FEA, the
user should purchase the NozzlePro program and install it in the Nozpro subfolder under
the PVElite folder. PVElite will automatically run it and present the results in the PVElite
screen.
The WRC 107/FEA Module 17-1

Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Enter the Attachment Number for this Analysis
The attachment number should start out at 1 and continue by ones for each successive
attachment to be analyzed. These whole integer numbers will be reflected in the input
echo generated by the program. This number can be between up to 5 digits in length.
Enter the Attachment Description for this Analysis
The Description ID can be any combination of numbers and letters up to 15 characters.

This label is for user reference and should be meaningful for the analysis. In addition, note
that the attachment description will be reflected in the output and also in the display of
errors (if any exist).
Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the "Shells and Heads" module. Just select the shell
you want to model this nozzle with, and all the appropriate data will be brought in from
that shell.
Import Nozzle Data

Imports nozzle information from a PVElite input file (.pvi).
Choose the analysis type between WRC 107 and FEA

To perform a Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on the nozzle-vessel junction, the user has to
purchase the NozPro program from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com) and install
it under the CodeCalc folder (or PVElite folder if the user has PVElite). Some additional
input will be required for the FEA run.
Select the Attachment Type

For a WRC 107 analysis possible options are:
• Typical Pipe Nozzle
• Square Attachment ( lug type )
• Rectangular Attachment ( lug type )
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select 'Round'. WRC107 also analyzes
other load bearing attachments such as square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular
attachment is a vessel support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in the
WRC107 bulletin.
At this point FEA can only be performed on round attachments.
Hollow or Solid Attachment ?

This input is only required for performing a WRC 107 analysis. One may note that round-
hollow attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder to cylinder
case. In addition, rectangular attachments on spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this
method. Also, round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels.
17-2 The WRC 107/FEA Module

Enter the Type of Vessel Being Analyzed

The Welding Research Council Bulletin #107 recognizes two types of vessels in which the
stress intensities can be calculated. These are cylindrical and spherical vessels.
• Cylindrical
• Spherical
If user selects to perform a finite element analysis then following vessel types are permit-
ted:
• Cylindrical
• Spherical
• Elliptical
• Torispherical
• Conical
• Flat Head
Enter the Diameter Basis for the Vessel
If the vessel on which you are analyzing has dimensions specified based on the inside
diameter, choose ID. If the diameter basis is outside, choose OD. These are the only
acceptable inputs for this cell.
Diameter of Vessel
Enter the diameter of the vessel in the units displayed. The diameter basis for the vessel is
a user defined value and appears above With the vessel wall thickness, diameter basis and
corrosion allowance known, PVElite will automatically determine the mean radius.
Enter the Vessel Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the vessel wall in this field. If, the vessel in question is pipe and a
12.5% mill tolerance is wished to be used then enter the actual thickness of the vessel wall
times 0.875. PVElite does not make any modification to this value unless a corrosion
allowance is specified.
Enter the Corrosion Allowance of the Vessel
If a corrosion allowance is to be used then enter it in this field. The vessel wall thickness
will be decreased by this amount and the mean radius will be adjusted accordingly.
Material Name
Click the "Material Database" button to look up a material name from the material data-
base. Click the "Material Edit Properties" button to change the properties of the selected
material. Users can also choose between the ASME Section VII Div 1 or Div 2 material
database.
If you enter the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C

Some typical material names (standard ASME material name):

• Plates & Bolting
• SA-516 55
• SA-516 60
• SA-516 65
• SA-516 70
• SA-193 B7
• SA-182-F1
• SA-182 F1
• SA-182 F11
• SA-182 F12
• SA-182 F22
• SA-105
• SA-36
• SA-106 B
• Stainless Steels
• SA-240 304
• SA-240 304L
• SA-240 316
• SA-240 316L
• SA-193 B8
• Aluminum
• SB-209
• SB-234
• Titanium
• SB-265 1
• Nickel
• SB-409
• SB-424

Input Vessel Fatigue Curve

Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME
Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are.
S. No Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS < 130 ksi
2 Low Alloy Steels to 700 deg. F
3 Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 deg. F
4 Austenitic Stainless Steel to 800 deg. F
5 Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel.
6 Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 deg. F
Input Loads in WRC107 Convention
Check this field if you would like to input the forces and moments in the traditional
WRC107 convention. Leave this field unchecked if you would like to input loads in Glo-
bal Coordinates and perform the stress summation. The program will NOT perform the
Div. 2 stress summation and S.I. check if this field is checked. This option is only avail-
able when running a WRC 107 calculation.
Input Loads in Global Coordinates and Allowable Stresses
Check this field if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and input cold/hot
Div. II allowable stresses. The program will perform Stress Summation and check against
S.I. allowables if Sustained (unrelenting) loadings are known. If you are performing FEA,
the program will ask for additional information.
Input Sustained (SUS) Loads
Check this field if you would like to input Sustained loads in Global Coordinates. The
Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on the
different load cases.
Input Expansion (EXP) Loadings/Input Operating (OPE) Loadings

The way this input is used depends on if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis or FEA
(finite element analysis).
For a WRC 107 run, check this field if you would like to input EXPansion loads in Global
Coordinates. In that case, total Stress summation will be performed and the overall stress
intensities will be checked for each load case.
For a FEA run, check this field if you would like to input OPErating loads in Global
Coordinates.
Note For graphics plot of EXPansion loads—temporarily set sustained and occasional
to not checked.

Input Occasional (OCC) Loadings
Check this field if you would like to input Occasional loads in Global Coordinates. For
WRC 107, the Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be
checked based on loading cases.
Note For graphics plot of Occasional loads—temporarily set sustained and expansion to
not checked.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Enter the Diameter Basis for the Nozzle
If the junction that is being analyzed is a nozzle, enter the diameter basis here. Select the
nozzle’s diameter basis from the pull-down menu.
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Enter the nozzle wall thickness. The WRC 107 program will use this thickness when the
hollow attachment is used. If the standard 12.5% mill tolerance is to be deducted, simply
multiply the standard wall thickness by 0.875 directly on the spreadsheet.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the nozzle diameter. Both the nozzle diameter and thickness must be specified. The
nozzle diameter should be entered in accordance with the nozzle diameter basis. The units
are displayed above.
Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle.
Material Name
This input is only needed for FEA. Press on the "Material Database" button to look up a
material name from the material database. Press the "Material Edit Properties" button to
change the properties of the selected material.
If you type in the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C
Some typical material names (standard ASME material name):
• Plates & Bolting
• SA-516 55
• SA-516 60
• SA-516 65
• SA-516 70
• SA-193 B7
• SA-182-F1
• SA-182 F1
• SA-182 F11
• SA-182 F12
• SA-182 F22
• SA-105
• SA-36

• SA-106 B
• Stainless Steels
• SA-240 304
• SA-240 304L
• SA-240 316
• SA-240 316L
• SA-193 B8
• Aluminum
• SB-209
• SB-234
• Titanium
• SB-265 1
• Nickel
• SB-409
• SB-424
Reinforcement
Select the type of reinforcement (if present) from the list. Selecting a reinforcement type
causes a popup window to appear for prompts concerning reinforcing pad or hub
dimensions.
In a finite element analysis attachments can have a reinforcement pad or hub type self-
reinforcement. Results are available for the some critical locations such as the nozzle-shell
junction and the edge of the pad.
While in WRC 107 analysis (due to the limitations of the bulletin) only reinforcement pad
can be considered. When the reinforcing pad dimensions are included the program per-
forms two analyses for this situation. The first analysis uses the nozzle OD and the vessel
wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness. The second run takes the pad into
account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a
solid attachment.
Parameter C11 (Full Length of Attachment)
Attachments other than nozzles can be analyzed using the WRC107 method. The dimen-
sion C11 is the FULL length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. Most often
these types of attachments are lifting lugs or vessel support lugs.
Parameter C22 (Full Length of Attachment)
The parameter C22 is the FULL length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.

Pad Diameter
Enter the diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. This information
will be used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using a solid attach-
ment model. Reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. If external corrosion is to be considered, enter
the corroded pad thickness. In WRC 107, when a pad is used the combined vessel+pad
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the nozzle. The corroded vessel
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the pad. Reinforcement pad is
explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Enter Pad Parameter C11 (full length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the circumferen-
tial direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the cir-
cumferential direction. The change was done for user convenience.
Enter Pad Parameter C22 (full length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the longitudinal
direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the longi-
tudinal direction. The change was done for user convenience.
Hub Thickness/Hub height/Bevel Height

Enter in the appropriate dimension based on the diagram below.

Insert or Abutting Nozzle?

If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel wall. If the
hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is
inserted.

Enter the projection of the nozzle from the vessel wall to the nozzle flange.

Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel, measured along the centerline of the noz-
zle.
Thickness of Nozzle Insert (if different)

Enter the thickness of the internally projected part of the nozzle, if it is different from the
nozzle thickness.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell / Pad
It is an optional field. Enter the fillet leg size.
Input Nozzle Fatigue Curve

Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME
Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are.
S. No Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS < 130 ksi
2 Low Alloy Steels to 700 deg. F
3 Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 deg. F
4 Austenitic Stainless Steel to 800 deg. F
5 Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel.
6 Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 deg. F
Design Length of Section

Enter the total length of the cylinder or a conical geometry.
Attached Shell Length

This is an optional entry. Enter the length of the shell attached to the head. Set this value
based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for any
discontinuity stress in this area.
Attached Shell Thickness

This is an optional entry. Enter the thickness of the shell attached to the head. Set this
value based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for
any discontinuity stress in this area.
If left blank this entry defaults to the thickness of the head.

Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads

The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a stan-
dard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Length of Straight Flange

Enter the length of straight flange portion for Conical or Torispherical heads.
Inside Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads

The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as the dimension L, per ASME
Section VIII Div. 1.
This dimension is usually referred to as "DR" in many head catalogues. Even though the
head catalogues list these heads as being "OD" heads, the crown radius is given on the
inside diameter basis. Note the illustrated picture in the catalogue and where the arrows
for "DR" and "IKR" point to ( the inside of the head).
For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the Code
Inside Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads

This dimension is r, per ASME Section VIII Div. 1.
This dimension is usually referred to as "IKR" in many head catalogues. Even though the
head catalogues list these heads as being "OD" heads, the knuckle radius is given on the
inside diameter basis. Note the illustrated picture in the catalogue and where the arrows
for "DR" and "IKR" point to ( the inside of the head).
For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the Code
Small End Diameter

Enter the small end diameter for the cone.
Is there a knuckle ?
Check here if this cone has a knuckle.
Knuckle Radius at Small End

Enter the Knuckle radius of the small end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the
large end to the small end. So, the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the small
end of the cone is the top end.
Knuckle Radius at Large End

Enter the Knuckle radius of the large end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the
large end to the small end. So, the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the small
end of the cone is the top end.
Design Pressure (for input with WRC107 convention)
Enter the design pressure of the vessel in this field using the units above. The pressure
stress equation is of the following form:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri^2 / ( ro^2 - ri^2 )
Hoop Stress = 2.0 * Longitudinal Stress.

For the spherical case the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lame type
equation to compute the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the
edge of the attachment.
Radial Load
Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel.
Positive loads try to “push” the nozzle while negative loads try to “pull” the nozzle. The
program does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. However, if you input in global
coordinates (stress summation), the program will consider pressure thrust as default unless
you specify NOT to.
Circumferential Shear Load
Enter the circumferential shear load VC from B to A in the units above. If the vessel is
spherical then enter the shear load V2 from D to C. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Shear Load
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL from D to C in the units above. If the vessel is spher-
ical then enter the shear load V1 from B to A. The sign convention should be in accor-
dance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Circumferential Moment
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. The sign con-
vention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Moment
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. The sign conven-
tion should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Torsional Moment
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Compute Maximum Radial Force
Compute Maximum Circumferential Moment
Compute Maximum Longitudinal Moment
Often times a vessel designer would like to determine the maximum force or moment on
an attachment while keeping the other 5 constant. By checking to one of these fields
PVElite will iterate and determine the maximum force or moment to produce a desired
stress intensity. If your geometry includes a reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform the
same type analysis at the edge of the reinforcing pad. The above loads produce the highest

local bending loads and will usually govern the design. This is why the shear loads and
torsional moment are not options.
Compare Maximum Stress Intensity to
This entry should be a stress value approximately 3 times the hot allowable stress for the
vessel material as taken from Section II Part D of the ASME Code. PVElite will use this
number to compare computed stress intensities if one of the “Compute Maximum” fields
was checked. Note that in the results PVElite performs the analysis using the input values.
After that has been completed, PVElite will then iterate for the maximum force or
moment as it has been instructed to.
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines

Enter the vessel/nozzle centerline direction cosine. The direction of nozzle is positive
when pointing inwards into the vessel.
For finite element analysis these direction cosines are used to determine the angle between
the nozzle and the vessel. Also note that the direction for a conical vessel is from the big
end to small end.
For WRC 107 analysis, the centerlines of the vessel and nozzle are required to be perpen-
dicular to each other. The direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle centerline must
NOT be collinear. If they are, as in the case of a nozzle in head, the vessel direction vector
shall be changed so that it is perpendicular to the nozzle centerline. A typical input for a
nozzle on the side of a vertical vessel would be:
• Vessel Direction Vector (0.0, -1.0, 0.0)
• Nozzle Direction Vector (1.0, 0.0, 0.0)
The program uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments
from the CAESAR II static run (from each load case) into the somewhat confusing
WRC107 sign/load convention.
Note The sign of the vessel centerline direction vector can be +ve or -ve follows
the location of data point (A->D) convention defined by WRC 107, e.g. for
a vertical vessel, if point A is at the bottom of the nozzle, then the Y direc-
tion cosine of the vessel will be -1.0. Remember points A and B are always
lie along the direction of the vessel. The nozzle direction vector is defined
as a vector pointing from the nozzle connection to the centerline of the ves-
sel.Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc)
Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc)

Enter the cold stress intensity allowable (Smc) of the vessel as defined per ASME Section
VIII, Division 2. They can be located in Table 2A of Section II, Part D of ASME Code.
These values are used only for WRC 107 analysis.

Hot Stress Intensity Allowable (Smh)

Enter the hot stress intensity allowable (Smh) of the vessel as defined per ASME Section
VIII, Division 2. They can be located in Table 2A of Section II, Part D of ASME Code.
These values are used only for WRC 107 analysis.
Override Angle Between Nozzle and Vessel ?

The program computes the angle between the vessel and the nozzle by taking the dot prod-
uct between their direction cosines. Click here to override that computed value of angle.
This value is used only for FEA.
Nozzle Orientation Reference Vector

The nozzle orientation reference vector defines the reference axis from where the orienta-
tion of the nozzle can be measured by the nozzle orientation angle. For example, if nozzle
orientation reference axis is along x-axis and nozzle orientation angle is zero then the noz-
zle is located along the x-axis as seen in figure below.
Nozzle Orientation Angle from the Reference Vector

This is the angle that describes the nozzle position around the circumference of the vessel
from the orientation reference vector. The reference orientation vector should be entered
above on this dialog.
For example, if nozzle orientation reference axis is along x-axis and nozzle orientation
angle is zero then the nozzle is located along the x-axis as seen in the previous figure.

Nozzle Offset from the Vessel Centerline

Enter the offset distance from Shell/Head Centerline to the Nozzle Centerline.
Nozzle Distance from Top End of the Vessel

Enter the distance from the positive end of the vessel to the point where the nozzle or
branch centerline intersects the vessel centerline.
Global Forces/Moments (SUS, EXP, OCC)

Enter the value of nozzle forces or Moments from the restraint summary of the CAESAR
II output and/or other calculations. Three loading sets may be included in these calcula-
tions. For WRC 107, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen,
where
SUS Primary Loads (typically Weight+Pressure+Forces)
EXP Secondary Loads (Thermal Expansion)
OCC Occasional Loads (typically Wind, Seismic)
For FEA, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen, where
SUS Primary Loads (typically Weight+Pressure+Forces)
OPE Operating Loads (typically Weight+Disp+Temp+Pressure+Forces)
OCC Occasional Loads (typically Wind, Seismic)
Internal Pressure (P)
Enter the system design pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The pressure
thrust force P*A will be added to the value of the nozzle radial load UNLESS the user
deactivates and disables the following field. This value is used only if the user is perform-
ing WRC 107 analysis.
Include Pressure Thrust Force
Check this box if you wish to include the pressure thrust force as part of the radial load.
This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Internal Pressure (Pvar)
Enter the DIFFERENCE between the peak pressure of the system and the system design
pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The additional thrust load due to this
pressure difference will also be accounted for in the nozzle radial loading UNLESS a
response of N to “Include Pressure Thrust” was entered above.
This entry will be superimposed onto the system design pressure to evaluate the primary
membrane stress due to occasional loads. This value is used only if the user is performing
WRC 107 analysis.

Additional Input for VRC107
WRC107 Version
There are 3 options available here. The first option is for the original August 1965 version
of this industry standard. The second option is for March 1979 and option 3 is for March
1979 use B1 and B2. In 1979 the Welding Research Council noted that if certain curves
were flipped, the computed stress results matched theoretical results more closely. In that
same year an adjustment was made to allow this stress computation method to compute a
maximum stress that did not lie on the stress points A, B, C or D. This is referred to as
computation of the off-angle maximums. Thus, we can infer the third option is probably
the most accurate.
Use Interactive Control
In many instances, the geometric parameter Beta which is computed for cylindrical shell
geometry’s, exceeds the parameter Gamma for certain WRC107 curves. When this occurs
PVElite will pause and display a message “Beta too Big” or “Beta too Small”. If the
response to Use Interactive Control is “No” then PVElite will use the last point on the
curve that is available. If the response to Interactive Control is “Yes” PVElite will pause
and ask you to enter what you believe the value of the stress parameter should be. This
will involve having the WRC107 bulletin with all of the curves available.
Include WRC107 SIF (Kn,Kb)
Check this field to include the WRC107 Stress Concentrations (Kn & Kb). The program
will estimate and use the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the
WRC-107 Bulletin.
For normal analysis, do not check this field. And DO NOT include the next field “Pressure
Stress Indices Per Div. 2”.
Be very careful when using Y for this input and the next input. You may check ASME
VIII Div.2 AD-160 to see if you need to consider fatigue effect. Please note that the pro-
gram currently DOES NOT perform the fatigue analysis per Div.2 Appendix 4 & 5 rules.
The program simply multiply the stresses by the factors and/or indices. The user can com-
pare the fatigue effect. Therefore the stress summation results with these factors are
intended for your references ONLY. Please review the User’s Guide for detail.
Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r)
Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The program will use this
value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the WRC-
107 Bulletin.
Entering 0 here will set Kn and KB = 1.0.
If you have a re-pad, the same Kn and Kb will be used for the vessel and pad intersection.

Include Pressure Stress Indices
Check this field to include the stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2, prima-
rily to account for the fatigue analysis of the vessel nozzle under internal pressure. The
stress indices can be found in the Table AD-560.7 of the Code.
Compute WRC -386 Pressure Stress per WRC
Check this box to compute pressure, stresses in the shell and nozzle per WRC-386. WRC-
386 provides a method for calculating the stresses in cylinder to cylinder intersections
(such as cylinder to nozzle junction), due to the internal pressure and radial thrust load-
ings.
Note Using WRC -368 along with WRC 107/297 is not accurate when calculating the
combined stress from pressure and external loads. So, WRC-368 is only active
when no external loads are specified and the attachment type is round.
For more information on WRC-368 pressure thrust please read "Modeling of Internal
Pressure and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368. You can access this information
in the July 2001 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pgs. 9-13) or via
our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jul01.pdf.
Additional Input for FEA
Specify File Name for FEA

Enter the file name that will form the prefix for FEA analysis files. Filename can up to 7
character log without quotes and spaces. For example, noz and b012.
Specify FEA Mesh Density

Select the type of mesh: Fine or Crude. When the user selects a fine mesh they will be
prompted to specify the mesh density multiplier. A higher mesh density value produces a
finer finite element mesh. Which produces more accurate results but takes more time to
solve. Typical values are between 1-2.
Crude mesh option along with the "Preview the Finite Element Mesh" option can be used
to check the initial mesh.
Specify S.C.F. for Vessel

This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the
peak stresses. They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typ-
ical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.
Specify S.C.F. for Nozzle

This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the
peak stresses. They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typ-
ical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.

Number of Operating Cycles

Optional. Used only to select the allowable fatigue stress from S-N curves. It defaults to
7000 cycles if not specified or if 0.
Number of Occasional Cycles

Optional. If zero then the occasional load is treated like a static load. If nonzero then it
will be assumed that occasional load input is the "range" of occasional loads, and a fatigue
analysis of occasional loads will be performed.
FEA Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure for the vessel and the nozzle. When performing a finite element
analysis, internal pressure is positive and external pressure is -ve.
While, WRC 107 can only analyze internal pressure.
FEA Design Temperature

Enter the operating temperature for the vessel. This value is used to compute the hot
allowable stress for the vessel and the nozzle.
Do Not Cut Hole in Header for Branch?

Check this box if there is no opening in the vessel due to the nozzle. For example, in case
of a support trunnion there will not be an opening whereas an injector pipe will have one.
Consider Thermal Strains?

Check this box if Nozzle and Vessel are at different temperatures or there is a through the
wall temperature gradient. Most analysis of single nozzles in pressure vessels "do not"
require the analysis of thermal strains.
Vessel Inside Temperature, Vessel Outside Temperature, Nozzle Inside Tempera-

ture and Nozzle Outside Temperature
Enter the inside and outside surface temperatures for the nozzle and the vessel, used for
computing the thermal expansion.
Run Analysis in Silent Mode?

Check this box to run in silent mode.
In silent mode, when the program is running, the status windows from Nozzle Pro pro-
gram will not be visible. In some cases these windows provide additional information
about possible errors.
Preview the finite element mesh?

Check this box to preview the finite element mesh for this problem. Then on running the
analysis the finite element mesh will be shown.

WRC107 Stress Calculations
The program computes stress intensities in accordance with WRC107 and includes the
effects of longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes
a circular reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform two analyses on the geometry. The first
analysis will compute the stresses at the edge of the nozzle. The second stress analysis will
be at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
PVElite uses the Lamé equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower
surface of the cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as
well as the longitudinal stress equation are as follows:
2
Pri
S Long 2 2
r0 ri
S Hoop (Upper) = 2 S
Long
S Hoop (Lower)
2
P ri r0
2

2 2
r0 ri
For spherical shells the program uses the following equation:
P § r0 2ri ·
3 3
S Long ¨¨ 3 3 ¸¸
2 © r0 ri ¹
S Hoop S Long
For each run performed a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading will be dis-
played for review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the
curve figure for that loading has been exceeded.
Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at the Edge of the Nozzle?
Since the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses computed at the edge of
the pad may be same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type
of stress has been exceeded.
What are the Allowable Stresses ?
The stress intensities computed should typically be between 1.5 and 3.0 times the hot
allowable stress for the vessel material at operating temperature. If the results are less than
1.5 Sa then the configuration and loading are acceptable. If the load is self-relieving, that
is if it would relax or disappear after only a small rotation or translation of the attachment,
the allowable stress intensity would increase to 3.0 Sa.
Since many geometry do not fall within the acceptable range of what WRC107 will
accept, it may be necessary to use a more sophisticated tool to solve the problems where

the diameter of the vessel is very large in comparison with the nozzle or where the thick-
ness of the vessel or nozzle is small. An example of a more sophisticated tool would be a
FEA (finite element analysis) program.
M TAXIS M
T
V (or V ) V L
1 C
B Upper
A VC A B
V (or V ) L C C Lower
2
M LAXIS M CAXIS
M 1AXIS P AXIS
(or M ) C
P AXIS
M 2AXIS M CAXIS
(or M ) L D
D M AXIS
1 A
B
A B
C
M L AXIS
M2 AXIS
C
SPHERICAL SHELLS CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
To Define WRC Axes: To Define WRC Axes:

1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and posi- 1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and posi-
tive entering the vessel. tive entering the vessel.
2. M1-axis: Perpendicular to the nozzle center- 2. MC-axis: Along the vessel centerline and posi-
line along convenient global axis. tive to correspond with any parallel global axis.
3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis into the M1 axis and 3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with the MC axis and
the result is the M2-axis. the result is the ML-axis.
To Define WRC Stress Points: To Define WRC Stress Points:

u—upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at u—upper, means stress on outside of vessel wall at
junction. junction.
l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junc- l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junc-
tion. tion.
A—Position on vessel at junction, along negative A—Position on vessel at junction, along negative
M1 axis. MC axis.
B—Position on vessel at junction, along positive B—Position on vessel at junction, along positive
M2 axis. MC axis.
C—Position on vessel at junction, along positive C—Position on vessel at junction, along positive
M2 axis. ML axis.
D—Position on vessel at junction, along negative D—Position on vessel at junction, along negative
M2 axis. ML axis.
Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same

direction as the bending axis "ML." Shear
axis "VL" is parallel, and in the opposite
direction as the bending axis "MC."
Figure 17A - Geometry for the WRC 107 Module

Figure 17B - Clarifying WRC 107 convention for a cylinder

WRC107 Stress Summations PVElite - User Guide
WRC107 Stress Summations

The ASME Section VIII, Division 2 code provides for a fairly elaborate procedure to ana-
lyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles (Appendix 4-1 “Mandatory Design Based On
Stress Analysis”). Only the elastic analysis approach will be discussed here. The user
should always refer to the applicable code if any of the limits described in this section are
approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists, or there are non-lin-
ear concerns such as the material’s operation in the creep range.
The first step in the procedure is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. Sec-
tion AD-160 contains the exact method and basically states that if all of the following con-
ditions are met, then fatigue analysis need not be done:
a. The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the
number of allowed cycles corresponding to an Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-inte-
gral attachments) on the material fatigue curve. The Sm is the allowable stress
intensity for the material at the operating temperature.
b. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must
be less than 1/3 (1/4 for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/
Sm), where Sa is the value obtained on the material fatigue curve for the specified
number of significant pressure fluctuations.
c. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
d. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads (including piping reac-
tions) does not exceed Sa from the fatigue curve for the expected number of load
fluctuations.
Once the user has decided that an elastic analysis will be satisfactory, either a simplified or
a comprehensive approach may be taken to the vessel stress evaluation. Both methods will
be described in detail below, after a discussion of the Section VIII Div. 2 Requirements.

PVElite - User Guide ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle

Ideally in order to address the local allowable stress problem, the user should have the
endurance curve for the material of construction and complete design pressure / tempera-
ture loading information. If any of the elastic limits are approached, or if there is anything
out of the ordinary about the nozzle/vessel connection design, the code should be carefully
consulted before performing the local stress analysis. The material Sm table and the
endurance curve for carbon steels are given in this section for illustration. Only values
taken directly from the code should be used in design.
There are essentially three criteria that must be satisfied before the stresses in the vessel
wall due to nozzle loads can be considered within the allowables. These three criteria can
be summarized as:
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary mem-
brane stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane
plus bending), respectively; and K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot
material allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) /
2.
Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of noz-
zles, as given in the Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load
moments or internal pressure in the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be
classified as Q, or the secondary stresses, regardless of whether they were caused by sus-
tained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and leads to a much more detailed
classification:
P - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure);

m
P - Local primary membrane stress, which may include:

l
Membrane stress due to internal pressure;

Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments.
Q - Secondary stresses, which may include:
Bending stress due to internal pressure;

Bending stress due to applied sustained forces and moments;
Membrane stress due to applied expansion forces;
Bending stress due to applied expansion forces and moments
Membrane stress due to applied expansion moments

ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle PVElite - User Guide
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contain three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these
stresses, the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pmand Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute
the resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated
using a k value of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section
VIII, Division 2 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is
not applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section
VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same analogy, the peak stress limit may also be
written as:
Pl + P b + Q + F < S a
The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is
met based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
“If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis
for cyclic operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed
in 4-135 has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials,
design, fabrication, testing and inspection of this division.”

PVElite - User Guide ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle

ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle PVElite - User Guide
The equations used in PVElite to qualify the various stress components can be summa-
rized as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)
If some of the conditions of in ASME VIII Div.2, AD-160 are not satisfied, you probably
need to perform the formal fatigue analysis. Peak stresses are required to be calculated or
estimated. You may consider using AD-560 “Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design”
instead of Article 4-6 “Stresses in Openings for Fatigue Evaluation” to calculate the peak
pressure stress for the opening. If all conditions of AD-560.1 through AD-560.6 are satis-
fied, the stress indices given in Table AD-560.7 may be used. If user says “Yes”, the pro-
gram will use these pressure stress indices to modify the primary stress due to internal
pressure (hoop and longitudinal stresses). For external loads, the highest peak stress are
usually localized in fillets and transitions. If the user decides to use WRC107 stress con-
centration factors (Kn, Kb), the fillet radius between the Vessel and Nozzle is required. (If
a reinforcing pad is used, the program assumes the same pad fillet radius.) The program
will make a crude approximation and use WRC107 Appendix-B equations (3) and (4) to
estimate Kn and Kb. The tension and bending stresses are thus modified using Kn and Kb
respectively. The program outputs the local stresses for 4 pairs of points (upper and lower)
at the intersection. The user should not direct the program to perform the stress summa-
tions. Instead the user should determine which stresses should be added based on locations
in order to obtain the peak stress level, then use Appendix-4 & 5 rules and fatigue curves
depending on operation cycles. Based on comparisons with finite element analysis, it is
known that the top tip of the fillet weld on the nozzle usually experiences the highest peak
stress due to external loads. So it is conservative to add all the peak stresses after including
both pressure stress indices and concentration factors. Note that the stress summation may
ONLY be used to check stress intensities, not stress levels. You need the peak stress level
to perform fatigue analysis. The current stress summation routine does not compare stress
level with fatigue allowables per Appendix-5. However, you may find the stress summa-
tion results useful to compare the combined effect due to the stress concentration factor
and pressure stress indices.

PVElite - User Guide Finite Element Analysis (FEA):
Finite Element Analysis (FEA):

Using the interface within PVElite and Paulin Research Group’s NozzlePro program, users
can perform FEA and WRC 107 within the same module. FEA can model more types of
vessel and nozzle geometries.
The FEA program generates graphical results showing various ASME stress states. We
will briefly describe the important results:
1. ASME overstressed areas are reported. A sample printout is shown here,
ASME Overstressed Areas

Pad Edge Weld for Nozzle 1
Pl 1.5(k)Smh Primary Membrane Load Case 2
20,116 18,000 Plot Reference:
psi psi 1) Pl < 1.5(k)Smh (SUS,Membrane) Case 2
111%
2. Next report is the Highest Primary Stress Report that outlines the stresses at critical
location like the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad.
3. Highest Secondary and fatigue Stress Reports are provided.
4. Next, the program lists Nozzle Stress Intensification factors for use in a beam type
pipe stress analysis program such as CAESAR II.
5. The NozzlePro program computes the maximum individual allowable loads and
simultaneously acting allowable loads. Both Primary and Secondary loads are
reported. A typical report is listed here,
Allowable Loads
SECONDARY Maximum Conservative Realistic
Load Type (Range): Individual Simultaneous Simultaneous
Occurring Occurring Occurring
Axial Force (lb. ) 398030. 120631. 180946.
Inplane Moment (in. lb.) 5306513. 1137199. 2412363.
Outplane Moment (in. lb.) 3358105. 719650. 1526608.
Torsional Moment (in. lb.) 2343568. 710264. 1065396.
Pressure (psi ) 344. 111. 111.
PRIMARY Maximum Conservative Realistic

Load Type: Individual Simultaneous Simultaneous
Occurring Occurring Occurring
Axial Force (lb. ) 618455. 178300. 267450.
Inplane Moment (in. lb.) 5998639. 1222872. 2594104.
Outplane Moment (in. lb.) 5458219. 1182725. 2508939.
Torsional Moment (in. lb.) 2938301. 847110. 1270665.
Pressure (psi ) 422. 111. 111.
The conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to-
70% of the allowable. The Realistic Allowable Simultaneous loads are the maximum
loads that can be applied simultaneously, they produce stresses that are closer to 100% of
the allowable. The Maximum Individual Occurring Primary Pressure can be taken as a
finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle.

Finite Element Analysis (FEA): PVElite - User Guide
6. Nozzle-Shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities can be used to
accurately model the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress
program that is used to model the piping system attaching to the nozzle.
Thus, users will have a choice of performing either an WRC 107 or a finite element analy-
sis from within the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element
program users should visually check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the
FEA results make sense for stress analysis perspective.
Technical queries regarding FEA results should be addressed to Paulin Research Group
(www.paulin.com).

PVElite - User Guide Examples
Examples
The example problem listed below is a comparison problem in our QA series. It can be
found in the file CHECKS.
COADE Engineering Software

WRC 107 Examples including WRC107 Summations
FileName : WRC107 ----------------------------------- Page 1
WRC107 Analysis : OLD FILE ITEM: 1, 03:10pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, WRC107 Number 1, Description: OLD FILE
Diameter Basis for Vessel VBASIS OD

Cylindrical or Spherical Vessel CYLSPH Cylindrical
Corrosion Allowance for Vessel CAS .0000 in.
Vessel Diameter DV 120.000 in.
Vessel Thickness TV .625 in.
Attachment Type TYPE Round

WRC107 Attachment Classification HOLSOL Solid
Diameter Basis for Nozzle NBASIS OD

Nozzle Diameter DN 12.750 in.
Nozzle Thickness TN .375 in.
Design Internal Pressure DP 275.00 psig

Radial Load P -31128.00 lb.
Circumferential Shear VC 32.00 lb.
Longitudinal Shear VL 1389.00 lb.
Circumferential Moment MC 127.00 ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment ML 4235.00 ft.lb.
Torsional Moment MT 65.00 ft.lb.
Use Interactive Control INTACT No

WRC107 Version VERSION March 1979 ( B1 & B2 )
Include WRC107 SIF(Kn,Kb)—concentration factors No

Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2 No
Dimensionless Parameters used : Gamma = 95.50

Dimensionless Loads for Cylindrical Shells
-------------------------------------------------------
Curves read for Beta Figure Value
------------------------------------------------------
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 2C1 .059
N(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3A 3.449
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1A .085
N(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3B 10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1B .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082

Examples PVElite - User Guide
M(x) / ( P ) .093 1C1 .097

N(x) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4A 5.631
M(x) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2A .045
N(x) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4B 3.511
M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2B .051
STRESS POINTS C & D (MARCH 1979)

N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 1C .094
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 1B1 .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994

M(x) / ( P ) .093 2C .060
M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 2B1 .052
Stress Concentration Factors Kn = 1.00, Kb = 1.00
Stresses in the Vessel at the Nozzle Junction

---------------------------------------------------------------------
| Stress Values at
Type of | (psi )
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Stress Load| Au Al Bu Bl Cu Cl Du Dl
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Circ. Memb. DP | 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263
Circ. Memb. P | 12511 12511 12511 12511 10081 10081 10081 10081
Circ. Bend. P | 28242 -28242 28242 -28242 44865 -44865 44865 -44865
Circ. Memb. MC | 0 0 0 0 -25 -25 25 25
Circ. Bend. MC | 0 0 0 0 -358 358 358 -358
Circ. Memb. ML | -2635 -2635 2635 2635 0 0 0 0
Circ. Bend. ML | -4938 4938 4938 -4938 0 0 0 0
|
Tot. Circ. Str.| 59168 12835 74314 8229 80551 -8188 81317 -8854
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Memb. DP | 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994
Long. Memb. P | 10081 10081 10081 10081 12511 12511 12511 12511
Long. Bend. P | 46473 -46473 46473 -46473 28748 -28748 28748 -28748
Long. Memb. MC | 0 0 0 0 -41 -41 41 41
Long. Bend. MC | 0 0 0 0 -190 190 190 -190
Long. Memb. ML | -857 -857 857 857 0 0 0 0
Long. Bend. ML | -7325 7325 7325 -7325 0 0 0 0
|
Tot. Long. Str.| 61366 -16930 77730 -29866 54022 -3094 54484 -3392
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear VC | 2 2 -2 -2 0 0 0 0
Shear VL | 0 0 0 0 -110 -110 110 110
Shear MT | 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Tot. Shear| 6 6 2 2 -106 -106 114 114
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Str. Int. | 61366 29765 77730 38095 80551 8190 81317 8856
---------------------------------------------------------------------

The following example problem goes through a comprehensive local stress analysis of a
vessel/nozzle using WRC107 and ASME Section VIII, Division 2 criteria.
WRC 107 Example Problem
After confirming that the geometry guidelines per WRC 107 are met, the actual prepara-
tion of the WRC 107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in
the WRC 107 procedure is to identify the correlation between the stress output global
coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. The PVElite program performs this conversion
automatically. The user will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the vessel as
well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure is provided to illustrate the definition of
the direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle.

Converting Forces/Moments in CAESAR II Global Coordinates to WRC 107

Local Axes
Notice that in order to define a vessel direction vector, the user first needs to designate the
output data points (A->D) as defined by the WRC 107 Bulletin. Note that the line between
data points B and A defines the vessel centerline (except for nozzles on heads, where the
vessel centerline will have to be defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of
the nozzle). Since, in the vessel/nozzle configuration shown, point A is assigned to the
bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the
nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is always defined as
the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel.
For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be
obtained from typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect
the action of the piping on the vessel. The following is the example loads:

Summary of Restraint Loads on the Vessel
MX MY MZ
Load X (lb) Y (lb) Z (lb)
(ft.lb) (ft.lb) (ft.lb)
Sustained -26 -1389 32 -65 127 4235
Expansion 8573 23715 -5866 31659 -5414 -52583
WRC 107 Local Components
Force Force Force Moment Moment Moment

Load
P(+X) VL(-Y) VC(+Z) T(-X) MC(+Y) ML(+Z)
Sustained -26 1389 32 65 127 4235
Expansion 8573 -23715 -5866 -31659 -5414 -52583
Restraint Report from CAESAR II
The total sustained axial load on the nozzle may not be reflected in the restraint report. A
pressure thrust load will contribute an additional axial load to the nozzle. The pressure
thrust force always tends to push the nozzle away from the vessel. For example, with a
pressure of 275 psi over the inside area of the 12 inch pipe, the total P load becomes:
P = -26 - P*A
= -26 - 275p (122) / 4
= -31,128
The P load may be adjusted automatically for the input by PVElite’s WRC 107 module, if
the user so requests.
FileName : WRC107 --------------------------------------- Page 1
WRC107 Analysis : CII COMPARISON ITEM: 2, 03:10pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, WRC107 Number 2, Description: CII COMPARISON
Diameter Basis for Vessel VBASIS OD

Cylindrical or Spherical Vessel CYLSPH Cylindrical
Corrosion Allowance for Vessel CAS .0000 in.
Vessel Diameter DV 120.000 in.
Vessel Thickness TV .625 in.
Attachment Type TYPE Round

WRC107 Attachment Classification HOLSOL Solid
Diameter Basis for Nozzle NBASIS OD

Nozzle Diameter DN 12.750 in.
Nozzle Thickness TN .375 in.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX .000

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY -1.000

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ .000

Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosine NX 1.000
Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosine NY .000
Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosine NZ .000
Cold S.I. Allowable Smc 20000.00 psi

Hot S.I. Allowable Smh 20000.00 psi
Global Force (SUS) Fx -26.00 lb.

Global Force (SUS) Fy -1389.00 lb.
Global Force (SUS) Fz 32.00 lb.
Global Moment (SUS) Mx -65.00 ft.lb.
Global Moment (SUS) My 127.00 ft.lb.
Global Moment (SUS) Mz 4235.00 ft.lb.
Internal Pressure (SUS) P 275.00 psig
Include Pressure Thrust Yes
Global Force (EXP) Fx 8573.00 lb.

Global Force (EXP) Fy 23715.00 lb.
Global Force (EXP) Fz -5866.00 lb.
Global Moment (EXP) Mx 31659.00 ft.lb.
Global Moment (EXP) My -5414.00 ft.lb.
Global Moment (EXP) Mz -52583.00 ft.lb.
Use Interactive Control INTACT No

WRC107 Version VERSION March 1979 ( B1 & B2 )
Include WRC107 SIF(Kn,Kb)—concentration factors No

Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2 No
WRC 107 Stress Calculation for SUStained loads:

Radial Load P -31127.77 lb.
Circumferential Shear VC 32.00 lb.
Longitudinal Shear VL 1389.00 lb.
Circumferential Moment MC 127.00 ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment ML 4235.00 ft.lb.
Torsional Moment MT 65.00 ft.lb.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 2C1 .059
N(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3A 3.449
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1A .085
N(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3B 10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1B .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082

M(x) / ( P ) .093 1C1 .097
N(x) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4A 5.631
M(x) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2A .045

N(x) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4B 3.511

M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2B .051

N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 1C .094
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 1B1 .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994

M(x) / ( P ) .093 2C .060
M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 2B1 .052

-------------------------------------------------------------------
| Stress Values at
Type of | (psi )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Circ. Memb. P 12510 12510 12510 12510 10081 10081 10081 10081
Circ. Bend. P 28242 -28242 28242 -28242 44865 -44865 44865 -44865
Circ. Memb. MC 0 0 0 0 -25 -25 25 25
Circ. Bend. MC 0 0 0 0 -358 358 358 -358
Circ. Memb. ML -2635 -2635 2635 2635 0 0 0 0
Circ. Bend. ML -4938 4938 4938 -4938 0 0 0 0
Tot. Circ. Str. 33179 -13429 48325 -18035 54563 -34451 55329 -35117
------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Memb. P 10081 10081 10081 10081 12510 12510 12510 12510
Long. Bend. P 46473 -46473 46473 -46473 28748 -28748 28748 -28748
Long. Memb. MC 0 0 0 0 -41 -41 41 41
Long. Bend. MC 0 0 0 0 -190 190 190 -190
Long. Memb. ML -857 -857 857 857 0 0 0 0
Long. Bend. ML -7325 7325 7325 -7325 0 0 0 0
Tot. Long. Str. 48372 -29924 64736 -42860 41027 -16089 41489 -16387
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear VC | 2 2 -2 -2 0 0 0 0
Shear VL | 0 0 0 0 -110 -110 110 110
Shear MT | 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
|
Tot. Shear| 6 6 2 2 -106 -106 114 114
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Str. Int. | 48372 29924 64736 42860 54563 34451 55329 35117
---------------------------------------------------------------------
WRC 107 Stress Calculation for EXPansion loads:

Radial Load P 8573.00 lb.
Circumferential Shear VC -5866.00 lb.
Longitudinal Shear VL -23715.00 lb.
Circumferential Moment MC -5414.00 ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment ML -52583.00 ft.lb.

Torsional Moment MT -31659.00 ft.lb.

-------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 2C1 .059
N(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3A 3.449
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1A .085
N(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 3B 10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 1B .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082

M(x) / ( P ) .093 1C1 .097
N(x) / ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4A 5.631
M(x) / ( MC/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2A .045
N(x) / ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) ) .093 4B 3.511
M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * Beta) ) .093 2B .051

N(PHI) / ( P/Rm ) .093 3C 12.082
M(PHI) / ( P ) .093 1C .094
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 1B1 .035
N(x) / ( P/Rm ) .093 4C 14.994

M(x) / ( P ) .093 2C .060
M(x) / ( ML/(Rm * BETA) ) .093 2B1 .052

--------------------------------------------------------------------
| Stress Values at
Type of | (psi )
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Circ. Memb. P -3445 -3445 -3445 -3445 -2776 -2776 -2776 -2776
Circ. Bend. P -7778 7778 -7778 7778 -12356 12356 -12356 12356
Circ. Memb. MC 0 0 0 0 1076 1076 -1076 -1076
Circ. Bend. MC 0 0 0 0 15281 -15281 -15281 15281
Circ. Memb. ML 32727 32727 -32727 -32727 0 0 0 0
Circ. Bend. ML 61315 -61315 -61315 61315 0 0 0 0
Tot. Circ. Str.| 82819 -24255-105265 32921 1225 -4625 -31489 23785
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Memb. P | -2776 -2776 -2776 -2776 -3445 -3445 -3445 -3445
Long. Bend. P | -12799 12799 -12799 12799 -7917 7917 -7917 7917
Long. Memb. MC | 0 0 0 0 1758 1758 -1758 -1758
Long. Bend. MC | 0 0 0 0 8120 -8120 -8120 8120
Long. Memb. ML | 10647 10647 -10647 -10647 0 0 0 0
Long. Bend. ML | 90951 -90951 -90951 90951 0 0 0 0

|
Tot. Long. Str.| 86023 -70281-117173 90327 -1484 -1890 -21240 10834
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear VC | -468 -468 468 468 0 0 0 0
Shear VL | 0 0 0 0 1894 1894 -1894 -1894
Shear MT | -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380
|
Tot. Shear| -2848 -2848 -1912 -1912 -486 -486 -4274 -4274
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Str. Int. | 87688 70456 117472 90390 2878 4708 33037 25068
--------------------------------------------------------------------
WRC 107 Stress Summations:

Vessel Stress Summation @ Nozzle Junction
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of | Stress Values at
Stress Int. | (psi)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Location Au Al Bu Bl Cu Cl Du Dl
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Circ. Pm (SUS) 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263
Circ. Pl (SUS) 9875 9875 15145 15145 10056 10056 10106 10106
Circ. Q (SUS) 23304 -23304 33180 -33180 44507 -44507 45223 -45223
Circ. Q (EXP) 82819 -24255-105265 32921 1225 -4625 -31489 23785
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Pm (SUS) 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994 12994
Long. Pl (SUS) 9224 9224 10938 10938 12469 12469 12551 12551
Long. Q (SUS) 39148 -39148 53798 -53798 28558 -28558 28938 -28938
Long. Q (EXP) 86023 -70281-117173 90327 -1484 -1890 -21240 10834
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear Pm (SUS) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Shear Pl (SUS) 2 2 -2 -2 -110 -110 110 110
Shear Q (SUS) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Shear Q (EXP) -2848 -2848 -1912 -1912 -486 -486 -4274 -4274
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm (SUS) 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263 25988 26263
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm+Pl (SUS) 35863 36138 41133 41408 36045 36320 36095 36370
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm+Pl+Q (Total) 148608 87317 39852 60648 81787 12857 50812 16783
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of | Max. S.I. S.I. Allowable | Result
Stress Int. | (psi ) |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm (SUS) | 26263 20000 | Failed
Pm+Pl (SUS) | 41408 30000 | Failed
Pm+Pl+Q (TOTAL)| 148608 60000 | Failed
--------------------------------------------------------------------


&KDSWHU
The Leg & Lug Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Leg & Lug module of the PVElite program. To use the Leg &
Lug module the current analysis type should be Leg & Lug. The current analysis type
appears on the main menu of PVElite. The basic capabilities of the Leg & Lug module are
to analyze structural members (legs), support lugs and lifting lugs. The basic required
information for each of these analysis types is shown below.
• Vessel design internal pressure
• Design temperature for the attachment
• Vessel outside diameter
• Weight of vessel operating and dry
• Vessel dimensions
• Additional horizontal force on vessel
• Location of horizontal force above grade
The Leg & Lug Module 18-1

Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The design temperature for the attachment is used to compute the material properties for
attachment being analyzed. In most cases the actual attachment temperature will be differ-
ent from the vessel design temperature. The controlling stress for support lug and vessel
leg calculations is the yield stress. The material yield stress can be looked up in the tables
in ASME Section II Part D.
The weight of the vessel should be the weight of the vessel while it is operating. This
should include operating fluid, trays, insulation etc. Support lug calculations should use
the same loading conditions. However since vessels are typically lifted “dry” the empty
weight of the vessel should be used when performing lifting lug calculations. There is a
separate field for lifting weight of the vessel.
Item Number
Enter the a positive integer value (i.e. 1) in this cell. This number will not be used in the
analysis but will be displayed on the screen while PVElite is executing.
Vessel Description
Enter a meaningful descriptor for this analysis. This will be displayed on the screen and in
the output reports. An example might be Cryogen - 1. A combination of letters and num-
bers up to 15 may be used.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure that the vessel will be operating at. This value will not be used
by the program, however, the pressure will be an input item for WRC 107. This is also a
good number to have for information purposes.
Design Temperature of Attachment

The temperature entered in this cell should correspond to the temperature of the attach-
ment in question. It would be reasonable to assume that vessel legs are much cooler than
the actual metal temperature of the pressure vessel. The controlling stress for leg and sup-
port lug design is the yield stress of the material at the leg/lug temperature. If the attach-
ment is not at ambient, enter the yield stress at that temperature. This value available in
ASME Section II Part D. Alternately, the cold yield stress may be multiplied by the ratio
of the hot allowable stress to the cold allowable stress. This should be acceptable in most
cases.
Outside Diameter of Vessel

Enter the outside diameter of the vessel to which the supports are attached. Any factors
such as external corrosion should be accounted for at this time. PVElite will assume the
vessel is one diameter from the top to the bottom of the vessel.
Shell Thickness
Enter the shell thickness. This input is used only in the case of a support lug with a full
reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to compute the Area and Moment of Iner-
tia of the shell-ring junction.
18-2 The Leg & Lug Module


Enter the shell corrosion allowance. This input, along with the shell thickness is used only
in the case of a support lug with a full reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to
compute the area and Moment of Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel

Enter the vessel length from tangent to tangent. This value in combination with the next
input parameter, will be used to compute the height of the top of the tower above grade.
Knowing the elevation at the top, the wind pressure can be computed for the support lug
and leg calculations.
Shell Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Data-
base. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected
material. If you cannot find the material you need in the Material Database, you can add
its specification and properties by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials.
Type of Analysis
Use the table below to determine the appropriate analysis type:
Analysis Type Description

Support Lug If the vessel rests on support lugs select this option. The pro-
gram prompts you to enter all information necessary to deter-
mine the stress in these types of supporting attachments.
Vessel Leg If the vessel rests on vessel legs select this option. The program
prompts you to enter all information necessary to perform an
AISC Unity Check on the vessel legs. This option also allows
you to design the leg, baseplate and anchor bolts.
Lifting Lug If the vessel is lifted by lug type attachments select this option.
The program prompts you to enter information pertaining to the
lifting lugs.
Trunnion If the vessel is lifted by a trunnion select this option. The pro-
gram prompts you to enter information pertaining to the trunnion
design.
Note: You can also perform a local stress analysis on the trun-
nion per WRC 107 methods.
Analyze Baseplate
Check this box for designing the baseplate and Anchor Bolts per Moss and Bednar.
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel

Enter the additional horizontal force exerted on the vessel due to external loads. An exam-
ple of such would be the reaction imposed by the thermal expansion of a piping system.
For more information see Figure 18A - External Force Illustration.

A Vessel on Legs A Vessel on Lugs
Figure 18a - External Force Illustration
Location of Horizontal Force on Vessel

Enter the location of the external force above the base point. For more information see
Figure 18A - External Force Illustration.
Operating Weight of Vessel (total vertical load)

Enter the total weight of the vessel in this cell. This weight should include all operating
fluids, equipment loads, and other equipment attached to the vessel.
Height of Bottom Tangent Above Grade

Enter the distance from the ground to the bottom tangent of the vessel. If you are perform-
ing a leg analysis this distance should be equal to the length of the legs. This value will be
used along with the tangent to tangent length to determine the centroid where the wind
loads and seismic shear loads are applied. These horizontal shear forces cause bending
around the legs and support lugs. For more information see Figure 18A-External Force
Illustration.
Perform Lifting Lug Analysis

If a vessel is to be lifted by lug type attachments check this field. Prompts will appear ask-
ing for information pertaining to the lifting lugs.
Occasional Load Factor (AISC A5.2)

With many types of construction codes and occasional load factor can be used to increase
the allowable stress for an event that is considered occasional in nature. Such occasional
loads are Wind, Seismic, and the lifting of a vessel. The occasional load factor will be
multiplied by the other terms in the allowable stress equation to get the overall allowable.
If you do not wish to take credit for such an increase in the allowable, enter a 1 in this
field. The defaults is 1.33.
Apply Wind Loads to Vessel

If you wish to enter wind loads on your vessel check this field. You will then be prompted
for the necessary parameters to compute the wind pressure on the vessel.

Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel

If you wish to have a seismic analysis check this field. If you do so, the seismic zone or
seismic factor Cs will be needed.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Force Coefficient
Enter the force coefficient for the vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5
and 1.2. This can be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, plat-
forms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the
input diameter known.
Wind Pressure on Vessel

If your vessel specification calls for a constant wind pressure design, and you know what
that pressure is, enter it here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure
requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area
calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the infor-
mation in the following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Val-
ues up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed

Enter the basic wind speed which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be
accepted. A minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A) - “Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings hav-
ing a height in excess of 70 ft.”
Exposure (B) - “Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other ter-
rain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having
the size of single family dwellings.”
Exposure (C) - “Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights

generally less than 30 feet. This category includes flat,
open country and grasslands.”
Exposure (D) - “Flat, unobstructed costal areas directly exposed to wind

flowing over large bodies of water.”

Note that most petrochemical sites use Exposure C.
Use ASCE 7-95 Code

If you choose to use ASCE 7-95 code, check this field. Then enter the following cells.
Type of Hill
Select the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
• None
• 2-D Ridge
• 2-D Escarpment
• 3-D Axisym Hill
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H)

Enter height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2
for detail.

Enter distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site. See ASCE 7-95.
Distance to Crest (Lh)

Enter distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) — Optional (Hz)

Enter the natural frequency for the structure. The program will use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6
category III if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0.
Damping Ratio (beta) — optional

Enter the damping ratio for the structure if you like to use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6 category III
(if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0).
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in
ASCE #7. A value of 0 will slightly increase the reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will pro-
duce the highest loads.
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS

When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or 0, PVElite will look the
seismic zone factor up from an applicable table. This number is then used in conjunction
with the operating weight of the vessel to compute the forces which act on the supports. If
for any reason the table value of Cs is unacceptable, entry of a non-zero value will cause
this to be used in lieu of the table value. This might occur if the building code in your
project specifications is different from the one used by PVElite.

Vessel Leg Input PVElite - User Guide
Vessel Leg Input

The number of vessel legs must be between 3 and 16. The program computes the number
of legs for bending and shear of the vessel.
PVElite must have a valid material from which to determine material properties. The
material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Data-
base, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its
specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materi-
als, from the Main Menu.
Currently there are 929 structural shapes in AISC database. PVElite is intended to per-
form unity checks on I-beam and angle type sections. AISC’s method for computing unity
checks for angle sections is rather complicated when compared to the corresponding
method used for “I” type sections.
Each beam section has a strong and weak orientation. If the beam is attached such that the
tangent to the vessel is parallel to the beam’s strong axis this designation is considered
strong. If the designation is not strong it must be weak.
If the legs are cross braced bending stresses are significantly reduced. The end fixity con-
dition is assumed to be 1.0.
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal
to 3 and less than 16. PVElite will determine the effective number of legs for bending and
shear of the vessel.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel.
This length term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more
likely to buckle than shorter legs. The distance of the tangent line of the vessel above
grade should always be equal to the length of the legs. If they are not the same PVElite
will use the maximum of the two when determining the wind pressure and the location of
the centroid.
Effective Leg End Condition Factor K (used in Kl/r)

Enter in the value of K used as the effective end condition. This value usually ranges from
0.2 to 2.10. For design of pressure vessel legs a value of 1.0 is commonly used. If your
design specs call out for a different value enter it here.
Material Specification for Legs

Enter the material that the legs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA-
516 70. To properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is
shown. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
tained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-

PVElite - User Guide Vessel Leg Input
Leg Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the design
temperature is used.
Leg Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the operat-
ing temperature is used.
AISC Member Designation

Enter the shape type of the leg on which the vessel is sitting. A complete list of shapes can
be found in the AISC structural steel handbook. All material shape information is current
with the latest AISC code standard. An example of a shape type may be W8X40 or
W36X300. A 2 by 1/4 inch angle section would have the designation L2X2X0.2500. This
reference must be exact.
If your design incorporates pipe legs, check the pipe-leg selection box and fill in the ID
and the OD of the pipe leg.
Orientation to the Vessel

Each I - beam and channel has a strong and weak orientation. This means that these sec-
tions are more easily bent around one as opposed to the other. If the member is attached
such that the tangent to the vessel is parallel to the beams strong axis select the strong
option, otherwise select the weak option. If the member is an angle and it is attached to
with one leg welded to the vessel or one flat welded to the vessel, select strong. If both
legs are welded to the vessel select diagonal.
Are the Legs Cross-Braced

If the legs are cross braced check this field. Cross bracing effectively stiffens the legs.
Thus they will experience a minimum of bending stress.
Are the Legs Pipe Legs

Check this box to activate the pipe ID and OD.
Pipe Legs Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the pipe leg (as determined by which cell you are entering
data for) that is attached to the vessel. You must account for any corrosion allowance to
the Inner or Outer Diameter when entering this value. Please verify that the inside diame-
ter

Leg Results PVElite - User Guide
Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed PVElite reads all of the data out of the structural data-
base (AISC89.BIN). The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compres-
sion loads as outlined in AISC paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula
will be shown as appropriate. The combination of stresses due to bending and compres-
sion will be compared to the allowable per AISC 1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC
unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0 the member has failed.

PVElite - User Guide Support Lug Input
Support Lug Input

If the number of support lugs to be analyzed is between 3 and 16. PVElite assumes that
each support lug has two gussets equally spaced about a bolt hole. The distance between
gussets is used to determine the bending stress in the lug bottom plate. The lug bottom
plate is analyzed as a beam on simple supports, where the support spacing is the gusset
spacing. The allowable stress in bending is 66 percent of the yield stress, per the AISC
manual. In addition, the stress in the gusset is one half of the lug force divided by the gus-
set area. This compression is compared to the AISC compression allowable.
Usually when analyzing stresses in the lug plate the stresses in the wall of the vessel at the
attachment location should be checked. The support lug portion of the program will print
additional forces and moments for WRC107 analysis. This information can then be used
for local stress calculations according to the WRC107/297 method.
Support Lug Reinforcing Ring ( None, Girder Ring )

Select girder ring if the support lugs are reinforced with rings. If there are no stiffening
rings for the support lugs, select none.
Number of Support Lugs

Enter the number of support lugs on which the vessel is supported. This number must be
greater than 3 and less than 16. The program cannot calculate the lug stresses for 2 support
lugs because PVElite does not anticipate the bending reactions at the side lugs, which are
necessary for such a support system to work.
Location of Support Lugs Above Grade

Enter the height above grade to which the support lugs are attached to the vessel. This is
used to determine the reaction load on each support lug.
Distance from Vessel OD to Support Contact Point

Enter the distance from the outside wall of the vessel to where the support lug attaches/
rests on/to the supporting member. This distance should be as short as possible to mini-
mize bending on the support lug and the vessel wall.
Material Specification for Support Lugs

Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA-
Radial Width of Bottom Support Lug Plate

The radial width of the support lug is how far from the vessel wall the plate extends. For
more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Lug Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature

The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operat-

Support Lug Input PVElite - User Guide
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operat-
Circumferential Length of Bottom Support Lug Plate

Enter the distance measured along the vessel wall that the support lug plate extends.
Thickness of the Bottom Support Lug Plate

Enter the thickness of the plate on which the gussets rest. The bottom support plate is ana-
lyzed as a beam on simple supports where the support spacing is the distance between gus-
sets. The allowable stress is 66% of the yield stress per the AISC steel construction
manual.
Distance Between Gussets

Enter the gusset spacing in this cell. PVElite assumes that support lugs have two gussets,
equally spaced about a bolt hole (support point).
Mean Width of Gusset Plate

Enter the average width of the gusset plate. The width is radially from the OD of the ves-
sel. If the top and bottom of the gussets are different widths, add them up and divide the
result by 2. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Height of Gusset Plate

Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel that the gusset plate extends. This length
will be used in the AISC formulation to determine the stress in the gussets. For more infor-
mation see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Thickness of Gusset Plate

Enter the thickness of the gusset plate. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry
for the Leg & Lug Module.
Radial Width of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring

The radial width of the top bar/ring is how far from the vessel wall the top plate/ring
extends. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Note If there is no top bar/ring, enter the top width of the gusset.
Thickness of top Bar Plate or top Ring

Enter the thickness of the top bar plate/ring in the units above. If there is no top bar plate
or top ring, enter 0 here.

PVElite - User Guide Lifting Lug Input
Lifting Lug Input

Generally there are two types of lifting lug orientations, flat and perpendicular. Flat lugs
are generally welded below the top head seam and extend far enough above the seam for
the lifting cables to clear the head and its nozzles. Perpendicular lugs (ears) are used to
clear some obstruction at or near the top head (such as a body flange) by moving the sup-
port point away from the vessel shell. They are also used as tailing lugs.
The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described above. The
length is in the vertical direction relative to the vessel.
The length of the welds will also need to be entered. For flat lugs the weld at the bottom
will usually be the same as the lug width. For perpendicular lugs the weld length will be
the same as the thickness of the lug.
PVElite will take the square root of the sum of the squares (W, N, and T) to determine the
total shearing load. The forces W and N cause bending loads on flat lugs while W and T
cause bending loads on perpendicular lugs. The corner of the weld group is where the
stress will be checked at.
Review the example problems and see Figure 18A - External Force Illustration for further
clarification of input.
Material Specification for Lifting Lugs

Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA-
Lug Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

The lug allowable stress is multiplied by 0.6 for comparison to the shear stress above the
hole in the lifting lug. It is also multiplied by the arc efficiency to get the allowable weld
shear for combined loads.
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

The lifting lug allowable stress at ambient temperature should appear in this cell. The
allowable stress at the lug operating temperature is used for the allowable stress compari-
son.
Lug Orientation to Vessel

Select "Perpendicular" if the lug extends radially away from the vessel wall. These lugs
are referred to as ear-type lugs. They are typically used on the tops of horizontal vessels. If
the lug extends in the same direction as the vessel axis, select "Flat." This is a flat orienta-
tion.
If you are working with a perpendicular lug and there will be no bending stresses in the
lug, you will need to set the offset dimensions (moment arms) to 0. The program will run,
but may give some warnings. This type of lifting lug would be one on the top of a horizon-
tal vessel and the vessel would be lifted by a spreader bar equally distributing the weight
load directly over each lug. Thus there would be no bending.

Lifting Lug Input PVElite - User Guide
Contract Width or Height (Per. Lug) of Lifting Lug

The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described in the lug
orientation to vessel wall. For perpendicular lugs this is the total height of the lug.
Thickness of Lifting Lug

Enter the thickness of the plate that the lifting lug was constructed from.
Diameter of Hole in Lifting Lug

Most lifting lugs have a circular hole cut or drilled into them. Enter the diameter of this
hole.
Radius of Semi-Circular ARC of Lifting Lug

Enter the RADIUS of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug where the hole is located.
Typically this will be circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular lugs.
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom

Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel from the center of the hole to the bottom of
the lug.
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole

Enter the distance from the center of the hole to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular
lugs this will be to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat, this will be one half the lug
thickness.
Minimum Thickness of Fillet Weld Around Lug

This minimum is usually the distance from the root to the surface of the fillet weld (root
dimension), and is not the fillet weld leg size.
Length of Weld Around Sides of Lug

Enter the length of the long welds on the side of the lifting lug. PVElite will multiply this
value by two when determining the weld area.
Length of Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug

Enter the length of the short weld. This is usually the bottom weld.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the lifting lug analysis. For more information see Fig-
ure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more infor-
mation see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.

PVElite - User Guide Lifting Lug Input
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
OFFSET OF LIFTING LUG
FLAT LIFTING
LUG OFFSET
ARC
RADIUS
HOLE
PERPENDICULAR DIAMETER
LUG
SIDE FILLET
WELD
BOTTOM
FILLET WELD
LEGS SUPPORT
LUG
CROSS BRACING
LEG ORIENTATION:
WEAK
GUSSET GUSSET
WIDTH THICKNESS
STRONG
WIDTH LENGTH
THICKNESS
Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module

Output PVElite - User Guide
Output
PVElite produces three basic types of results in the Leg & Lug module. Results for Legs,
using the methods described by AISC, results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering
principles, and results for Support Lugs, using AISC methods and formulae from pressure
vessel text books and other engineering reference texts.
The input for this module include some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangent-
tangent length, the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are
performing a Leg or Support Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in
order to determine the loads.
For evaluation of wind loads:
1. Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel.
2. Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average.
3. Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area.
4. Compute the centroid of the vessel.
5. Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid.
For evaluation of seismic loads:
1. Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave.
2. Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel.
3. Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel.
If both types of loadings are considered, PVElite will compute both and then choose the
maximum of the two.

Examples
The first example presented below involves the horizontal lifting of a vessel that weighs
about 73,000 pounds. The design specification stated that if one lug failed, the other lug
must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the vessel. In addition, the spreader bar
used to pick up the tower was a few inches short and caused a normal load to be generated
on the flat lifting lugs. The normal force is simply a function of the angle the chains make
with the lug and the load per lug.
Ideally this geometry should be analyzed a second time with the lifting weight of the ves-
sel in the erection weight input field. Also the tangent force should be set equal to 0. This
would simulate picking the vessel up in its normal operating position or when it is being
installed in the field.
As you can see the arrangement worked well with the exception of the bending stress in
the lug. This is essentially cantilever bending. The remedy for this situation is to place a
gusset support between the top head and the flat lug. This would decrease the moment arm
and thus lower the bending stress.
The next example problem is for a lug supported vessel. This particular arrangement had
three support lugs. This vessel is supported in a structure containing piping and other
equipment. Bending stress are computed in the bottom support lug plate by two methods.
One is a uniform load (as if the lug were sitting on a beam) and the other is a point load.
Obviously, the point load on the plate will produce much higher bending stresses. When
you are looking at these bending stress results for the bottom plate only one will be appli-
cable. The stress in the gusset plate and its allowable are also computed. The allowable
should be greater than the actual stress for the lug to work properly. The results for the
gusset plates are computed using rules of the AISC.
The final example here is a leg supported vessel. The main point of interest is the AISC
Unity Check. The unity check combines forces and moments on the leg and essentially
predicts buckling. This result must be less than or equal to 1.0. If your unity check is
small, then you should be able to decrease the size of the structural member until you have
a unity check that is satisfactory for your design work.
Input Echo, LEG&LUG Number 1, Description: LIFTING LUG
Design Internal Pressure .00 psig

Design Temperature for Attachment TEMP 70.00 F
Vessel Outside Diameter OD 55.0000 in.
Operating Weight of Vessel (vertical load ) W .00 lb.

Erection Weight of Vessel (Lifting Analysis) W .00 lb.
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel FF .00 lb.

Location of Horizontal Force above Base Point FH .00 ft.
Horizontal Force Normal to the Vessel N 17045.00 lb.

Horizontal Force Tangent to the Vessel T 72525.00 lb.
Lifting Lug Material SA-516 70
Lifting Lug Yield Stress YIELD 38000.00 psi
Lifting Lug Orientation to Vessel Flat
Width of Lifting Lug WLUG 20.0000 in.
Thickness of Lifting Lug TLUG 1.7500 in.

Diameter of Hole in Lifting Lug DLIF 2.7500 in.

Radius of Semi-Circular Arc of Lifting Lug RLIF 10.0000 in.
Height of Lug from bottom to Center of Hole HLIF 37.0000 in.
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole OLIF .8750 in.
Minimum thickness of Fillet Weld around Lug TWELD .6187 in.
Length of weld along sides of Lifting Lug LWELD 18.0000 in.
Length of Weld along Bottom of Lifting Lug BWELD 20.0000 in.
Occasional Load Factor (AISC A5.2) OCCFAC 1.33
RESULTS FOR LIFTING LUGS : Description:LIFTING LUG

Weld Group Inertia in the Longitudinal Direction 1291.16 in**4
Weld Group Centroid distance in the Long. Direction 12.32 in.
Weld Group Inertia in the Circumferential Direction 3192.54 in**4
Weld Group Centroid Distance in the Circ. Direction 10.62 in.
Primary Shear Stress in the Welds due to Shear Loads:

Ssll = SQRT(W^2+T^2+N^2)/((2*Lweld+Bweld)*Tweld)
Ssll = SQRT( 0^2+ 72525^2+ 17045^2)/((2* 18.0+ 20.0)* .6187)
Ssll = 2150.28 psi
Shear Stress in the Welds due to Bending Loads :

Sblf = (N*(Hlif-Lweld/2))*YLL/ILL+(W*OLIF*YLL/ILL)+(T*OLIF*YLC/ILC)
Sblf = ( 17045*( 37.000- 18.000/2))* 12.325/ 1291.159 +
( 0* .875* 12.325/ 1291.159) +
( 72525* .875* 10.619/ 3192.545)
Sblf = 4766.76 psi
Total Shear Stress vs. allowable Shear for Combined Loads :

St = ( Ssll + Sblf )
St = ( 2150.276 + 4766.762 )
St = 6917.04 psi
Sta = ( .4 * Yield * Occfac ) AISC Shear All.

Sta = ( .4 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Sta = 20216.00 psi
Secondary Shear Stress in the Welds due to Shear Loads:

Unit Weld Section Modulus ( Uwsm )
= (2*LWELD+WLUG)^3/12 - LWELD^2(LWELD+WLUG)^2/(2*LWELD+WLUG)
= 6280.10 in.^3
Loads on Welds due to Torsional Moment

Fth = T * (Hlif-(Lweld-Cent)) * (Bweld/2)/Uwsm
Fth = 3604.75 lb./in.
Ftv = T * ( Hlif-(Lweld-Cent)) * Cent / Uwsm

Ftv = 4402.94 lb./in.
Fsv = T / ( 2 * Lweld + Wlug )

Fsv = 1295.09 lb./in.
Resultant Load on Weld Group

Fr = Sqrt( Fth^2 + ( Ftv+Fsv )^2 )

Fr = 6742.53 lb./in.
Resultant Secondary Weld Stress

Fws = Fr / Tweld
Fws = 10897.91 psi
Allowable Resultant Secondary Weld Stress

Psa = ( .4 * Yield * Occfac )
Psa = 20216.00 psi
Shear Stress in Lug above Hole vs. Allowable Base Metal Shear :
Shs = SQRT( W^2 + N^2 + T^2 ) / Sha
Shs = SQRT( 0^2 + 17045^2 + 72525^2 ) / 30.188
Shs = 2467.94 psi
Sas = ( 0.4 * Yield * Occfac ) Shear Allowable

Sas = ( 0.4 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Sas = 20216.00 psi
Pin Hole Bearing Stress Vs. Allowable Bearing Stress

Pbs = Sqrt( W^2 + N^2 + T^2 )/( Tlif * Dlif )
Pbs = Sqrt( 0^2 + 17045^2 + 72525^2 )/( 1.750 * 2.750 )
Pbs = 15480.74 psi
Pba = ( 0.75 * Yield ) AISC Bearing All.

Pba = ( 0.75 * 38000 )
Pba = 28500.00 psi
Bending Stress in Lug at Weld Vs. Allowable Stress

Fbs = N*(HLIF-LWELD)/(WLUG*TLIF^2/6)
Fbs = 17045 *( 37.000 - 18.000 )/( 20.000 * 1.750^2 / 6)
Fbs = 31724.57 psi
Fba = ( 0.4 * Yield * Occfac ) Shear Allowable

Fba = ( 0.4 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Fba = 20216.00 psi

Input Echo, LEG&LUG Number 2, Description: LUG DESIGN

Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel TANTAN 30.0000 ft.
Height of Bottom Tangent Above Grade 40.0000 ft.
Operating Weight of Vessel (vertical load ) W 83000.00 lb.

Force Coefficient Cf 1.000

Additional Area .00 sq.in.
Importance Factor I 1.110
Wind Velocity V 100.000 mile/hr
Exposure Catagory Expcat C
Use ASCE 7-95 Wind Code No

Support Lug with Full Reinforcing Rings? No

Number of Support Lugs NLUG 3
Location of Support Lugs above Base Point LLUG 50.0000 ft.
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Contact Point DLUG 8.0000 in.
Lug Support Force Bearing Width WFB 4.0000 in.
Support Lug Material SA-516 70
Support Lug Yield Stress 38000.00 psi
Radial Width of bottom Support Lug Plate WPL 12.0000 in.
Circum. Length of Bottom Support Lug Plate LPL 15.0000 in.
Thickness of bottom Support Lug Plate TPL 2.0000 in.
Distance between Gussets DGP 14.0000 in.
Mean Width of Gusset Plate WGP 11.0000 in.
Height of Gusset Plate HGP 15.0000 in.
Thickness of Gusset Plate TGP .7500 in.
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel AREA 47001.60 sq.in.
Wind Pressure on Vessel ( ASCE #7 or User ) PWIND 35.57 psf
Location of Centroid above Base Point WH 55.00 ft.
RESULTS FOR SUPPORT LUGS: Description:LUG DESIGN

Overturning Moment at Support Lug 58046. ft.lb.
Weight Load at the top of one Lug 27667. lb.
Shear at top of one Lug 3870. lb.
Force on one Lug:

Flug = ( W/Nlug + Mlug/( Rlug * Nlug/ 2 ) )
Flug = ( 83000 / 3 + 58045 /( 4.67 * 3 / 2 ) )
Flug = 35958.93 lb.
Bending Stress in bottom Support Plate (Point Load):

Spl = ( Flug/2*Dgp/2)/((Wpl/6)*Tpl^2)
Spl = ( 35958/2* 14.000/2)/(( 12.00/6)* 2.0000^2)
Spl = 15732.03 psi
Bending Stress in bottom Support Plate (Unif. Load) Per Bednar p.156:
Spl2 = Beta1 * Flug/(Lpl*Wfb)) * Wfb^2 / Tpl^2 per Roark & Young 5th ed
Spl2 = 2.105 * ( 35958.9 / 60.000) * 4.000^2 / 2.000^2
Spl2 = 5046.24 psi
Allowable Stress in the Bottom Support Plate:

Spa = ( 0.66 * Ylug )
Spa = ( 0.66 * 38000 )
Spa = 25080.00 psi
Stress in Gusset Plate ( Force / Gusset Plate Area ):

Sgp = ( Flug/2 ) / ( Wgp * Tgp )
Sgp = ( 35958/2 ) / ( 11.000* .7500 )
Sgp = 2179.33 psi
Gusset Plate Allowable Stress :

Sga = ( 1-(Klr)^2/(2*Cc^2))*Fy /
( 5/3+3*(Klr)/(8*Cc)-(Klr^3)/(8*Cc^3)
Sga = ( 1-( 80.00 )^2/(2 * 122.74^2 )) * 38000 /
( 5/3+3*( 80.00)/(8* 122.74)-( 80.00^3)/(8* 122.74^3)
Sga = 15948.94 psi
Maximum Compressive Stress in the Gussets per Bednar:

SgpB = Flug * ( 3*Dlug - Wpl ) / ( Tgp* Wpl**2 * (SIN(Alph_G))**2 )
SgpB = 35958*( 3* 8.000- 12.000 )/( .7500* 12.000**2*(SIN( 82.41))**2 )
SgpB = 4066.47 psi
Gusset Plate Allowable Compressive Stress per Bednar:

SgaB = 18000./ (1.+ (1./18000)* ( Hgp /SIN(Alph_G)/(.289*Tgp) )**2 )
SgaB = 18000/ (1+ (1/18000)* ( 15.000 /SIN( 82.41)/(.289* .7500) )**2 )
SgaB = 14164.33 psi
Additional Results - Forces/Moments for WRC107 Analysis:

Axial Load = Shear / Nlugs = 3870. lb.
Circumferential Shear = Shear / Nlugs = 3870. lb.
Longitudinal Shear = Load / Lug = 35959. lb.
Longitudinal Moment = Moment/ Nlugs = 23973. ft.lb.
Circumferential Moment = Shear * Distance = 1935. ft.lb.

Input Echo, LEG&LUG Number 3, Description: LEG DESIGN

Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel TANTAN 20.0000 ft.
Height of Bottom Tangent Above Grade 20.0000 ft.
Operating Weight of Vessel (vertical load ) W 240000.00 lb.

Force Coefficient Cf 1.000

Additional Area .00 sq.in.
Importance Factor I 1.050
Wind Velocity V 120.000 mile/hr
Exposure Catagory Expcat B
Use ASCE 7-95 Wind Code No

Number of Legs NLEG 8

Length of Legs LLEG 20.0000 ft.
Effective Leg End Condition Factor K 1.00
Material for Legs SA-516 70
Yield Stress of Leg Material 38000.00 psi
AISC Member Designation W8X40
Leg Orientation to Vessel Axis ORIENT Strong
Are the Legs Cross-Braced XB YES
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel AREA 20736.00 sq.in.
Wind Pressure on Vessel ( ASCE #7 or User ) PWIND 27.43 psf
Location of Centroid above Base Point WH 30.00 ft.
RESULTS FOR Legs : Description:LEG DESIGN

Section Properties for the selected Member :
Cross Sectional Area for W8X40 11.700 sq.in
Radius of Gyration ( strong axis ) 3.530 in.
Section Modulus ( strong axis ) 35.500 in.**3
Overturning Moment at top of Legs 39505.0 ft.lb.
Weight Load at top of one Leg 30000.0 lb.
Shear at top of one Leg 987.6 lb.
Additional force in Leg due to Bracing 11173.7 lb.
Axial Compression, Leg futhest from N.A.

Sma = ((W/Nleg)+(Mleg/(Nlegm*Rn)))/Aleg)
Sma = (( 240000 / 8) + ( 39504 /( 4 * 2.84 )))/ 11.700 )
Sma = 2861.10 psi
Axial Compression, Leg closest to N.A.

Sva = ( W / Nleg + Fadd ) / Aleg

Sva = ( 240000 / 8 + 11173 ) / 11.700

Sva = 3519.12 psi
Allowable Comp. for the Selected Leg (KL/r < Cc ) :

Sa = ( 1-(kl/r)^2/(2*Cc^2))*Fy /
( 5/3+3*(Kl/r)/(8*Cc)-(Kl/r^3)/(8*Cc^3)
Sa = ( 1-( 117.65 )^2/(2 * 122.74^2 )) * 38000 /
( 5/3+3*( 117.65 )/(8* 122.74 )-( 117.65^3)/(8* 122.74^3)
Sa = 10721.60 psi
Bending at the Bottom of the Leg closest to the N.A.:

S = ( Vleg * Rlngth * 12 / Smdsa )
S = ( 987.62 * 20.00 * 12 / 35.50 )
S = 0.0 since the legs are cross braced
Sb = ( 0.6 * Fy * Occfac )
Sb = ( 0.6 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Sb = 30324.00 psi
AISC Unity Check ( must be < or = to 1.00 ) :

Sc = (Sva/Sa)+(0.85*S)/((1-Sva/Spex)*Sb)
Sc = ( 3519/ 10721 )+( 0.85 * .000 )/(( 1 - 3519/ 10789 ) * 30324 )
Sc = .3282
Additional Results - Forces/Moments for WRC107 Analysis:

Axial Load = Shear / Nlegs = 494. lb.
Circumferential Shear = Shear / Nlegs = 494. lb.
Longitudinal Shear = Load / Leg = 30000. lb.
Longitudinal Moment = Moment/ Nlegs = 10313. ft.lb.
Circumferential Moment = Shear * Distance = 339. ft.lb.

Baseplate Input PVElite - User Guide
Baseplate Input
The Baseplate Thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe,
and angle leg only, and can be activated by clicking the Annoyance Baseplate checkbox.
The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual
by D. Moss and is applied to the other leg shapes. CodeCalc will assume the following for
all Baseplate Thickness calculations:
• Strong axis leg orientation
• Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension). For more information
see Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension
• The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate. For more information see Figure
18C - Baseplate Dimension
It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of CodeCalc.
Baseplate Length B
Enter the length "B" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Width D
Enter the width "D" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Thickness BTHK

Enter the available baseplate thickness.
Baseplate Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Bolt Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z"
Enter the "z" dimension of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C- Baseplate
Dimension.

Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters included in the program range from
0.5 to 4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nom-
inal size in this field and also enter the root area of one bolt in the "Root Area" cell.
Bolt Corrosion Allowance

If there is any corrosion allowance for the bolts then enter it here. The nominal bolt size is
corrected for this allowance.

PVElite - User Guide Baseplate Input
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry:
• TEMA Bolt Table
• UNC Bolt Table
• User specified root area of a single bolt.
Bolt Root Area

If your geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types you must enter
the root area of a single bolt in this field.
Total Number of Bolts per Baseplate

Enter the total number of bolts per baseplate. At least two bolts are needed for uplift stitu-
ations. The program assumes that the bolts are located along the length "B" of the base-
plate as shown in Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension.
Number of Bolts in Tension per Baseplate

Enter the total number of bolts in tension per baseplate. If there is an uplift the number of
bolts in tension per Baseplate should be at least 1. If there is no uplift the number of bolts
in tension per Baseplate is not required.

Enter the Nominal Compressive Stress of the Concrete to which the basering/baseplate is
bolted. This value is f’c in Jawad and Farr of FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Water Content (gal) per 94 lb. Sack of f’c 28 day Ultimate Compressive
Cement Strength (psi)
7.50 2000
6.75 2500
6.0 3000
5.00 3750

Baseplate Input PVElite - User Guide
Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension

PVElite - User Guide Baseplate Results
Baseplate Results
The Baseplate analysis produces the following result:
• The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress
and compared to the input thickness.
• The concrete bearing pressure is compared to the input allowable stress
• The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel
moment equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts you should
choose a practical bolt size.

Trunnion Input PVElite - User Guide
Trunnion Input
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed
using the Trunnion Design module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design
are stresses at the vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check are calculated and compared with the appropri-
ate allowables. Local stresses at the junction can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis
Selection checkbox. The lifting orientation, vertical and horizontal positions, and the
orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis.
CodeCalc assumes that magnitude of the applied loads is acting on one trunnion. Typi-
cally vessels are lifted with two trunnions thus the load is divided between them. An
option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting on that trunnion during the
lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified by the user.
Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces’ magni-
tude and direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc.
The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.
Trunnion Type (Hollow or Solid)

This input is required for performing shear and bending stress calculations and for WRC
107 Analysis.
Trunnion Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trun-
nion Geometry.
Trunnion Thickness
Enter the thickness of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion
Geometry.
Projection Length
Enter the projection length of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trun-
nion Geometry.
Bail/Sling Width
Enter the bail or sling width used during erection. This input is required for locating the
the lifting load only. No analysis is performed on the bail or sling. For more information
see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Material
Enter the material the trunnion is made of. Depending on the size and the availability, the
trunnion can be made of pipe or sheet plate. To properly initialize the material, type its
name in this field even if the default displays. If am material is not contained in the data-
base, its specifications and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Reinforcement
This input is required to perform the WRC 107 Analysis.

PVElite - User Guide Trunnion Input
Ring Outside Diameter

Ring Outside Diameter is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in
the calculations. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Ring Thickness
Ring Thickness is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the cal-
culations. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the trunnion analysis. This value will be used to per-
form WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more infor-
mation see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Importance Factor
When the vessel is lifted from the ground it may be yanked abruptly. The Importance Fac-
tor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0 although values as
high as 3.0 may be used. The program multiplies the Lifting Load by the Importance Fac-
tor.
Perform WRC 107 Analysis on Trunnion

Click this box to perform WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion/vessel junction.

Trunnion Input PVElite - User Guide
Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry
Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation

PVElite - User Guide Trunnion Result
Trunnion Result
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to dis-
play a picture only.
There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used:
• Bending Stress: 0.66 *Sy*Occfac
• Shear Stress: 0.40 *Sy*Occfac
• Bearing Stress: 0.75 *Sy*Occfac
• WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the
allowable (1.5 * S allow). For more information see the WRC 107 module.

Trunnion Result PVElite - User Guide

&KDSWHU
The Pipe & Pad Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Pipe & Pad module in the PVElite program. To use this pro-
gram make sure the current analysis type is Pipe & Pad. This can be determined by look-
ing on the PVElite main menu. The Pipe & Pad module computes required wall thickness
and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are
based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Code. Extruded outlet headers are also analyzed.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Intersection Number
Enter an intersection number for this analysis. These should be positive integer values and
incriminated by ones.
Intersection Description
Enter a 15 letter/number identifier for this intersection. This description will not be used in
the analysis, however, it will be used in the error checker and in the output reports. This
identifier should have some link to the actual intersection. An example might be “Int
12x4”.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure that
the system will operate at continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall
thickness etc. involve the design pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the intersection. This temperature will be used to deter-
mine the allowable stress of the branch. The user may note that if a new temperature is
input the allowable stress information of the branch is updated automatically.
Branch\Header\Pad Material Specification

Enter the material specification in this cell. A list of materials can be found in the PVElite
User’s Guide or it can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and select-
ing Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data-
The Pipe & Pad Module 19-1

base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu. An example of a valid material name is A106 B.
Valid piping materials available are
A-106 B A-285 C A-312 304 A-312 304L A-312 316 A-312 316L
A-516 55 A-516 60 A-516 65 A-516 70 A-53 A A-53 B
A-335 P1 A-335 P2 A-335 P5 A-335 P11 A-335 P22 A-537 CL1
Any material can be used as long as the hot and cold allowables are properly specified.
Allowable Stress, Operating

The allowable stress of the material specified at the design temperature above should
appear in this cell. This stress will appear automatically if a valid material is selected. If
the temperature is changed the material properties will be updated automatically.
Allowable Stress, Ambient

The allowable stress of the material at ambient temperature above should appear in this
cell. This stress will appear automatically if a valid material is selected.
Branch Dimension Basis

Select the branch dimension basis in this field.
Pipe Normal or Actual Outside Diameter

If actual was entered in the field immediately above, then enter the actual outside diameter
of the branch in this cell. If nominal was entered above, enter the nominal outside diameter
of the branch pipe. An example is “10.” for a 10 inch pipe.
Actual Thickness of Branch/Header

If the user has specified a 1 in the branch/header dimension basis field, then the actual wall
thickness of the branch will be entered in this cell. PVElite will reduce the wall thickness
according to B31.3 if appropriate values are entered for mill tolerance or corrosion allow-
ance.
Nominal Thickness of Branch/Header

Enter the schedule for the branch/header wall. Enter a value in this field only if you
selected Nominal for the branch diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a thickness
in the field above. Type in the schedule for the branch, i.e. SCH 40. Available schedules
are
SCH 10SCH 80 SCH STD
SCH 10SSCH 80SSCH-STG
SCH 20SCH 100SCH XX-STG
SCH 30SCH 120SCH 40
SCH 140SCH 40SSCH 160
SCH 60
19-2 The Pipe & Pad Module

Mill Undertolerance, Percent

The mill undertolerance accounts for manufacturing deficiencies when pipe is produced.
If for example a value of 12.5 is entered, then the wall thickness of the pipe will be multi-
plied by (100 - 12.5)/100 or .875. This is essentially a reduction in wall thickness. Valid
entries are between 0 and 99%.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness
- (corrosion allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0.
Basic Quality Factor for Longitudinal Joints

The basic quality factor is used in the wall thickness calculations for pipes under internal
pressure only. These factors are listed in the ANSI B31.3 piping code Table A-1B. For
seamless and fully radiographed pipe this value is 1.0. For electric resistance welded and
spot welded materials it is usually 0.85.
Angle Between Branch and Header

Enter the angle between the centerline direction vector of the branch and the header. This
is typically 90 degrees. The piping codes do not allow “hillside” type attachments. This
angle is referred to as Beta and is shown in Figure 19A. This is the smaller angle between
axes.
Does the Branch Penetrate a Header Weld

If the branch pipe passes through a weld seam on the header pipe check this field. Refer to
ANSI B31.3 paragraph 304.3.3 under “t =” for more information.
Rate the Attached B16.5 Flange

If a flange is attached to the branch pipe and you wish to rate it check this field.
Header Dimension Basis

Enter the header dimension basis in this field. If the actual outside diameter is known
select actual. If the nominal schedule of the header is known select nominal.
Reinforcing Pad Present

If the intersection being analyzed has a reinforcing pad, check this field. If selected
PVElite will determine the area(s) available in the pad within the appropriate limits of
reinforcement. In addition, PVElite will also report the required pad diameter based on the
given pad thickness and the required pad thickness based on the given diameter.
Thickness of Extruded Outlet, TX

The dimension TX of an extruded outlet header is the corroded finished thickness which is
measured at a height equal to the radius of curvature above the outside surface of the
header.
Height of Extruded Outlet, HX

The dimension Hx of an extruded outlet header is the height of the extruded outlet. This
distance must be greater than or equal to the radius of curvature Rx, of the outlet.

Inside Diameter of Extruded Outlet, DX

Dx is the inside diameter of the extruded outlet which is measured at the level of the out-
side of the header. PVElite will automatically adjust the wall thickness of the outlet if the
mill tolerance and/or the corrosion allowance is specified.
Radius of Curvature, RX, of Extruded Outlet

Rx is the radius of curvature of the external contoured part of the extruded outlet, which is
measured in the plane containing the axes of both the header and the branch.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Class of the Attached B16.5 Flange
If you answered Y to rate the attached B16.5 flange then enter the class of the flange
attached to the nozzle neck. Available classes of flanges are: CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL
600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL 2500.
Grade of the Attached B16.5 Flange

If the flange attached to the nozzle neck is to be rated then the grade of the flange must be
entered here. The allowable grades of B16.5 flanges are
GR 1.1 Med C Steel GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 1.2 High C Steel GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 1.4 Low C Steel GR 2.3 Type 304L,316L
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo GR 2.5 Type 347,348
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo GR 2.7 Type 310
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of reinforcing element in this cell. All allowances for corrosion should
be taken into consideration by the user.
Pad Diameter Along Header Surface

Enter the length of the reinforcing element along the longitudinal axis of the header.

Output
PVElite will generate output for maximum allowable working new and cold as well as the
corroded condition. The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable work-
ing pressure at the design condition times 1.5 the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient
temperature to the allowable stress at the design temperature.
The replaced area can only be within a certain zone. No credit will be given for reinforce-
ment that lies outside of the zone. Please note that these zones are different for extruded
outlets.
If a reinforcing element is used PVElite will compute the required diameter for the given
thickness and the required thickness for the given diameter. If a pad is used in conjunction
with an extruded outlet header consult the piping code for details on this design. If the cal-
culated diameter falls outside the limit of reinforcement a message such as “EXCEEDS
D2” or “EXCEEDS L4” will be displayed.

PVElite - User Guide Output
The MAWP for the given geometry is an estimate because of a slight non-linearity in the
required thickness calculation. To verify the MAWP plug the value back into the analysis
as the design pressure and check to see if the area required is equal to the area available.
Figure 19A - Geometry for The Pipe & Pad Module

Figure 19B - Geometry for The Pipe & Pad Module

PVElite - User Guide Output
Figure 19C - Extruded Outlet

Example Problem
Input Echo, Pipe&Pad Number 1, Description: PIPE&PAD 1

Header Material A-PI5L A

Header Allowable Stress Operating Sh 16000.00 psi
Header Allowable Stress Ambient Shcold 16000.00 psi
Branch Material A-PI5L A
Branch Allowable Stress Operating Sb 16000.00 psi
Branch Allowable Stress Ambient Sbcold 16000.00 psi
Header Branch
Dimension Basis ( Nominal or Actual ) Nominal Nominal
Nominal -or- Actual Outside Diameter 8.0000 4.0000 in.
Basic Quality Factor for Long. Joints E 1.00 1.00
Mill Tolerance c 12.5 12.5 %
Corrosion Allowance c .1000 .1000 in.
Pipe Schedule ( Header ) SCH 40

Pipe Schedule ( Branch ) SCH 40
Angle Between Branch and Header á 90.0000 Degrees

Does the Branch Penetrate a Header Weld No
Thickness of Reinforcing Pad Tr .3220 in.

Diameter of Reinforcing Pad 6.0000 in.
Reinforcing Pad Material A-PI5L A
Reinforcing Pad Allowable Stress Sp 16000.00 psi
— Internal Pressure Calculations for Header and Branch ----------
Header Branch
Allowable Stress used in Calculations 16000.00 16000.00 psi
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 16000.00 16000.00 psi
Actual Outside Diameter used in Calc. 8.625 4.500 in.
Nominal Thickness used in Calculations .322 .237 in.
Coefficient of Effective Stressed Dia. .400 .400
Required Thickness at Design Pressure .080 .042 in.

Required Thickness + CA and Mill Tol. .206 .162 in.
Max. Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) 685.88 778.41 psig

MAWP, New (uncorroded) & Cold (ambient) 1073.38 1531.11 psig
Hydrotest Pressure 1028.82 1167.62 psig
— Calculations for Required Branch Reinforcement ----------
Height of Reinforcement Zone L4 .4544 in.

Effective Length removed from Pipe d1 4.2853 in.

Half Width of Reinforcement Zone d2 4.2853 in.
Allowable Stress used for Reinforcement 16000. psi
Required Reinforcement Area A1 .3439 sq.in.
Area Available in Header Wall A2 .4349 sq.in.

Area Available in Branch Wall A3 .0595 sq.in.
Area Available in Branch Weld A4 .0551 sq.in.
Area Available in Pad A4 .4830 sq.in.
Area Available in Pad Weld A4 .0519 sq.in.
Total Area Available (A2+A3+A4+A4+A4) 1.0844 sq.in.
Estimated MAWP of Assembly 606.01 psig
FORMULAS and SUBSTITUTIONS for B31.3 INTERSECTION CALCULATIONS :

th = ( P * Dh )/2( Sh * QF + P * Yh )
th = ( 300 * 8.6250 )/2( 16000 * 1.00 + 300 * .40 )
th = .080 in. Required thickness of header
tmh = ( th + c ) / Hmtr
tmh = ( .0803 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmh = .206 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
tb = ( P * Db )/2 ( Sb * QF + P * Y )
tb = ( 300 * 4.5000 )/2 ( 16000 * 1.00 + 300 * .40 )
tb = .042 in. Required thickness of branch
tmb = ( tb + c ) / Bmtr
tmb = ( .0419 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmb = .162 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
--------------- Pressure Results ------------------
Hpo = (Th*Hmtr-c)*2*Sh*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr-c)*Yh)
Hpo = ( .3220 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Hpo = 685.881 psig M.A.W.P., operation, header
Hpnc = (Th*Hmtr)*2*Shcold*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr)*HY)
Hpnc = ( .3220 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 ) * .40 )
Hpnc = 1073.385 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, header
Hpht = ( 1.5 * Hpo * Shcold / Sh )

Hpht = ( 1.5 * 685.88 * 16000 ) / 16000 )
Hpht = 1028.822 psig Hydrotest Pressure, header
Bpo = (Tb*Bmtr-c)*2*Sb*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c)*By)
Bpo = ( .2370 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Bpo = 778.415 psig M.A.W.P., operation, branch

Bpnc = (Tb*Bmtr)*2*Sbcold*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr)*BY)
Bpnc = ( .2370 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000/
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 ) * .40 )
Bpnc = 1531.114 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, branch
Bpht = ( 1.5 * Bpo * Sbcold / Sb )

Bpht = ( 1.5 * 778.41 * 16000 ) / 16000 )
Bpht = 1167.622 psig Hydrotest Pressure, branch
----------- Area and Zone Results --------------
L4 = The minimum of ( L4th, L4tb )

L4 = Minimum( .454 , .590 )
L4 = .454 in. Height of reinforcement zone
d1 = ( Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c))/SIN( á )
d1 = ( 4.50 - 2 * ( .2370 * .88 - .1000 ))/SIN( 90.0 )
d1 = 4.285 in. Effective Length removed from pipe
d2d2 = ( Tb*Bmtr-c ) + ( Th*Bmtr-c ) + ( d1/2 )

d2d2 = ( .237 * .875 - .1000 ) + ( .322 * .875 - .1000 ) +
( 4.285 / 2)
d2d2 = 2.432 in. Candidate for d2 based on Tb + Th
d2 = The Min of ( The Max of ( d1, d2d2 ), Db )

d2 = Min( Max( 4.285, 2.432 ), 8.625 )
d2 = 4.285 in. Half length of reinforcement zone
A1 = ( th * d1 * ( 2 - Sin( á ) )
A1 = ( .080 * 4.285 * ( 2 - Sin( 90.0 ) )
A1 = .344 sq.in. Area required to be replaced
A2 = ( 2 * d2 - d1) * (Th * Hmtr - th - c)

A2 = ( 2 * 4.285 - 4.285 ) * ( .322 * .875 - .080 - .100 )
A2 = .435 sq.in. Area available in header
A3 = ( 2*L4*(Tb*Bmtr-tb-c)/Sin(á)
A3 = ( 2 * .454 * ( .237 * .8750 - .042 - .100 )/Sin( 90.0 )
A3 = .060 sq.in. Area available in branch
A4 = ( Min( 0.7 * Tb, Minthk ) / 0.707 ) ** 2

A4 = ( Min( 0.7 * .237, .250 ) / 0.707 ) ** 2
A4 = .055 sq.in. Area available in branch weld
A5 = 2*Min(Dpad/2,d2)-(Db/2)/Sin(á))*Min(Tpad,L4)*Padf)
A5 = 2*Min( 6.00/2, 4.285 ) - ( 4.500/2) / Sin( 90.0 )) * .322 * 1.00
A5 = .483 sq.in. Area available in reinforcing pad
A6 = If(A5>0&&Dpad+2*Bw<d2*2,(.5*Min(Tpad,L4)/0.707)^2,0)
A6 = ( 0.5 * .3220 / 0.707 ) ^ 2 )
A6 = .052 sq.in. Area available in pad weld

&KDSWHU
The Base Ring Module
Introduction
The PVElite base ring module performs thickness calculations and design for annular
plate base rings, top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using
industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
Calculation Techniques
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the base ring is the equation for a simple cantilever
beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load
caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and
bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for
the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, includ-
ing Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, for-
mula 12.12:
t = SQRT( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
Where
fc = bearing stress on the concrete
l = cantilever length of base ring
s = allowable bending stress of base ring (typically 1.5 times Code allowable).
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the con-
crete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete
assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area
of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to
fc = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
A = Cross sectional area of base ring on foundation
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the edge
I = Moment of inertia of the base ring on the foundation
The Base Ring Module 20-1

Calculation Techniques PVElite - User Guide
However, when a steel skirt and base ring are supported on a concrete foundation, the
behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net
bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced
by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different
elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the
strain in the base ring at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/
concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed
this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical
Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This for-
mulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabu-
lated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is
identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and
the angle alpha.
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young’s moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-
adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
s = (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha = acos [(s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where
t3 = width of base ring (similar to l in Jawad & Farr’s equations above)
c = bolt circle diameter
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh & Soler
equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed].
Then alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless
parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values
of p and s (say po’ and so’). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1 = .5 * (so + so’)
p1 = .5 * (po + po’)
20-2 The Base Ring Module

PVElite - User Guide Calculation Techniques
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within spec-
ified tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value),
Where
ei = (si’ - si) / si
Ei = (pi’ - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
Thickness of Base Ring Under Tension

On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, there is disagreement on
how to do the analysis. For example, Megyesy uses a ‘Table F’ to calculate an equivalent
bending moment, Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but gives the table (page 126-
129), and Jawad & Farr use a ‘yield-line’ theory (page 435-436). Since Jawad & Farr is
both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation 12.13:
t = SQRT{ (3.91 * F) / [Sy * ( x + y + z)]}
Where
x = 2*b/a
y = a / (2 * l)
z = d * ( 2 / a + 1 / [2 * l])
F = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
a = Distance between gussets
b = Width of base plate that is outside of the skirt
l = Distance from skirt to bolt circle
d = Diameter of bolt hole
Thickness of Top Ring Under Tension

If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is calculated using a simple beam formula. Tak-
ing the plate to be a beam supported between two gussets with a point load in the middle
equal to the maximum bolt load, we derive the following equation:
t = SQRT(6 * M / s)
Where
M = 2 * Ft * Cg / 8.0, bending moment from Megyesy, beam formulas, case 11, fixed
beam.
Ft = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
s = Allowable stress, 1.5 * plate allowable
Z = Section Modulus, from Megyesy, Properties of Sections
Z = Wt * t2 / 6.0
Wt = (Do/2.- Ds/2.- db) = Width of Section
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension

If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for both tension and compression. The stress
formula in tension is just the force over the area, where the force is taken to be the allow-

Calculation Techniques PVElite - User Guide
able bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset
times one half the width of the gusset (because gussets normally taper).
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression

In compression (as a column) we must iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking
the actual thickness as the starting point, we perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The
radius of gyration for the gusset is taken as 0.289 t per Megyesy, Fifth edition, page 404.
The actual compression is calculated as described above, then compared to the allowed
compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and another calculation performed
until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one percent of one
another.
Base Ring Design

When the user requests a base ring design, the program performs the following additional
calculations to determine the design geometry.
Selection of Number of Bolts

This selection is made on the basis of Megyesy’s table in Pressure Vessel Handbook
(Table C, page 67 in the fifth edition). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to
keep the anchor bolt spacing at about 24 inches.
Calculation of Load per Bolt

This calculation is made per Jawad & Farr, equation 12.3:
P = -W / N + 2 * M / (N * R)
Where
W = Weight of vessel
N = Number of bolts
R = Radius of bolt circle
M = Bending moment
Calculation of Required Area for each Bolt

This is just the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress.
Selection of the Bolt Size

The program has a table of bolt areas, and selects smallest bolt with area greater than the
area calculated above.
Selection of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry

The table of bolt areas also contains the required clearances in order to successfully
tighten the selected bolt (wrench clearances and edge clearances). The program selects a
preliminary base ring geometry based on these clearances. Values selected at this point are
the bolt circle, base ring outside diameter, and base ring inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry

Using the methods described above for the analysis section, the program determines the
approximate compressive stress in the concrete for the preliminary geometry.

PVElite - User Guide Calculation Techniques
Selection of Final Base Ring Geometry

If the compressive stress calculated above is acceptable, then the preliminary geometry
becomes the final geometry. If not, then the bolt circle and base ring diameters are scaled
up to the point where the compressive stress will be acceptable. These become the final
base ring geometry values.
Analysis of Base Ring Thicknesses

The analysis then continues through the thickness calculation described above, determin-
ing required thicknesses for the base ring, top ring, and gussets.
Basic Skirt Thickness

The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression loads is determined
using the same formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete, except using the
thickness of the skirt rather than the width of the base ring:
s = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
A = Cross sectional area of skirt.
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the skirt (radius of skirt).
I = Moment of inertia of the skirt cross section.
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required
thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the
allowable stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where
the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials fac-
tor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calcu-
lations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated,
the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allow-
able stress approaches the actual stress.
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring

If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring included in the base plate geometry, there is
an additional load in the skirt. Jawad & Farr have analyzed this load and determined that
the stress in the skirt due to the bolt load on the base plate is calculated as follows:
s = (1.5 * F * b) / (PI * h * t ** 2)
Where
F = Total load in one bolt = load on one gusset
b = Width of the gusset at the base
t = thickness of the skirt
h = height of the gusset.
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight
and bending moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They
thus categorize this stress as secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of
this stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the
required thickness of the skirt at the top of the base ring.

Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Base Ring Number

The base ring number should start out at 1 and increment by 1 for each successive base
ring analyzed. A blank entry for the base ring number will cause PVElite not to analyze
the data for that base ring.
Base Ring Description

Enter an optional alpha-numeric description for the base ring to be analyzed. This may be
a project number that will help keep track of the base ring.
Analyze or Design Base Ring

The Base Ring program in PVElite can either analyze existing base rings or design new
ones. Two valid entries are
Analyze—Existing Base rings
Design—New Base rings
When in design mode, PVElite may change the following items:
• Number of Bolts
• Size of Bolts
• Bolt Circle Diameter
• Outside Diameter of the Base ring
• Inside Diameter of the Base ring
Temperature of Base Ring

Normally base rings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the base ring is at
a higher temperature, enter it here, otherwise leave the default temperature.
Thickness of Base Ring

Enter the actual thickness of base ring. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc.
should be subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required base
ring thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user
entered thickness value will be used only for comparison.
Base Ring\Skirt\Bolt Material Specification

Enter the base ring material. Plate materials such as SA-516 70 and SA-36 are commonly
used. The material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and select-
ing Database, while the cursor is in this field. If your material is not present, enter the
allowable stresses at the base ring design metal temperature.

If your base ring material is not in the database, enter the hot allowable stress here.


This field is for the base ring ambient allowable stress.
Inside Diameter of Base Ring

Enter the inside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than 0 and less than
the bolt circle diameter and the base ring OD. If the you have specified the program to
design the base ring, PVElite may change this value. A good approximation for the base
ring ID should be entered when using either the analyze or design option.
Outside Diameter of Base Ring

Enter the outside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than the base ring
ID and the bolt circle diameter. When in design mode, PVElite may change this value.

The nominal bolt diameters accepted by PVElite range between 1/2 and 4 inches (1.27
and 10.16) centimeters. Values outside of this range will not be accepted. When in design
mode PVElite may change the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters are
Bolt Size(inches) Root Area (sq. in.)
1/2 0.126
5/8 0.202
3/4 0.302
7/8 0.419
1 0.551
1 1/8 0.728
1 1/4 0.929
1 3/8 1.155
1 1/2 1.405
1 5/8 1.680
1 3/4 1.980
1 7/8 2.304
2 2.652
2 1/4 3.423
2 1/2 4.292
2 3/4 5.259
3 6.324
3 1/4 7.487
3 1/2 8.749
3 3/4 10.108
4 11.566
This information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Pro-
cess Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.

Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the base ring design calls for. If the BASE RINGS program is in design
mode, it may change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the
maximum load per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is refer-
enced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 120.
Diameter at Bolt Circle

Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This value must be greater than the base ring Id and
less than the base ring OD. When in design mode, PVElite may change the bolt circle
diameter. Whenever this happens, it will be reported in the output. The word DESIGN will
appear followed by the value and description of the input the program has changed.
Bolt Table (TEMA, UNC, USER)

Enter the thread series identifier. If the option is picked you will be prompted to enter the
root area of a single bolt. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering
handbook.

Enter the Nominal Compressive stress of the Concrete to which the base ring is bolted.
This value is f’c in Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Are Gussets to be Used?

If your base ring design includes the use of gusset plates, check this field, otherwise con-
tinue.
Thickness of Top Ring Plate (if any)

If your base ring design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness
greater than 0.0 is entered, PVElite will compute the required thickness of the top plate. If
no top ring thickness is entered, PVElite will not perform top ring thickness calculations.
Radial Width of Top Ring/Plate (if any)

Enter the radial width of the top ring or plate, if any. This is simply the half of (top ring
OD - top ring ID). This value must be entered if you entered last field, and must be posi-
tive.
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring )
Enter the type of top Ring or Plate per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring).
Refer to Dennis Moss “Pressure Vessel Design Manual” p129. If type 3 or 4 is entered, the
program will calculate per p130.
External Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, base plate, gussets and
top ring. The external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness
of these components.

Skirt Thickness
Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. PVElite will auto-
matically compute the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial
stress. PVElite uses the ASME code compression allowable B for axial stresses.
Skirt Temperature
If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Normally, skirts are at ambient tem-
perature.
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base

Enter the skirt Od at the junction of the skirt and base ring. This value should be greater
than the base ring ID and less than the base ring bolt circle.
Joint Efficiency for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head

Enter the joint efficiency for the weld that joins the skirt to the bottom head. This value
depends on the weld detail used. Typical values range between 0.49 and 1.0.
Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head

Enter the diameter of the skirt at the bottom head of the vessel. Not all skirts are cylindri-
cal. Some skirts are cone shaped and as such have different diameters at the top and bot-
tom.
Dead Weight of Vessel

Enter the weight of the vessel with all peripheral equipment (ladders, cages, catwalks,
packing) etc. The working fluid of the vessel should not be included here. This entry is
optional and can be 0.
Operating Weight of Vessel

Enter the operating weight of the vessel here. This includes all contents and associated
“hardware”. This value must be greater than 0.
Test Weight of Vessel

Enter the test weight of the vessel here. This weight will include the fluid used for the
hydrotest of the vessel. This entry is optional and can be 0.
Operating Moment of Base Ring

Enter the total moment exerted on the skirt by the wind, reboilers, attached piping etc.
when the vessel is operating. This value must be greater than 0.
Test Moment on Base Ring

Enter the test moment on the base ring. The entry for the test moment is optional and can
be 0.
Are Stress Multipliers to be Used?

If you wish to increase the allowable stress the program uses for the skirt design, check
this field.

Pop-up Input Fields PVElite - User Guide
Pop-up Input Fields

User-Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt
If your base ring design calls out for special bolts, enter the root area of a single bolt in this
filed. Note, however, this option is mutually exclusive from the design option. If this con-
dition is detected, the numbers from Table 2 (UNC) will be used.
Thickness of Gusset Plates

Enter the thickness of the gusset plates to be used for this base ring. Any allowances for
corrosion should be considered when making this entry.
Temperature for Gussets (if not ambient)

Enter the temperature for the gusset plates. Normally, the gussets will operate at ambient
temperature. If the temperature is above ambient, enter it here.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the base ring to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
Distance from Bolts to Gussets

Enter the distance from a bolt to the nearest gusset. Normally, each bolt will have two gus-
sets. This distance would be 1/2 of the spacing between the gusset plates.
Average Width of Gusset Plates

Enter the average width of the gusset plates.
Number of Gussets per Bolt

Enter the number of gussets per bolt. Usually, each bolt will have 2 gusset plates associ-
ated with it. For base rings that have a large number of bolts, this may not always be the
case. In these occasions, each bolt may have a single gusset plate associated with it.
Elastic Modules for Plates

The elastic modulus is used to determine the allowable stress for plates in compression
according to AISC. This is a required value. For most common steels, this value is 29E6
psi.
Factor for the Skirt Allowable at the Skirt Top

This factor is multiplied by the skirt operating allowable wherever it is used. For example:
The skirt allowable stress at the top would be = stress multiplier X joint efficient X skirt
operating allowable. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 1.00 for this value. This
multiplier is usually between 1 and 2.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (OPE)

This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the operating case.
PVElite will look at the minimum of this factor times its allowable and the skirt yield
stress times its allowable multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a compari-
son to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.

PVElite - User Guide Pop-up Input Fields
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (TEST)

This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the test case.
PVElite will look at the minimum of this factor times its allowable times 1.5 and the skirt
yield stress times its allowable multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a
comparison to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (OPE)

PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and
the basic hot allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt operating allowable stress.
This minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in
the skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (TEST)

PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and
the basic hot allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt test allowable stress. This

Pop-up Input Fields PVElite - User Guide
minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the
skirt.
TOPWTH
TTA
HG
DS
DI
DC
TBA DO
BND
CG
TGA
Figure 20A - Geometry for The Base Ring Module

Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------------- Page 1
Basering Analysis : PVHB EXAMPLE ITEM: 1, 04:10pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, BASERING Number 1, Description: PVHB EXAMPLE
Analyze or Design the Basering AORD A

Design Temperature for Basering RNGTMP 300.00 F
Thickness of Basering TBA 2.0000 in.
Basering Material SA-516 70
Basering Operating Allowable Stress BASOPE 17500.00 psi
Basering Ambient Allowable Stress BASAMB 17500.00 psi
Inside Diameter of Basering DI 47.0000 in.
Outside Diameter of Basering DO 66.2500 in.
Nominal Diameter of Bolts BND 2.0000 in.

Bolt Operating Allowable Stress SA 25000.00 psi
Bolt Ambient Allowable Stress SABAMB 25000.00 psi
Number of Bolts NGIV 12
Diameter of Bolt Circle DC 59.5000 in.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete FPC 3000.0 psi
Thickness of Gusset Plates TGA .7500 in.

Temperature for Gusset Plates GUSTMP 100.0000 F
Average Width of Gusset Plates AVGWDT 5.0000 in.
Material for Gussets SA-516 70
Gusset Plate Elastic Modulus E 29000000.0 psi
Gusset Plate Yield Stress SY 38000.00 psi
Height of Gussets HG 12.0000 in.
Distance from Bolts to Gussets CG 4.0000 in.
Number of Gussets per bolt NG 2
Thickness of Top Ring/Plate TTA 2.0000 in.

Radial Width of the Top Ring/Plate TOPWTH 6.1250 in.
Top Ring or Plate Type per Moss TOPTYPE 4
External Corrosion Allowance CA .0000 in.
Skirt Thickness TS .5000 in.

Skirt Temperature SKTTEM 100.0000 F
Skirt Material SA-516 70
Skirt Operating Allowable Stress SKTOPE 17500.00 psi
Skirt Ambient Allowable Stress SKTAMB 17500.00 psi
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base DS 54.0000 in.
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Bottom Head SKTHED 54.0000 in.
Joint Efficiency of Skirt Weld ARCJNT .4900
Dead Weight of Vessel DW 36000.0 lb.

Operating Weight of Vessel ROW 36000.0 lb.
Test Weight of Vessel TW 36000.0 lb.

Operating Moment on Basering ROM 692100.0 ft.lb.

Test Moment on Basering TM 692100.0 ft.lb.
The Skirt Allowable Stress Multiplier SAM 1.0000

The Skirt Allowable Multiplier (Operating) BXOPE 1.0000
The Skirt Allowable Multiplier (Test) BXHYD 1.0000
Skirt Yield Stress Multiplier (Operating) SYXOPE 1.0000
Skirt Yield Stress Multiplier (Test) SYXHYD 1.0000
RESULTS FOR BASERING ANALYSIS : ANALYZE OPTION

Calculation of Load per Bolt, Operating Condition:
W/Bolt = (( 4 * M/DC ) - W ) / RN per Jawad & Farr, Eq. 12.3
W/Bolt = (( 4 * 8305200 / 59.500) - 36000 ) / 12
W/Bolt = 43527.7300 lb.
Required Area for Each Bolt, Based on Max Load 1.7411 sq.in.
Area Available in a Single Bolt 2.6520 sq.in.
Area Available in all the Bolts 31.8240 sq.in.
Bolt Stress Based on Approximate Analysis 16413.17 psi
Concrete Contact Area of Base Ring 1712.22 sq.in.

Concrete Contact Section Modulus of Base Ring 21315.69 in.^3
Calculation of Concrete Load, Operating Condition:

SC = ((ABT*SA+W)/CA) + M/CZ per Jawad & Farr Eq. 12.1
SC = (( 31.8240* 25000+ 36000)/ 1712.22) + 8305200/ 21315.69
SC = 875.31 psi
Calculation of Basering Thickness, (Simplified):

TB = RW * SQRT( 3 * SC / S ) + CA per Jawad & Farr Eq. 12.12
TB = 6.1250 * SQRT( 3 * 875 / 26250 ) + .0000
TB = 1.9372 in.
Results of Neutral Axis Shift Calculation:

Bearing Pressure on Concrete 478.85 psi
Stress in Bolt 12548.70 psi
Calculation of Basering Thickness, (N.A. Shift):

TBNA = RW * SQRT( 3 * SCNA / S) + CA per Jawad & Farr Eq. 12.12
TBNA = 6.1250 * SQRT( 3 * 478 / 26250 ) + .0000
TBNA = 1.4328 in.
Required Thickness of Top Ring/Plate in Tension:

(Calculated as a fixed beam per Megyesy)
FT = (SA*ABSS), Bolt Allowable Stress * Area
RM = (FT*2.0*CG)/8.0, Bending Moment
SB = (1.5*BASOPE), Allowable stress * 1.5
WT = (TOPWTH - BND), Width of Section
T = SQRT( 6 * RM / ( SB * WT )) + CA
T = SQRT( 6 * 66300 / ( 26250 * 4.1250 )) + .0000
T = 1.9167 in.
Required Thickness of Continuous Top Ring per Moss:

a = ( Dc-Ds )/2 Skirt Distance to Bolt Circle

P = Sa * Abss Maximum Bolt Load
l = Avgwdt Average Gusset Width
g1 = Gamma 1 Constant Term f( b/l )
g2 = Gamma 2 Constant Term f( b/l )
g = Flat distance/2 Nut 1/2 Dimension (from Tema)
Fb = ( 1.5 * Basope ) Allowable Stress
Mo = P/(4ã)[1.3(ln((2lsin(ãa/l)/(ãg)))+1]-g1*P/(4ã)
Tc = ( 6 * Mo / Fb )^1/2 + CA Required Thickness
Tc = ( 6 * 9425 / 26250 )^1/2 + .0000
Tc = 1.4678 in.
Required Thickness of Gusset in Tension:

T = ( SA*ABSS )/( NG*S*( AVGWDT )) + CA
Required thickness based on average cross-section .3789 in.
Actual thickness as entered by user .7500 in.
Required Thickness of Gusset in Compression, per AISC 1.5.1.3:

1. Allowed Compression at Given Thickness:
Factor Kl/r Per 1.5.1.3.1 110.7266
Factor Cc Per 1.5.1.3.1 122.7360
All. Buckling Str. per 1.5.1.3.3 11779.41 psi
Act. Buckling Str. at Given Thickness 8840.00 psi
Required Gusset thickness, + CA .6725 in.

2. Allowed Compression at Calculated Thickness:
Factor Kl/r Per 1.5.1.3.1 123.4821
Factor Cc Per 1.5.1.3.1 122.7360
All. Buckling Str. per 1.5.1.3.2 9793.61 psi
Act. Buckling Str. at Calculated Thickness 9858.35 psi
SUMMARY OF BASERING THICKNESS CALCULATIONS

Required Basering Thickness (simplfied) 1.9372 in.
Required Basering Thickness (N.A. Shift) 1.4328 in.
Actual Basering Thickness as entered by user 2.0000 in.
Required Top Ring/Plate Thickness as a Fixed-Beam 1.9167 in.

Required Top Ring Thickness per Moss(Type 4) 1.4678 in.
Actual Top Ring Thickness as entered by user 2.0000 in.
Required Gusset thickness, + CA .6725 in.

Actual Gusset Thickness as entered by user .7500 in.
TENSILE STRESS CALCULATIONS FOR SKIRT AT TOP HEAD:

S = M/( PI*R^2*T ) - F/(2*PI*R*T)
Operating Dead Load Test Load
Skirt Rad. Given by User 27.0000 27.0000 27.0000 in.
Skirt Thkn. Given by User .5000 .5000 .5000 in.
Bndg. Mom. Given by User 692100 692100 692100 ft.lb.
Axial Force Given by User 36000 36000 36000 lb.
Actual Stress in Skirt 6828 6828 6828 psi
Allowed Stress in Skirt 8575 8575 12862 psi

THICKNESS CALCULATION FOR SKIRT:

Required Thickness .3982 .3982 .2654 in.
Actual Thickness as Given .5000 .5000 .5000 in.
COMPRESSIVE STRESS CALCULATIONS AT BASE OF SKIRT:

S = M/(PI*R^2*T) + F/(2*PI*R*T)
Operating Dead Load Test Load
Skirt Rad. Given by User 27.0000 27.0000 27.0000 in.
Skirt Thkn. Given by User .5000 .5000 .5000 in.
Bndg. Mom. Given by User 692100 692100 692100 ft.lb.
Axial Force Given by User 36000 36000 36000 lb.
Actual Stress in Skirt 7677 7677 7677 psi
Allowed Stress in Skirt 15506 15506 23260 psi
THICKNESS CALCULATION FOR SKIRT AXIAL COMPRESSION:

Required Thickness .2835 .2835 .2092 in.
SUMMARY OF SKIRT THICKNESS: Operating Dead Load Test Load

Req. Thickness, Tension .3982 .3982 .2654 in.
Req. Thickness, Comp. .2835 .2835 .2092 in.

&KDSWHU
The Thin Joint Module
Introduction
The Thin Joint Module calculates the stresses in a metal bellows expansion joint of the
type typically used in piping systems and heat exchangers. The module does elastic stress
analysis for stresses due to internal pressure and closing or opening of the joint. The max-
imum combined stress is used to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the
appropriate formula in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26, 2001, A-
2001.

The purpose of the Thin Joint Module is to allow engineers and designers to evaluate or
design metal bellows expansion joints. Since the module uses the ASME Code procedure
for evaluating these joints, the calculations will be acceptable to fabricators, engineering
contractors, and petrochemical companies. Thus a consistent design basis and a simple
way to perform the calculations will be established, and individual engineers will be effec-
tive in evaluating these critical components.
The module calculates the required thickness and elastic stresses using formulas in the
ASME Section VIII Code, Division 1, Appendix 26. These formulas take into account
both internal pressure and axial joint movement. The appendix covers expansion joints up
to 1/8 inch thick, with multiple convolutions, and includes both reinforced and unrein-
forced expansion joints.
Each curve in the appendix 26 was digitized. The program picks points off of the curves
and interpolates for the results used in the stress calculations. These parameters are dis-
played as part of the output.
If the selected joint is reinforced or unreinforced PVElite will perform the various stress
and cycle life computations for that type of joint. Thus, there will be no extraneous output
for a joint type that is not of interest. In addition, for reinforced expansion joints, the
stresses in the reinforcing element and any bolted fastener which may be holding the ring
together are calculated as well.
The Thin Joint Module 21-1


Main Input Fields
Item Number
Enter the thin walled expansion joint number. This should typically start out at 1 and
increase by one for each expansion joint in the file.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description of the expansion joint in this field. This should relate in
some way to the expansion joint i.e. (a project id).
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles

Enter the number of cycles that the expansion joint is to be designed for. This value is to
be compared to the total number of cycles that this design will be capable of handling.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the expansion joint. During normal operation, expansion
joints typically run cooler than the piping/pressure vessel. Determine that temperature and
enter it here.

Enter the internal pressure to be exerted on the expansion joint. This analysis is limited to
internal pressure only. External pressure is not considered.
Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution

This is the value :
e = design axial movement of joint per convolution
For example, for a total design movement of 1 inch with an expansion joint that had 8 con-
volutions, this would result in e = 1/8 = .125 in/conv.
Expansion Joint Bellows Material

Typical expansion joints are formed from various stainless steels, monels and inconels. An
example of a material is SA-516 70.

Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the operating temperature. If your
material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.

Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the ambient temperature. If your
21-2 The Thin Joint Module

Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature

Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows operating tempera-
ture. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3
CODE for PRESSURE PIPING. The table is C-6.
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature

Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient tempera-
Material Category for Cycle Life Evaluation

Materials:
Carbon Steel
Low Alloy Steel
Martensitic Stainless
Austenitic Stainless
Nickel Chrome Iron
Nickel Copper
Inside Diameter of Bellows
Enter the inside diameter of the bellows. This value will normally be equal to the pipe or
vessel inside diameter. Some geometries are larger in diameter than the attached cylinder.
Thus, the bellows id (d) will be larger than the vessel/pipe id.
Convolution Depth
The convolution depth is the distance from the “top” of the convolution to the “trough” of
the convolution. This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code.
Convolution Pitch
This is the distance between the “tops” of successive bellows convolutions. This is
referred to as q in the ASME Code.
Bellows Minimum Thickness Before Forming

Enter the nominal thickness of the plate that the expansion joint is to be made of before it
is pressed or formed. Expansion joints are typically thin compared to the matching pipe.
Reinforcing Ring Present

Some applications of expansion joints include a continuous reinforcing ring which lies in
the convolutions. If your application includes a reinforcing ring, check this field.
Fastener Bolt Present

If the expansion design includes a reinforcing ring, it may be held together by a bolted
geometry in lieu of a welded ring geometry. If your application includes a fastener, check
this field.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Reinforcing Ring Cross-Sectional Area
Enter the cross sectional metal area of the reinforcing ring. Typical reinforcing rings can
be circular in shape or tear-drop shaped.
Reinforcing Ring Material

Enter the reinforcing ring material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. The material
can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while
the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification
and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the
Main Menu.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature

Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the operating temperature. If your mate-
rial is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the ambient temperature. If your material
is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.

Fastener Cross-Sectional Area

Enter the cross-sectional root area of one bolt that retains the reinforcing ring.
Effective Length of Fastener Bolt

Enter the effective length of the bolt that is being stressed. This is typically the distance
from the center of the nut to the center of the head on the bolt.
Fastener Material Specification

Enter the fastener material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. The material can be
selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while the
cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and
properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main
Menu.
Fastener Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature

Enter the allowable stress of the fastener material at the operating temperature. If your
Fastener Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

Enter the allowable stress of the fastener material at the ambient temperature. If your


d diam tm
UNREINFORCED BELLOWS
A-A
A AF
Equalizing
Reinforcing ring
rings q
A
End equalizing
ring
W
tm
Ar
Ar
d diam
REINFORCED BELLOWS
Figure 21A - Geometry for the Thin Joint Module

Example Problems
The following two example problems were adapted from ASME Section VIII Div. 1
Appendix 26. The first example is for an unreinforced geometry, while the second exam-
ple is for a reinforced geometry. Agreement for the results is excellent with the exception
of the reinforced example problem. As of this printing the value Ar (area in the reinforce-
ment) in the ASME problem was incorrect. Thus the computed value in the Code for Sar-
coma is also incorrect. All of the other results are in good agreement.
FileName: CHECKS --------------------------------- Page 1
Thinjnt Analysis :APP BB-8, A ITEM: 1, 04:23pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, THINJNT Number 1, Description: APP BB-8, A
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles NCYC 1800

Design Temperature of Expansion Joint TEMP 200.0 F
Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution E .1250 in.
Material of Expansion Joint Bellows MAT1 SA-240 304

Bellows Operating Allowable Stress ALLST1 17800.0 psi
Bellows Elastic Modulus at Design Temp. EMOD1 .27700E+08 psi
Bellows Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temp. EAMB1 .2830E+08 psi
Material Category for Cycle Life Evaluation AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
Inside Diameter of Bellows D 24.0 in.

Convolution Depth W 1.0000 in.
Convolution Pitch Q 1.1250 in.
Bellows Minimum Thickness before Forming TM .0500 in.
Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor Kg 1.0000
Nominal Bellows Thickness Based on given Minimum

T = ( TM * SQRT( D/( D + W ) ) )
T = ( .0500 * SQRT( 24.00/( 24.00 + 1.0000 ) ) )
T = .0490 in.
Cross Sectional Area of Bellows

AB = ( 0.571 * Q + 2.0 * W ) * T
AB = ( 0.571 * 1.1250 + 2.0 * 1.0000 ) * .0490
AB = .1294 sq.in
Final Reinforcement Ratio = 1.0000
Minimum Required Thickness for Unreinforced Bellows

Tu = P*(D+W)/(ALLST1*(1.14+4.0*W/Q))
Tu = 150.0*( 24.0+ 1.0000)/( 17800.0*(1.14+4.0* 1.0000/ 1.1250))
Tu = .0449 in.
Required Bellows Thickness for Pressure = .0449 in.
Actual Knuckle Radius for one Convolution

RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0500 / 2 )
RKN = .2562 in.
Allowed Knuckle Radius for one Convolution

TM3 = 3.0 * TM = .1500 in.
Stiffening Factor for Bellows Under Pressure

RKS = 0.3-( 100.0/( 0.6 * P**1.5 + 320.0 ) )**2
RKS = 0.3-( 100.0/( 0.6 * 150.0**1.5 + 320.0 ) )**2
RKS = .2951
SUMMARY for PRESSURE CALCULATIONS :

Nom. Bellows Thickness based on given Minimum T .0490 in.
Required Bellows Thickness for Pressure TREQ .0449 in.
Actual Knuckle Radius for One Convolution RKN .2562 in.
Allowed Knuckle Radius for One Convolution 3*TM .1500 in.
Cross-Sectional Area for One Convolution Ab .1294 sq.in.
Fraction of Pressure Resisted by Bellows R 1.0000
Stiffening Factor for Bellows under Pressure RKS .2951
SUMMARY of FIGURES BB-3, BB-4, BB-5

Horizontal Figure Factor q/2W .56250
Vertical Figure Factor q/(2.2((d+w)**.5 *t)) .46207
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-3, Cp Cp .63207
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-4, Cf Cf 1.74880
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-4, Cd Cd 1.78330
STRESS RESULTS for UNREINFORCED BELLOWS

Circumferential Stress in the Bellows
SCMPU = P*(D+W)/(T*(1.14+4.0*W/Q))
SCMPU = 150.0*( 24.0+ 1.0000)/( .0490*(1.14+4.0* 1.0000/ 1.1250))
SCMPU = 16301.9 psi
Meridional Membrane Stress due to Pressure

SMMPU = ( P*W )/( 2.0*T )
SMMPU = ( 150.0 * 1.0000 )/( 2.0 * .0490 )
SMMPU = 1530.9 psi
Meridional Bending Stress due to Pressure

SMBPU = ( P * W * W * CP )/( 2.0 * T * T )
SMBPU = ( 150.0* 1.0000* 1.0000* .63207 )/( 2.0 * .0490 * .0490 )
SMBPU = 19752.2 psi
Meridional Membrane Stress due to Deflection

SMMDU = ( EAMB1*T*T*E )/(2.0*W^3*Cf )
SMMDU = ( 28300000* .0490* .0490* .1250 )/(2.0* 1.0000^3* 1.74880 )
SMMDU = 2427.4 psi
Meridional Bending Stress due to Deflection

SMBDU = 5.0*EAMB1*T*E/(3.0*W*W*CD)
SMBDU = 5.0* 28300000* .0490* .1250/(3.0* 1.0000* 1.0000* 1.78330)
SMBDU = 161967.2 psi

Summation of all Meridional Stresses

STOTU = (SMBDU+SMMDU+SMBPU+SMMPU) = 185677 psi
The Total Cycle Life

CYCU = (FM/((FN*RKG*STOTU/EMOD1)-FO))** 2.00
CYCU = ( 2.5/(( 14.2* 1.0000* 185677/ 27700000)- .020))**2
CYCU = 1106.
Maximum Stress for Given Cycle Life

SMAXC = (FM/(RNCYC**(1/2.00))+FO)*(EMOD1/FN*RKG)
SMAXC = ( 2.5/( 1800**(1/2.00))+ .020)*( 27700000/ 14.2* 1.0000)
SMAXC = 153960.4 psi
STRESSES in BELLOWS, psi Actual Allowed

Circumferential membrane, pressure Scmp 16301 17800
Meridional Membrane, pressure Smmp 1530 17800
Meridional Bending , pressure Smbp 19752
Meridional Membrane, deflection Smmd 2427
Meridional Bending , deflection Smbd 161967
Meridional Membrane + Bending , pressure 21283 26700

Summation of all Meridional Stresses 185677 153960
Stress Amplitude for Cycle Life Evaluation 185677

Cycle Life for Bellows 1105

FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------------ Page 1

Thinjnt Analysis :APP BB-8, B ITEM: 2, 04:23pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, THINJNT Number 2, Description: APP BB-8, B
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles NCYC 900

Design Temperature of Expansion Joint TEMP 200.0 F
Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution E .1000 in.
Material of Expansion Joint Bellows MAT1 SA-240 304

Bellows Operating Allowable Stress ALLST1 17800.0 psi
Bellows Elastic Modulus at Design Temp. EMOD1 .27700E+08 psi
Bellows Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temp. EAMB1 .2830E+08 psi
Material Category for Cycle Life Evaluation AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
Inside Diameter of Bellows D 24.0 in.

Convolution Depth W 1.2500 in.
Convolution Pitch Q 1.1250 in.
Bellows Minimum Thickness before Forming TM .0600 in.
Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor Kg 1.0000
Reinforcing Ring Cross Sectional Area AR .1963 sq.in.

Reinforcing Ring Material MAT2 SA-240 304
Operating Allowable Stress of Ring ALLST2 17800.0 psi
Ambient Elastic Modulus of Ring EMOD2 27700000.0 psi
Nominal Bellows Thickness Based on given Minimum

T = ( TM * SQRT( D/( D + W ) ) )
T = ( .0600 * SQRT( 24.00/( 24.00 + 1.2500 ) ) )
T = .0585 in.
Cross Sectional Area of Bellows

AB = ( 0.571 * Q + 2.0 * W ) * T
AB = ( 0.571 * 1.1250 + 2.0 * 1.2500 ) * .0585
AB = .1838 sq.in
Reinforcement Ratio, Reinforcement

RC = ( AB * EMOD1 )/( AR * EMOD2 )
RC = ( .1838 * 27700000 )/( .1963 * 27700000 )
RC = .9364
Final Reinforcement Ratio = .9364
Minimum Required Thickness for Reinforced Bellows

Tr = P*(D+W)/(ALLST1*(1.14+4*W/Q))*(R/(R+1.0))
Tr = 450.0*( 24.0+ 1.2500)/( 17800.0*(1.14+4.0* 1.2500/ 1.1250))
* ( .9364 /( .9364 + 1.0 ) )
Tr = .0553 in.
Required Bellows Thickness for Pressure = .0553 in.
Actual Knuckle Radius for one Convolution

RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0600 / 2 )
RKN = .2512 in.
Allowed Knuckle Radius for one Convolution

TM3 = 3.0 * TM = .1800 in.
Stiffening Factor for Bellows Under Pressure

RKS = 0.3-( 100.0/( 0.6 * P**1.5 + 320.0 ) )**2
RKS = 0.3-( 100.0/( 0.6 * 450.0**1.5 + 320.0 ) )**2
RKS = .2997
SUMMARY for PRESSURE CALCULATIONS :

Nom. Bellows Thickness based on given Minimum T .0585 in.
Required Bellows Thickness for Pressure TREQ .0553 in.
Actual Knuckle Radius for One Convolution RKN .2512 in.
Allowed Knuckle Radius for One Convolution 3*TM .1800 in.
Cross-Sectional Area for One Convolution Ab .1838 sq.in.
Fraction of Pressure Resisted by Bellows R .9364
Stiffening Factor for Bellows under Pressure RKS .2997
SUMMARY of FIGURES BB-3, BB-4, BB-5

Horizontal Figure Factor q/2W .45000
Vertical Figure Factor q/(2.2((d+w)**.5 *t)) .42076
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-3, Cp Cp .68792
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-4, Cf Cf 1.62577
Value Interpolated from Figure BB-4, Cd Cd 1.62942
STRESS RESULTS for REINFORCED BELLOWS

Circumferential Stress in the Bellows
SCMPR = P*(D+W)/(T*(1.14+4*W/Q))*(R/(R+1.0))
SCMPR = 450.0*( 24.0+ 1.2500)/( .0585*(1.14+4.0* 1.2500/ 1.1250))
* ( .9364 / ( .9364 + 1.0 ) )
SCMPR = 16820.4 psi
Meridional Membrane Stress due to Pressure

SMMPR = P*( W-RKS*RKG*Q )/( 2.0 *T )
SMMPR = 450.0*( 1.2500- .2997* 1.0000* 1.1250 )/( 2.0 * .0585 )
SMMPR = 3511.0 psi
Meridional Bending Stress due to Pressure

SMBPR = (P/2.0)*CP*((W-RKS*RKG*Q)/T)^2
SMBPR = ( 450.0 / 2.0 ) * .68792
* ( ( 1.2500- .2997* 1.0000* 1.1250)/T )^2
SMBPR = 37690.3 psi
Meridional Membrane Stress due to Deflection

SMMDR = (EAMB1*T*T*E)/(2*CF*(W-RKS*RKG*Q)^3)
SMMDR = ( 28300000 * .0585 * .0585 * .1000 )
/ ( 2 * 1.62577 * ( 1.2500- .2997* 1.0000* 1.1250 )^3 )
SMMDR = 3915.7 psi
Meridional Bending Stress due to Deflection

SMBDR = (5*EAMB1*T*E)/(3*CD*(W-RKS*RKG*Q)^2)

SMBDR = 5 * 28300000 * .0585 * .1000

/ ( 3.0* 1.62942 * ( 1.2500- .2997* 1.0000* 1.1250 )^2 )
SMBDR = 203222.1 psi
Stresses in the Reinforcement

SRCMP = (P*Q*(D+W)*(1/(RC+1)))/(2*AR)
SRCMP = ( 450.0* 1.1250*( 24.0+ 1.2500)*(1/( .9364+1)))/(2* .1963)
SRCMP = 16814.3 psi
Summation of all Meridional Stresses

STOTR = (SMBDR+SMMDR+SMBPR+SMMPR) = 248339 psi
The Total Cycle Life

CYCR = (FM/((FN*RKG*STOTR/EMOD1)-FO))** 2.00
CYCR = ( 2.5/(( 14.2* 1.0000* 248339/ 27700000)- .020))**2
CYCR = 543.
Maximum Stress for Given Cycle Life

SMAXC = (FM/(RNCYC**(1/2.00))+FO)*(EMOD1/FN*RKG)
SMAXC = ( 2.5/( 900**(1/2.00))+ .020)*( 27700000/ 14.2* 1.0000)
SMAXC = 201572.8 psi
STRESSES in BELLOWS, psi Actual Allowed

Circumferential membrane, pressure Scmp 16820 17800
Meridional Membrane, pressure Smmp 3511 17800
Meridional Bending , pressure Smbp 37690
Meridional Membrane, deflection Smmd 3915
Meridional Bending , deflection Smbd 203222
Meridional Membrane + Bending , pressure 41201 53400

Summation of all Meridional Stresses 248339 201572
Stress Amplitude for Cycle Life Evaluation 248339

Cycle Life for Bellows 542
STRESSES in REINFORCEMENT, psi Actual Allowed

Circumferential Membrane, pressure 16814 17800


&KDSWHU
The Thick Joint Module
Introduction
This module applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers which require flexible elements to
reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint
loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) are not included within the purview
of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs are based upon the
equivalent geometry used in “Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers” by S. Kopp and M.F.
Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell the-
ory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with
this method. (TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61).
The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions:
• Applied loadings are axial
• Torsional loads are negligible
• The flexible elements are sufficiently thick to avoid instability.
• The flexible elements are axisymmetric.
• All dimensions are in inches and all forces are in pounds.
(TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61: note that other systems of units may
be used for input and output, since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its
internal calculations.)
The sequence of calculation used by the program is as follows:
1. Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user input)
2. Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22.
3. Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3
4. Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4
5. Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell ele-
ments per RCB-8.5
6. Calculate Fax for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you
run the PVElite Tubesheet module to determine the differential expansion and shell-
side and tubeside equivalent pressures.
7. Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7
The Thick Joint Module 22-1

Introduction PVElite - User Guide
8. Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the
Code, for the load conditions as noted in step 6.
9. Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary.
Note More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate hydrotest and uncorroded con-
ditions.
Figure 22A shows geometry for the Thick Joint module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and
RCB-8.22). Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for the analysis are
shown. The discussion of input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure.
A recent computational change was made to the program to allow users to better comply
with the design rules for allowable stresses per appendix CC of the ASME Code. In previ-
ous versions, the program designed expansion joints based on fatigue analysis techniques.
The default behavior for computation of the allowables has not changed. If you prefer to
design per CC then check the Use App CC box. Also the program uses the minimum of
the expansion joint allowable stress and the shell allowable stress for the default to use
when designing for the shellside pressure case. If you wish to use the expansion joint
allowable only, then check the Use EXP. Jt. Allowables box.
22-2 The Thick Joint Module


Main Input Fields
Expansion Joint Number

Enter an ID number for the Expansion Joint. This may be the item number on the drawing,
or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Expansion Joint Description

Design Temperature for Shell and Expansion Joint

Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure.
The PVElite program will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN mate-
rials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by
hand, you are responsible to update them for the given temperature.
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint bellows.
Note that this is not the diameter at the shell, but the inside diameter at the outside of the
bellows.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as ID.
Expansion Joint Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint bellows.
Note that this is not the diameter at the shell, but the outside diameter at the outside of the
bellows.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as OD.
Expansion Joint Flange (Minimum) Wall Thickness

Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming.
This will usually be somewhat thinner than the unformed metal.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as te.
Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint.
This value will be subtracted from the minimum thickness of the flange or web for the
joint.
Material Name

Note that the program uses the external pressure charts to determine the modulus of elas-
ticity and material type for the analysis.

temperature.
Expansion Joint Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient
temperature.

Enter the inside diameter of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as G.

Enter the actual wall thickness of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is
attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as ts.

Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell wall.
Shell Cylinder Length

Enter the length of the shell cylinder to the nearest body flange or head.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 included the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the
cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements
are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the
cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA pro-
cedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this
length if less than the cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as li.

Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Offset (Straight Flange)

Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion
joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the shell diameter for joints with a square inside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as fa.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius

Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp inside corner.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as ra.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset

Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion
joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero, and that for an expansion joint with
a outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance is the distance from the end of the
knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as fb.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius

Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp outside corner. (Flanged Only)
This value is shown on Figure 22A as rb.
Use Appendix CC ?
Check this box to use the ASME Sec. VIII, Div.1, APP-CC design rules for allowable
stresses. Otherwise the program will use the fatigue analysis techniques.
Use Expansion Joint Allowable Stress

The program uses the minimum of the expansion joint allowable stress and the shell
allowable stress for the shellside pressure case. Check this box if you wish to use the
expansion joint allowable value only.
Is There an Outer Cylinder?

Check this field if there is a cylindrical section attached to the expansion joint at the OD.
This will always be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolute. It
may also be true when there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half con-
volutes, as in the case of certain inlet nozzle geometries for heat exchangers.

Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet)

You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis of fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Shellside Design Pressure

You do not need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program to get this value - it is simply the
design pressure for the shell.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)

listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded

As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Shellside Prime
Design Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Tubeside Design Pressure

You do not need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program to get this value - it is simply the
design pressure for the channel.
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)

Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded

As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Tubeside Prime
Design Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Analyze Differential Expansion?

Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you ana-
lyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded

As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Differential
Expansion Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.

Analyze Shellside Pressure

Analyze Tubeside Pressure

Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure

Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion

Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion

Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion

Pop-Up Input Fields
Outer Cylindrical Element Thickness

Enter the actual wall thickness of the outer cylindrical element at the point where the
expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as to.
Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance for the outer cylindrical element.
Outer Cylindrical Element Length

Enter the length of the outer cylinder to the nearest body flange or head, or to the center-
line of the convolute.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 includes the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the
cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements

are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the
cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA pro-
cedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this
length if less than the cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as lo.

The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant
for the joint, the stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed
below.
Spring Constant
The program does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring
constant for the joint, which can be used in the Tubesheet program or elsewhere to deter-
mine the effect of the joint on the heat exchanger design.
Stresses
The program calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the
expansion joint and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix CC, this stress should be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the
annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of the inner and outer torus (or sharp
corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material at operating tem-
perature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure -
stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allow-
ables. Thus the program only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the
case of shellside pressure.
Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys,
nickel-iron chromium alloys and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as fol-
lows:
N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17
For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equa-
tion for cycle life is:
N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17
Where:
Kg = fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for geometrical stress concentration
factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions.
The range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical
shapes and its maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a
Kg of 1.0 when the knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thick-
ness.
Sn = Maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible
element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection.
Eb = Modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The program determines both the modu-
lus of elasticity and the material type from the name of the external pressure chart given by

the user. To check the name of the external pressure chart in your input, move to the mate-
rial name and press [E] (Material Edit).
Figure 22A - Geometry for the Thick Joint Module

Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ---------------------------------- Page 1
Thickjnt Analysis : COMP. TO ANSYS ITEM: 1, 04:30pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, THICKJNT Number 1, Description: COMP. TO ANSYS
Design Temperature for Expansion Joint TEMP 214.3000 F

Inside Diameter of Expansion Joint RID 33.0000 in.
Outside Diameter of Expansion Joint ROD 34.0000 in.
Wall thickness of Expansion Joint TE .4378 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Expansion Joint CAE .0000 in.
Material for Expansion Joint SA-240 316
Operating Allowable Stress, Expansion Joint SOE 18742.80 psi
Ambient Allowable Stress, Expansion Joint SAE 18800.00 psi
Inside Diameter of Shell G 25.2500 in.

Wall thickness of Shell TS .3750 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Shell CAS .0000 in.
Length of Shell Cylinder RLI 40.0000 in.
Material for Shell SA-516 70
Operating Allowable Stress, Shell SOS 17500.00 psi
Ambient Allowable Stress, Shell SAS 17500.00 psi
Length of Straight Flange, Joint ID FA 1.0000 in.

Radius of Knuckle, Joint ID RA 1.5000 in.
Length of Straight Flange, Joint OD FB 1.0000 in.
Radius of Knuckle, Joint OD RB 1.5000 in.
Thickness of Outer Cylinder TO .5000 in.

Corrosion Allowance for Outer Cylinder CAO .0000 in.
Length of Outer Cylinder RLO 1.0000 in.
Outer Cylinder Material Name SA-240 316
Operating Allowable Stress, Outer Cylinder SOO 18742.80 psi
Ambient Allowable Stress, Outer Cylinder SAO 18800.00 psi
Differential Expansion Pressure PD 515.9200 psig

Shellside Design Pressure PS 200.0000 psig
Shellside Prime Design Pressure PSP -38.7500 psig
Tubeside Design Pressure PT 100.0000 psig
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure PTP 86.8900 psig
Analyze for Differential Expansion Y

Analyze for Shellside Pressure Y
Analyze for Tubeside Pressure Y
Analyze for Shellside + Tubeside Pressure Y
Analyze for Shellside + Differential Expansion Y
Analyze for Tubeside + Differential Expansion Y
Analyze for Shellside + Tubeside + Differential N
Results per TEMA 1988 :
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.22 Effective Geometry Constants:

Ta = IF(RA<>0,Te,Ts) .4378 in.

Tb = IF(RA<>0,Te,To) .4378 in.
A = ( G + TA ) / 2.0 12.8439 in.
B = (ROD-TB)/2-(4-PI)*(RA+RB)/4 16.1373 in.
RLA = FA + PI * RA / 4.0 + TE / 2.0 2.3970 in.
RLB = FB + PI * RB / 4.0 + TE / 2.0 2.3970 in.
YA = MIN ( RLA + RLI, 2 * SQRT ( A * TA ) ) 4.7426 in.
YB = MIN ( RLB + RLO, 2 * SQRT ( B * TB ) ) 3.3970 in.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.30 Element Flexibility Factors:

Elastic Modulus for Expansion Joint Material EE .272E+08 psi
Elastic Modulus for Shell Material ES .290E+08 psi
Elastic Modulus for Outer Cylinder Matl. EO .272E+08 psi
EA = IF (RA <> 0, EE, ES) .272E+08 psi

EB = IF (RB <> 0, EE, EO) .272E+08 psi
Ba = 1.285 / SQRT( A * TA ) .5419 1/in.
Bb = 1.285 / SQRT( B * TB ) .4834 1/in.
Da = 0.0916 * EA * TA**3 209069.20 in. lb.
Db = 0.0916 * EB * TB**3 209069.20 in. lb.
De = 0.0916 * EE * TE**3 209069.20 in. lb.
Wa = 2 * BA * YA 5.1400
RJ1A = SIN( WA / 2.0 ) * SINH( WA / 2 ) 3.5134
RJ2A = COS( WA / 2.0 ) * COSH( WA / 2 ) -5.5266
ZZA = RJ1A**2 + RJ2A**2 42.8877
RK0A = SINH( WA ) + SIN( WA ) 84.4450
RK1A = ( COSH( WA ) + COS( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0158
RK2A = ( SINH( WA ) - SIN( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0216
RK3A = ( COSH( WA ) - COS( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0059
Wb = 2 * BB * YB 3.2845
RJ1B = SIN( WB / 2.0 ) * SINH( WB / 2 ) 2.4803
RJ2B = COS( WB / 2.0 ) * COSH( WB / 2 ) -.1914
ZZB = RJ1B**2 + RJ2B**2 6.1887
RK0B = SINH( WB ) + SIN( WB ) 13.1872
RK1B = ( COSH( WB ) + COS( WB ) ) / RK0B .9386
RK2B = ( SINH( WB ) - SIN( WB ) ) / RK0B 1.0216
RK3B = ( COSH( WB ) - COS( WB ) ) / RK0B 1.0887
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.31 Cylinder Flexibility Factors:

C1A = ( RLA / SQRT( A * TA ) ) 1.0108
C2A = ( TS / TA ) .8566
C3A = ( EA / ES ) .9379
C4A = -0.364661+(0.338172/C2A)-(0.0366351/C2A**2 -.0198
C5A = -1.06871+(1.01164/C2A)-(0.122627/C2A**2) -.0548
C6A = 0.0696709+(1.76415*C2A)-(5.46103*C2A**3) -1.8512
C7A = -0.142734+(0.918656*C2A)-(2.00749*C2A**3) -.6174
C8A = (C5A/C1A**2-C6A/C1A**3+C7A/C1A**4-C4A)
/(C3A**0.2) 1.1821
EAA = 2.718**C8A 3.2609
C1B = ( RLB / SQRT( B * TB ) ) .9018

C2B = ( TO / TB ) 1.1421

C3B = ( EB / EO ) 1.0000
C4B = (3.3731-1.707962*C2B+0.226216*C2B**2)/1000 .0017
C5B = -0.403287+0.320037*C2B-0.0307508*C2B**2 -.0779
C6B = -0.684978+0.582549*C2B-0.0547812*C2B**2 -.0911
C7B = -0.201334+0.168201*C2B-0.015728*C2B**2 -.0298
C8B = (C5B/C1B**2-C6B/C1B**3+C7B/C1B**4-C4B)
/(C3B**0.2) -.0182
EBB = 2.718**C8B .9819
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.40 Element Geometry Factors:

RY1 = (EAA*(RK3A-RK2A**2/(2*RK1A))/(DA*BA)) 14.1679 / 10^6
RY2 = (EBB*(RK3B-RK2B**2/(2*RK1B))/(DB*BB)) 5.1753 / 10^6
C = (A**2 / (B**2 - A**2)) 1.7284
D = ( B / A ) 1.2564
RX1 = -A * C * (0.769 + 1.428 * D * D) / DE -321.0036 / 10^6
RX2 = 2.2 * A * C * D * D / DE 368.7490 / 10^6
RX3 = -A*A*(1.538+LN(D)*(2+C*(2+3.71*D*D)))
/(4*DE) -1.0049 / 10^3
RX4 = ( -2.2 * B * C ) / DE -293.4925 / 10^6
RX5 = (B * C * (0.769 * D * D + 1.428) / DE) 352.4486 / 10^6
RX6 = (-A*B*(1.538 + 5.714*C*ln(D)) / (4*DE)) -939.8965 / 10^6
XBOT = (RX1 - RY1) * (RX5 + RY2) - (RX2 * RX4) -.0116 / 10^6
RX7 = (RX2 * RX6 - RX3 * RX5 - RX3 * RY2) / XBOT -1.0980
RX8 = (RX3 * RX4 - RX1 * RX6 + RX6 * RY1) / XBOT 1.7271
RQ1 = 0.385 * A * A + 1.429 * C * B * B * ln(D) 210.3250

RQ2 = ( -0.385 - 1.429 * C * ln(D)) * B * B -247.0719
RQ3 = .25*A*B*B*(1.269/(C*D*D)+3.714*C*ln(D)^2) 668.5906
GG = ( A / B ) .7959
GST = (GG**4 * ln(GG) / (1-GG**2)) -.2499
RM1 = 0.51 - 0.635 * GG**2 + GST -.1422
RM2 = 0.635 * (1 - GG**2 ) + GST -17.1808 / 10^3
RM3 = 2.357 * GG**2 + 3.714 * GST .5649
TEMA RCB 8.50 Flexible Element Stiffness (lbs/in):

SJ = 2*PI*A*DE/( RX7*RQ1 + RX8*RQ2 + RQ3 ) 1.5418 * 10^6
SJF = (1.0 / (1.0 / SJ + 1.0 / SJ)) .7709 * 10^6
Analysis of Differential Expansion
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.60 Induced Axial Force:

Tubeside Equivalent Pressure for this case, P1C .000 psig
Shellside Prime Pressure for this case, PSPC .000 psig
Differential Expansion Pressure for this Case, PDC 515.920 psig
Shellside Pressure for this Case, PSC .000 psig
Equivalent Pressure, PSS = P1C + PSPC - PDC -515.920 psig
Induced Axial Force, FAX = A * PSS / 2.0 -3313.213 lb.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.70 Flexible Element Moments

THA = ( (Ps*B^3) / (8*DE) ) *
(-2*GG*RM2-RM3/GG-GG^3/2-2*GG^3*LN(GG)) = .0000 / 10^6
THB = (Ps*B**3)*(-2*RM2-RM3+0.5-GG**2)/(8*DE) .0000 / 10^6
ZA = (Ps*A**2-0.3*A*FAX)/(EA*TA) 1.0721 / 10^3
ZB = (Ps*B^2-0.3*(A*FAX+((B^2-A^2)/2)*Ps))

/ (EB*TB) 1.0721 / 10^3

MT1A = (RX5+RY2)*(-THA-FAX*RX3-BA*ZA) -1.1909 / 10^3
MT2A = RX2*(FAX*RX6+THB-(BB*RK2B*ZB/RK1B)) 1.1481 / 10^3
RMA = (MT1A+MT2A)/XBOT 3.6737 * 10^3
MT1B = (RY1-RX1) *
(THB+FAX*RX6-(BB*RK2B*ZB/RK1B)) 1.0436 / 10^3
MT2B = RX4*(FAX*RX3+THA+BA*ZA) -977.3136 / 10^6
RMB = (MT1B+MT2B)/XBOT -5.6912 * 10^3

RA11 = -C*RMA+C*D*D*RMB+0.65*A*C*FAX*ln(GG) -10.9644 * 10^3
RA12 = PSS*(0.325*RM2*B*B+0.4125*A*A) .0000 / 10^6
RA1 = (RA1D1-RA12) -10.9644 * 10^3
RA21 = C*RMA-C*RMB-0.65*A*C*FAX*ln(GG) 5.2732 * 10^3
RA22 = 0.0875*RM3*PSS*B*B .0000 / 10^6
RA2 = B*B*(RA21+RA22) 1.3732 * 10^6
RA3 = 0.206*PSS .0000 / 10^6
RA4 = 0.65*A*(FAX-0.5*A*PSS) -27.6605 * 10^3
Stress in Expansion Joint Flange:

SBX(R) = (6.0 / TE**2) * (RA1 + RA2/(R*R) + RA3*R*R + RA4*ln(R/B))
Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., 115001.80 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., -178157.20 psi
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.73 Cylindrical Element Stresses
For the Inner Cylinder at X = YA

DEA = +RRA*(PSS*RRA-0.3*F2A)/(EA*TYA) 1.2516 / 10^3
B1A = (1/ZZA)*(RJ2A*RMA/(2*BA^2*EAA*DA)-RJ1A*DEA -1.2849 / 10^3
B2A = (1/ZZA)*(-RJ1A*RMA/(2*BA*BA*EAA*DA)
-RJ2A*DEA) -590.3668 / 10^6
U1A = +BA*(YA-YA) .0000 / 10^6
U2A = B1A*SIN(U1A)*SINH(U1A)+B2A*COS(U1A)
*COSH(U1A) -590.3668 / 10^6
SMYA = EA*(DEA+U2A)/RRA 1.4003 * 10^3
For the Inner Cylinder at X = LA

DEA = RRA*(PSS*RRA-0.3*F2A)/(EA*TYA) 1.2516 / 10^3
B1A = (1/ZZA)*(RJ2A*RMA/(2*BA^2*EAA*DA)-RJ1A*DEA -1.2849 / 10^3
B2A = (1/ZZA)*(-RJ1A*RMA/(2*BA^2*EAA*DA)-RJ2A*DE -590.3668 / 10^6
U1A = BA*(YA-LA) 1.2711
U2A = B1A*SIN(U1A)*SINH(U1A)+B2A*COS(U1A)*COSH(U -2.3509 / 10^3
SMYA = EA*(DEA+U2A)/RRA -2.3281 * 10^3
For the Outer Cylinder at X = YB

DEB = RRB*(PSS*RRB-0.3*F2B)/(EB*TYB) 1.0721 / 10^3
B1B = (1/ZZB)*(RJ2B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ1B*DEB 1.4046 / 10^3
B2B = (1/ZZB)*(-RJ1B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ2B*DE 23.8024 / 10^3
U1B = BB*(YB-YB) .0000 / 10^6
U2B = B1B*SIN(U1B)*SINH(U1B)+B2B*COS(U1B)
*COSH(U1B) 23.8024 / 10^3
SMYB = EB*(DEB+U2B)/RRB 41.9267 * 10^3

For the Outer Cylinder at X = LB

DEB = RRB*(PSS*RRB-0.3*F2B)/(EB*TYB) 1.0721 / 10^3
B1B = (1/ZZB)*(RJ2B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ1B*DEB 1.4046 / 10^3
B2B = (1/ZZB)*(-RJ1B*RMB/(2*BB*BB*EBB*DB)-RJ2B*D 23.8024 / 10^3
U1B = BB*(YB-RLB) .4834
U2B = B1B*SIN(U1B)*SINH(U1B)+B2B*COS(U1B)
*COSH(U1B) 23.9138 / 10^3
SMLB = EB*(DEB+U2B)/RRB 42.1145 * 10^3
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8.74 Maximum Cyclic Stresses

Evaluated per ASME A-97 Appendix CC, Paragraph CC-3(c):
For the Inner Cylinder:

SCLA = ABS(6.0*RMA/ (T*T)) + ABS(F2A/T) .1226 * 10^6
RNA= 47.11*EXP((ln(SCLA*28.3E6/EB)-14.12)**2/1.023 11.1028 * 10^3
For the Outer Cylinder:

SCLB = ABS(6.0*RMB/ (T*T)) + ABS(F2B/T) .1842 * 10^6
RNB= 47.11*EXP((ln(SCLB*28.3E6/EB)-14.12)**2/1.023 1.9882 * 10^3
Analysis of Shellside Pressure

P1C = .000 PSPC= -38.750 PDC = .000
PSC = 200.000 PSS = -38.750 FAX = -248.851

THA -.354 THB -.334
ZA 2.851 /10^3 ZB 4.214 /10^3
MT1A 36.591 /10^6 MT2A -37.612 /10^6 RMA 87.651
MT1B -34.187 /10^6 MT2B 30.030 /10^6 RMB 357.143

RA11 1.643 *10^3 RA12 13.319 *10^3 RA1 -11.676 *10^3
RA21 -1.285 *10^3 RA22 2.574 *10^3 RA2 .336 *10^6
RA3 41.200 RA4 -12.800 *10^3

Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., 2406.65 psi
Location: (R) 14.0268 in., -2191.15 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., 10695.02 psi

DEA 3.329 /10^3 B1A -300.896 /10^6 B2A 411.004 /10^6
U1A .000 /10^6 U2A 411.004 /10^6 SMYA 7.920 *10^3

DEA 3.329 /10^3 B1A -300.896 /10^6 B2A 411.004 /10^6
U1A 1.271 U2A -238.757 /10^6 SMLA 6.544 *10^3


DEB 4.214 /10^3 B1B -1.804 /10^3 B2B -1.361 /10^3
U1B .000 /10^6 U2B -1.361 /10^3 SMYB 4.808 *10^3

DEB 4.214 /10^3 B1B -1.804 /10^3 B2B -1.361 /10^3
U1B .483 U2B -1.770 /10^3 SMLB 4.119 *10^3


SCLA 3.312 *10^3 RNA 1.000 *10^6

SCLB 12.079 *10^3 RNB 1.000 *10^6
Analysis of Tubeside Pressure

P1C = 13.110 PSPC= .000 PDC = .000
PSC = .000 PSS = 13.110 FAX = 84.192

THA .000 /10^6 THB .000 /10^6
ZA -27.242 /10^6 ZB -27.242 /10^6
MT1A 30.261 /10^6 MT2A -29.174 /10^6 RMA -93.352
MT1B -26.518 /10^6 MT2B 24.834 /10^6 RMB 144.618

RA11 278.616 RA12 .000 /10^6 RA1 278.616
RA21 -133.998 RA22 .000 /10^6 RA2 -34.895 *10^3
RA3 .000 /10^6 RA4 702.878

Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., -2922.30 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., 4527.14 psi

DEA -31.805 /10^6 B1A 32.650 /10^6 B2A 15.002 /10^6
U1A .000 /10^6 U2A 15.002 /10^6 SMYA -35.584

DEA -31.805 /10^6 B1A 32.650 /10^6 B2A 15.002 /10^6
U1A 1.271 U2A 59.740 /10^6 SMLA 59.159

DEB -27.242 /10^6 B1B -35.692 /10^6 B2B -604.840 /10^6
U1B .000 /10^6 U2B -604.840 /10^6 SMYB -1.065 *10^3


DEB -27.242 /10^6 B1B -35.692 /10^6 B2B -604.840 /10^6
U1B .483 U2B -607.672 /10^6 SMLB -1.070 *10^3


SCLA 3.115 *10^3 RNA 1.000 *10^6

SCLB 4.680 *10^3 RNB 1.000 *10^6
Analysis of Shellside + Tubeside Pressure

P1C = 13.110 PSPC= -38.750 PDC = .000
PSC = 200.000 PSS = -25.640 FAX = -164.659

THA -.354 THB -.334
ZA 2.824 /10^3 ZB 4.187 /10^3
MT1A 66.852 /10^6 MT2A -66.786 /10^6 RMA -5.701
MT1B -60.705 /10^6 MT2B 54.864 /10^6 RMB 501.762

RA11 1.921 *10^3 RA12 13.319 *10^3 RA1 -11.398 *10^3
RA21 -1.419 *10^3 RA22 2.574 *10^3 RA2 .301 *10^6
RA3 41.200 RA4 -12.097 *10^3

Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., -515.62 psi
Location: (R) 13.6401 in., -2565.13 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., 15222.18 psi

DEA 3.297 /10^3 B1A -268.246 /10^6 B2A 426.006 /10^6
U1A .000 /10^6 U2A 426.006 /10^6 SMYA 7.884 *10^3

DEA 3.297 /10^3 B1A -268.246 /10^6 B2A 426.006 /10^6
U1A 1.271 U2A -179.018 /10^6 SMLA 6.603 *10^3

DEB 4.187 /10^3 B1B -1.840 /10^3 B2B -1.966 /10^3
U1B .000 /10^6 U2B -1.966 /10^3 SMYB 3.743 *10^3

DEB 4.187 /10^3 B1B -1.840 /10^3 B2B -1.966 /10^3
U1B .483 U2B -2.378 /10^3 SMLB 3.048 *10^3



SCLA 554.577 RNA 1.000 *10^6

SCLB 16.759 *10^3 RNB 1.000 *10^6
Analysis of Shellside + Differential Expansion

P1C = .000 PSPC= -38.750 PDC = 515.920
PSC = 200.000 PSS = -554.670 FAX = -3562.063

THA -.354 THB -.334
ZA 3.923 /10^3 ZB 5.286 /10^3
MT1A -1.154 /10^3 MT2A 1.110 /10^3 RMA 3.761 *10^3
MT1B 1.009 /10^3 MT2B -947.284 /10^6 RMB -5.334 *10^3

RA11 -9.322 *10^3 RA12 13.319 *10^3 RA1 -22.641 *10^3
RA21 3.988 *10^3 RA22 2.574 *10^3 RA2 1.709 *10^6
RA3 41.200 RA4 -40.461 *10^3

Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., 117408.10 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., -167462.10 psi

DEA 4.580 /10^3 B1A -1.586 /10^3 B2A -179.361 /10^6
U1A .000 /10^6 U2A -179.361 /10^6 SMYA 9.320 *10^3

DEA 4.580 /10^3 B1A -1.586 /10^3 B2A -179.361 /10^6
U1A 1.271 U2A -2.590 /10^3 SMLA 4.215 *10^3

DEB 5.286 /10^3 B1B -399.321 /10^6 B2B 22.441 /10^3
U1B .000 /10^6 U2B 22.441 /10^3 SMYB 46.735 *10^3

DEB 5.286 /10^3 B1B -399.321 /10^6 B2B 22.441 /10^3
U1B .483 U2B 22.144 /10^3 SMLB 46.233 *10^3



SCLA .126 *10^6 RNA 9.822 *10^3

SCLB .172 *10^6 RNB 2.589 *10^3
Analysis of Tubeside + Differential Expansion

P1C = 13.110 PSPC= .000 PDC = 515.920
PSC = .000 PSS = -502.810 FAX = -3229.021

THA .000 /10^6 THB .000 /10^6
ZA 1.045 /10^3 ZB 1.045 /10^3
MT1A -1.161 /10^3 MT2A 1.119 /10^3 RMA 3.580 *10^3
MT1B 1.017 /10^3 MT2B -952.479 /10^6 RMB -5.547 *10^3

RA11 -10.686 *10^3 RA12 .000 /10^6 RA1 -10.686 *10^3
RA21 5.139 *10^3 RA22 .000 /10^6 RA2 1.338 *10^6
RA3 .000 /10^6 RA4 -26.958 *10^3

Stress Summary:
Location: (A) 12.8439 in., 112079.20 psi
Location: (B) 16.1373 in., -173630.10 psi

DEA 1.220 /10^3 B1A -1.252 /10^3 B2A -575.363 /10^6
U1A .000 /10^6 U2A -575.363 /10^6 SMYA 1.365 *10^3

DEA 1.220 /10^3 B1A -1.252 /10^3 B2A -575.363 /10^6
U1A 1.271 U2A -2.291 /10^3 SMLA -2.269 *10^3

DEB 1.045 /10^3 B1B 1.369 /10^3 B2B 23.198 /10^3
U1B .000 /10^6 U2B 23.198 /10^3 SMYB 40.861 *10^3

DEB 1.045 /10^3 B1B 1.369 /10^3 B2B 23.198 /10^3
U1B .483 U2B 23.306 /10^3 SMLB 41.044 *10^3


SCLA .119 *10^6 RNA 12.514 *10^3

SCLB .180 *10^6 RNB 2.195 *10^3
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Differential Expansion

Inside Junction Outside Junction
Annular Element 115002. (Fatigue) -178157. (Fatigue) psi
Annular Element Max. at R = 16.137 178157. (Fatigue) psi
Cyl. at point Y 1400. (Fatigue) 41927. (Fatigue) psi
Cyl. at point L -2328. (Fatigue) 42114. (Fatigue) psi
Max. Cycle Stress 122570. (Fatigue) 184181. (Fatigue) psi
Max. Cycle Life 11103. Cycles 1988. Cycles
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Shellside Pressure

Annular Element 2407. 52500. 10695. 52500. psi
Annular Element Max. at R = 14.027 -2191. 28114. psi
Cyl. at point Y 7920. 17500. 4808. 17500. psi
Cyl. at point L 6544. 17500. 4119. 17500. psi
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Tubeside Pressure

Annular Element -2922. (Fatigue) 4527. (Fatigue) psi
Cyl. at point Y -36. (Fatigue) -1065. (Fatigue) psi
Cyl. at point L 59. (Fatigue) -1070. (Fatigue) psi
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Shellside + Tubeside Pressure

Annular Element -516. (Fatigue) 15222. (Fatigue) psi
Annular Element Max. at R = 13.640 -2565. (Fatigue) psi
Cyl. at point L 6603. (Fatigue) 3048. (Fatigue) psi
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Shellside + Differential Expansion

Cyl. at point L 4215. (Fatigue) 46233. (Fatigue) psi
STRESS SUMMARY: Analysis of Tubeside + Differential Expansion



Cyl. at point L -2269. (Fatigue) 41044. (Fatigue) psi


&KDSWHU
The ASME Tubesheets Module
Introduction
This module computes the required thickness for tubesheets according to the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA, A-2001. Currently ASME addresses required
thickness for both U-tube tubesheets as well as fully fixed tubesheets. Other tubesheet
types such as floating tubesheets are not supported by ASME at this time.

The ASME Tubesheets module is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1
Appendix AA. This module will also compute loads on the tubes and compare them to
their allowable loads per the appropriate equation in Appendix A. Gasketed geometries for
both fixed and U-tube exchangers are also analyzed as well as the thickness of the flanged
extension (the TEMA equation has been used). This module is good for both square or
rectangular tube patterns.
When this module is executed it will display the output (equations and all) for the given
input. Afterwards, PVElite will iterate for the required thickness of the tubesheet. The
shell side and tubeside corrosion allowances will then be added to these final results.
PVElite also performs the plasticity calculations for fixed tubesheets if high discontinuity
stresses exist at the attachment between the tubesheet and shell or channel. PVElite con-
tains all of the graphs and functions that appear in appendix AA.
The ASME Tubesheets Module 23-1

Figure 23A shows the geometry for the ASME Tubesheets Module.
23-2 The ASME Tubesheets Module

Figure 23A - Geometry for the ASME Tubesheets Module


Main Input Fields
Tubesheet Number
Enter an ID number for the Tubesheet. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Note, that more than one pressure or tem-
perature case can be run. Use the page down key, enter a new tubesheet number and
change the relevant input items.
Tubesheet Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a descrip-
tion will help you to keep up with each item when reviewing the output.
Shell Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external
pressure, enter a negative pressure. The program will add this pressure with the positive on
the tube (channel) side.

Enter the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the
program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets. It is used in the compu-
tation of the Beta parameter as well as the spring rate and other factors.

Enter the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the shell.

Enter the uncorroded inside diameter of the exchanger shell.
Channel Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum
design condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will add the absolute value of
this pressure with the positive pressure on the other side.
Channel Wall Thickness

Enter the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by
the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types. An example of
such a parameter is the Beta dimension for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Channel Corrosion Allowance

Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the channel.
Channel Inside Diameter

Enter the uncorroded inside diameter of the exchanger channel.

Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature

Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for
determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal tem-
perature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temper-
ature.
Tubesheet Material Specification

Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (chap-
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
Tubesheet Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature

When you change the design temperature the program will automatically update this field,
but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to dou-
ble check your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure
Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
Tubesheet Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification. If
you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure con-
formance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance (Shellside/Tubeside)
Enter the shellside and tubeside corrosion allowance for the tubesheet. This is used to cal-
culate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the tubesheet thickness that you are going to be using. For fixed exchangers, all of
the initial calculations will be performed and printed using the original tubesheet thick-
ness. PVElite will converge on the minimum required tubesheet thickness for the given
loading condition. For U-Tube geometries, PVElite will simply compute the required
thickness for the geometry.
Type of Tubesheet
ASME has two distinct types of tubesheets for analysis purposes. These are fixed and U-
tube exchangers. A fixed tubesheet exchangers is one that is subject to loads arising from
differential thermal expansion. Based on the selected tubesheet type, the program will
automatically reset other inputs on this dialog, such as tubesheet Gasketed with which side
or tubesheet integral with which side. The list below identifies the tubesheet types sup-
ported:
U-Tube Tubesheet Exchangers:

(U) U-tube tubesheets gasketed on both sides.
(V) U-tube tubesheets integral with the channel.

U-tube tubesheets integral with the shell.

U-tube tubesheets integral with both shell and channel.
Fixed tubesheet exchanger - two stationary tubesheets:
(F, A) Configuration A- tubesheet integral on both sides.
(F, B) Configuration B- shell integral, channel Gasketed, tubesheet extended as flange.
(F, C) Configuration C- shell integral, channel Gasketed, tubesheet not extended as
flange.
(F, D) Configuration D- tubesheet Gasketed on both sides.
Number of Tubes
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Note For U-tube exchangers, this is the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. (Nor-
mally equal to 2 times the number of tubes.)
Tube Wall Thickness

Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area
and stiffness. The following table gives thicknesses for some common tube gauges:
B.W.G. Thickness B.W.G. Thickness

Gauge (Inches) Gauge (Inches)
7 .180 17 .058
8 .165 18 .049
10 .134 19 .042
11 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
Tube Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75,
.875, 1.0, or 1.25. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term ‘eta’
in the tubesheet formulas. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular lay-
outs. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.

Design Temperature of Tubes

Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable
stress values for the tube material from the material tables.
Tube Material Specification

Tube Material Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature

Tube Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square)

Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calcu-
late the term ‘eta’ in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular
and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square lay-
outs. In the ASME, code square patterns have a 90 degree layout angle and triangular pat-
terns have a 60 degree angle.
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and
pattern are used to calculate the term mustar in the tubesheet thickness equation. These
rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for
square or rotated square layouts.
Distance between Innermost Tube Centers (UL)

The ASME defines this input also as the largest center-to-center distance between adjacent
tube rows. This is not the tube pitch, however the values for the tube pitch and this value
may be the same.
Length of Expanded Portion of Tube

The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward. When the
tube is expanded it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Simply enter this expanded length.
Some tubes are welded into place and this value may be 0. The maximum this value can be
is the thickness of the tubesheet.

Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center

Enter the distance from the centerline of the exchanger to the centerline of outermost tube.
Tube Side Pass Partition Groove Depth (hg)

Enter the tube side pass partition groove depth.
Enter the Bolting Information

Check this box to enter the bolting information. If it is a U-tube tubesheet exchanger then
this information is needed if the tubesheet is extended as flange. For a Fixed tube
tubesheet exchanger this information is needed if the tubesheet is Gasketed with channel
or shell, irrespective of the tubesheet’s extension as a flange. Programs (PVElite from ver-
sion 4.1) now require, the bolting information for tubesheet not extended as flange.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)

Select NONE if the tubesheet is not gasketed on either side.
Select SHELL if the gasket is only on the shell side of the exchanger.
Select CHANNEL 2.0 if the gasket is only on the channel side of the exchanger.
Select BOTH if the gaskets are on both sides of the exchanger.
Tubesheet Integral With

This input is used with U-Tube and Fixed type exchangers. For U-Tube exchangers, the
elastic properties of either the shell or channel are needed to properly compute reduced
bending moment in the second elastic iteration. While for Fixed Tubesheet exchangers,
just the information that, which side the tubesheet is integral with is needed.
Enter the Dimension G for the Backing Flange

This input is only required for fixed tubesheet exchanger configuration C. G is the mid-
point of the contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet.
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet

This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code. For the tubesheet extended as flange,
this will be the diameter of the extended portion of the tubesheet.
Is There a Shell Band

The shell band can be used to reduce the bending stresses in the tubesheet, shell, or chan-
nel.
Fixed tubesheets where the shell is integral to the tubesheet, configuration a, b, or c, can
have a different thickness of shell adjacent to the tubesheet. The band of shell can be made
of a a different material as well. If that is the case then check this box.

Shellband Heat Exchanger

Pop-Up Input Fields
Shell Temperature for Internal Pressure

Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for deter-
mining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal tempera-
ture for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Shell Material Specification

Shell Allowable Stress, Design Temperature

Shell Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure

Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for deter-
mining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal tempera-
ture for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Channel Material Specification

Channel Allowable Stress, Design Temperature


Channel Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

Length of Tubes
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate

will be required, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate

will be required, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell OD

For fixed tubesheet heat exchangers that have an expansion joint enter the value (wj). This
distance is measured from the OD of the shell to the ID of the expansion joint. This is the
dimension hj in Fig. AA-2.0 of ASME Code VIII Div. 1 (pg. 644, 1998 ed) pressure vessel
code.

Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for MAX (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
SL : Unsupported Span of the tube

k : Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the differ-
ent values of k:
K End Condition
0.6 For unsupported spans between two tubesheets
0.8 For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support
1.0 For unsupported spans between two tube supports
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combina-
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
Enter the Tube End Condition, K Corresponding to Span SL
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
SL : Unsupported Span of the tube

k : Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the differ-
ent values of k:
K End Condition
0.6 For unsupported spans between two tubesheets
0.8 For unsupported spans between a tubesheet and a tube support
1.0 For unsupported spans between two tube supports
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combina-
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
Metal Temperatures
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that
you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may
have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Fre-
quently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to
thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient
and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube tempera-
ture will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don’t forget to evaluate the condition of

shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condi-
tion may govern the exchanger design.
Mean Shell Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Mean Tube Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tube
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the tubesheet at the rim, under realistic operating conditions.
Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the
shell at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the channel at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Classification for Tube Joint Connection (1 - 11)

Enter a value between 1 and 11 based on the following table from ASME VIII appendix A
table A-2 (pg. 463 1992 ed.).
Type Joint Description Fr.(test) Fr.(no test)

1 a welded only, a ≥ 1.4t 1.00 .80
2 b welded only t ≤ a < 1.4t .70 .55
3 c brazed examined 1.00 .80
4 d brazed not fully examined 0.50 .40
5 e welded a ≥ 1.4t, exp. 1.00 .80
6 f welded a < 1.4t,exp,2 .95 .75

grooves
7 g welded a < 1.4t,exp,1 .85 .65

grooves
8 h welded a < 1.4t,exp,0 .70 .50

grooves
9 i expanded 2 or more grooves .90 .70
10 j expanded single groove .80 .65
11 k expanded no grooves .60 .50
Table A-2 Efficiencies and Joint Types
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor

Enter a value between .40 and 1.0 based on the following table from ASME VIII appendix
A table A-2 (Pg. 463 1992 ed.). This is needed when the tube connection class is not spec-
ified above. See the table above for these factors.


Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet

Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will be used ion the calculation of the required
thickness. The final results should therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five
percent. Since ASME does not have a single equation to compute this required thickness,
the appropriate formula from TEMA 7th edition was used.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ?

Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the
ASME standard.
Load
Load case description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shellside and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube side Design Pressures.
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
Enter the Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures

When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel
side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric
vacuum condition enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi will be
used.

Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout

When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate sum-
marized results for all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and
intermediate calculations for one or more load cases select those load cases.
Is This a Pressure Only Case ?

The program designs the tubesheet under all the load cases. If you manually want to run
the load cases then use this input. If you check this box the allowable stress amplification
factor of 2 will be used and there will be no stresses due to differential thermal expansion.

from 0.5 to 4.0 inches.
Thread Series (TEMA,UNC)

There are two options for this entry:
• TEMA Bolt Table
• UNC Bolt Table
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number.

Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temp

Bolt Allowable Stress, Ambient Temp





Facing Sketch PVElite Equivalent Description



ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Note For gasket properties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.
Gasket Thickness
Nubbin Width



Design Temperature for Integral Part

Enter the actual metal temperature for either the channel or shell part. This temperature
will be used to retrieve the elastic properties from the material tables.
Material Specification for Integral Part



Shell Band Material

Specify the material for the shell band. This material can be different than the shell mate-
rial.
Shell Band Input

Fixed Tubesheets in which the shell is integral to the tubesheet configuration A, B, or C,
can have a different thickness of shell adjacent to the tubesheet. The band of shell can be
made of a different material as well. This procedure can be used to reduce the bending
stresses in the tubesheet, shell, or channel.

Shellband Heat Exchanger

Appendix AA of the Code is divided into two major sections. One section is for the U-
Tube exchangers and the other is for fixed types. There is a sequence of steps to go
through when performing calculations for each type of exchanger. PVElite will perform
each individual; step and print the applicable formula substitution and answer for each
step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition, the program will iterate for
the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed PVElite will also perform the second
elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the pro-
gram can run multiple load cases for the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code.
The table below displays the load cases that are considered.
Load
Load case description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell side and Tube side Design Pressures
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses.
For pressure only load cases (!, 2, 3, 8) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses
are 1.5 * their allowable tensile stresses respectively. For cases involving thermal and/or
pressure (4, 5, 6, 7) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses are 3.0 * their
allowable tensile stresses respectively.
Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. The user can enter his own shell/channel vac-
uum pressures for the multi-case analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the pro-
cess fluid streams being stopped, while the other stream continues.
In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of
withstanding the axial forces imposed on them due to the differential thermal expansion.
These forces must be less than the allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equa-
tions (App A). Tube stresses are also checked against the criteria in appendix AA.

Finally, the discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables
are exceeded, PVElite will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity
of the integral component is considered. Typically, when this iteration is performed, the
stresses will come down below their allowables. If for any reason they do not, the geome-
try of the unit must be reconsidered.
If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the
overall tubesheet thickness. Bending stress in the tubesheet, shell, or the channel can also
be reduced by having a local shell thickness adjacent to the tubesheet.

Example Problem
The following example problem is a comparison to another Heat Exchanger Program.
Both programs were in excellent agreement, including the values read from each of the
various figures. The stress results were less than .1 percent different.
FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------- Page 1
ASMETube Analysis : TEMP + PRESS ITEM: 1, 04:46pm, 05/18/01
INPUT ECHO, TUBESHEET NUMBER 1, Description: TEMP + PRESS
Shell Design Pressure Ps 50.00 psig

Shell Thickness Hs .2500 in.
Shell Corrosion Allowance CAS .0000 in.
Inside Diameter of Shell Ds 112.0000 in.
Channel Design Pressure Pt 50.00 psig

Channel Thickness HC .2500 in.
Channel Corrosion Allowance CAC .0000 in.
Inside Diameter of Channel DC 112.0000 in.
Tubesheet Design Metal Temperature TEMPTS 649.00 F

Tubesheet Material Specification SA-240 304
Tubesheet Allowable Stress at Temperature S 15900.00 psi
Tubesheet Allowable Stress at Ambient SATS 18800.00 psi
Thickness of Tubesheet H 1.8125 in.
TUBESHEET TYPE: Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR FIXED TUBESHEET EXCHANGERS

Shell Temperature for Internal Pressure DELTs 649.00 F
Shell Material SA-240 304
Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature Ss 15900.00 psi
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient SAS 18800.00 psi
Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure DELTC 649.00 F
Channel Material SA-240 304
Channel Allowable Stress at Temperature Sc 15900.00 psi
Channel Allowable Stress at Ambient SAC 18800.00 psi
Length of Tubes RL 152.25 in.
Tube Yield Stress At Operating Temperature SYT 20000.00 psi
Expansion Joint Spring Rate ( lbs./in. ) Sj 49250. lbs./in.
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell OD wj 2.6250 in.
Maximum Unsupported Tube Length SL 50.00 in.
Tube Span Between Baffle and Tubesheet SLT 50.0000 in.
Width of Diametral Lane wu .0000 in.
Percent Expanded Depth of Tube %ED 100.00
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center rc 55.2813 in.
Actual Metal Temperature for Shell 156.00 F
Actual Metal Temperature for Tubes 226.00 F
Actual Metal Temperature for Tubesheet 233.00 F
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor FASME .70
Classification for Tube Joint Type TJNT A

Number of Tubes RNTUBS 3100

Tube Wall Thickness t .0490 in.
Tube Outside Diameter D .7500 in.
Design Temperature of the Tubes 649.00 F
Tube Layout Pattern Square
Tube Material SA-249 TP304
Tube Allowable Stress at Temperature SOT 13500.00 psi
Tube Allowable Stress At Ambient SAT 16000.00 psi
Tube Pitch (Center to Center Spacing) P 1.3500 in.
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR TUBESHEETS EXTENDED AS FLANGES:

Flanged Tubesheet Outside Diameter DF 116.2500 in.
Flange Thickness TF 5.1250 in.
Nominal Bolt Diameter DBOLT .6250 in.
Number of Bolts 176
ADDITIONAL DATA FOR GASKETED TUBESHEETS:

Gasket Thickness .1250 in.
Tubesheet Gasket on which Side SIDE CHANNEL
Installation Temperature of Assembly 70.00 F
ASME TUBE SHEET RESULTS PER APP. AA, 1995 WITH A-97 :
Gasket Contact Width, RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0 .500 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = RN / 2.0 .250 in.
Effective Gasket Width, BE = B0 .250 in.
Required Thickness of Flanged Extension Per TEMA 7th Edition

FTREQ = .98*SQRT((RM*(R^2-1+3.72*R^2*LOG(R))/((A-G)*(1+1.8*R^2))
FTREQ = .98*SQRT(( 722024*( 1.0276^2-1+3.72* 1.0276^2*LOG( 1.0276))/
(( 116.2500- 113.1250)*(1+1.8* 1.0276^2))
FTREQ = .8857 in.
Elasticity/Expansion Material Properties :
Shell - TEMA : TP304

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion at Actual Temp. .9608E-05 / deg F
Elastic Modulus at actual Metal Temperature .2505E+08 psi

Channel - TEMA : TP304

Tubes - TEMA : TP304
TubeSheet - TEMA : TP304
Results for ASME Fixed Tubesheet Calculations, Original Thickness :
Results for Step 1 :
d* = d - 2t*( Et/E )( %ED/100 )( St/S )

d* = .7500-2* .0490*( 25054998/ 25054998)( 100/100)*( 13500/ 15900)
d* = .6668 in.
a = rc + d* / 4
a = 55.2813 + .6668 / 4
a = 55.4480 in.
Au = 2 * rc * wu
Au = 2 * 55.2813 * .0000
Au = .0000 in.^2
x = ã * a^2 - Au
x = 3.14159 * 55.4480^2 - .0000
x = 9658.7590 in.^2
P‘ = P * SQRT( 1 + Au/x )
P‘ = 1.3500 * SQRT( 1 + .0000/ 9658.76 )
P‘ = 1.3500 in.
ETA = 1 - d* / P‘
ETA = 1 - .6668 / 1.3500
ETA = .5061
K = b/a
K = 56.1250/ 55.4480
K = 1.0122
Kbar = a1/a
Kbar = 58.1250/ 55.4480
Kbar = 1.0483
Kc = ac/a
Kc = 56.5625/ 55.4480
Kc = 1.0201
XI = 2/n*(b/d)(hs/t)(1/(1-t/d))*(Es/Et)
XI = 2 / 3100 *( 56.1250 / .7500 )( .2500 / .0490 ) *

( 1/( 1- .0490 / .7500 ))( 25054998 / 25054998 )

XI = .2635
ás = 1.285/SQRT( b * hs )
ás = 1.285/SQRT( 56.1250 * .2500 )
ás = .3430 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
ác = 1.285/SQRT( ac * hc )
ác = 1.285/SQRT( 56.5625 * .2500 )
ác = .0000 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
J = 1/( 1 + ( 2*ã*b*Es*hs)/Sj*L )
J = 1/(1+(2*ã*56.1250*25054998*.2500)/49250*152.25)
J = .0034 ( = 1.0 if No Exp. Joint )
Lambdas = .3(b/hs) + Es/Et(d/t) *

[(.3/2+(a^2/n*d^2)(1/(1-t/d))*(1-n*d^2/4*a^2))]
Lambdas = .3(56.1250/.2500)+25054998/25054998(.7500/.0490)*
[(.3/2+(55.4480^2/3100*.7500^2)(1/(1-.0490/.7500))*
(1-3100*.7500^2/4*55.4480^2))]
Lambdas = 94.4252
Lambdat = .3/2(d/t)*(1-2t/d)+a^2/(ndt(1-t/d)) *
[1-nd^2/(4a^2)(1-4t/d+4t^2/d^2)]
Lambdat = .3/2(.7500/.0490)*(1-2*.0490/.7500)+55.4480^2/
(3100*.7500*.0490*(1-.0490/.7500))*
[1-3100*.7500^2/(4*55.4480^2)
(1-4*.0490/.7500+4.0490^2/.7500^2)]
Lambdat = 27.7752
Qe = J(àt*Tt-às*Ts)+J*Lambdas(Ps/Es) -
(Pt/Et)[J*Lamdat+0.5*Et*b/(Es*hs)] - Ps(1-J)*wj/( Es*hs )
Qe = .00((.961E-05)*156-(.961E-05)*86)+.00*94.4252(50.00/25054998)-
(50.00/25054998)[.00*27.7752+0.5*25054998*56.1250/(25054998*.2500)
-50.00(1-.00)*.0000/(25054998*.2500)
QE = -.000221282
e = ( E*/E )*( 0.91 /( 1 - v*^2 )

e = ( .6083 )*( .91 /( 1 - .3009*^2 )
e = .6087
Xa = 2.161(n*Et*t(d-t)/(e*E*L*a)^.25 * (a/h)^.75
Xa = 2.161(3100*25054998*.0490(.7500-.0490)/
(.6087*25054998*152.25*55.4480)^.25*(55.4480/1.8125)^.75
Xa = 10.6654
Mu = 2.198/(E*h^3)[ás*hs^3*Es*b(1+ás*h+ás^2*h^2/2)
+ ác*hc^3*Ec*ac*(1+ác*h+ác^2*h^2/2)]
Mu = 2.198/(25054998*1.8125^3)[.3430*0^3*25054998*56.1250
(1+.3430*1.8125+.3430^2*1.8125^2/2)+.0000*.2500^3*

25054998*56.5625*(1+.0000*1.8125+.0000^2*1.8125^2/2)]
Mu = .2016
Gammabs = ás^2*hs^2*K^3(1+ás*h)/5.46
Gammabs = .3430^2*.2500^2*1.0122^3(1+.3430*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabs = .0023
Gammabt = ác^2*hc^2*Kc^3(1+ác*h)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000^2*.2500^2*1.0201^3(1+.0000*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000
Gammat = 0.25*(Kc^2-1)(Kc+1)-0.5(Kc^3-K)+Gammabt
Gammat = 0.25*(1.0201^2-1)(1.0201+1)-0.5(1.0201^3-1.0122)+.0000
Gammat = -.0041
Gammab = KC - DUNDB/a ( Fig. AA-2.1 (c) )

Gammab = 1.0201 - 57.3750/ 55.4480
Gammab = -.0147
Curve Values from Figure AA-2.3

Zm = .143346
Zv*Xa/Xa = .008752
PHI(è) = 0.91/e * ( Ln(kbar) + Mu )

PHI(è) = 0.91 / .6087 * ( Ln( 1.0483) + .2016 )
PHI(è) = .3719
Q1 = (K-1-è*Zv)/( 1 + è*Zm )
Q1 = ( 1.0122-1- .3719* .0088)/( 1 + .3719* .1433 )
Q1 = .0085
Delta T*s = 1/2( Delta Ts + Delta Tr )

Delta T*s = 1/2( 86.00 + 135.00 )
Delta T*s = 110.5000 F
Delta T*c = 1/2( Delta Tc + Delta Tr )

Delta T*c = 1/2( 156.00 + 135.00 )
Delta T*c = 145.5000 F
DeltaT r = 1/3( DeltaTc + DeltaTs + DeltaTts)

DeltaT r = 1/3( 156.00 + 86.00 + 163.00 )
DeltaT r = 135.0000 F
P*t = Ec*hc/ac(àc*DeltaT*c - àts*DeltaTr)

P*t = 25054998*.2500/56.5625((.961E-05)*145.50-(.961E-05)*135.00)
P*t = 11.1724 psig
P*s = Es*hs/b (às*DeltaT*s - àts*DeltaTr)

P*s = 25054998*.2500/56.1250((.961E-05)*110.50-(.961E-05)*135.00)
P*s = -26.2721 psig

Q2 = (a^2(Pt*Gammat+P*t*Gammabt+Ps*Gammas-P*Gammabs)+B*dundb*Gammab)/
( 1 + è*Zm )
Q2 = (55.4480^2(50.00*-.0041+11.1724*.0000+50.00
*-.0022—26.2721*.0023)+2465*57.3750*-.0147)/(1+.3719*.1433)
Q2 = -2719.0950
Curve Values from Figures AA-2.4 and AA-2.5

QZ1 = 8.351214
QZ2 = 65.097820
U1 = 0.5 * Xa^4 [ Zv + (K-1) * Zm ]

U1 = 0.5* 10.6654^4[ .0088 + ( 1.0122-1) * .1433 ]
U1 = 67.9465
Equivalent Uniform Pressure

Pea^2/2 = (bEshsQe-(JXIQ2)U1-0.5(Ps-Pt)a^2(K^2-1))(1+JXI[QZ1+(K-1)QZ2])
Pea^2/2 = (56.1250*25054998*.2500*-.0002-(.00*.2635*
-2719.1)*67.9465-0.5*(50.00-50.00)*55.4480^2(1.0122^2-1))/
(1+.00*.2635*[8.3512+(1.0122-1)*65.0978])
Pea^2/2 = -76999.6200 lb.
Q3 = Q1 + Q2/(Pea^2/2)
Q3 = .0085 + -2719.1/( -76999)
Q3 = .0438
Curve Value from Figure AA-2.6

Fm = .039082
The Tubesheet Bending Stress - Original Thickness:

å = (2a/h)^2 ( 1.5 Fm Pe / ETA )
å = (2 * 55.4480 / 1.8125)^2 ( 1.5 * .0391 * -50.09 / .5061 )
å = -21720.5400 psi
The Allowable Tubesheet Bending Stress :

å allowed = 1.5 * ê * S
å allowed = 1.5 * 2.6667 * 15900.00
å allowed = 63600.0000 psi
The Tubesheet Bending Stress - Final Thickness:

åf = (2a/h)^2 ( 1.5 Fm Pe / ETA )
åf = (2 * 55.4480 / .9680)^2 ( 1.5 * .0326 * -50.11 / .5061 )
åf = -63597.4200 psi
Required Tubesheet Thickness for Given Loadings : Including CAS &CAC

H reqd. = H + CAS + CAC
H reqd. = .9680 + .0000 + .0000
H reqd. = .9680 in.
Curve Values from Figure AA-2.4 ( Original Thickness )

Q3 = .044

Xa = 10.665
QZ1* = 10.300
Pe = -50.090 psi
qt = Pe * QZ1*
qt = -50.09 * 10.3001
qt = -515.9258 psi
STEP 8 The Tube Stress in the Outermost Tube Row :
Intermediate Constants fs and ft.

fs = 1 - (nd^2)/(4a^2)
fs = 1-(3100*.7500^2)/(4*55.4480^2)
fs = .8582
ft = 1 - (nd^2)/(4a^2)[1-2t/d]^2
ft = 1-(3100*.7500^2)/(4*55.4480^2)[1-2*.0490/.7500]^2
ft = .8928
The Tube Stress in the Outermost Tube row.

å = a^2/(n*t*d(1-t/d))*(Ps*fs-Pt*ft-qt)
å = 55.4480^2/(3100*.0490*.7500(1-.0490/.7500))*
(50.00*.8582-50.00*.8928—515.9258)
å = 14846.4700 psi
The Force on the Outermost Tube :

TubeForce = TubeStress * Tube Area
TubeForce = 14846.47 * .10791
TubeForce = 1602.0910 lb.
The Allowable Tube Force Per Appendix A VIII 1

Force Allowed = Area * Sot * FASME
Force Allowed = .1079 * 13500.00 * .70
Force Allowed = 1019.7550 lb.
STEP 9 Bending Stresses in the Channel and Shell :

åLc ( Channel ) = 5656.25 psi
åLs ( Shell ) = 124.78 psi
åc ( Channel ) = .00 psi
ås ( Shell ) = -13928.75 psi
CHANNEL STRESS SUMMATION vs. ALLOWABLE

|åc| + |åLc| =< 1.5 * ê * Sc
| 0 | + | 5656 | =< 1.5 * 2.6667 * 15900
5656.25 must be < or = 63600.0000
SHELL STRESS SUMMATION vs. ALLOWABLE

|ås| + |åLs| =< 1.5 * ê * Ss
| -13928 | + | 124 | =< 1.5 * 2.6667 * 15900
14053.53 must be < or = 63600.0000

SUMMARY of RESULTS for ASME Tubesheet Calculations

Reqd Tubsheet Thickness+CAS+MAX(CAC,GRV) HREQ .9680 in.
Actual Tubsheet Thickness as Given HH 1.8125 in.
Required Thickness for the Flanged Portion FTREQ .8857 in.
Actual Thickness for the Flanged Portion TF 5.1250 in.
TubeForce ( on the outmost Tube ) 1602.0910 lb.
TubeForce Allowed 1019.7550 lb.

&KDSWHU
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction
The PVElite Half-Pipe Module performs pressure calculations for half-pipe jackets
attached to cylindrical shells using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.

The PVElite Half-Pipe Module performs required thickness and Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure calculations for cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The
module is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
2001, A-2001. Specifically, the module is based on the rules in Paragraph EE-1, Appendix
EE.
The module first performs shell thickness calculations based on both the internal pressure
and the externally applied half-pipe jacket pressure. In addition to the thickness calcula-
tions, the jacket MAWP is computed for both the input shell thickness and the required
shell thickness. Once the required thickness of the shell is determined, the half-pipe jacket
thickness is calculated. Finally, based on the shell and jacket thicknesses, an appropriate
fillet weld size is calculated.
It is important to note the limitations of the Half-Pipe Module. First, the half-pipe jacket
analysis performed is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in Figure EE-4.
These are the only two geometries addressed by paragraph EE-1. The analysis of rectan-
gular or square jacketed geometries is not supported. The second limitation on the Half-
Pipe Module is the acceptable Nominal Pipe Sizes. Appendix EE only includes charts for
Nominal Pipe Sizes 2, 3, and 4. Therefore, Nominal Pipe Sizes greater than 4 or less than
2 will not be accepted in the input. Although there are no charts for Nominal Pipe Sizes
2.5 and 3.5, the Half-Pipe Module will accept these sizes and perform iterations between
the given charts. Additionally, if the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size or has a formed
radius, the actual radius is used in the calculations.
The Half-Pipe Module takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values
and corrosion allowances are entered, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters
when making calculations for the corroded condition.
The Half-Pipe Module 24-1

Figure 24A shows the geometries accepted by the Half-Pipe Module.
Figure 24A - Acceptable Geometries for the Half-Pipe Module
24-2 The Half-Pipe Module


Item Number
Enter the Shell Section ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or num-
bers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Half-Pipe Section Description

Inside Diameter of Shell

Enter the inside diameter of the shell or head. The value entered should be the uncorroded
dimension of the inside diameter. This analysis is only valid for cylindrical shells, there-
fore, inputting inside diameter values for torispherical, elliptical, spherical, or conical
heads will produce erroneous results.
Thickness of Shell
Enter the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness
value will be tested to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the exter-
nally applied jacket pressure.
Internal Pressure in Shell

Enter the internal design pressure used in the vessel analysis. This value will be used as an
initial check on the required thickness of the shell. The value entered should be a positive
value, i.e. 14.7 psia.

will automatically update material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
Shell Section Material Name

Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II
Part D at the design temperature.

Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II

Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams

the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in the cylindrical shell. Please be sure to refer to
Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket

Enter the nominal pipe size of the half-pipe jacket. The pipe size entered must lie within
the range of values supported in ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, Appendix EE. The supported
sizes range between NPS 2 inch and NPS 4 inch.
If working in SI units, the proper conversion values must be entered. For example, if
working with a NPS 50 pipe, the corresponding SI value of 5.08 cm must be entered. The
following table lists the accepted values for the NPS.
English SI
Input NPS NPS PVElite Input
2.0 in 50- 5.08 cm
2.5 in 65- 6.35 cm
3.0 in 80- 7.62 cm
3.5 in 90- 8.89 cm
4.0 in 100- 10.16 cm
Inside Radius of Formed Half-Pipe Jacket

Enter the radius of the formed half-pipe. This value will be used rather than the standard
nominal pipe sizes.
Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket

Enter the thickness of the jacket used to withstand the internal pressure. If the thickness
value of the jacket is not adequate to withstand the internal pressure, an acceptable thick-
ness will be determined. Therefore, if the program is used for design purposes, enter a
minimal value for jacket thickness. The program will determine an appropriate pipe
schedule through iteration.
It is important to note that the program selected pipe schedules include a standard mill tol-
erance of 0.875 (a reduction of 12.5%). This tolerance will not, however, be included in

the user input value of thickness. This allows users to include their own mill tolerance in
their input value, without having this value further adjusted.
Design Pressure in Jacket

Enter the internal design pressure used in the half-pipe jacket analysis. This value will be
used to determine the required thickness of both the shell and the jacket. The value entered
should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
Design Temperature for Jacket Pressure

Enter the temperature associated with the internal jacket pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
Jacket Material Name

Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temperature

When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the jacket, the pro-
temperature.
Jacket Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature

When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the jacket, the pro-
with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section II
Corrosion Allowance of Jacket


Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation the Half-Pipe Module performs is the required thickness of the shell
due to the internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation
1 from Paragraph UG-27 of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in
this calculation. Because the exterior of the shell wall is also used as the internal half-pipe
jacket wall (see Figure 24A), both the corrosion allowance of the shell and the corrosion
allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are dis-
played in this section of the output.
Once the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness
due to the external pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is
obtained through the pressure calculations discussed in the next section.
Pressure Calculations for Input Shell Thickness

The calculations displayed in this section of the output are the external (jacket) pressure
calculations, performed using the input value of shell thickness. The first step in the pres-
sure calculations is to determine the K-factor from the appropriate chart. The chart is
selected based on the Nominal Pipe Size of the jacket and the K-factor is a factor of the
shell inside diameter and the shell thickness. Both the chart and K-factor are displayed in
the output. As stated earlier, for Nominal Pipe Size 2.5 or 3.5, an iteration is performed
between the charts to obtain the K-factor. When this is the case, the output will display the
two charts from which the iteration was performed.
The next step in the external pressure calculations is to determine the longitudinal stress.
This calculation accounts for the corrosion allowance by using a corroded value of the
shell inside radius, as well as the corroded value of the shell thickness. Using the longitu-
dinal stress and the previously determined K-factor, the permissible jacket pressure is
determined using Equation 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. The permissible jacket pres-
sure is considered the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure for the input shell thick-
ness, and it is compared to the input jacket design pressure.
Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations

The input jacket thickness is tested to see if it is adequate to withstand the internal pressure
of the jacket. The calculation is based on Equation 2, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. As in
previous calculations, the corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculation. If
the input thickness is not adequate, the program iterates for an appropriate pipe thickness.
The iteration begins with Schedule 5S pipe and continues on until an acceptable schedule
is found.
As mentioned in the Discussion of Input section, the program selected pipe schedule is
adjusted by a standard mill tolerance value (0.875). The user input value of thickness,
however, does not use the mill tolerance adjustment. In the event that the input thickness is
not adequate, both the selected pipe schedule and the adjusted thickness are displayed in
the output.
Minimum Fillet Weld Size Calculations

As mentioned in Paragraph EE-1, “The fillet weld attaching the half-pipe jacket to the ves-
sel shall have a throat thickness not less than the smaller of the jacket or shell thickness.”

Therefore, the program selects the smaller of the two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld
factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum fillet weld size. The output report indi-
cates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based upon.
Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo
of the input thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness cal-
culations. The comparison of these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness
of the shell is governed by the internal or external pressure. The next three displayed val-
ues are the jacket pressure results. The input design pressure is shown along with the
MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next displayed values
are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the
required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness
selected by the program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.

Example Problem
The example problem is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix
EE. The Code example problem asks to find the required thickness of a cylindrical shell
subjected to an inside pressure of 190 psi and a half-pipe jacket pressure of 300 psi. The
ID of the shell is 40 inches, the allowable stress of the shell is 16,000 psi, the joint effi-
ciency is 1.0, the half-pipe jacket is NPS 3, the allowable stress of the jacket is 12,000 psi,
and there is no corrosion allowance.
FileName : CHECKS ----------------------------- Page 1

HalfPipe Analysis : ASME EXAMPLE ITEM: 1, 04:56pm, 05/18/98
INPUT ECHO, HALF-PIPE 1, Description: ASME EXAMPLE
Inside Diameter of Shell DIN 40.0000 in.

Thickness of Shell TS .3125 in.
Internal Pressure in Shell P 190.00 psig
Shell Section Material SA-516 70
Shell Allowable Stress, Design Temp S 16000.00 psi
Shell Allowable Stress, Ambient SA 17500.00 psi
Corrosion Allowance of Shell CA .0000 in.
Joint efficiency for Shell Joint E 1.00
Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket NPS 3.0000 in.

Minimum Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket TJCK .0730 in.
Design Pressure in Jacket P1 300.00 psig
Design Temperature for Jacket 800.00 F
Jacket Material Name SA-516 70
Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temp S1 12000.00 psi
Jacket Allowable Stress, Ambient S1A 17500.00 psi
Corrosion Allowance of Jacket CAJ .0000 in.
SHELL THICKNESS CALCULATIONS:
Required Thickness of Shell per UG-27 Eqn(1) (Includes CA):

Tr = ( P * R ) / ( S * E - 0.6 * P ) + ( CA + CAJ )
Tr = ( 190.00 * 20.000 )/( 16000.00 * 1.00 - 0.6 * 190.00 ) + .000
Tr = .2392 in.
Required Thickness of Shell to Withstand Jacket Pressure:

Trj = .2813 in.
PRESSURE CALCULATIONS FOR INPUT SHELL THICKNESS:
Input Value of Shell Thickness:

Ts = .3125 in.
Chart Used to Find the K-Factor:

FIG. EE - 2

K-Factor Read from Chart:

K = 46.5000
Longitudinal Stress in Shell due to Internal Pressure (Includes CA):

SPrime = ( P * R ) / ( 2 * Ts )
Sprime = ( 190.0000 * 20.0000 ) / ( 2 * .3125 )
Sprime = 6080.0000 psi
Permissible Jacket Pressure per Appendix EE-1, Equation (1):

Pprime = ( 1.5 * S - Sprime ) / K
Pprime = ( 1.5 * 16000.00 - 6080.0000 ) / 46.50
Pprime = 385.3765 psig
HALF-PIPE JACKET THICKNESS CALCULATIONS:
Input Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness:

Tj = .0730 in.
Req‘d Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness per App. EE-1, Eqn. (2) (Includes CA):
T = ( P1 * R ) / ( .85 * S1 - .6 * P1 ) + CAJ
T = ( 300.0000 * 1.6770 ) / ( .85 * 12000.00 - .6 * 300.0000 ) + .0000
T = .0502 in.
MINIMUM FILLET WELD SIZE CALCULATIONS:
Minimum Fillet Weld Size (Based on Jacket Thickness):

Fillet = Tj / .875 * 1.414
Fillet = .0730 / .875 * 1.414
Fillet = .1180 in.
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
Input Thickness of Shell .3125 in.

Req.d Thickness of Shell due to Internal P. .2392 in.
Req.d Thickness of Shell due to Jacket P. .2813 in.
Pressure Used for Jacket Design 300.0000 psig

M.A.W.P. of Jacket for Input Thickness 385.3765 psig
M.A.W.P. of Jacket for Required Thickness 323.8394 psig
Input Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket .0730 in.

Required Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket .0502 in.
Minimum Acceptable Fillet Weld Size .1180 in.


&KDSWHU
The Large Opening Module
Introduction
The PVElite Large Opening Module calculates the stresses and their allowables which act
on integrally attached flat heads that have a large centrally located opening. This program
is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14 of the
2001 Code, A-2001.

This module computes three different kinds of stresses which act on flat heads that have a
hole or nozzle whose inside diameter is greater than 1/2 of the outside diameter of the flat
head. Geometries with or without an attached nozzle may be analyzed.
The first step in this process is to analyze the flange as a flat head and determine the total
moment acting on the flange for the operating case. Since there is no gasket, the gasket
seating case is neglected. The radial flange, tangential flange and longitudinal hub stresses
are computed in accordance with Appendix 2. These three stresses, Sr*, St*, Sh* and
some geometry constants are used to determine the actual radial, tangential, and longitudi-
nal hub stresses. Two sets of stresses are computed, one for the head/shell juncture, and
the second for the opening head juncture. If all of the computed stresses are below their
allowables, the geometry is considered O.K. If any stress is greater than its allowable, the
geometry must be reconsidered.
The Large Opening Module 25-1

Figure 25A shows the geometry for an attached nozzle. Figure 25B shows the geometry
for an opening without an attached nozzle.
Figure 25A
Figure 25B
25-2 The Large Opening Module


Main Input Fields
Large Central Opening Number

Enter the Flange ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Opening Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. It is however
printed on output reports. This field should be meaningful to the item you are analyzing.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for this flange. This value will be used to look up the stress
values for the material you have chosen from the material tables.

Enter the design internal pressure for this flange. The pressure is used to compute the
forces which act on the inside of the flange. One such example would be the hydrostatic
end force. Note that only positive (internal) pressures are considered.
Flat Head Thickness

Enter the thickness of the plate to be used to construct the flat head.
Opening Inside Diameter

Enter the Inside Diameter (Bn) of the Opening here. Appendix 14 states that the opening
should be centrally located in the flat head. The diameter of the opening should also be
greater than 1/2 of the flange outside diameter. If your opening does not meet these crite-
ria, do not use this module to analyze the opening.
Flat Head Outside Diameter

Enter the outer diameter of the flat head. This is the dimension A as it appears in Appendix
14. It is normally the shell outside diameter.
Shell Side Hub Thickness, Small End

Enter the thickness of the shell. This is referred to as value g0 in the ASME code. PVElite
will use this value to compute the shell inside diameter Bs.
Shell Side Hub Thickness, Large End

Enter the Large End hub thickness on the shell side. This value is g1 in the ASME Code.
This will typically be the leg dimension of the weld which attaches the flat head to the
shell.
Shell Side Hub Length

Enter the length of the Hub on the shell side of the flange. This will usually be the length
of the weld leg. The ASME Code refers to this as dimension h (shell). The hub length and

other hub dimensions g1 and g0 are used to determine the flange stress factors from
Appendix 2.
Corrosion Allowance
If your specification includes a corrosion allowance enter it here. PVElite corrects all
dimensions such as the flange ID, and all hub thicknesses for the effect of corrosion. The
CA cannot be greater than any of the entered shell hub or flange thickness dimensions.
This will be flagged as an error.
Material Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

design temperature.
Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

ambient temperature.
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Small End

If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub thickness here. If there is no noz-
zle attached, then enter a 0.0 here. This dimension will usually be the nozzle neck thick-
ness. This dimension is referred to as g0 for the nozzle.
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End

If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub thickness of the large end. If
there is no nozzle attached, enter a 0.0 . This dimension will usually be the weld leg
dimension. This dimension is referred to as g1 for the nozzle.
Nozzle Side Hub Length

If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub length here. If there is no nozzle
attached, enter a 0.0 . This dimension will usually be the weld leg dimension. This dimen-
sion is referred to as h for the nozzle.

Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------ Page 1
Lgcenter Analysis : SENIOR GB TEST ITEM: 4, 05:04pm, 05/18/98
INPUT ECHO, LGCENTER NUMBER 4, Description: SENIOR GB TEST
Design Temperature TEMP 300.00 F

Integral Flat Head Thickness T 2.5000 in.
Opening Inside Diameter B 13.2500 in.

Flat Head Outside Diameter A 24.0000 in.
Shell Side Hub Thickness, Small End SG0 .3750 in.

Shell Side Hub Thickness, Large End SG1 .3750 in.
Shell Side Hub Length 5.0000 in.
Corrosion Allowance FCOR .0000 in.
Flange and Nozzle Material SA-516 70

Allowable Stress at Design Temperature SFO 17500.00 psi
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature SFA 17500.00 psi
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Small End NG0 .3750 in.

Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End NG1 .3750 in.
Nozzle Side Hub Length NHL 5.0000 in.
Diameter of the Load Reaction G = C per App. 14

G = FLGOD - 2.0 * SG1 + 2.0 * FCOR
G = 24.0000 - 2.0 * .3750 + 2.0 * .0000
G = 23.2500 in.
The Flange K Factor
K = Flange OD / Flange ID
K = 24.0000 / 13.2500
K = 1.8113
The Flange Radial Distance Dimension R
R = 0.5 * ( G - FLGCID ) - ( SG1 - FCOR )
R = 0.5 * ( 23.2500 - 13.2500 ) - ( .3750 - .0000 )
R = 4.6250 in.
The Hydrostatic End Force Hd
Hd = PI/4 * Flange ID ^ 2 * P
Hd = PI/4 * 13.2500^2 * 225.0000
Hd = 31024.4600 lb.
The Moment Md
Md = HD * ( R + 0.5 * ( SG1 - FCOR ) )
Md = 31024.46 * ( 4.6250 + 0.5 * ( .3750 - .0000 ) )
Md = 12442.1000 ft.lb.
The Total Hydrostatic End Force H
H = PI/4 * G^2 * P
H = PI/4 * 23.2500^2 * 225.0000
H = 95525.2800 lb.

The Differential End Force Ht

Ht = H - Hd
Ht = 95525.28 - 31024.46
Ht = 64500.8300 lb.
The Moment Mt
Mt = 0.5 * Ht * ( R + SG1 )
Mt = 0.5 * 64500.83 * ( 4.6250 + ( .3750 - .0000 ) )
Mt = 13437.6700 ft.lb.
The Total Moment Mo
Mo = Md + Mt
Mo = 12442.10 + 13437.67
Mo = 25879.7700 ft.lb.
Flange Factors ( Opening ) :

T = 1.580 U = 3.779
Y = 3.439 Z = 1.877
Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(B*GZERO) 2.229 in.

Hub Ratio, HRAT = HBLNG / H0 2.243
Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (GONE/GZERO) 1.000

d = 2.185 in.^3 e = .407 in.^-1
Stress Factors ALPHA = 2.018
BETA = 2.358 GAMMA = 1.278
DELTA = 7.151 LAMBDA = 8.429
Longitudinal Hub Stress, Operating:

SH* = ( F * RMO / B ) / ( RLAMBDA * GONE^2 )
SH* = ( 1.0000 * 310557 / 13.2500 ) / ( 8.4287 * .3750^2 )
SH* = 19774. psi
Radial Flange Stress, Operating:
SR* = ( BETA * RMO / B ) / ( RLAMBDA * TH^2 )
SR* = ( 2.3577 * 310557 / 13.2500 ) / ( 8.4287 * 2.5000^2 )
SR* = 1049. psi
Tangential Flange Stress, Operating:
ST* = ( Y*RMO / TH*TH*B ) - Z*SRO
ST* = ( 3.4389 * 310557 / 2.5000^2 * 13.2500 ) - 1.8769 * 1048
ST* = 10927. psi
The Value for E Theta Star ( Integral Nozzle )

Et* = 0.91*(NG1/NG0)^2*B1*V*Sh*/(f*ho)
Et* = 0.91*( .375 / .375 )^2 * 13.625 * .542 * 19774/( 1.000 * 2.229)
Et* = 59630.8300 psi
Flange Factors ( Shell ) :
Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(B*GZERO) 2.976 in.

Hub Ratio, HRAT = HBLNG / H0 1.680

Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (GONE/GZERO) 1.000

d = 2.891 in.^3 e = .305 in.^-1
Moment Acting at the Shell to Flat Head Juncture

Mh = Et*/[(1.74*ho*V/(SG0^3*B1))+Et*/Mo*(1+Ft/ho)]
Mh = 59630 /[(1.74 * 2.9765 * .5472 /( .3750^3 * 23.6250 ))+ 59630 /
310557 * ( 1 + .9086 * 2.5000 / 2.9765 )
Mh = 1901.4780 ft.lb.
The X1 Factor
X1 = ( Mo - Mh( 1 + Ft/ho ) ) / Mo
X1 = ( 310557 - 22817 ( 1 + .9086 * 2.5000 / 2.9765 ) ) / 310557
X1 = .8705
Stress Results for the Head/Shell Juncture :
Longitudinal Hub Stress in the Shell :

Shs = (X1)(Eé*)(1.10*ho*f)/((g1/g0)^2*Bs*V)
Shs = ( .87)( 59630)(1.10 * 2.976 * 1.000)/(( 1.000)^2 * 23.25) .547 )
Shs = 13357.6200 in.
Radial Stress at the Outside Diameter :

Srs = 1.91*Mh(1+F*t/ho)/(Bs*t^2) + 0.64*F*Mh/(Bs*ho*t)
Srs = 1.91 * 1901( 1 + .909 * 2.500 / 2.976 )/( 23.250 * 6.250^2 ) +
0.64 * .909* 1901/( 23.250 * 2.976 * 2.500 )
Srs = 605.5016 psi
Tangential Stress at the Outside Diameter :

Sts = X1*Eé**t/Bs - .57(1+F*t/ho)Mh/(Bs*t^2) + .64*F*Z*Mh/(Bs*ho*t)
Sts = .870 * 59630.830* 2.500 / 23.250 -
.57( 1 + .909 * 2.500 / 2.976) 1901 /( 23.250 * 6.2500^2 ) +
.64 * .909 * 1.877 * 1901 /( 23.250 * 2.976 * 2.500 )
Sts = 5567.4130 psi
where Z = (K^2+1)/(K^2-1) = ( 3.281 + 1 )/( 3.281 - 1 ) = 1.877
Stress Results for the Opening Head Juncture :
Longitudinal Hub Stress in Central Opening :

Sho = X1 ù Sh* = ( .870 * 19774.440 ) = 17212.740 psi
Radial Stress at Central Opening :

Sro = X1 ù Sr* = ( .870 * 1048.993 ) = 913.100 psi
Tangential Stress at Diameter of Central Opening :

Sto = X1*St* + .64*F*Z1*Mh/(Bs*ho*t)
Sto = .870 * 10927.420 +
.64 * .9086 * 2.877 * 1901 / ( 23.250 * 2.976 * 2.500 )
Sto = 9732.4580 psi

where Z1 = 2*K^2/(K^2-1) = (2* 3.281 + 1 )/( 3.281 - 1 ) = 2.877
Flange Stress Results per Appendix 14

Head/Shell Allowed Opening Allowed
Long. Hub 13357 26250 17212 26250 psi
Radial 605 17500 913 17500 psi
Tangential 5567 17500 9732 17500 psi
M.A.W.P. for the given Geometry 343.133 psig

Estimated Finished Weight of Forging 245.2 lb.
Approximate Minimum Flange Thickness 2.0640 in.

&KDSWHU
The Rectangular Vessel Module
Introduction
The PVElite Rectangular Vessel Module performs internal pressure calculations for rect-
angular vessels using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.

The PVElite Rectangular Vessel Module performs stress calculations and Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure calculations for the rectangular, obround, and circular ves-
sels described in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
2001, A-2001, Appendix 13. The calculations are taken from sections 13-6 through 13-13.
The module will analyze the following vessels:
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(1) -Vessel with equal long-side and short-side thickness. (Figure 26A)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(2)-Vessel with differing long-side thickness. (Figure 26B)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(3)-Vessel with rounded corners. (Figure 26C)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(4)-Reinforced vessel. (Figure 26D)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(5)-Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners.(Figure 26E)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(6)-Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners. (Figure
26EE)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(7) -Rectangular vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure 26F)
• Fig. 13-2 (a)(8)-Rectangular vessel with two stay plates/rows of bars. (Figure 26G)
• Fig. 13-2 (b)(1) -Obround vessel. (Figure 26H)
• Fig. 13-2 (b)(2)-Reinforced obround vessel. (Figure 26I)
• Fig. 13-2 (b)(3) - Obround vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure 26J)
• Fig. 13-2 (c)(1)-Circular vessel with single diametral plate. (Figure 26K)
The program first performs ligament efficiency calculations for those vessels with holes in
the side plates. The membrane and bending ligament efficiencies are used to adjust the
stress calculations at the mid-side of the plates. The ligament efficiency calculations are
based on section 13-6, and are performed for both uniform and multi diameter hole pat-
terns.
Once the ligament efficiencies are determined, the individual stress calculations are per-
formed. Membrane, bending, and total stress calculations are performed as prescribed by
The Rectangular Vessel Module 26-1

the Code in Sections 13-7 through 13-13. These stresses are compared to their allowables,
and a highest percentage of allowable calculation is performed.
The final calculation performed by the Rectangular Vessel module is the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure calculation. The program computes a M.A.W.P. for all three
types of stresses (Membrane, Bending, and Total). Additionally, depending on the specific
geometry of those vessels stayed by bars, an additional M.A.W.P. is computed per Equa-
tion 2 of UG-47.
The Rectangular Vessel module takes full account of corrosion allowance. The program
uses the corroded condition for all dimensions in its calculations. The only exception is the
reinforcement calculations. The reinforcing member is assumed to be entered in its cor-
roded state.
Figure 26A - Rectangular vessel with equivalent long side thickness (Type A1)
26-2 The Rectangular Vessel Module

Figure 26B - Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Type A2)
Figure 26C - Rectangular vessel with rounded corner (Type A3)

Figure 26D - Reinforced rectangular vessel (Type A4)
Figure 26E - Non-continuously reinforced rectangular vessel (Type A5)

Figure 26EE - Non-continuously reinforced vessel with rounded corners

(Type A6)
Figure 26F - Vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type A7 or A7-B)

Figure 26G - Vessel stayed by stay plates/stay bars (Type A8 or A8-B)
Figure 26H - Obround vessel (Type B1)

Figure 26I - Reinforced obround vessel (Type B2)
Figure 26J - Obround vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type B3 or B3-B)

Figure 26K - Circular vessel stayed by single diametral plate (Type C1)


Main Input Fields
Item Number
Enter the Rectangular Vessel ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Rectangular Vessel Description


Enter the Internal Design Pressure. The internal design pressure is a required entry. For
vessel type C1 (Figure 26K), this is the entry for P1. If analyzing vessel type C1 be aware
that the P1 value is associated with only one of the two chambers. If both chambers are
operating at the same pressure, then an equal value must be entered for P2.

Material Name
Material Allowable Stress at Design Temperature

When the material temperature is specified, all material properties associated with that
temperature will be automatically updated for materials that appear in the database.
If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure con-
formance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at
the design temperature.
Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature

If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure con-
formance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at
the ambient temperature.

Minimum Yield Stress for This Material

Enter the yield stress for this material. The ASME Code, Section II Part D lists the yield
stress for the material at ambient temperature. For many kinds of analysis, this is the
appropriate value to enter. If you need to use the yield stress at design temperature, you
can probably find it in the ASME Code, Section II Part D.
If analyzing a reinforced vessel this is a required entry for both the shell material and the
reinforcement material. These entries are used in determining an allowable stress for both
bending and total stresses, and if this entry is left blank, the program will assume zero for
the allowable stress.
Figure Number for Type of Vessel

Enter the ID of the type of rectangular vessel to be analyzed. The possible ID types are as
follows:
ID Figure Vessel Type

A1 Figure 26A Rectangular vessel with equal long-side plate thickness
A2 Figure 26B Rectangular vessel with unequal long-side thickness
A3 Figure 26C Rectangular vessel with rounded corners
A4 Figure 26D Reinforced rectangular vessel
A5 Figure 26E Non-continuously reinforced rectangular vessel
A6 Figure 26EE Non-continuous reinforced with rounded corners
A7 Figure 26F Rectangular vessel with single stay plate
A7-B Figure 26F Rectangular vessel with single row of bars
A8 Figure 26G Rectangular vessel with two stay plates
A8-B Figure 26G Rectangular vessel with double row of bars
B1 Figure 26H Obround vessel
B2 Figure 26I Reinforced obround vessel
B3 Figure 26J Obround vessel with single stay plate
B3-B Figure 26J Obround vessel with single row of bars
C1 Figure 26K Circular vessel with single diametral plate
Short-Side Length Dimension

Enter the design length of the short-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
particular vessel being analyzed.
For Figure:
A1 H Inside length of long-side of vessel
A2 H Inside length of long-side of vessel
A3 L1 Half-length of short-side minus the corner radius

A4 H Inside length of short-side of vessel

A5 L3 Half-length of short-side of vessel
A6 L3 Half-length of short-side of vessel
A7 h Inside length of short-side of vessel
A7-Bh Inside length of short-side of vessel
A8 h Inside length of short-side of vessel
A8-Bh Inside length of short-side of vessel
B1 2R Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side
B3-B2R Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side
C1 *** No Entry Required ***
Minimum Thickness of Short-Side Plate

Enter the minimum thickness of the short-side plate used to build the vessel, or the mini-
mum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a
required entry for all vessel types. For those vessels that the Code specifies a single thick-
ness (A3 and C1), the short-side thickness is used for both t1 and t2.
Joint Efficiency for Welded Seams

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency
value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-
side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead,
the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Please be sure to
refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
Typical values are
• 1.00 Full Radiography
• 0.85 Spot X - Ray
• 0.70 No - Radiography
Threaded Holes in Plates

If the plate has uniform or multi diameter holes, check this field in order to enter the pitch,
diameter, and depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in
order to adjust the calculated actual stress values.
Type of Reinforcement
Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel.
When a reinforced vessel is selected, the first responses are those of the pitch distance and
the delta value.

Long-Side Length Dimension

Enter the design length of the long-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
particular vessel being analyzed.
For Figure:
A1 h Inside length of long-side of vessel
A3 L2 Half-length of long-side minus the corner radius
A5 L4 Half-length of long-side
A6 L4 Half-length of long-side of vessel
A7-Bh Inside length of long-side of vessel
A8-Bh Inside length of long-side of vessel
B1 L2 Half length of long-side of vessel
B3-BL2 Half length of long-side of vessel
C1 *** No Entry Required ***
Minimum Thickness of Long-Side Plate

Enter the minimum thickness of the long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the mini-
mum thickness measured for an existing vessel.
Per Appendix 13, vessels A3 and C1 (Figure 26C and 26K, respectively) are assumed to
have equivalent long and short-side thickness’. Thus, the long-side thickness is not a
required entry for these two vessel types.
Minimum Thickness of End Plate

Enter the minimum thickness of the end plate. If a valid thickness is entered, the end plate
will be analyzed per UG-34. If the thickness value is entered as zero, or left blank, no cal-
culations will be performed on the end plate.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The program adjusts the actual thickness and
the inside diameter of the vessel, and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter
of the stay plate/bar.
C Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head

The C Factor is used in the equation to compute the required thickness of welded end
plates. Typical values are 0.2 or 0.3. See UG-34 for details.

Pop-Up Input Fields

Enter the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external
pressure calculations performed. When entered external pressure stress calculations as
well as vessel stability calculations will be performed.
Modulus of Elasticity
If an external pressure has been input, enter the Elastic Modulus of the material from Sub-
part 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature.
Length of Vessel
Enter length dimension of vessel type C1.
Minimum Thickness of 2nd Long-Side Plate

Enter the minimum thickness of the 2nd long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the min-
imum thickness measured for an existing vessel.
This entry is only used in the analysis of vessel A2 (Figure 26B). Appendix 13 allows ves-
sels of this type to have differing long-side thickness. If analyzing a type A2 vessel this is
a required entry.
Radius of Corner Section

Enter the radius of the corner section for vessels A3 and A5. The program assumes each of
the corner sections to have equivalent radii.
Pitch Distance Between Reinforcement

Enter the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be
greater than or equal to the width of the reinforcing member.
C-Factor
The C-factor is an attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces.
This factor is taken from UG-47, and will default to 2.1.
Delta
Material parameter used to calculate pitch.
Materials listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):

Material English SI
Carbon Steel 6000 15754.54

Austinitic SS 5840 15334.42
Ni-Cr-Fe 6180 16227.17
Ni-Fe-Cr 6030 15833.31
Aluminum 3560 9347.69
Nickel Copper 5720 15019.33
Unalloyed Titanium 4490 11789.65
Unreinforced Length Dimension

Enter the unreinforced length dimension for figure A6. This dimension is L11 for the
short-side and L21 for the long-side.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T3)

Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A7, A7-B, A8, A8-B, B3, or B3-B.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T4)

Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A8, or A8-B.
Is the Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate?

If you do not check this box, PVElite will perform the end plate calculations based on the
entire long-side length. If you do check this box, the program will use the dimensions of
the compartment formed by the stay plate.
Pitch Distance Between Bars

Enter the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or
equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.
Vessel Radius
Enter the inside radius of the vessel type C1.
Pressure in 2nd Compartment

Enter the internal pressure of the 2nd compartment in vessel C1. You must enter an inter-
nal design pressure that is less than or equal to P1. In the event that the two compartments
have equivalent pressure, the value entered for P2 must equal the value entered for P1. If
left blank, a value of zero is used for P2.
Center to Center Distance Between Poles

Enter the maximum pitch distance between holes in the side plates of the vessel being ana-
lyzed. This pitch distance is shown in Figure 26L.
This value must be greater than the hole diameter.

Figure 26L - Plate with multicomputer holes
Diameter of Hole
Enter the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the
hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure
26L. The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.
Depth of Hole
Enter the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole
is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure 26L.
The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.
Type of Reinforcing Ring

Three types of reinforcement are available:
None—No reinforcing ring
Simple Bar Geometry—Enter the width, thickness, and length (if necessary) of the
bar.
Distance from Outside of Vessel

Enter the distance from the outer surface of the vessel to the outermost point on the rein-
forcing bar or beam.
Width of Reinforcing Member

Enter the width of the reinforcing member. This value is the distance that the reinforce-
ment remains in contact with the vessel wall.
This value cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch, as that would indicate that the
reinforcement if overlapping.
Length of Reinforcing Member

For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforce-
ment.
No entry is required for other vessel types.

General Beam Section—Enter the moment of inertia, cross-sectional area, and

the distance from the centroid.
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section

Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as reinforcement.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member

Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcement,
in the direction parallel to the surface of the vessel.
Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel

Enter the distance from the surface of the vessel to the centroid of the reinforcing ring.
This distance should be measured normal to the vessel surface.
Length of Reinforcing Member

For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforce-
ment. No entry is required for other vessel types.
In all cases the program includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of iner-
tia.

Ligament Efficiency Calculations
When the side plates have uniform or multi diameter holes, ligament efficiency calcula-
tions are performed according to Section 13-6. For the case of uniform diameter holes, the
ligament efficiency factors em and eb for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are
considered to be the same. In the case of multi diameter holes (see Figure 26L), the neutral
axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid thickness of the plate; in this case, for bend-
ing loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other surface.
If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies,
the calculated stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is
important to note that if the stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then
the calculations for the allowable stresses will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incor-
rectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the allowables at the same time.
Reinforcement Calculations
The reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures 26D, 26E,
and 26I), are discussed in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses
those vessels in which the reinforcement on opposite side plates have the same moment of
inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4 and B2 is assumed to be continu-
ous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous.
The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing
member center lines. Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using
this maximum value, equations (1a)-(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum
value for both the long and short-side plates. The minimum calculated value shall be con-
sidered the maximum distance between reinforcement center lines. In addition to the
above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked. Specifically, the
width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch.
Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and
reinforcement) is determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calcu-
lations are performed for locations where the plate is in compression, and then also per-
formed for locations where the plate is in tension. Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to
calculate the maximum width of the shell plate which can be used to compute the effective
moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in compression. At
locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch
distance is used in the computations.
Stress Calculations
The stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The cal-
culations are performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side
plates. These actual stress values are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form.
A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress, while a negative (-) stress indicates compres-
sive stress.
As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are
adjusted by the ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint effi-
ciency E. At the mid-side locations, the stresses are increased by dividing the calculated
value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency. In the event that the plates have

holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E, there is no adjust-
ment to the stress calculations, rather the allowables are adjusted by the value E.
Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are
used in the M.A.W.P. calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on
end plates is performed if a thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are
performed per UG-34 with a C factor entered by the user. These stresses are not used in
the computation of the MAWP.
Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that
for reinforced members the program compares the membrane stress to the lower of the
plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress. Note also that when there are holes in the
side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is fac-
tored into the actual stress calculation as necessary.
Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted
allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced members the program compares the actual
stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the
lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these
four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note also that when there are
holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a mem-
brane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.
Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations

After performing the actual stress calculation and computing the allowable stresses at all
locations, the program computes the highest stress/allowable ratio for each of the three
stress types. The program displays the highest percentage of the allowable used, and the
actual stress value that this percentage relates to.
MAWP Calculations
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for each of the three stress types.
The computation of the M.A.W.P. is performed by setting the stress equations equal to the
allowables, and solving for P. The minimum computed P value is considered to be the
maximum allowable working pressure for the particular stress type.
When analyzing vessels A7-B or A8-B (Figures 26G and 26H stayed by bars), an addi-
tional pressure rating is computed. If the long-side height is greater than the pitch of the
stay bars, then a pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with the long-side
height substituted for the pitch. If this value of pressure is less than the previously calcu-
lated M.A.W.P.s, then this becomes the vessel pressure rating. Similarly for vessel B3-B
(Figure 26J stayed by bars), if (L2 + R/2) is greater than the pitch, then an additional pres-
sure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with (L2 + R/2) substituted for the pitch.
External Pressure Calculations

External pressure calculations are performed on vessel A1 and A2 if the user has entered a
value for external pressure. These calculations are performed per Appendix 13, Section
13-14. First, the external pressure is substituted for internal pressure, and the calculations
discussed previously are performed again. Next, the four side plates and the end plates are

checked for stability per equation (1) of 13-14(b). Finally, the entire cross section is
checked for column stability in accordance with equation (1) from paragraph 13-14(c).

Example Problems
Example problem 1 analyzes vessel type A1 (Figure 26A). This vessel has holes in the two
long-side plates, and uses the ligament efficiency calculations. This is the Code example
problem 13-17(a).
Rectangular Vessels Per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix 13

FileName : RCTEXMPL -------------------------------- Page 1
Rectves Analysis : EXAMPLE A1 ITEM: 1, 05:15pm, 05/18/98
INPUT VALUES, COMPONENT 1, Description: EXAMPLE A1
Figure Number Analyzed A1

Design Temperature Temp 650.0000 F
VESSEL MATERIAL DATA:

Material Specification SA-516 70
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temp S 17500.0000 psi
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient SA 17500.0000 psi
Shell Yield Stress at Design Temperature Sy .0000 psi
SHORT-SIDE VESSEL DATA:

Short-side Length Dimension H 6.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Short-side Plates t1 .6250 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Short-side E .8000
Corner Joint Efficiency on Short-side EC .8000
LONG-SIDE VESSEL DATA:

Long-side Length Dimension h 13.5000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Long-side Plates t2 1.0000 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Long-side E .8000
ADDITIONAL VESSEL DATA:

Minimum Thickness of End Plate t5 .5000 in.
LIGAMENT EFFICIENCY DATA:

Long-side Plate # 1,
Pitch Distance p 3.7500 in.
Uniform Hole Diameter d0 1.5000 in.
Depth of Holes T0 1.0000 in.
Long-side Plate # 2,
Pitch Distance p 3.7500 in.
# 1: Hole Diameter d0 1.7500 in.
Hole Depth T0 .6250 in.
# 2: Hole Diameter d1 1.2500 in.
Hole Depth T1 .3750 in.
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, RECTANGULAR VESSEL # 1, Desc: EXAMPLE A1

PRELIMINARY CALCULATION RESULTS:

Moment of Inertia of a Strip of the Vessel Wall:
Thickness t1, I1 = .0203 in**4
Ligament Efficiency Calculations (Section 13-6, Equations (1)-(6)):

Em Eb Ci Co
Short-side 1 .800 .800 .313 -.313
2 .800 .800 .313 -.313
Long-side 1 .600 .600 .500 -.500
2 .583 .564 .473 -.527
Rectangular Vessel Parameters:

Alpha = H / h = .4444
K = (I2/I1)*Alpha = 1.8204
MEMBRANE STRESSES: Membrane Stress Calculations per Section 13-7,

Equations (1) and (2). (psi) :
STRESS LOCATIONS Actual Allowable
Short-side 1 1242.00 14000.00
Short-side 2 1242.00 14000.00
Short-side Corner 1242.00 14000.00
Long-side 1 at A 575.00 17500.00
Long-side 2 at A 591.43 17500.00
Long-side Corner 345.00 14000.00
BENDING STRESSES: Bending Stress Calculations per Section 13-7,

Equations (3-6). (psi) :
STRESS LOCATIONS Inner Outer Allowable
Short-side 1 at N 4983.24 -4983.24 21000.00
at Q 12932.04 -12932.04 21000.00
Short-side 2 at N 4983.24 -4983.24 21000.00
at Q 12932.04 -12932.04 21000.00
Long-side 1 at M -17779.14 17779.14 26250.00
at Q 5051.58 -5051.58 21000.00
Long-side 2 at M -17909.12 19936.57 26250.00
at Q 4780.96 -5322.20 21000.00
TOTAL STRESSES: Total Stress Calculations per Section 13-7,

Short-side 1 at N 6225.24 -3741.24 21000.00
at Q 14174.04 -11690.04 21000.00
Short-side 2 at N 6225.24 -3741.24 21000.00
at Q 14174.04 -11690.04 21000.00
Long-side 1 at M -17204.14 18354.14 26250.00
at Q 5396.58 -4706.58 21000.00
Long-side 2 at M -17317.69 20527.99 26250.00
at Q 5125.96 -4977.20 21000.00
END PLATE STRESSES (psi) : Actual Allowable

End Plate 7728.00 17500.00

SUMMARY OF RESULTS (INTERNAL PRESSURE):
MEMBRANE STRESS SUMMARY,

High Stress (Highest % of Allowable) 1242.00 psi
High Stress Percentage 8.87 %
M.A.W.P. for Membrane Stresses 1296.30 psig
BENDING STRESS SUMMARY,

M.A.W.P. for Bending Stresses 151.42 psig
TOTAL STRESS SUMMARY,

M.A.W.P. for Total Stresses 147.06 psig

Example problem 2 analyzes vessel type A4 (Figure 26D). This reinforced vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(d).

FileName : RCTEXMPL ----------------------------------- Page 1


Material Specification SA-285 C
Shell Yield Stress at Design Temperature Sy 25700.0000 psi

Short-side Length Dimension H 61.6250 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Short-side E .8500
Corner Joint Efficiency on Short-side EC 1.0000

Long-side Length Dimension h 83.6250 in.
Minimum Thickness of Long-side Plates t2 .3750 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Long-side E .8500
REINFORCEMENT MATERIAL DATA:

Reinforcement Material Specification SA-36
Reinf Allowable Stress at Design Temp Sr 14500.0000 psi
Reinf Allowable Stress at Ambient SA 14500.0000 psi
Reinf Yield Stress at Design Temp Sy 30800.0000 psi
Pitch Distance for Reinforcement 14.0000 in.

C-Factor for Reinforcement ( from UG-47) 2.1000
DELTA (Reinforcement Material Parameter) 6000.0000
SHORT-SIDE SECTIONAL DATA:

Cross-sectional Area of Reinforcement 3.6100 sq.in.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcement 21.8000 in**4
Outside Distance from Outside of Vessel 6.0000 in.
Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel 3.0000 in.
Width of Reinforcing Member 7.0000 in.
LONG-SIDE SECTIONAL DATA:

Cross-sectional Area of Reinforcement 5.3400 sq.in.

Moment of Inertia of Reinforcement 56.9000 in**4

Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel 4.0000 in.
Width of Reinforcing Member 7.0000 in.
RECTANGULAR VESSEL RESULTS, ITEM NUMBER 4, Description: EXAMPLE A4
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 16.4829 in.
Beta and J Values Taken from Table 13-8(d):

Short-side BETA = 3.7387
J = 2.0261
Long-side BETA = 5.0734
J = 2.0000
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 16.1904 in.
Long-side p2 = 16.0857 in.
Maximum Pitch ( Minimum of p, p1, and p2 )

pmax = 16.0857 in.
Effective Width of Shell Plate at Locations where the Plate

is in Compression ( Section 13-8, Eq. (2) ):
w = 14.0000 in.

is in Tension:
w = 14.0000 in.
Effective Area of Reinforcement on Shell ( t * w ):

Short-side Ap = 5.2500 sq.in.
Long-side Ap = 5.2500 sq.in.
Moment of Inertia of Effective Area of Reinforcement ( w * t**3 / 12 ):

Short-side Is = .0615 in**4
Long-side Il = .0615 in**4
Moment of Inertia of Combined Reinforcement and Effective Width:

In Compression I11 = 43.5952 in**4
I21 = 103.3825 in**4
In Tension I11 = 43.5952 in**4
I21 = 103.3825 in**4
Distance from Neutral Axis of Cross Section of Composite Section to

the Inside Surface of the Vessel (in.):
Ci Co
Short-side, in Compression 1.4862 -4.8888
in Tension 1.4862 -4.8888
Long-side, in Compression 2.2990 -6.0760
in Tension 2.2990 -6.0760

Rectangular Vessel Reinforcement Parameters:

Alpha1 = H1 / h1 = .7787
k(comp)= (I22/I11)*Alpha1 = 1.8466
k(tens)= (I22/I11)*Alpha1 = 1.8466

Equations (3) and (4). (psi) :
Short-side 1 991.04 11730.00
Short-side 2 991.04 11730.00
Short-side Corner 991.04 13800.00
Long-side 1 at A 611.01 11730.00
Long-side 2 at A 611.01 11730.00
Long-side Corner 611.01 13800.00

Short-side 1 at N -291.75 959.65 17133.33
at Q 3106.81 -10219.35 17133.33
Short-side 2 at N -291.75 959.65 17133.33
at Q 3106.81 -10219.35 17133.33
Long-side 1 at M -2055.69 5432.82 17133.33
at Q 2026.58 -5355.88 17133.33
Long-side 2 at M -2055.69 5432.82 17133.33
at Q 2026.58 -5355.88 17133.33

Short-side 1 at N 699.30 1950.69 17133.33
at Q 4097.85 -9228.31 17133.33
Short-side 2 at N 699.30 1950.69 17133.33
at Q 4097.85 -9228.31 17133.33
Long-side 1 at M -1444.68 6043.83 17133.33
at Q 2637.59 -4744.87 17133.33
Long-side 2 at M -1444.68 6043.83 17133.33
at Q 2637.59 -4744.87 17133.33
Note: The following can be used for outer stress:
Short-side 1 at N, outer allowable 18487.50 psi
Short-side 2 at N, outer allowable 18487.50 psi
Long-side 1 at M, outer allowable 18487.50 psi
Long-side 2 at M, outer allowable 18487.50 psi
At Corner Q, outer allowable 20533.33 psi
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:


High Stress (Highest % of Allowable) -10219.35 psi



Example problem 3 analyzes vessel type A7 (Figure 26F). This vessel which is stayed by a
single plate is a COADE generated example problem.

FileName : RCTEXMPL ---------------------------------- Page 1



Short-side Length Dimension L3 25.0000 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Short-side E 1.0000

Long-side Length Dimension L4 30.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Long-side Plates t2 1.0000 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Long-side E 1.0000

Radius of Corner Sections R 7.5000 in.
REINFORCEMENT MATERIAL DATA:

Reinforcement Material Specification SA-515 70
Reinf Allowable Stress at Design Temp Sr 17500.0000 psi
Reinf Allowable Stress at Ambient SA 17500.0000 psi
Reinf Yield Stress at Design Temp Sy 30800.0000 psi
Pitch Distance for Reinforcement 7.0000 in.

C-Factor for Reinforcement ( from UG-47) 2.1000
DELTA (Reinforcement Material Parameter) 6000.0000
SHORT-SIDE RECTANGULAR BEAM DATA:

Length of Reinforcing Member 14.0000 in.
Width of Reinforcing Member .7500 in.
LONG-SIDE RECTANGULAR BEAM DATA:


Length of Reinforcing Member 18.0000 in.
Width of Reinforcing Member .7500 in.
RECTANGULAR VESSEL RESULTS, ITEM NUMBER 5, Description: EXAMPLE A5
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 32.1496 in.
Beta and J Values Taken from Table 13-8(d):

Short-side BETA = 1.0887
J = 4.2489
Long-side BETA = 1.3997
J = 3.3196
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 45.7300 in.
Long-side p2 = 53.8952 in.
Maximum Pitch ( Minimum of p, p1, and p2 )

pmax = 32.1496 in.

is in Compression ( Section 13-8, Eq. (2) ):
w = 7.0000 in.

is in Tension:
w = 7.0000 in.
Effective Area of Reinforcement on Shell ( t * w ):

Short-side Ap = 5.2500 sq.in.
Long-side Ap = 7.0000 sq.in.
Moment of Inertia of Effective Area of Reinforcement ( w * t**3 / 12 ):

Short-side Is = .2461 in**4
Long-side Il = .5833 in**4
Moment of Inertia of Combined Reinforcement and Effective Width:

In Compression I11 = 7.4707 in**4
I21 = 9.1644 in**4
In Tension I11 = 7.4707 in**4
I21 = 9.1644 in**4
Distance from Neutral Axis of Cross Section of Composite Section to

the Inside Surface of the Vessel (in.):
Ci Co
Short-side, in Compression .9375 -2.8125
in Tension .9375 -2.8125
Long-side, in Compression .8919 -3.1081
in Tension .8919 -3.1081

Rectangular Vessel Reinforcement Parameters:

In Compression,
K4 (Sec.13-8, Eqn.39) = -216.1620
Ma = p * P * K4 = -30262.6900
Theta (Sec.13-8 ) = 37.8778
Mr (Sec.13-8, Eqn.38) = 16729.4200
In Tension,
K4 (Sec.13-8, Eqn.39) = -216.1620
Ma = p * P * K4 = -30262.6900
Mr (Sec.13-8, Eqn.38) = 16729.4200

Long-side 1 at A 500.00 17500.00
at B 500.00 17500.00
at C 500.00 17500.00
Long-side 2 at A 500.00 17500.00
at B 500.00 17500.00
at C 500.00 17500.00
Short-side 1 at F 800.00 17500.00
at G 800.00 17500.00
at H 800.00 17500.00
Short-side 2 at F 800.00 17500.00
at G 800.00 17500.00
at H 800.00 17500.00
Corner Sections 960.12 17500.00

Long-side 1 at A -2945.20 10263.58 20533.33
at B -21079.45 21079.45 26250.00
at C 4435.55 -4435.55 26250.00
Long-side 2 at A -2945.20 10263.58 20533.33
at B -21079.45 21079.45 26250.00
at C 4435.55 -4435.55 26250.00
Short-side 1 at F 15885.43 -15885.43 26250.00
at G -11554.57 11554.57 26250.00
at H -1381.98 4145.95 20533.33
Short-side 2 at F 15885.43 -15885.43 26250.00
at G -11554.57 11554.57 26250.00
at H -1381.98 4145.95 20533.33
Corner Sections 14339.50 -14339.50 26250.00

Long-side 1 at A -2445.20 10763.58 20533.33
at B -20579.45 21579.45 26250.00
at C 4935.55 -3935.55 26250.00
Long-side 2 at A -2445.20 10763.58 20533.33
at B -20579.45 21579.45 26250.00
at C 4935.55 -3935.55 26250.00

Short-side 1 at F 16685.43 -15085.43 26250.00

at G -10754.57 12354.57 26250.00
at H -581.98 4945.95 20533.33
Short-side 2 at F 16685.43 -15085.43 26250.00
at G -10754.57 12354.57 26250.00
at H -581.98 4945.95 20533.33
Corner Sections 15299.62 -13379.38 26250.00
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:




Example problem 4 analyzed vessel type B1 (Figure 26H). This obround vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(f).

FileName : RCTEXMPL ---------------------------------- Page 1
Rectves Analysis : EXAMPLE B1 ITEM: 11, 05:15pm, 05/18/98
INPUT VALUES, COMPONENT 11, Description: EXAMPLE B1
Figure Number Analyzed B1



Short-side Length Dimension 2R 20.0000 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Short-side E 1.0000

Long-side Length Dimension L2 10.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Long-side Plates t2 .7500 in.
Mid-side Joint Efficiency on Long-side E 1.0000

Minimum Thickness of End Plate t5 .6250 in.
RECTANGULAR VESSEL RESULTS, ITEM NUMBER 11, Description: EXAMPLE B1
PRELIMINARY CALCULATION RESULTS:

Moment of Inertia of a Strip of the Vessel Wall:
Rectangular Vessel Parameters:

Alpha2 = I2 / I1 = 3.3750
Gamma = L2 / R = 1.0000
A ( Section 13-5 ) = 126.0288
C1 ( Section 13-5 ) = 7430.8630
MEMBRANE STRESSES: Membrane Stress Calculations per Section 13-10


Long-side 1 at A 266.67 17500.00

at B 266.67 17500.00
Long-side 2 at A 266.67 17500.00
at B 266.67 17500.00
Short-side 1 at B 400.00 17500.00
at C 800.00 17500.00
Short-side 2 at B 400.00 17500.00
at C 800.00 17500.00

Long-side 1 at A 20964.14 -20964.14 26250.00
at B -10297.47 10297.47 26250.00
Long-side 2 at A 20964.14 -20964.14 26250.00
at B -10297.47 10297.47 26250.00
Short-side 1 at B -23169.32 23169.32 26250.00
at C 24830.68 -24830.68 26250.00
Short-side 2 at B -23169.32 23169.32 26250.00
at C 24830.68 -24830.68 26250.00

Long-side 1 at A 21230.81 -20697.47 26250.00
at B -10030.81 10564.14 26250.00
Long-side 2 at A 21230.81 -20697.47 26250.00
at B -10030.81 10564.14 26250.00
Short-side 1 at B -22769.32 23569.32 26250.00
at C 25630.68 -24030.68 26250.00
Short-side 2 at B -22769.32 23569.32 26250.00
at C 25630.68 -24030.68 26250.00
END PLATE STRESSES (psi) : Actual Allowable

End Plate 4096.00 17500.00
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:




&KDSWHU
7KH:5&$QQH[*
0RGXOH
Introduction
The WRC 297 analysis module performs local stress calculations on cylinder to cylinder
attachments according to the Welding Research Council’s bulletin number 297 or PD
5500, Annex G.

The WRC 297 bulletin was published in 1984 and attempts to extend the existing analysis
of WRC 107 for cylinder to cylinder intersections. In many cases the d/D ratio is beyond
the limit of WRC 107 and the limit of WRC 297 extends this ratio from 0.3 to 0.5.
Another important difference is that WRC 297 computes the stresses in the nozzle wall
where the WRC 107 analysis does not. This module provides inputs for all of the informa-
tion required to perform this analysis. Please note that this method does not perform stress
analysis of nozzles on spheres as WRC 107 does, nor does it address square or rectangular
attachments.

Item Number
Enter the item’s ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Description
Diameter Basis for Vessel

The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (Id) or outside (Od) dimension basis.
Vessel Diameter
Enter in the actual diameter of the vessel using the Id or Od as specified above.
Vessel Wall Thickness

Enter in the wall thickness of the vessel. This thickness should be measured at the inter-
section of the nozzle and the vessel.
The WRC 297/Annex G Module 27-1

Vessel Corrosion Allowance

Enter in the corrosion allowance if there is any. The program will adjust the Id and thick-
ness appropriately.
Design Pressure
The design pressure will be used to compute membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel
wall. It will also be used to compute axial pressure thrust if instructed to do so.
Design Temperature
This is design temperature for the vessel. This value is used to look up allowable stresses
for the vessel and nozzle materials from the ASME Section II Part D material table.
Vessel Material
The vessel material can be typed in selected from the material database. Right Click on
this field to access the properties for this material or access the database.
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor

This value typically varies from 1 to 3 and is a function of the quality of the weld and the
local dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld.
Stress concentration factors are a measure of a very local stress riser because of sharp cor-
ners, no filet radii, etc.
This stress concentration factor will apply for the stress calculations in the vessel on both
the inside and outside of the vessel.
This stress concentration factor is not used in any way with the pressure stress calcula-
tions.
Is there a Reinforcing Pad?

If this nozzle has a pad check this button and you will be prompted to enter in the diameter
of the pad along the vessel surface and the pad thickness. This will cause the program to
perform stress calculations at the edge of the pad.
Diameter Basis for Nozzle

The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (Id) or outside (Od) dimension basis.
Diameter of Nozzle
Enter in the actual inside or outside diameter of the nozzle as appropriate.
Nozzle Wall Thickness

Enter in the minimum nozzle wall thickness at the shell to nozzle junction. This value
should include any allowances for mill tolerance.

Enter in the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 3/
16" or more depending on the service and design specifications.
27-2 The WRC 297/Annex G Module

Axial Force "P" (IN WRC 107 ) or FR (IN PD 5500)

Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel.
The program does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. In WRC 107 convention:
Positive loads to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the nozzle. While in
PD 5500 convention Positive loads try to "pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to
"push" the nozzle. The following figures should clarify these conventions.
Shear Force VC (IN WRC 107 ) or FC (IN PD 5500)

Enter the longitudinal shear load VC (or FC in PD 5500 convention) in the units above.
Enter this value in accordance with the convention used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The
following figure should clarify these conventions.
Shear Force VL (IN WRC 107 ) or FL (IN PD 5500)

Enter the longitudinal shear load VL (or FL in PD 5500 convention) in the units above.
Enter this value in accordance with the convention used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The
following figure should clarify these conventions.
Torsional Moment MT
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance
with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures should clar-
ify these conventions.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. Enter this value
in accordance with the used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following figures should
clarify these conventions. Note that this moment has opposite signs in these conventions.

Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in
accordance with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures
should clarify these conventions.
WRC 107 Naming Convention

PD 5500 Naming Convention
Add Axial Pressure Thrust ?

If this box is checked the force due to pressure times the internal pipe area will be added to
or subtracted from the radial load "P".
Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)?

If this box is checked the nominal computed pressure stress on the vessel wall as defined
in paragraph AD-560.7 will be multiplied by the stress indices as they are listed in that
paragraph of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 2. This is essentially the computation
of the surface stress intensity. If the design specification requires the use of these indices,
check this box. Please note that these indices are not used in the calculation of the pressure
stress on the nozzle. The program will multiply the pressure stress on the nozzle by a fac-
tor of 1.2.

Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G
Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane + Bending)

This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f, to obtain an allowable stress for the
maximum membrane plus bending stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 27, 28 and
29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G. This entry normally has a value of 2.25 or
lower. The program will use a value of 2.0 for this factor for stresses computed at the edge
of the pad.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane)

This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f, to obtain an allowable stress for the
maximum membrane stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the print-
out samples in PD 5500 Annex G. This entry normally has a value of 1.2 or lower.

If this nozzle has a projection inside of the vessel, enter that length into this field. This
value is used to determine the pressure stress intensification factor from the graphs in Sec-
tion 3 of the PD 5500 Code. These curves for Cers/eps have been digitized and are used by
the program. All of the curves for protruding and flush nozzles are included for analysis.
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section

Enter in the length of the vessel on which this nozzle lies. For vessels without stiffeners or
cones this would be the entire vessel length accounting for the heads as necessary. This
value is used along with the "Distance from left Tangent" field to compute the equivalent
length for off center loading.
Offset from Left Tangent Line

Enter in the distance that the centerline of the nozzles is with respect to the left tangent line
or appropriate line of support. This value is used in conjunction with the vessel length to
compute the equivalent length for off center loading.
Is the Location of the Nozzle in the Vessel Spherical?

If the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical head or
is in a spherical head then check this box. If you are entering this data manually ensure
that you are entering the spherical diameter. This is especially important for nozzle located
in elliptical heads. Checking this box causes the program to access the various curves used
to compute the spherical factors for nozzles connected to spheres per Annex G.

PVElite - User Guide Sample Calculation
Sample Calculation
Input Echo, WRC297 Item 1, Description: WRC NOZ
Diameter Basis for Vessel Vbasis OD

Corrosion Allowance for Vessel Cas 0.0000 in.
Vessel Diameter Dv 120.000 in.
Vessel Thickness Tv 1.000 in.
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor Scfn 0.000
Diameter Basis for Nozzle Nbasis OD

Corrosion Allowance for Nozzle Can 0.0000 in.
Nozzle Diameter Dn 12.000 in.
Nozzle Thickness Tn 0.375 in.
Nozzle Stress Concentration Factor Scfv 0.000
Design Internal Pressure Dp 100.00 psig

Radial Load P 100.00 lb.
Circumferential Shear Vc 200.00 lb.
Longitudinal Shear Vl 300.00 lb.
Torsional Moment Mt 400.00 ft.lb.
Circumferential Moment Mc 0.00 ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment Ml 0.00 ft.lb.
Include Axial Pressure Thrust No
Stress Computations at the Edge of the Nozzle

---------------------------------------------
WRC 297 Curve Access Parameters:
Nr/P = 0.082
Mr/P = 0.109
M0/P = 0.084
N0/P = 0.209
MrD/Mc = 0.185
NrDL/Mc = 0.118
M0d/Mc = 0.174
N0DL/Mc = 0.150
MrD/Ml = 0.143
NrDL/Ml = 0.098
M0D/Ml = 0.121
N0DL/Ml = 0.300
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stresses Normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
longitudinal plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Normal Pressure Stress 7139 18444 7139 18444
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Outplane Stress Summary 7139 18444 7139 18444
VESSEL Stresses

Sample Calculation PVElite - User Guide
-----------(psi )------------
Inplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Pressure Stress 5949 -1189 5949 -1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Inplane Stress Summary 5949 -1189 5949 -1189
VESSEL Stresses
(Shear stress normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Shear (Vc) 10 10 -10 -10
Outplane Shear (Vl) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Shear (Mt) 21 21 21 21
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Shear Stress Summary 31 31 11 11
VESSEL Stresses
(Stress Intensities Top Top Bottom Bottom
Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Two * Max Shear Stress 7139 19633 7139 19633
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stresses Normal to Left Left Right Right
circumferential plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Normal Pressure Stress 12494 5949 12494 5949
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Outplane Stress Summary 12494 5949 12494 5949
VESSEL Stresses
(Stresses parallel to Left Left Right Right
-----------(psi )------------
Inplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Pressure Stress 15469 -1189 15469 -1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Inplane Stress Summary 15469 -1189 15469 -1189
VESSEL Stresses
(Shear stress normal to Left Left Right Right
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Shear (Vc) 0 0 0 0

Outplane Shear (Vl) -15 -15 15 15

Torsional Shear (Mt) 21 21 21 21
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
VESSEL Stresses
(Stress Intensities Left Left Right Right
Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
NOZZLE Stresses
(Stresses in the Top Top Bottom Bottom
hoop direction) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Hoop Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Pressure Stress 1741 1861 1741 1861
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Hoop Stress Summary 1741 1861 1741 1861
NOZZLE Stresses
pipe cross-section) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Axial Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Pressure Stress 870 870 870 870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Axial Stress Summary 870 870 870 870
NOZZLE Stresses
(Shear stress) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Shear due to (Vc) 28 28 -28 -28
Shear due to (Vl) 0 0 0 0
Shear due to Torsion 56 56 56 56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
NOZZLE Stresses
(Stress Intensities Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
NOZZLE Stresses
(Stresses in the Left Left Right Right
hoop direction) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Hoop Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0

Hoop Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0

Hoop Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Pressure Stress 1741 1861 1741 1861
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Hoop Stress Summary 1741 1861 1741 1861
NOZZLE Stresses
(Stresses Normal to Left Left Right Right
pipe cross-section) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Axial Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Pressure Stress 870 870 870 870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Axial Stress Summary 870 870 870 870
NOZZLE Stresses
(Shear stress) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Shear due to (Vc) 0 0 0 0
Shear due to (Vl) -42 -42 42 42
Shear due to Torsion 56 56 56 56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
NOZZLE Stresses
(Stress Intensities Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------

The WRC 297 stress evaluation method computes stress intensities in the nozzle and ves-
sel wall at the junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different
points. Typically, stress intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at
operating temperature. However, users should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for
further clarification and evaluation of stress results.
Since this method produces quite a bit of output, it may be useful to use the option to pro-
duce only the summary of results. To do this use the tools -> configuration option (miscel-
laneous tab) and check the appropriate box to produce the results in a summary fashion.
Note that this directive will affect all of the generated reports in the file.

Appendix G Sample Problem PVElite - User Guide
Appendix G Sample Problem

Input Echo, Annex G Item 1, Description: test
Diameter Basis for Vessel Vbasis OD
Corrosion Allowance for Vessel Cas 0.1587 mm.
Vessel Diameter Dv 3048.000 mm.
Vessel Thickness Tv 25.400 mm.
Vessel Shell Design Allowable Stress f 137.900 N./mm²
Vessel Shell Yield Strength fy 218.916 N./mm²
Allowable Stress Intensity Factor (Mem + Bend) 2.25
Allowable Stress Intensity Factor (Membrane) 1.20
Diameter Basis for Nozzle Nbasis OD
Corrosion Allowance for Nozzle Can 0.0000 mm.
Nozzle Diameter Dn 304.800 mm.
Nozzle Thickness Tn 25.400 mm.
Nozzle Inside Projection h 0.000 mm.
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section L 2540.00 mm.
Offset from Left Tangent Line Dx 1270.00 mm.
Design Internal Pressure Dp 0.69 N./sq.mm.
Radial Load Fr -9785.60 N.
Circumferential Shear Fc 7005.60 N.
Longitudinal Shear Fl 0.00 N.
Torsional Moment Mt -1171843.2 N.mm.
Circumferential Moment Mc 7595280.3 N.mm.
Longitudinal Moment Ml 3058456.6 N.mm.
Stress Calculations at the Edge of the Nozzle Neck :
==================================================
Intermediate Values L o n g i t u d i n a l Circ. Radial
At Point A Point B At C
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
K Factor K 8.0000 8.0000 1.5748

Load over the Area W 19317.4 -19317.4 47972.2 9785.6
Equivalent Length Le 2530.1311 2530.1311 2540.0000 2540.0000
Parameter Cx 39.5817 39.5817 118.7450 118.7450
Parameter Cø 118.7450 118.7450 39.5817 118.7450
Parameter 64r(Cx/r) 2.6284 2.6284 23.6552 23.6552
Parameter 2Cx/Le 0.0313 0.0313 0.0935 0.0935
Parameter Cø/Cx 3.0000 3.0000 0.3333 1.0000
G6 Curve Value 0.1425 0.1425 0.1774

G7 Curve Value 0.1381 0.1381 0.1074
G8 Curve Value -0.1917 -0.1917 -0.1601
G9 Curve Value -0.1427 -0.1427 -0.1491
G6 at Zero 0.3139 0.3139

G7 at Zero 0.2267 0.2267
G8 at Zero -0.2050 -0.2050
G9 at Zero -0.1609 -0.1609
Circ. value Mø 0.4539 0.4539

Long. value Mx 0.6092 0.6092
Circ. value Nø 0.9352 0.9352
Long. value Nx 0.8867 0.8867
Curve Value Mø3/W 0.1058 0.1058

Curve Value Mx3/W 0.0376 0.0376

PVElite - User Guide Appendix G Sample Problem
Curve Value Nø3/W -0.0550 -0.0550

Curve Value Nx3/W -0.0982 -0.0982
Value Mø2/W 0.0480 0.0480

Value Mx2/W 0.0229 0.0229
Value Nø2/W -0.0514 -0.0514
Value Nx2/W -0.0870 -0.0870
Circ. value Mø/W 0.0945 0.0945 0.1774 0.1232

Long. value Mx/W 0.1152 0.1152 0.1074 0.0838
Circ. value Nøt/W -0.1403 -0.1403 -0.1601 -0.1538
Long. value Nxt/W -0.0557 -0.0557 -0.1491 -0.1427
Pressure Stress SIF 2.0455
PD 5500 Annex G Nozzle to Cylinder Stress Evaluation
-------------------------------------------------------
Quadrant Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Surface In Out In Out In Out In Out
Circumferential Stresses:
Membrane Component (Nø/t) due to:
Radial Load -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2.
Circ. Moment -12. -12. -12. -12. 12. 12. 12. 12.
Long. Moment -4. -4. 4. 4. 4. 4. -4. -4.
Sub-Total loc. -19. -19. -10. -10. 14. 14. 5. 5.
Pressure (fp) 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84.
Sub-Total(føm) 66. 66. 74. 74. 98. 98. 90. 90.
Bending Component (6Mø/t²) due to:

Radial Load 11. -11. 11. -11. 11. -11. 11. -11.
Circ. Moment 80. -80. 80. -80. -80. 80. -80. 80.
Long. Moment 17. -17. -17. 17. -17. 17. 17. -17.
Sub-Total(føb) 109. -109. 74. -74. -86. 86. -52. 52.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Circ. Str 174. -43. 149. 0. 12. 184. 38. 141.
Longitudinal Stresses:
Membrane Component (Nx/t) due to:
Radial Load -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2.
Circ. Moment -11. -11. -11. -11. 11. 11. 11. 11.
Long. Moment -2. -2. 2. 2. 2. 2. -2. -2.
Sub-Total loc. -15. -15. -12. -12. 11. 11. 7. 7.
Pressure (fp) 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84.
Sub-Total(fxm) 69. 69. 73. 73. 95. 95. 92. 92.
Bending Component (6Mx/t²) due to:

Radial Load 8. -8. 8. -8. 8. -8. 8. -8.
Circ. Moment 49. -49. 49. -49. -49. 49. -49. 49.
Long. Moment 21. -21. -21. 21. -21. 21. 21. -21.
Sub-Total(fxb) 77. -77. 35. -35. -62. 62. -20. 20.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Long. fx 147. -8. 108. 37. 33. 157. 72. 112.
Shear Stresses due to:

Torsion Moment 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
Circ. Shear 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.
Long. Shear 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.

Appendix G Sample Problem PVElite - User Guide
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Shear tau 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.
Check of Total Stress Intensity (membrane + bending)

f1 Principle 174. -8. 149. 37. 33. 184. 72. 141.
f2 Principle 147. -43. 108. 0. 12. 157. 38. 112.
f2-f1 -28. -35. -41. -37. -21. -27. -34. -30.
Check of Buckling Stress (only if Row 4, 15 in Compression)

Row 4 + Row 10 90. -127. 64. -84. 0. 0. 0. 0.
Row15 + Row 21 62. -92. 24. -47. 0. 0. 0. 0.
Check the Maximum Stresses versus defined Allowables N./mm²:
-----------------------------------------------------
Max. Stress Intensity (Membrane + Bending) : 184.36 Allowable: 310.28

Max. Compressive Stress : 0.00 Allowable: -197.02
Max. Membrane Stress : 98.62 Allowable: 165.48

&KDSWHU
The Appendix Y Module
Introduction
This module performs stress evaluation of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form
identical flange pairs. This module conforms to the latest version (A-2001) of the ASME
Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y.

The analysis of an Appendix Y flange is similar in many ways to the Appendix 2 evalua-
tion. However, these flanges have metal-to-metal contact outside the bolt circle, unlike the
types evaluated in Appendix 2. These flanges typically have a soft, self sealing o-ring gas-
ket that sits in recess in one of the flange faces. The loads on the flanges are generated in a
very similar manner to those in Appendix 2. The actual stress evaluation however is differ-
ent.
This program evaluates flanges with or without hubs. A category 1 flange is an integral
flange. The integral type must have the hub information specified. A category 2 flange is a
loose type with a hub where the hub strengthens the assembly. A category 3 flange is a
loose type where no credit is taken for the strengthening effect of the hub. Based on the
user input (especially flange type and hub information), the category is automatically
determined.
The Appendix Y Module 28-1

Gasket and Gasket Factors PVElite - User Guide
Gasket and Gasket Factors

One critical value the program computes is the diameter of the load reaction. This value is
termed G and is a function of where the gasket sits on the flange face. The value of G is
typically the average of the gasket inner and outer diameters. For these types of flanges the
gasket ID is usually equal the flange face ID and the gasket OD is usually equal to the
flange face OD. Two other important factors m and Y. The value of m is the leak pressure
ratio and Y is the gasket design seating stress. This Appendix takes these gaskets to be self
sealing (see the definition of Hg in the Code). Thusly the m and Y factors should both be
0.0. If any other value is entered the user values will be echoed but the program will use
values of 0.0 for both.
28-2 The Appendix Y Module

Sample Calculation
Input Echo, App Y Flange Item 1, Description: APPY
Description of Flange Geometry (Type) Integral Weld Neck

Corrosion Allowance FCOR 0.0000 in.
Flange Inside Diameter B 10.0000 in.

Flange Outside Diameter A 16.0000 in.
Flange Thickness T 0.6250 in.
Thickness of Hub at Small End G0 0.2500 in.
Thickness of Hub at Large End G1 0.3750 in.
Length of Hub HL 1.0000 in.
Flange Material SA-240 316L

Flange Allowable Stress At Temperature SFO 16300.00 psi
Flange Allowable Stress At Ambient SFA 16300.00 psi

Diameter of Bolt Circle C 14.2500 in.

Nominal Bolt Diameter DB 0.7500 in.
Type of Threads UNC Thread Series
Number of Bolts 12

Elastic Modulus of Bolt Material at Des. Temp 29538461 psi

Elastic Modulus of Flange Material at Des. Temp 28138460 psi
FLANGE ANALYSIS of Identical Flange Pairs Per Appendix Y
Corroded Flange ID, BCOR = B+2.0*FCOR 10.000 in.

Corroded Large Hub, G1COR = G1-FCOR 0.375 in.
Corroded Small Hub, G0COR = G0-FCOR 0.250 in.

Gasket Contact Width, N = (GOD-GID) / 2 0.100 in.

Basic Gasket Width, B0 = N / 2.0 0.050 in.
Gasket Reaction Diameter, G = (GOD+GID) / 2.0 12.000 in.
Radial Contact Dist., hcmax = (A - C) / 2 0.875 in.

H = 0.785 * G * G * PEQ
H = 0.785 * 12.0000 * 12.0000 * 150.0000
H = 16956. lb.
HP = 2.0 * BE * 3.14 * G * M * PE
HP = 2.0 * 0.0500 * 3.14 * 12.0000 * 0.0000 * 150.00
HP = 0. lb.
HD = 0.785 * B² * PEQ
HD = 0.785 * 10.0000² * 150.0000
HD = 11775. lb.
HT = H - HD
HT = 16956 - 11775
HT = 5181. lb.
MOMENT ARM CALCULATIONS:

DHG = (C - G ) / 2.0
DHG = ( 14.2500 - 12.0000 ) / 2.0
DHG = 1.1250 in.
DHT = ( R + G1COR + DHG ) / 2.0
DHT = ( 1.7500 + 0.3750 + 1.1250 ) / 2.0
DHT = 1.6250 in.
DHD = R + ( G1COR / 2.0 )
DHD = 1.7500 + ( 0.3750 / 2.0 )
DHD = 1.9375 in.


End Pressure, MD 11775. 1.9375 1.0000 1901. ft.lb.
Face Pressure, MT 5181. 1.6250 1.0000 702. ft.lb.
Gasket Load, MG 0. 1.1250 1.0000 0. ft.lb.
TOTAL MOMENT FOR OPERATION, RMO 2603. ft.lb.
TOTAL MOMENT FOR GASKET SEATING, RMA 3853. ft.lb.
Effective Hub Length, H0 = SQRT(BCOR*G0COR) 1.581 in.

Hub Ratio, HRAT = HL / H0 0.632
Thickness Ratio, GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR) 1.500

Factor F per 2-7.2 0.831
Factor V per 2-7.3 0.289

T = 1.668 U = 4.732
Y = 4.306 Z = 2.282
Stress Analysis of a Class 1 Assembly
Compute the Factor: F’

= g0² * ( h0 + F * T ) / V
= 0.2500 * ( 1.5811 + 0.8308 * 0.6250 ) / 0.2894
= 0.4535
Factor: Js
= 1/B1 * ( 2*hd/ß + hc/a ) + pi*rb
= 1/10.375(2*1.937/1.1867+0.8750/1.4578)+3.14159*0.009012
= 0.4009
Factor: Jp
= 1/B1 * ( hd/ß + hc/a ) + pi*rb
= 1/10.375(1.937/1.1867+0.8750/1.4578)+3.14159*0.009012
= 0.2435
Flange Moment due to Flange-Hub Interaction: Ms

= -( Jp * F’ * Mp )/( t^3 + Js * F’ )
= -( 0.2435 * 0.4535 * 31233.18 )/( 0.6250 + 0.4009 * 0.4535 )
= -674.8762 ft.lb.
Slope of the Flange at the ID times E (Elastic Modulus): Ethetab

= 5.46/(pi*t^3) * ( Js*Ms + Jp*Mp )
= 5.46/(3.14159 * 0.6250^3) * ( 0.4009* -8098.51 + 0.2435* 31233.18 )
= 31034. psi
Contact Force between Flanges at hc: Hc

= ( Mp + Ms ) / hc
= ( 31233.18 + -8098.51 ) / 0.8750 )
= 26440. lb.
Operating Bolt Load: Wm1

= H + Hg + Hc
= 16956.00 + 0.00 + 26439.60
= 43396. lb.
Operating Bolt Stress: Sigmab

= Wm1 / Ab
= 43395.60 / 3.6240
= 11975. psi
Design Prestress in the Bolts: Si

= Sigmab - 1.159 * hc² * (Mp+Ms)/( a * t^3 * l * re * B1 )
= 11974-1.159*0.875²*(23134)/(1.458*0.6250^3*2.000*2.000
= 9195. psi
Radial Flange Stress at the Bolt Circle: Sr

= 6 * (Mp + Ms)/( t² * ( pi*C - n*D ) )
= 6 * ( 31233 + -8098)/( 0.6250²( pi * 14.2500 - 12 * 0.8750 ) )
= 10370. psi
Radial Flange Stress at the Inside Diameter: SRid

= -(( 2*F*t)/(h0+F*t)+6))*Ms/(pi*B1*t²)
= -((2*0.831*0.625)/(1.581+0.831*0.625)+6))*-8098/(pi*-8098.514
= -3501.9504 psi
Tangential Flange Stress at the Inside Diameter: STid

= (t*Ethetab/B1) + ((2*F*t*Z)/(h0+F*t) - 1.8) * Ms/(pi*B1*t²)
= ( 0.6250* 31033.87/ 10.3750)
+ ((2* 0.8308* 0.6250* 2.2821)/( 1.5811+ 0.8308* 0.6250) - 1.8) *

-8098.51/(pi* 10.375* 0.6250²)

= 2297. psi
Longitudinal Hub Stress: Sh

= ( h0 * Ethetab * f )/((0.91*(g1/g0)²*B1*V)
= (1.5811*31033.9*0.831)/((0.91*(0.3750/0.2500)²*10.3750*10.3750
= 6630. psi
Summary of Flange Stresses :

Actual Allowable
Radial Flange Stress at the Bolt Circle 10369.78 16300.00 psi
Tangential Flange Stress at the ID 2296.76 16300.00 psi
Radial Flange Stress at the ID -3501.95 16300.00 psi
Longitudinal Hub Stress 6630.05 24450.00 psi
Average of Sh and Sr 1564.05 16300.00 psi
Average of Sh and St 4463.40 16300.00 psi
Bolt Stress 11974.50 18000.00 psi
Results for Required Thickness and M.A.W.P.

Minimum Required Flange Thickness 0.4509 in.
Estimated M.A.W.P. 235.78 psig

Based on the given input the program computes the MAWP for the given geometry. With
the given loading conditions the required thickness is also computed. The program com-
putes flange stresses and compares those stresses with the appropriate allowables as
described in paragraph Y-7 of the ASME Code.

&KDSWHU
Miscellaneous Processors
File Manager
The file manager window allows the users to browse drives and directories for a file that
will be created, opened, saved or deleted. The following options are available:
• Filename - This field contains the name of the file you wish to create, open, save or
delete. Enter the name of the desired file then press [Enter] or select the OK button.
The filename is composed of two portions, the (job)name and the extension (such as
.PVI, .FIL, etc. ). The user can enter the full filename (name+extension) or just the
name; in which case, the program will add the appropriate extension.
The first portion of the filename must be eight characters or less, and only consists of
letters, numbers or ‘_’. The program will check the filename you entered (or selected)
to make sure it is valid.
• Directories - Contains the directories that may be browsed. A directory can be selected
from the list by pressing on the list’s up or down arrow, moving the cursor to the
desired directory then pressing [Enter].
• Drives - Contains the active drives on the system. The drives in this field can be
selected by pressing on the list’s up or down arrow, moving cursor to the desired drive,
Miscellaneous Processors 29-1

File Manager PVElite - User Guide
then pressing [Enter]. If the drive is available the directory and file fields will be
updated. Otherwise an error message is presented.
The OK button causes the information in the filename field to be processed by the pro-
gram. If the process is successful the file manager window is then removed from the
screen. In most cases, a message window will appear after pressing this button. The user
should answer the questions presented by the message window so that the process can be
fully carried out. The only circumstances where the message window does not appear is
when there is no previously opened file. In the DELETE option, after the process is fin-
ished, the file manager window is not removed from the screen, instead the file list is
updated and the program is waiting for another DELETE event. If the user does not wish
to delete any more files, press the CANCEL button to close the file manage window.
Selecting the CANCEL button causes the file manage window to be removed without any
further processing.
The HELP button displays information about this window.
29-2 Miscellaneous Processors

PVElite - User Guide Heading Edit
Heading Edit
Heading Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the heading and the title page for the
current job.

Material Definition PVElite - User Guide
Material Definition
Element materials may be selected for the Material button on the Define screen. When
clicking on the Material button, the following screen is presented:
By clicking on the material name, the material parameters are displayed:
By clicking on the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters
are loaded in the element. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the
Material Edit Window by pressing the Enter key when the cursor is in the Material field.
Material Edit Window lets the user display and modify the material properties of the cur-
rent element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here

PVElite - User Guide Material Definition
are directly from the program’s material database, otherwise the data are from the data
structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in
the program’s material database, the program will assume that is a “User-defined mate-
rial”, in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
The following buttons are available in this window:

• OK - Allows the user to save the data to the memory then close the window.
• Cancel - Allows the user to close the window without saving the data.
• Help - Displays information about this window.

Material Name PVElite - User Guide
Material Name
Enter the name of the material for this element. This program contains a database which
includes most of materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient temperature. ( Ambient tem-
perature for most vessel will be 70 F or 100 F or 30 C). You can find this value in the
ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1b, and 3.
Under normal circumstances, the program will look up this allowable stress for you. If you
enter a valid material name in the material input field, the program will look into its data-
base and determine the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and enter
it into this cell. The program will also determine this stress when you select a material
name from the material selection window.

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating temperature. ( Operating
temperature for most vessels is defined to be the same as the design metal temperature for
internal pressure). You can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table
1A, 1b, and 3.
Under normal circumstances, the program will look up this allowable stress for you. If you
enter a valid material name in the material input field, the program will look into its data-
base and determine the allowable stress for the material at design temperature, and enter it
into this cell. The program will also determine this stress when you select a material name
from the material selection window.
Allowable Stress at Hydrotest Temperature

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at Hydrotest temperature. ( Operating
temperature for most vessel will be 40 F or 70 F or 10 C). You can calculate this value in
the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1b, and 3.
Most times the allowed hydrotest stress will just be 1.5 times the allowable stress for the
vessel at ambient temperature. Under some circumstances you may choose to use an
allowable hydrotest stress of 0.9 times the yield stress of the material at ambient tempera-
ture. This is especially helpful in the case of tall vertical process tower where the hydrotest
pressure is increased by height of the water used for testing. Use of the higher hydrotest
allowable stress may prevent the hydrotest case from controlling the thickness of the ves-
sel.
Under normal circumstances, the program will calculate this allowable stress for you. If
you enter a valid material name in the material input field, the program will look into its
database and determine the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, multi-
ply it by 1.5, and enter it into this cell. The program will also calculate this stress when
you select a material name from the material selection window.
Nominal Density of this Material

Enter the nominal density of the material. Note that the program will use this value to cal-
culate component weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830
lbs/in3.

PVElite - User Guide Material Name
P Number Thickness
Enter the thickness for this P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness
above which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is base on the P
number for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code. This value is used
only for error checking.
Yield Stress, Operating

Enter the yield stress for the material at the operating temperature. This value is found in
the ASME Code, Section II, Part D. If the yield stress at operating temperature is signifi-
cantly different than the yield stress at ambient temperature, and if some of the items in the
model make use of yield stress (i.e. vessel legs), then you should carefully check and enter
this value.
UCS-66 Chart Number

Enter values 1 through 4 to specify the UCS-66 Carbon Steel Material Curves A through
D, respectively. Enter 0 for materials which are not carbon steel. Note that the material
database returns the non-normalized curve number; adjust the curve number if you are
using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.

External Pressure Chart Name

The program uses the chart name to calculate the B value for all external pressure and
buckling calculations. It is important that this name be entered correctly. Under normal
circumstances, the program will look up this chart name for you. If you enter a valid mate-

rial name in the material input field, the program will look into its database and determine
the external pressure chart name for this material, and enter it into this cell. The program
will also determine this chart name when you select a material name from the material
selection window.
The following are the acceptable external pressure chart names:
Carbon Steel Materials

CS-1 UCS-28.1, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy<30000
CS-2 UCS-28.2, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy>30000
CS-3 UCS-28.3, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy>38000
CS-4 UCS-28.4, SA-537
CS-5 UCS-28.5, SA-508, SA-533, SA-541
CS-6 UCS-28.6, SA-562 or SA-620
Heat Treated Materials

HT-1 UHT-28.1, SA-517 and SA-592 A, E, and F
HT-2 UHT-28.2, SA-508 Cl. 4a, SA-543,B,C
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials

HA-1 UHA-28.1, Type 304
HA-2 UHA-28.2, Type 316, 321, 347, 309, 310, 430B
HA-3 UHA-28.3, Type 304L
HA-4 UHA-28.4, Type 316L, 317L
HA-5 UHA-28.5, Alloy S31500
Non Ferrous Materials

NFA-1 UNF-28.2, AL3003, O and H112
NFA-2 UNF-28.3, AL3003, H14
NFA-3 UNF-28.4, AL3004, O and H112
NFA-4 UNF-28.5, AL3004, H34
NFA-5 UNF-28.13, AL5154, O and H112
NFA-6 UNF-28.14, C61400 (Aluminum Bronze)
NFA-7 UNF-28.17, AL1060, O
NFA-8 UNF-28.18, AL5052, O and H112
NFA-9 UNF-28.19, AL5086, O and H112
NFA-10 UNF-28.20, AL5456, O
NFA-11 UNF-28.23, AL5083, O and H112
NFA-12 UNF-28.30, AL6061, T6, T651, T6510 and T6511
NFA-13 UNF-28.31, AL6061, T4, T451, T4510 and T4511
NFA-14 UNF-28.32, AL5454, O and H112
NFC-1 UNF-28.9, Annealed Copper
NFC-2 UNF-28.10, Copper-Silicon A and C
NFC-3 UNF-28.11, Annealed 90-10 Copper Nickel
NFC-4 UNF-28.12, Annealed 70-30 Copper Nickel
NFC-5 UNF-28.43, Welded Copper Iron Alloy Tube
NFC-6 UNF-28.48, SB-75 and SB-111 Copper Tube
NFN-1 UNF-28.1, Low Carbon Nickel
NFN-2 UNF-28.6, Ni

TEMA Number PVElite - User Guide
NFN-3 UNF-28.7, Ni Cu Alloy

NFN-4 UNF-28.8, Annealed Ni Cr Fe
NFN-5 UNF-28.15, Ni Mo Alloy B
NFN-6 UNF-28.24, Ni Mo Cr Fe
NFN-7 UNF-28.25, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu
NFN-8 UNF-28.27, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800
NFN-9 UNF-28.29, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800H
NFN-10 UNF-28.33, Ni Moly Chrome Alloy N10276
NFN-11 UNF-28.34, Ni Cr Fe Mo Cu Alloys G and G-2
NFN-12 UNF-28.36, Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, etc.
NFN-13 UNF-28.37, Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330
NFN-14 UNF-28.38, Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4
NFN-15 UNF-28.39, Ni Mo Alloy X
NFN-16 UNF-28.40, Ni Mo Alloy B-2
NFN-17 UNF-28.44, Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625)
NFN-18 UNF-28.45, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3)
NFN-19 UNF-28.46, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3, >3/4)
NFN-20 UNF-28.47, Work Hardened Nickel
NFT-1 UNF-28.22, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1
NFT-2 UNF-28.28, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2
NFT-3 UNF-28.42, Titanium, Grade 1
NFZ-1 UNF-28.35, Zirconium, Alloy 702
NFZ-2 UNF-28.41, Zirconium, Alloy 705
The user may add material data to the standard material database using the
Edit/Add Materials option from Tools on the Main Menu.
TEMA Number
The TEMA number is used to determine the modulus of elasticity for materials at design
temperature. These values range from 1 to 52. They can be found in the TEMA tubesheet
chapter.

PVElite - User Guide Keyboard Commands
Keyboard Commands
The following movements are defined for the keyboard within the program:
Begin line <Home>
Begin list <Home>
Delete character <Del.>
Delete prev. char <Backspace>
Delete window <Alt+F4>
End line <End>
End list <End>
Exit <Shift+F3>
Help <F1>
Hot key <Alt+char(with ‘_’)>
Insert toggle <Ins>
Left word <Ctrl+left-arrow>
Mark <Ctrl+F5>
Maximize <Alt +>
Menu control <Alt>
Minimize <Alt ->
Move window <Alt+F7>
Next cell <Down_arrow>
Next Character <Right_arrow>
Next field <Tab>
Next window <Alt+F6>
Page down <Page Down>
Page up <Page Up>
Previous cell <Up_arrow>
Previous character <Left_arrow>
Previous field <Shift+Tab>
Refresh <F5>
Right word <Ctrl+right_arrow>
Select <Enter>
Size window <Alt+F8>
System button <Alt .>

Mouse Operation PVElite - User Guide
Mouse Operation
The following movements are defined for the mouse within the program:
In window objects:
Choose <Left-down-click>
Select <Left-release>
In vessel graphics:
Select element <Left-release>
Select detail <Right-down-click>

&KDSWHU
Vessel Example Problems
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide a listing for a typical vertical and horizontal ves-
sel. The actual modeling instructions have been previously outlined in the chapter 3. At
this point it is assumed that you can use the input program to create a vertical vessel or
horizontal tank.
In addition to the following examples, this program comes with many examples that reside
in the EXAMPLES subdirectory underneath the main program directory. If you wish to
access these examples, you can use the File Open command sequence while in the vessel
building part of PVElite. Once you get into the file open screen, you can choose the direc-
tory option to switch directories. Once in the EXAMPLES subdirectory, you can open any
of the existing examples and analyze them.
Vessel Example
The Vertical and Horizontal Vessel problems can now be accessed at www.COADE.com.
Vessel Example Problems 30-1

Vessel Example PVElite - User Guide
30-2 Vessel Example Problems

Index
Numerics Applications Available 1-4
1.60D.5 6-44 Are the Legs Pipe Legs 18-9
1.60D10 6-45 Area 2 Setting 5-14
1.60D2 6-44 Area Calculations for Small Nozzles 9-10
1.60D5 6-44 AREA1 or AREA2 Equal to 0 11-5
1.60D7 6-44 Area1 Setting 5-14
3D Viewer 3-32 ASCE 6-44
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor 6-15
A
Above Ground Height 6-22, 15-7
ASCE 7-95 Code 15-6, 18-7
Absolute 6-46
ASCE 95 Wind Data 6-21
Abutting Nozzle Insertion 5-16, 11-7
ASCE Roughness Factor 6-16
Acc Based Factor Fv 6-46
ASCE Wind Data 6-15
Acc.Based Factor Fa 6-46
ASCE-95 Seismic Data 6-37
Acceleration Zone 6-34
Acceptance of terms of agreement by the user 1-2
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of
AD-540.2 sketch b 3-25
Nozzle 17-23
Adding Details 3-42
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor 16-10, 23-13
Additional Area 15-5, 18-6
ASME Tubesheets 1-5
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad 5-17
ASME Tubesheets Module 23-1
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel 18-3
ASME UG-99(b) 6-2
AISC Member Designation 18-9
ASME UG-99(b) footnote 32 6-3
Allowable Calculations, Highest Percentage of 26-18
ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34 6-3
Allowable Stress, Ambient 19-2
ASME UG-99(c) 6-2
Allowable Stress, Ambient Tempature 14-4
Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads 15-8
Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 16-5, 23-17
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads 10-9, 11-10
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 14-4, 16-5, 23-17
Assigning Details to Elements 5-3
Allowable Stress, Operating 19-2
Attached B16.5 Flange Rating 19-3
Amplification Factor ac 6-30
Attached Flange Rating 11-5
Analysis Type 12-5
Attachment Description 17-2
Analysis, Performing an 9-20
Attachment Factor for Flat Head 10-10
Analyze Baseplate 18-3
Attachment Factor for Welded Flat Heads 11-11
Analyze Menu 3-22, 9-6
Attachment Number for this Analysis 17-2
Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Axial Force 12-12, 18-14, 18-29
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Axial Force for External Pressure Case 13-7
22-7
Axial Force for Internal Pressure Case 13-7
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Axial Forces on the Cone 13-4
Analyze Shellside Pressure 22-7
Axial Length of Kettle Cone (LC) 16-12
Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Axial Pressure Thrust 27-5
Analyze Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring 13-8
Angle Between Branch and Header 19-3
Axial Thrust Load "P" 27-3
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell 5-13
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell (Usually 90) entered in
description field 5-13 B
Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way 6-7 B16.5 Flange 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
ANSI Flange MAWP 7-4 B16.5 Flange, Grade for Attached 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
Apex Angle 10-10, 11-11 Backing Ring 14-7
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7 Backing Ring Actual Thickness 14-8
Appendix Y Module 28-1 Backing Ring Inside Diameter 14-8
i
Bail/Sling Width 18-28 Bottom Plate, Thickness of 5-20

Bar Thickness 6-7 Bottom Support Lug Plate 18-12
Base Elevation 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21, 6-24 Bottom Support Lug Plate, Thickness of 18-12
Base Plate Length 15-5 Bottom Support Plate 5-19
Base Plate Thickness 15-5 Branch Dimension Basis 19-2
Base Plate Width 15-5 Branch Penetration of a Header Weld 19-3
Base Ring Design 20-4 Branch/Header Thickness 19-2
Base Ring Thicknesses, Analysis of 20-5 Branch/Header, Thickness 19-2
Base Rings 1-5 British Standard BS5500 7-4
Baseplate Input 18-24
Baseplate Length 5-27 C
Baseplate Length B 18-24 C Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head 26-12
Baseplate Material 18-24 Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads 9-10
Baseplate Results 18-27 Calculation Techniques 20-1
Baseplate Thickness 5-27 Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head 14-9
Baseplate Thickness BTHK 18-24 Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flanges 16-16
Baseplate Width 5-27 Calculations, Allowable 26-18
Baseplate Width D 18-24 Carbon Steel Materials 29-9
Basering Description 20-6 Category Value 6-38
Basering Diameter, Outside 20-7 Center to Center Distance Between Poles 26-14
Basering Geometry, Analysis of 20-4 Center Web Height 5-27, 15-5
Basering Inside Diameter 20-7 Centerline Dimension 5-26
Basering Module 20-1 Centerline Offset 4-35
Basering Number 20-6 Central Opening Number, Large 25-3
Basering Under Compression, Thickness of 20-1 Centroid 13-8
Basering Under Tension, Thickness of 20-3 Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel 26-16
Basering, Analyze or Design 20-6 C-Factor 26-13
Basering, Thickness of 20-6 Channel Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 23-11
Beam Section, General 26-16 Channel Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 23-10
Bellows Inside Diameter 21-3 Channel Corrosion Allowance 16-6, 23-4
Bellows Minimum Thickness Before Forming 21-3 Channel Cover Deflection 12-12
Bending Moment 12-12 Channel Design Pressure 16-6, 23-4
Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement 3-25 Channel Inside Diameter 16-6, 23-4
Blind Flanges and Channel Covers 12-14 Channel Material Specification 23-10
Bolt Allowable Stress, Ambient Temp 23-15 Channel Metal Design Temperature 16-6
Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temp 23-15 Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. 23-13
Bolt Area Calculation 20-4 Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure 23-10
Bolt Circle, Diameter at 20-8 Channel Wall Thickness 16-6, 23-4
Bolt Circle, Diameter of 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 23-14 Circumferential Moment 17-12
Bolt Correction Factor 3-26 Circumferential Moment MC 27-3
Bolt Corrosion Allowance 18-24 Circumferential Shear Load 17-12
Bolt Diameter 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 20-7 COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers 1-9
Bolt Holes Center, Perimeter of 12-12 Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design 6-13
Bolt Material 18-24 Code Case 2260/2261 3-26
Bolt Material Specification 23-15 Coefficient Cd 6-47
Bolt Root Area 14-8, 18-25 Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc) 17-13
Bolt Root Area (Used if > 0) 16-14 Combination Method 6-45
Bolt Size, Selecting 20-4 Compare Maximum Stress Intensity to 17-13
Bolt Table (TEMA, UNC, USER) 20-8 Component Analysis 7-9, 8-4
Bolts and Gussets 20-10 Component Analysis Main Menu 9-2
Bolts, Number of 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 20-8, 23-15 Component Analysis Module 9-1
Bottom Lug Support Plate, Length of 5-19 Component Analysis Tutorial 9-1
ii
Componsite Stiffener Height 5-26 Cylindrical Element Length 22-7

Compressed Air, Water, or Steam Service 11-8 Cylindrical Element Thickness 22-7
Compressive Stress of Concrete 20-8
Computation Control Tab 9-9 D
Cone Actual Thickness 13-3 Damping Factor 6-22, 6-36
Cone Axial Length 13-4 Damping Ratio 15-7, 18-7
Cone Circumferential Joint Efficiency 13-6 Datum Line Distance 6-2
Cone Corrosion Allowance 13-3 Dead Weight of Vessel 20-9
Cone Description 13-2 Default units file 9-12
Cone Diameter at Large End 13-4 Delta 26-13
Cone Diameter at Small End 13-4 Density of Material 29-6
Cone Diameter Basis 13-4 Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles 21-2
Cone Half Apex Angle 13-4 Design Data 6-2
Cone Joint Efficiency 13-3 Design External Pressure 10-5, 11-3, 26-13
Cone Number 13-2 Design Internal Pressure 6-2, 10-5, 11-3, 21-2, 25-3, 26-
ConeCylinderRingKnuckle Material Name 13-3 9
Configuration 9-9 Design Internal Temperature 6-2
Conical Sections 1-4 Design Length for Cylinder Volumn Calculations 10-9
Conical Sections Module 13-1 Design Length of Section 10-9
Construction Type 6-3 Design Modification 6-9
Contract Width or Height (Per. Lug) of Lifting Lug 18- Design Pressure 6-12, 12-5, 17-11, 18-2, 19-1, 27-2
14 Design Pressure + Static Head 6-12
Convolution Depth 21-3 Design Pressure in Jacket 24-5
Convolution Pitch 21-3 Design Pressure, External 13-2
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate 16-10, 23-11 Design Temperature 11-3, 12-5, 14-3, 19-1, 21-2, 25-3,
Corroded Hydrotest 6-5 27-2
Corrosion Allowance 10-7, 12-6, 15-2, 19-3, 25-4, 26-12 Design Temperature for External Pressure 10-5
Corrosion Allowance of Jacket 24-5 Design Temperature for Integral Part 23-17
Corrosion Allowance of the Vessel 17-3 Design Temperature for Internal Pressure 10-5, 24-3, 26-
Corrosion Allowance, External 20-8 9
Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations 12-6 Design Temperature for Jacket Pressure 24-5
Crest Distance 6-22, 15-7, 18-7 Design Temperature for Shell and Expansion Joint 22-3
Critical Damping Ratio 6-19 Design Temperature of Attachment 18-2
Cross-Sectional Area 5-8 Design Temperature of Tubes 23-7
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring 10-11 Design Temperature, External 13-2
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section 13-8, 26-16 Design Wind Speed 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Cross-Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring 15-8 Detail Definition Buttons 5-4
Crown Radius 11-10, 14-4 Detail ID 5-6
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads 10-9, 15-8 Details, Definition of 5-6
Cycle Life 22-9 Diagnostics Menu 3-29, 9-16
Cycle Life Evaluation 21-3 Diameter and Thickness, Actual 5-15
Cylinder Actual Thickness, Large 13-5 Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-29
Cylinder Actual Thickness, Small 13-4 Diameter Basis 10-7
Cylinder Axial Length, Large 13-5 Diameter Basis for Nozzle 27-2
Cylinder Axial Strength, Small 13-5 Diameter Basis for the Nozzle 17-7
Cylinder Corrosion Allowance, Large 13-5 Diameter Basis for the Vessel 17-3
Cylinder Corrosion Allowance, Small 13-5 Diameter Basis for Vessel
Cylinder Joint Efficiency, Large 13-5
Vessel Diameter 27-1
Cylinder Joint Efficiency, Small 13-4
Diameter for Non-Circular Welded Flat Heads, Large
Cylinder Volumn Calculations 10-9
10-10
Cylinder, Outer 22-5
Diameter Limit 11-6
Cylindrical Element Corrosion 22-7
Diameter Nozzle Calculations, Large 11-14
iii
Diameter of Nozzle, Actual 5-14, 11-6 Enter the Unsupported Tube Sran, SL for MAX (k*SL)
Diamter, Minimum 5-15 23-12
Differential Design Pressure 16-7 Entire agreement 1-3
Differential Expansion 22-6 Equipment Class 6-25
Differential Expansion Pressure 16-16, 22-6 Error Checking 3-9, 7-3
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) Cor- Escarpment 15-7, 18-7
roded 22-6 ESL Installation on a Network 2-7
Disclaimer - CAESAR II 1-4 ESL Menu 3-38, 9-17
Discussion of Results 23-19 Example Problem 10-16, 11-16, 12-19, 13-11, 13-14, 13-
Distance between Gussets 5-20, 18-12 18, 14-11, 14-14, 15-14, 16-19, 19-10, 20-13, 21-6, 22-
Distance between Tube Centers 23-7 11, 23-19, 24-8, 25-5, 26-20
Distance from Bolts to Gussets 20-10 Examples 17-29, 18-17
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline 14-7 Expanded Portion of Tube, Length of 23-7
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface 10-11 Expansion Joint Allowable Stress at Ambient Tempera-
Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent 15-3 ture 22-4
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z" Expansion Joint Bellows Material 21-2
18-24 Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance 22-3
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base 15-6, Expansion Joint Description 22-3
15-7 Expansion Joint Flange Wall Thickness 22-3
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint 5-19 Expansion Joint Inside Diameter 16-11, 22-3
Distance from Vessel OD to Support Contact Point 18- Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Offset (Straight Flange)
11 22-5
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section 13-8 Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius 22-5
Distance to Crest 15-7, 18-7 Expansion Joint Number 22-3
Distance to Ring Centroid 5-8 Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution 21-2
Distance to Ring Centroid from Shell Surface 15-9 Expansion Joint Outside Diameter 22-3
Distance to Site 6-22, 15-7, 18-7 Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset 22-5
DXF File Generation Option 3-53 Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius 22-5
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell OD 23-11
E Exposure Constant 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Earthquake Load Calculation 7-6 Extended Portion of Tubesheet, Thickness of 16-14
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv 6-41 External Loads, Specifying 12-10
Edit Menu 9-5 External Pressure 10-5, 11-3, 26-13
EigenSolver 3-27 External Pressure calculations 7-3
El Centro 6-44 External Software Lock 2-1
Elastic Modules for Plates 20-10 Extruded Outlet Height 19-3
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature 21-3, 21-4, 21- Extruded Outlet Inside Diameter 19-4
5 Extruded Outlet, Thickness of 19-3
Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature 21-3
Element’s From Node 4-2 F
Element’s To Node 4-3 Failure Path Calculations 11-15
End Reinforcing, Large 13-5 Fastener Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 21-4
Enter the Dimension G for the Backing Flange 23-8 Fastener Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature 21-
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet 23-8 4
Enter the Shell/Channel Side Vacuum Pressures 16-13 Fastener Bolt Length 21-4
Enter the Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures 23-14 Fastener Bolt Present 21-3
Enter the Tube End Condition k, Corresponding to Span Fastener Cross-Sectional Area 21-4
SL 16-12 Fastener Material Specification 21-4
Enter the Tube End Condition, K Corresponding to Span File Manager 29-1
SL 23-12 File Menu 3-17, 9-2
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for Max (k*SL) Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length 16-10
16-11 Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r) 17-16
iv
Fillet Weld Between Flange and Shell/Channel 16-14 Gasket Outer Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16
Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell 10-10 Gasket Thickness 12-9, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16
Fillet Weld Size 24-6 Generating Output 8-1
Final Basering Geometry, Selection of 20-5 Geometric Constants, Pressure and Thickness Calcula-
Fireproofing with Insulation 5-35 tions 16-16
Flange Centroid 14-7 Global Forces/Moments (SUS, EXP, OCC) 17-15
Flange Depth 14-8 Groove in Tubesheet, Depth of 16-8
Flange Design 12-17 Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel 5-16, 11-12
Flange Designation 12-4 Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Neck 11-12
Flange Diameter, Outside 14-5, 16-13, 23-14 Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck 5-17
Flange Distance to Top 6-3 Gusset Plate Height 18-12
Flange Face Facing Sketch 12-9, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Gusset Plate, Mean Width 18-12
Flange Face Inner Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Gusset Plates, Thickness of 18-12, 20-10
Flange Face Outer Diameter 12-6, 14-6, 16-14, 23-15 Gussets 5-20, 18-12, 20-8
Flange Face to Attached Head 14-8 Gussets and Bolts 20-10
Flange ID 12-6 Gussets Height 5-20, 20-10
Flange Inside Diameter 14-5 Gussets per Bolt, Number of 20-10
Flange Module 12-1 Gussets, Mean Width 5-20
Flange Number 12-4 Gussets, Thickness of 5-20
Flange OD 12-6 Gust Response Factor 6-25
Flange Rigidity Calculations 12-17
Flange Stresses, Allowable 12-15 H
Flange Thickness 12-6 Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections 10-10, 11-11
Flange Type 12-4 Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6, 24-4
Flange, Slotted 14-7 Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations 24-6
Flange, Thickness of 14-5 Half-Pipe Jacket, Thickness of 24-4
Flange/Bolt Material Specification 12-6 Half-Pipe Module 24-1
Flanged Portion of Head 14-9 Half-Pipe Section Description 24-3
Flanges 1-4, 1-6 Head Joint Efficiency 15-3
Flanges with Different Bending Moments 12-14 Head Thickness 15-3
Flanges, Loose-Type 12-5 Head Type 15-3
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets 12-5 Head, Thickness of 14-4
Flat Head Outside Diameter 25-3 Header Dimension Basis 19-3
Flat Head Thickness 25-3 Heading Edit 29-3
Floating Head Description 14-3 Heat-Treated Materials 29-9
Floating Head Identification Number 14-3 Height above Ground 6-22
Floating Head Module 14-1 Height above Ground (z) 15-7
Floating Head Type (b, c, d) 14-3 Height of Center Web 5-27, 15-5
Floating Heads 1-5 Height of Composite Stiffener 5-26
Flohead Calculation 9-10 Height of Extruded Outlet, HX 19-3
Force Coefficient 15-5, 18-6 Height of Gusset Plate 18-12
Force Factor 6-37 Height of Gussets 5-20, 20-10
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction 5-23 Height of Hill (H) 6-22
Force Modification Factor 6-33 Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) 15-7, 18-7
Forces and Moments 5-23 Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest 10-9
From Node 5-6 Height of Liquid Column Operating 10-9
Full Face Gasket 14-5 Height of Liquid Column, Operating 11-10
Full Run 1-10 Height of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom 18-14
G Height of Packed Section 5-31
Gasket and Gasket Factors 28-2 Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9
Gasket Inner Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Height of Vessel above Grade 15-6
v
Height/Length of Insulation 5-35 Input Sustained (SUS) Loads 17-5

Height/Length of Lining 5-36 Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Head 11-
Height/Length of Liquid 5-33 10
Help Menu 3-39, 9-19 Inside Crown Radius of Head 14-4
Higher Long Stresses 6-4 Inside Diameter of Basering 20-7
Hill Height 6-22, 15-7, 18-7 Inside Diameter of Bellows 21-3
Hill, Types of 15-6 Inside Diameter of Extruded Outlet 19-4
Hills, Types of 6-22, 18-7 Inside Diameter of Flange 14-5
Hole in Lifting Lug, Diameter of 18-14 Inside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Hole, Depth of 26-15 Inside Diameter of Shell 24-3
Hole, Diameter of 26-15 Inside Knuckle Radius of the Torispherical Head 11-10
Hoops license grant 1-6 Inside Radius of Formed Half-Pipe Jacket 24-4
Horizontal Force Factor 6-29, 6-31 Installation on a Network Drive 2-7
Horizontal Force Normal to the Vessel 18-13 Installation Options 6-6
Horizontal Vessel Module 15-1 Installation Procedure 2-2
Horizontal Vessels 1-4, 1-6 Installation/Configuration Process 2-1
Hot Stress Intensity Allowable (Smh) 17-14 Installing PVElite 2-4
Hub Length 12-7 Insulation 5-35
Hub Thickness, Large End 12-7 Insulation Density 5-35
Hub Thickness, Small End 12-7 Insulation or Fireproofing, Thickness of 5-35
Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N) 6-4 Interactive Control 17-16
Hydrostatic Head Component 10-5, 11-4 Internal Design Pressure 13-2
Hydrotest Calculations 7-3 Internal Design Temperature 13-2
Hydrotest Position 6-3 Internal Pressure 6-2, 10-5, 11-3, 21-2, 25-3, 26-9
Hydrotest Type 6-2 Internal Pressure (P) 17-15
Hydrotest, Seismic 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-34, 6-36, 6-37, 6- Internal Pressure (Pvar) 17-15
38 Internal Pressure Calculations 7-3
Hydrotest, Wind 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21, 6-24, 6-26 Internal Pressure in Shell 24-3
Internal Pressure Results 13-9
I Internal Pressure Results for the Head 14-9
IBC 6-44 Internal Temperature 6-2
Impact Factor 6-7 Intersection Description 19-1
Importance 6-45 Intersection Number 19-1
Importance Factor 6-22, 6-28, 6-31, 6-33, 6-36, 6-37, 6- Invoking the Drawing 3-55
41, 6-45, 15-6, 18-6, 18-29 IS 875 Wind Code 6-24
Include Missing Mass Components 6-47 Is There a Shell Band 23-8
India’s Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM 6- Is This a Heat Exchanger 6-5
36 Is this a Kettle Type Heat Exchanger ? 16-12
Individual Heads 1-4 Is This a Pressure Only Case ? 23-15
Individual Shells 1-4 Item Number 18-2, 21-2, 24-3, 26-9, 27-1
Input 15-1, 17-2, 18-2, 19-1, 20-6
Input Data 10-5, 11-3, 12-4, 14-3, 16-5, 21-2, 22-3, 23- J
4, 24-3, 25-3, 26-9, 27-1 Jacket Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 24-5
Input Echo 7-3 Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 24-5
Input Expansion (EXP) Loadings 17-5 Jacket Material Name 24-5
Input Loads in Global Coordinates and Allowable Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams 10-6, 24-4
Stresses 17-5 Joint Efficiency for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head 20-9
Input Loads in WRC107 Convention 17-5 Joint Efficiency for Welded Seams 26-11
Input Menu 3-20 Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck 5-15
Input Occasional (OCC) Loadings 17-6 Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle
Input Processor 3-3 Passes 5-15
Input Processors 3-6
vi
K Liquid on Tray, Density of 5-28

Keyboard Commands 29-11 Load Case 6-10
Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End 13-8 Load per Bolt, Calculation of 20-4
Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End 13-8 Load Reaction, Diameter of 12-12
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads 10-9 Loads and Design Constraints 3-45
Knuckle Radius of Torispherical Head 11-10 Local Shell Thickness 5-16
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads 15-8 Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads 1-5
Knuckle Thickness, Large End 13-8 Location of the Nozzle in the Vessel Spherical 27-6
Knuckle Thickness, Small End 13-8 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses 7-6
Longitudinal Joints, Quality Factor for 19-3
Longitudinal Moment 17-12, 27-4
L
Longitudinal Shear Load 17-12
Lap Joint Contact Inside Diameter 12-11
Longitudinal Stress Constants 7-6
Lap Joint Contact Outside Diameter 12-11
Longitudinal Stresses 7-6
Lap Joint Flanges 12-5
Long-Side Length Dimension 26-12
Large Opening Module 25-1
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 18-12,
Lease 1-10
18-13
Leg & Lug Module 18-1
Lug Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 18-13
Leg Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 18-9
Lug Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature 18-11
Leg Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 18-9
Lug Bearing Width 5-19
Leg End Condition Factor K 18-8
Lug Distances from Base 6-8
Leg Orientation 5-29
Lug Height 5-20
Leg Results 18-10
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring 4-35
Legs 5-29
Lug Midpoint 5-19
Legs & Lugs 1-7
Lug Orientation to Vessel 18-13
Legs Cross-Braced 18-9
Lug Thickness 4-35
Legs, Length of 5-30, 18-8
Lug Width 5-20
Legs, Number of 5-20, 5-30, 18-8
Lugs 5-19
Length of Kettle Cylinder 16-12
Length of Kettle Port Cylinder (LP) 16-12
Length of Section 10-9 M
LGCENTER 1-6 M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-12
License agreement, CAESAR II 1-2 Main Input Fields 10-5, 11-3, 12-4, 14-3, 15-1, 16-5, 17-
License grant 1-2 2, 18-2, 19-1, 20-6, 21-2, 22-3, 23-4, 25-3, 26-9
Licenses 1-10 Main Menu 3-16
Lift Orientation 18-14, 18-29 Manway or Inspection Opening 11-8
Lifting Lug 1-5 Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 13-3,
Lifting Lug Input 18-13 25-4, 26-9
Lifting Lug, Thickness of 18-14 Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 13-3,
Ligament Efficiency Calculations 26-17 25-4, 26-9
Liguid on Tray 5-28 Material Category, Cycle Life Evaluation 21-3
Limitations of remedies 1-3 Material Definition 29-4
Limited Run 1-10 Material Diameter and Thickness Limits 11-14
Limited warranty 1-3 Material Name 22-3, 26-9, 29-6
Lines of Support for External Pressure 13-7 Material Specification 14-3, 15-2, 19-1, 20-6, 25-4
Lining 5-36 Material Specification for Integral Part 23-17
Lining Density 5-36 Material Specification for Legs 18-8
Lining, Thickness of 5-36 Material Specification for Lifting Lugs 18-13
Liquid 5-33 Material Specification for Support Lugs 18-11
Liquid Column Hydrotest Height 10-9 Material Yield Stress 5-27
Liquid Column Operating Height 10-9 Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating 12-13
Liquid Density 5-33 Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating 12-13
Liquid Height from Bottom of Tank 15-2 Mating Flange Design Bolt Load 12-13
vii
Mating Flange Loads 12-10 N

Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl 6-46 Natural Frequency Calculation 7-6
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss 6-46 Natural Frequency for the Structure 15-7, 18-7
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New & Cold 11-3 NBC Seismic Data 6-33
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 10-13, 12-16 NBC Wind Data 6-19
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure Calculation 11- Network ESLs 2-8
15 Network Installation / Usage 2-7
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure Calculations Node Number 12-12
26-18 Nominal Bolt Diameter 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 18-24, 20-7,
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold 23-15
10-14 Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete 18-25, 20-8
Maximum Circumferential Moment 17-12 Nominal Density of Material 29-6
Maximum Longitudinal Moment 17-12 Nominal Diameter and Thickness 5-15
Maximum Radial Force 17-12 Nominal of Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7
Mean Diameter of Kettle Cylinder 16-12 Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket 24-4
Mean Diameter of Kettle Port Cylinder (DP) 16-12 Nominal Schedule of Nozzle 5-15
Mean Shell Metal Temperatures 23-13 Nominal Thickness of Branch/Header 19-2
Mean Tube Metal Temperatures 23-13 Nominal Thickness of Nozzle 11-6
Mean Width of Gusset Plate 18-12 Non-Circular Flat Heads 11-11
Mean Width of Gussets 5-20 Non-Ferrous Materials 29-9
Meridional 22-9 Normal Force 18-14, 18-29
Metal Temperature 6-3, 10-7, 11-15, 23-13 Novell File Server ESL Installation 2-8
Metal Temperatures 10-14, 23-12 Novell Workstation ESL Installation 2-8
Mill Undertolerance, Percent 19-3 Nozzle 17-7
Minimum Design Metal Temperature 10-7, 11-15 Nozzle Analysis 5-11
Minimum Diameter and Thickness 5-15 Nozzle Angle Geometry 11-8
Minimum Fillet Weld Size Calculations 24-6 Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 5-15, 11-7, 17-7, 27-2
Minimum Metal Tempatures 10-14 Nozzle Description 5-13, 11-3
Minimum Metal Temperature 6-3 Nozzle Design Modifications 6-12
Minimum Thickness of 2nd Long-Side Plate 26-13 Nozzle Design Pressure 6-12
Minimum Thickness of End Plate 26-12 Nozzle Diameter 17-7, 27-2
Minimum Thickness of Fillet Weld Around Lug 18-14 Nozzle Diameter and Thickness, Actual 11-13
Minimum Thickness of Long-Side Plate 26-12 Nozzle Diameter Basis 5-14, 11-6
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7 Nozzle Diameter Limit 5-14, 11-6, 11-11
Minimum Thickness of Short-Side Plate 26-11 Nozzle Input Data 5-13
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T3) Nozzle Insertion 5-16, 11-7
26-14 Nozzle Inside Projection 5-16, 11-12
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T4) Nozzle Material Specification 5-14
26-14 Nozzle Module 11-1
Minimum Yield Stress for This Material 26-10 Nozzle Outside Projection 5-16, 11-12
Miscellaneous Tab 9-11 Nozzle Schedule 5-15
Modulus of Elasticity 26-13 Nozzle Side Hub Length 25-4
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis 5-23 Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End 25-4
Moment of Inertia 5-8 Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Small End 25-4
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member 26-16 Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis 5-14, 11-6
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section 13-8 Nozzle Thickness 3-25, 9-9, 11-6
Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring 15-8 Nozzle Thickness Limit 5-14, 11-12
Moment of Reinforcing Ring 10-11 Nozzle Wall Thickness 27-2
Moment Reduction Factor Tau 6-41 Nozzle Weight 5-10
Mouse Operation 29-12 Nozzle, Diameter of 27-2
Nozzle, Thickness of Actual 5-15
Nozzles 1-6, 5-10
viii
Nozzles, Small 3-25 Parameter C11 (Full Length of Attachment) 17-8

Nubbin Width 12-10, 14-7, 16-15, 23-16 Parameter C22 (Full Length of Attachment) 17-8
Number of Bolts in Tension per Baseplate 18-25 Parameters, Required 3-53
Number of Bolts, Selecting 20-4 Partition Gasket 12-10
Partition Gasket, Length of 12-12, 14-7, 16-16, 23-16
O Perform WRC 107 Analysis on Trunnion 18-29
Occasional Load Factor 18-4 Perform WRC 107 Calc 5-20
OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick 3-26 Performance Criteria Factor P 6-30
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline 5-13 Pin Hole Diameter 4-35
Offset from Centerline 5-22 Pipe & Pad 1-5
Offset from Left Tangent Line 27-6 Pipe & Pad Module 19-1
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole 18-14 Pipe Legs Inside Diameter 18-9
Opening Inside Diameter 25-3 Pipe Normal or Actual Outside Diameter 19-2
Openings, Large 1-6 Pitch Distance Between Bars 26-14
Operating Liquid Density 10-9, 11-10 Pitch Distance Between Reinforcement 26-13
Operating Moment of Basering 20-9 Plates 5-27
Operating Weight of Vessel 20-9 Platform Clearance 5-25
Ordinate Type 6-47 Platform End Angle (degrees) 5-24
Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion 22-7 Platform Force Coefficient 5-25
Outer Cylindrical Element Length 22-7 Platform Grating Weight 5-24
Outer Cylindrical Element Thickness 22-7 Platform Height 5-25
Output 18-16, 19-6 Platform Length 5-25
Output / Review 8-1 Platform Railing Weight 5-24
Output Menu 3-23, 9-8 Platform Start Angle (degrees) 5-24
Output Review 3-12 Platform Weight 5-24
Outside Diameter of Basering 20-7 Platform Width 5-25
Outside Diameter of Flange 14-5 Platform Wind Area 5-24
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion 16-13, 23-14 Platform Wind Area Calculation 5-25
Outside Diameter of Ring 5-8 Platforms 5-24
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base 20-9 Plotting the Vessel Image 3-43
Outside Diameter of Vessel 18-2 Pop-Up Input Fields 11-10, 12-11, 13-7, 14-8, 15-5, 17-
Outside Diamter 5-29 7, 18-6, 19-5, 21-4, 22-7, 23-10, 26-13
Overall M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-12 Pop-up Input Fields 10-9, 20-10
Pre-1999 Addenda 9-11
Preliminary Base Ring Geometry, Selecting 20-4
P Pressure 12-5, 17-11, 18-2, 19-1, 27-2
P instead of MAWP for UG-99B 9-10 Pressure Calculations for Input Shell Thickness 24-6
P Number Thickness 29-7 Pressure Calculations, External 26-18
Packed Section Height 5-31 Pressure Chart Name, External 29-8
Packing 5-31 Pressure in 2nd Compartment 26-14
Packing Density 5-31 Pressure in Jacket 24-5
Pad Diameter 17-9 Pressure Results for the Head, External 14-9
Pad Diameter Along Header Surface 19-5 Pressure Results, External 13-9
Pad Length 5-21 Pressure Stress Indices 17-17
Pad Material 5-17 Pressure Thrust Force 17-15
Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface 11-12 Printing Equations and Substitutions 3-25
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface 5-17 Printing Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure 11-10
Pad Parameter C11 (full length) 17-9 Printing or Saving Reports to a File 9-27
Pad Parameter C22 (full length) 17-9 Printing the Reports 9-27
Pad Thickness 5-17, 5-21, 11-12, 17-9, 19-5 Printing Water Volume in Gallons 3-24, 9-10
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter 5-17 Printout in Rows, External 9-12
Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter 11-12 Processors, Miscellaneous 29-1
Pad Width 5-20
ix
Program Structure and Control 3-1 Reinforcing Ring 13-8, 26-15

Program Support / User Assistance 1-9 Reinforcing Ring Cross-Sectional Area 21-4
Projection from Bottom 6-3 Reinforcing Ring Material 21-4
Projection from Top 6-3 Reinforcing Ring Present 21-3
Projection Length 18-28 Reinforcing Ring Type 10-7, 26-15
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features 1-11 Reinforcing Ring, Thickness of 10-10
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.1 Reinforcing Section 13-8
1-14 Reinforcing, Small End 13-5
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.3 Reloading last file at Startup 9-12
1-14 Report Content 9-12
PVElite Analysis 7-1 Report Generation 3-12
PVElite Definition 1-1 Required and Available Areas 11-14
PVElite Documentation 1-8 Required Parameters, Setting Up 3-53
PVElite Startup 3-40 Required Thickness Calculations 14-9
Q Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension 20-3
Quick Start with PVElite 3-40 Required Thickness of Nozzle 11-7
Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle 11-13
Required Thicknesses 11-5
R Response 6-43
Radial Force 17-12 Response Modification Factor R 6-41
Radial Load 17-12 Response Modification R 6-46
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate 5-19 Response Spectrum 6-43
Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring 13-8 Response Spectrum Name 6-43
Radial Width of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring 18-12 Restrictions of this Method 15-11
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring 5-20 Results 10-13, 11-13, 12-14, 13-9, 14-9, 15-10, 17-19,
Radial Width of Top Ring/Plate 20-8 22-9, 24-6, 26-17, 27-11, 28-8
Radiography, Degree of 6-4 Results for a Whole Vessel 9-28
Radius of Corner Section 26-13 Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure 10-
Radius of Curvature, RX, of Extruded Outlet 19-4 14
Radius of Half-Pipe Jacket 24-4 Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure 10-
Radius of Semi-Circular ARC of Lifting Lug 18-14 15
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center 23-8 Results Per Pressure, Area, and UG-45 11-15
Range Type 6-47 Reverse Geometry Flange 12-5
Recording the Model 3-43 Review 8-3
Rectangular Vessel Description 26-9 Review Screen 8-2
Rectangular Vessel Module 26-1 Reviewing the Results 3-49
Rectangular Vessels 1-6 Reviewing the Results - The Output Option 9-25
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings 6-13 Rib Thickness 5-27
Reinforcement 18-28 Ribs, Number of 5-27, 15-5
Reinforcement Calculations 26-17 Ribs, Thickness of 15-5
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure 13- Rigging Data 6-7
10 Ring Angle Rolled the Hard Way 10-12
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure 13- Ring Centroid 10-11, 15-9
9 Ring Centroid Distance 5-8
Reinforcement Limit Modification 11-5 Ring Diameter, Outside 5-8
Reinforcement Type 26-11 Ring Flanges 12-4
Reinforcing Cone, Location of 13-7 Ring Inside Diameter 5-8
Reinforcing Limits, Modification of 5-14 Ring Material 5-8
Reinforcing Member, Length of 26-15, 26-16 Ring Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Reinforcing Pad 11-7, 27-2 21-4
Reinforcing Pad Present 19-3 Ring Material Allowable Stress at Operating Tempera-
Reinforcing Pad, Selecting 11-14
x
ture 21-4 Shear Force VL 27-3

Ring Outside Diameter 18-29 Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 10-6,
Ring Thickness 18-29 24-4
Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements 10- Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 10-5, 24-3
11 Shell Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 23-10
Ring Weld Attachment Style (Intermittent, Continuous, Shell Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 23-10
Both) 10-11 Shell and Head Diameter Basis 15-3
Ring, Location of 10-11 Shell Corrosion Allowance 11-5, 16-6, 18-3, 22-4, 23-4,
Ring, Thickness of 5-8 24-4
Rings 5-7 Shell Cylinder Length 22-4
Risk Factor 6-24 Shell Design Length for External Pressure 11-10
Roughness Factor 6-20, 6-22 Shell Design Pressure 16-5, 23-4
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size? 3-25 Shell Diameter 15-3
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ? 16-13, Shell Diameter Basis 11-4
23-14 Shell Diameter or Crown Radius for Torispherical Head
Running the Analysis 3-48 11-5
Shell Inside Diameter 16-6, 22-4, 23-4, 24-3
S Shell Joint Efficiency 15-3
Saddle 15-3 Shell Length Tangent to Tangent 15-3
saddle 15-4 Shell Material 18-3
Saddle Base 15-6, 15-7 Shell Material Specification 23-10
Saddle Bearing Angle 15-4 Shell Metal Design Temperature 16-5
Saddle Check 5-27 Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. 23-13
Saddle Contact Angle 5-26 Shell Metal Temperature, Actual 16-9
Saddle Dimension A 5-27 Shell Metal Temperatures 23-13
Saddle Wear Plate Design 15-11 Shell Module 10-1
Saddle Webs & Base Plate 15-2 Shell or Head Type 10-6, 11-4
Saddle Width 15-4 Shell or Head, Diameter of 10-7
Saddles 5-26 Shell Seam Efficiency 11-7
Sample Calculation 27-7, 28-3 Shell Section Material Name 10-5, 24-3
Schedule of Nozzle, Actual 11-6 Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance 14-5
Section Identifier 5-30 Shell Side (External) Design Pressure 14-3
Section Type 5-8 Shell Side Hub Length 25-3
Seismic 5-23 Shell Side Hub Thickness, Large End 25-3
Seismic Coefficient Av 6-30 Shell Side Hub Thickness, Small End 25-3
Seismic Coefficient Ca 6-37 Shell Surface 10-11, 15-9
Seismic Coefficient Cc 6-30 Shell Temperature for Internal Pressure 23-10
Seismic Coefficient Cv 6-37 Shell Thickness 15-3, 18-2
Seismic Data 6-27 Shell Thickness Calculations 24-6
Seismic Design Category 6-41 Shell Thickness, Modification of 6-12
Seismic Design Code 6-27 Shell Tr Value 5-16
Seismic for Hydrotest 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-34, 6-36, 6-38, Shell Wall Thickness 16-5, 22-4, 23-4
6-43 Shell, Nozzle, or Pad Material Name 11-3
Seismic for Hydrotest, Percent 6-37 Shell, Thickness of 11-5, 24-3
Seismic Load Input in G’s 6-40 Shell/Head Material Normalized 10-6
Seismic Loads to Vessel, Applying 15-3 Shell/Head/Nozzle Material Normalized 11-4
Seismic Zone 6-29, 6-32, 15-7, 18-7 ShellChannelTubeTube Sheet Material Specification 16-
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout 16-13, 23-15 5
Select the Addenda for the Material Database 9-11 Shells & Heads 1-6
Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earth- Shellside Design Pressure 22-6
quake 7-6 Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) 22-6
Shear Force VC 27-3 Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Cor-
xi
roded 22-6 29-6

Shock Scale X|Y dir 6-45 Stress Calculations 26-17
Short-Side Length Dimension 26-10 Stress due to Combined Loads 7-6
Simple Bar Geometry 26-15 Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring 20-5
Site Distance 6-22, 15-7, 18-7 Stress Multipliers 20-9
Skirt Allowable at the Skirt Top 20-10 Stresses 22-9
Skirt at Base, Outside Diameter 20-9 Summary 1-7
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (OPE) 20-10 Summary of External Pressure Results 10-15
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (TEST) 20- Summary of Internal Pressure Results 10-14
11 Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements 1-12
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (OPE) 20- Summary of Results 24-7
11 Support Contact Point 18-11
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (TEST) 20- Support Lug Input 18-11
11 Support Lug Reinforcing Ring ( None, Girder Ring ) 18-
Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head 20-9 11
Skirt Temperature 20-9 Support Lugs Above Grade, Location of 18-11
Skirt Thickness 20-9 Support Lugs, Number of 18-11
Skirt Thickness, Basic 20-5 System and Hardware Requirements 2-1
Slip-on Flanges 12-4
Soehren’s Calculation 14-7 T
Soehren’s Calculations 14-9 Tail Lug Type 4-35
Software Lock 2-1 Tailing Lug Analysis 4-35
Soil Factor 6-36 Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel 18-3
Soil Type 6-28, 6-31, 6-33 Tangential Force 18-15, 18-29
Special Service 6-4 Tapped Hole Area Loss 5-17
Specifying Global Data 3-45 Technical Basis 10-1, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 16-1, 21-1,
Splits in Backing Ring, Number of 12-11, 14-8 23-1, 24-1, 25-1, 26-1, 27-1, 28-1
Spring Constant 22-9 TEMA Channel Cover 12-12
SRSS 6-45 TEMA Number 29-10
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials 29-9 TEMA Tubesheet Module 16-1
Standard Bar Ring 6-8 TEMA Tubesheets 1-5
Status Bar 10-13, 11-13, 12-14 TEMA Tubesheets Metal Temperature, Actual 16-9
Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate 26-14 Temperature 10-5, 11-3, 12-5, 14-3, 19-1, 21-2, 22-3,
Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis 23-7, 23-17, 24-3, 24-5, 25-3, 26-9, 27-2
Results 7-3 Temperature for Gussets (if not ambient) 20-10
Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9 Temperature of Basering 20-6
Stiffener Type 6-6 Term 1-2
Stiffening Ring Location 15-8 Terrain Category 6-24
Stiffening Ring Material Specification 15-8 Test Moment on Basering 20-9
Stiffening Ring Present 15-4 Test Weight of Vessel 20-9
Stiffening Ring Properties 15-8 Thick Joint Module 22-1
Stiffening Rings for External Pressure, Selecting 6-9 Thickness Due to Internal Pressure 10-13
Stored Liquid Density 15-2 Thickness of Kettle Cone (KC) 16-13
Straight Flange, Length of 10-9 Thickness of Kettle Cylinder 16-12
Stress at Ambient Temperature, Allowable 11-4, 12-6, Thickness of Kettle Port Cylinder (TP) 16-12
15-2, 20-7, 21-2, 29-6 Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7
Stress at Design Temperature, Allowable 11-3, 12-6, 22- Thickness, Minimum 5-15
4 Thickness, Required 11-5
Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness, Actual 10-14 Thick-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Stress at Hydrotest Temperature, Allowable 29-6 Thin Joint Module 21-1
Stress at Operating Temperature , Allowable 20-6 Thin-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Stress at Operating Temperature, Allowable 15-2, 21-2, Thread Series 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 18-25
xii
Thread Series (TEMA,UNC) 23-15 5

Threaded Holes in Plates 26-11 Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance (Shellside/Tubeside)
Tools Menu 3-11, 3-24, 9-9 23-5
Top Bar Plate 18-12 Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Chanel Side 16-8
Top Bar Plate or top Ring, Thickness of 18-12 Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side 16-8
Top Plate/Ring 5-20, 20-8 Tubesheet Description 23-4
Top Plate/Ring, Thickness of 5-20 Tubesheet Extended as Flange? 16-8
Top Ring 18-12 Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both) 16-8,
Top Ring Plate, Thickness of 20-8 23-8
Top Ring Under Tension, Thickness of 20-3 Tubesheet Integral With 23-8
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4- Tubesheet Material Specification 23-5
Continuous Ring ) 20-8 Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature 16-8, 23-5
Torsional Moment 17-12 Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. 23-13
Torsional Moment MT 27-3 Tubesheet Number 23-4
Total Number of Bolts per Baseplate 18-25 Tubesheet Thickness 16-8, 23-5
Total weight and detail moment 7-5 Tubesheet Type 16-6
Tower Deflection, Allowable 3-26 Tubesheets Extended as Flanges 16-16
Tray Spacing 5-28 Tubeside Design Pressure 22-6
Tray Weight Per Unit Area 5-28 Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) 22-6
Trays 5-28 Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Cor-
Trays, Number of 5-28 roded 22-6
Trunnion Input 18-28 Tutorial / Master Menu 3-1
Trunnion Material 18-28 Tutorial Problem Printout 9-29
Trunnion Outside Diameter 18-28 Type of Analysis 18-3
Trunnion Result 18-31 Type of Tubesheet 23-5
Trunnion Thickness 18-28
Trunnion Type (Hollow or Solid) 18-28 U
Tube Centers 23-7 UBC 1997 Earthquake Data 6-38
Tube Corrosion Allowance 16-7 UBC Earthquake Importance Factor 6-38
Tube Joint Connection 23-13 UBC Horizontal Force Factor 6-39
Tube Layout, Area of 16-7 UBC Near Source Factor 6-38
Tube Layout, Perimeter of 16-7 UBC Seismic Coefficient CA 6-38
Tube Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature UBC Seismic Coefficient CV 6-38
23-7 UBC Seismic Data 6-31
Tube Material Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature UBC Seismic Zone 6-38
23-7 UBC Wind Data 6-17
Tube Material Specification 16-10, 23-7 UBC Wind Importance Factor 6-17
Tube Metal Temperature, Actual 16-9 UCS-66 Chart Number 29-7
Tube Metal Temperatures 23-13 UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness 11-14
Tube Outside Diameter 16-7, 23-6 Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate 16-11, 23-11
Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square) 16-7, 23-7 Unreinforced Length Dimension 26-14
Tube Pitch 23-7 Updates 1-10
Tube Pitch (Distance Between Tube Centers) 16-7 Use Appendix CC ? 22-5
Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance 14-4 Use Code Case 2260? 9-11
Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure 14-3 Use Expansion Joint Allowable Stress 22-5
Tube Side Pass Partition Groove Depth (hg) 23-8 Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only 3-26
Tube Wall Thickness 16-10, 23-6 Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)? 27-5
Tubes Attached by a Groove or Fillet Weld 16-7 User Border Creation 3-54
Tubes, Length of 16-9, 23-11 User Defined 6-44
Tubes, Number of 16-9, 23-6 User-Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure 6-5
Tubesheet Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 23-5 User-Defined MAWP/MAPnc 6-5
Tubesheet Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature 23- User-Defined Wind Profile 6-26
xiii
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS 15-7, 18-7 Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle 15-4
User-Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt 20-10 Wear Pad Thickness 15-4
Wear Pad Width 15-4
V Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees) 5-27
Velocity Zone 6-35 Wear Plate, Thickness of 5-26
Version 3.5 Improvements 1-11 Web Location 5-27
Version 3.6 Improvements 1-11 Web Location Center or Side 15-5
Version 4.1 Improvements 1-13 Web Thickness 5-27
Version 4.3 Improvements 1-14 Web, Thickness of 15-5
Vertical Vessels 1-4 Weight 5-22, 15-2
Vessel 17-3 Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance 10-
Vessel above Grade 15-6 14
Vessel Analysis Calculations 7-8 Weight of Details 7-4
Vessel Centerline 15-6, 15-7 Weight of Elements 7-4
Vessel Centerline, Distance or Offset 5-6 Weight of One Lug 5-20
Vessel Components (Details), Individual 3-50 Weight, Miscellaneous 5-22, 6-4
Vessel Corrosion Allowance 27-2 Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug, Length of 18-14
Vessel Data, General 6-1 Weld Around Sides of Lug, Length of 18-14
Vessel Description 15-1, 18-2 Weld Leg at Back of Ring 12-11
Vessel Description, Rectangular 26-9 Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Vessel Design Pressure 15-1 5-16, 11-12
Vessel Design Temperature 15-2 Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or
Vessel Detail Data 5-1 Pad 5-16, 11-12
Vessel Details, Design and Analysis of 3-14 Weld Neck Flanges 12-4
Vessel Diameter 27-1 Weld Size Calculations 11-15
Vessel Example Problems 30-1 Weld Size Thickness 4-35
Vessel Leg Input 18-8 Weld Strength Calculations 11-15
Vessel Material 27-2 Width of Gusset Plates, Average 20-10
Vessel Nozzles 1-4 Width of Partition Gasket 14-7, 16-16, 23-17
Vessel Number 15-1 Width of Reinforcing Member 26-15
Vessel OD 5-19, 18-11 Width of Reinforcing Ring 10-10
Vessel Orientation 18-9 Width of Saddle 5-26
Vessel Radius 26-14 Width of the Pass Partition Gasket 12-12
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor 27-2 Width of Wear Plate 5-26
Vessel Tangent 15-3 Wind 5-23
Vessel Type 17-3, 26-10 Wind & Seismic Data 6-14
Vessel Wall Thickness 17-3, 27-1 Wind Data 6-14
Vessel, Basic Definition of 3-40 Wind Deflection 7-6
Vessel, Diameter of 17-3 Wind Design Code 6-14
Vessel, Distance from Outside of 26-15 Wind Exposure 15-6, 18-6
Vessel, Length of 26-13 Wind for Hydrotest 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21, 6-24, 6-26
Vessel, Outside Diameter 18-2 Wind Load Calculation 7-6
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines 17-13 Wind Loads to Vessel, Applying 15-3
Vessels, General 1-4 Wind Pressure on Vessel 15-5, 18-6
Vibration Period 6-36 Wind Profile Data 6-26
View Menu 3-30, 9-17 Wind Shape Factor 3-26
Vortex Shedding 6-5 Wind Speed 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Wind Speed, Basic 15-6, 18-6
Wind Zone Number 6-24
W Windows Server Installation 2-8
Wall Thickness for Axial Stress, Selecting 6-9 Working Pressure 10-13, 10-14, 11-15, 12-16
Wall Thickness for External Pressure, Selecting 6-9 WRC 107 1-7
Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure, Selecting 6-9
xiv
WRC 107 Module 17-1 X

WRC 107 SIF (Kn,Kb) 17-16 XY Coordinate Calculations 7-3
WRC 107 Stress Calculations 17-19
WRC 107 Stress Summations 17-22
Y
WRC 107 Version 17-16
Yield Stress, Operating 29-7
WRC 297 1-7
WRC 297 Module 27-1
Z
Zero Period Acceleration 6-45
Zone Number 6-36
xv
COADE, Inc.
12777 Jones Rd., Suite 480
Houston, Texas 77070
Phone: (281)890-4566
Fax: (281)890-3301
E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
WWW: www.coade.com
PVElite
USER'S GUIDE
V E R S I O N 4.30
( L A S T R E V I S E D 1/2002 )

PVElite Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PVElite Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12777 Jones Rd. Ste.

Dear PVElite User,

Some New Features of Version 4.3 are:

• Tailing lug analysis

Component Analysis Features:

• ASME 2001 Code 2001 Addenda update

Plus many others

Important Release Notes

PVElite Development Staff

Chapter: 2 Overview of the Installation/Configuration Process

Chapter: 3 Tutorial / Master Menu

Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness? 3-25

Chapter: 4 Element Data

Torispherical Head 4-7

Thickness of Basering Under Tension 4-26

Chapter: 5 Vessel Detail Data

Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface 5-17

Thickness of Wear Plate 5-26

Chapter: 6 General Vessel Data

Min. Metal Temperature 6-3

NBC Wind Data 6-19

Seismic Zone 6-32

Acc Based Factor Fv: 6-46

Chapter: 7 PVElite Analysis

Chapter: 8 Output / Review

Chapter: 9 Component Analysis Tutorial

Tools Menu 9-9

Chapter: 10 The Shell Module

Moment of Reinforcing Ring 10-11

Chapter: 11 The Nozzle Module

Chapter: 12 The Flange Module

Chapter: 13 The Conical Sections Module 13-1

Cone Diameter at Small End 13-4

Chapter: 14 The Floating Head Module

External Pressure Results for the Head 14-9

Chapter: 15 The Horizontal Vessel Module

Chapter: 16 The TEMA Tubesheet Module

Chapter: 17 The WRC 107/FEA Module

Chapter: 18 The Leg & Lug Module

Chapter: 19 The Pipe & Pad Module

Chapter: 20 The Base Ring Module

Chapter: 21 The Thin Joint Module

Chapter: 22 The Thick Joint Module

Chapter: 23 The ASME Tubesheets Module

Pop-Up Input Fields 23-10

Chapter: 25 The Large Opening Module

Chapter: 26 The Rectangular Vessel Module

Chapter: 27 The WRC 297/Annex G Module

Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 27-2

Chapter: 28 The Appendix Y Module

Chapter: 29 Miscellaneous Processors

Chapter: 30 Vessel Example Problems

PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT

ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES,

ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT IS THE USERS

HOOPS License Grant

What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program?

What distinguishes PVElite from other commercial pressure vessel

What Applications are Available?

Complete Vertical Vessels

Complete Horizontal Vessels

Individual Shells & Heads

Pipe & Pad